






































































































































































































































































REGULAR ARMY 

GENERAL H. B. FISKE 
“ A most exhaustive and yet 
in every way practical text. 
Its arrangement is logical and 
its language clear and easily 
understood. The many excel¬ 
lent sketches add greatly to 
ease of acquisition of a proper 
mental picture of how war is 
made.” 

NATIONAL GUARD 

COLONEL WASHINGTON 
BOWIE, JR. 

^Comdg. 5th Inf., Md. N. G. 

. . I do not hesitate to pro¬ 
nounce them not only the best 
text books I have ever ex¬ 
amined, but in fact they are 
ahead of anything of the kind 
I know of. I congratulate 
you and also thank you for 
the interest in the service that 
prompted the pareful pains¬ 
taking effort displayed in 
these most valuable compen- 
diums of military knowledge.” 







FOREIGNERS 

GENERAL BUAT, 
Chief of Staff to Marshall 
Foch 

“ I am pleased to find in 
these books a sense of reality, 
which is so characteristic of 
the American methods of in¬ 
struction. Your works are 
equally interesting to persons 
already with knowledge of 
military affairs and to ci¬ 
vilians completely ignorant of 
technical questions commen¬ 
cing the study for the first 
time.” 

ORGANIZED RESERVES 

COL. J. P. ROBINSON 

“ I had no idea there were 
such valuable books in exis¬ 
tence. They are easily the 
best thing of their kind in 
print. While admirable for 
all officers, they are especially 
just what is needed for the 
Organized Reserves. 


THE NEW MILITARY LIBRARY 

A NATION capable of raising, training, and successfully directing 4,000,000 

^ soldiers in a world conflict, should have its own “ Military Library,” 
recording for study and reference those principles used in the training of its 
soldiers and their leadership. 

In The New Military Library, by Colonel P. S. Bond, U. S. Army 
and collaborators, we have, for the first time in the history of our country, 
a truly American Military Library, in keeping with our achievements. 

Each book in this Library is a new treatment of one or more subjects of the 
art of War, based on our experience in the World War, and the courses taught 
at our Service Schools, and the treatment of each subject is co-ordinated and 
synchronized with every other subject, making the entire Library indispensable 
to the Military student, to all charged with the training or instruction of 
officers or enlisted men, and to the officer who desires to succeed at the Service 
Schools. The method of presentation adopted is known as The Applicatory 
System, now used in the armies of all civilized nations. 

This New Military Library, which is profusely illustrated with new and 
clever drawings, consists of the eight books here listed; others will be pub¬ 
lished later. We recommend these books to every officer and non-commis¬ 
sioned officer in the Army, U. S. Marine Corps, National Guard, and Reserve 
Corps. Order a copy sf any one of these books to verify our judgment of 
the merit of this New Military Library. 

A REAL I.D.R. ILLUSTRATED AND SIMPLIFIED 
SCOUTING, PATROLING AND MUSKETRY 
MAP READING AND MILITARY SKETCHES 
FIELD ENGINEERING 

INFANTRY WEAPONS 

(To be published this summer) 

RED, WHITE AND BLUE MANUAL 
TACTICS 

MILITARY HISTORY AND POLICY OF THE U. S. 































“ From its study a number of poor to fair drillmasters have 
become quite proficient.” Capt. T. D. Stamps, U. S. Army . 


I. D. R. 


ILLUSTRATED AND SIMPLIFIED, 

WITH 

HINTS TO DRILL INSTRUCTORS, 

BY 

THE AUTHORS OF THE PLATTSBURG MANUAL. 

A REAL I. D. R. 



THE HALT. 


Volumes have been written on how to 
execute movements, but this book contains 
the first complete treatise on " How to 
Become a Successful Drill Instructor.” 
This chapter alone is worth the cost of 
the book. No better use could be made of 
company funds than the purchase of a 
copy of this book for each non-commis¬ 
sioned officer, so as to insure uniform and 
efficient instruction. In fact, no Infantry 
officer’s library is complete without a 
copy, Don’t delay, order a copy to-day. 


T 94 pages (6" x 9"). 
Price, $1.25, postpaid. 


‘ This excellent manual easily escapes the charge of 
being merely a compilation; it is an original, thought¬ 
ful presentation of infantry drill, so designed as to 
make infantry drill as plain as possible to the student 
or recruit and to enable the officer instructor to get 
the best results by furnishing him with a guide to 
intelligent effort. No officer can afford to disregard this 
book on the ground that there is a War Department 
publication known as I. D. R. In the first place, the 
authors have composed a text-book (designed to teach) 
and the War Department publication is a Manual. 

“ This book is a meritorious contribution to our 
national-defense job. With its assistance, the officer 
of whatever branch, or the student, or the ambitious 
non-com. should be able to make of himself a good 
drill instructor.” The Cavalry Journal. 


would be a better name for this book. 
It is even more than that, it is a re¬ 
written and simplified I. D. R., and 
an efficient instructor, combined. It 
is as superior to all other books on 
the subject as our present high- 
powered rifle is to the old flint-lock 
rifle of the days of Washington. 

In methods of presentation it 
abounds with new ideas such as 
shown by the accompanying illus¬ 
trations. It contains 273 other draw¬ 
ings just as unique and instructive. 
So numerous are the illustrations 
that turning the pages, one gets the 
impression of seeing a series of mo¬ 
tion pictures, showing correct move¬ 
ments and common errors. 



COMMON ERRORS 
IN EXECUTING “ RIFLE SALUTE.” 






































Military Map Reading and Sketching ’ is well arranged and the explana¬ 
tions are clear. The work is singularly free from padding. It contains the 
essentials of military sketching and no more. I consider this the best 
text-book on the subject that has been published to date.” Major E. M. 
Whiting, USA. 



MAP READING AND MILITARY SKETCHING. 

The World War again emphasized the necessity of all officers being able to 
read and make maps. 

It also ushered in new methods of presentation which have been incorporated 
by Colonel P. S. Bond, U. S. Army, in his new book entitled, “ Map Reading 
and Military Sketching.” 

The many illustrations and practical problems make the subject matter readily 
comprehensible to all. 

Keep abreast of the times, order a copy. 

108 pages, 50 illustrations; full cloth binding. 

Price, $1.25, postpaid. 


“ ‘ Field Engineering ’ seems to me to embody the last word in field 
engineering as gleaned from our experiences in war.” Colonel IV. D. 
Beach, USA. 



FIELD ENGINEERING. 

The Organization of the Ground for Defense. 

By Colonel P. S. Bond, Corps of Engineers. 

This volume presents, in a most practical manner, all the sound principles 
and standardized methods employed in Field Engineering as developed by the 
United States Army in the World War. It is a clear and practical exposition 
of the use of fortifications in the organization of the ground for defense; a book, 
written and illustrated for the practical use of the man in the field. It contains 
practical exercises. 

170 pages, 68 illustrations; full cloth binding. 

Price, $1.50, postpaid. 

“ I am very much pleased with the course in Field Engineering and am 
frank to admit that had I to go through the Meuse-Argonne again, I 
should be tempted to make room for it with my tobacco and tooth brush 
in my musette bag.” Capt. C. R. F. Cornish, USA. 

































■ ■ 


“It was often said during the war that it was easier to find competent 
general officers than competent platoon leaders. This book would correct 
that difficulty and is thus a very material aid in the solution of the most 
difficult problem in the training of the Army.” Major G. B. Glover, USA . 



Scooting, Patroling and Musketry 

By Colonel P. S. Bond, U. S. Army. 

The World War thoroughly demonstrated that the units in the line of battle 
must depend chiefly upon efficient scouts and patrols for that information of the 
terrain and the enemy which is so essential for their guidance. 

Musketry, the combat tactics of infantry fire units (squad and section), is one 
of the most important items in the basic training of the infantry. Having learned 
the use of his weapons, the soldier must be trained to play his part as a member 
of the team in battle. 

A thorough knowledge of Scouting, Patroling, and Musketry is essential before 
the officer or non-com is prepared to undertake the study of Tactics, or to efficiently 
train or lead his command. 

Colonel Bond has included the latest and most complete treatises on these im¬ 
portant subjects in a single volume of THE NEW MILITARY LIBRARY. The 
manner in which he has coordinated these subjects with his treatise on Tactics 
might well be compared with the co-ordination which should exist between two 
good books on Arithmetic and Algebra. To master the second, you must know 
the first. 

The original and highly instructive illustrations, 127 in number, one of which is 
here reproduced, are alone well worth the price of this book of 300 pages. As in 
all other texts of this library, the doctrine is our own American doctrine, based 
on our experiences in all our wars, and exemplified in the teachings of Fort 
Benning, and other service schools. 

Keep ahead of the times . 

Order your copy to-day. 

Price, $1.50, postpaid. 

“The teachings are in accord with service school doctrines. 

* * * Any company commander will get a wealth of 
material and suggestions for training his company along 
these lines from this book.” Major C. H. White, USA. 










To be published this summer. 

(1923) 


INFANTRY WEAPONS 



MACHINE GUN AND HOWITZER COMPANY OFFICERS. 


Do you know the mechanics of your weapons ? 

Do you know how to operate the fire control instruments issued you ? 

Can you efficiently handle a single gun or battery in fire with direct laying? 

Can you properly designate a target and issue a clear fire order ? 

Can you compute the necessary firing data and command a single gun or a 
battery in fire with indirect laying ? 

Can you drill your organization in both close and extended order ? 

Do you know the characteristics of 
your weapons? 

Do you know the principles involved 
in the tactical operation of your com¬ 
mand ? 

Can you apply these principles to 
concrete cases ? 

If not, you should have this book. 

It presents in the simplest possible man¬ 
ner the answers to these questions and 
thousands of others you might ask. It 
will enable you to have an efficient 
organization, thoroughly qualified to 
carry out its mission—the fire support 
of the infantry. 

Over 400 pages. 

Over 200 illustrations. 

Price $2.50 



f"»— Z. 



Z paces 


□§D[IDE] 

Prepare for Action ! ! ! 











































“ The Red, White and 
Blue Manual is worth its 
weight in gold.” Col. E. 
M. Norton, U. S. Army. 

Red, White and 
Blue Manual 

(Plattsburg Manual 
Revised) 

(For Citizens Military 
Training Camps—Red 
Course) 


The authors of the Plattsburg Manual, 
Majors E. B. Garey, Infantry, and O. O. Ellis 
(Resigned), have written this book for the 
candidate and instructor at the Red Camps. 
It is an enlargement and improvement of the 
Plattsburg Manual which helped so many 
rookies win commissions when our country 
entered the World War. 

This book is the result of deep study and 
experience at civilian training camps by the 
authors. For both instructors and candidates 
it answers such questions as are listed in the 
“ DO YOU KNOW ” column. 

The following subjects are specially treated 
from a C. M. T. C. point of view: 

Military Courtesy. 

Infantry Drill Regulations. 

Individual Infantry Equipment. 

Rifle Marksmanship. 

Physical Training. 

Mass Athletics and Group Games. 

The Bayonet. 

Manual of Interior Guard Duty. 

Scouting and Patroling. 

Military Hygiene, Sanitation and First Aid. 

Camping and Marching. 

328 Pages—237 Illustrations. 

Price, $1.25, postage prepaid. 



INSTRUCTORS 
DO YOU KNOW: 

fc 

The purpose of the camp? 

The mistakes to be avoided 
when camp opens? 

How to get your company or¬ 
ganized? 

The best methods of instruc¬ 
tions? 

The way to stimulate the in¬ 
terest of your men? 

CANDIDATES 
DO YOU KNOW: 

What to take to camp ? 

What to do on arrival? 

Some simple rules of conduct? 

How to keep your feet from 
blistering? 

How to pitch your tent to keep 
warm and dry? 

How to hit the bull’s eye with 
the Army rifle? 









































I 






“My God, SOME book!” Col. E. P. Lawler. 

TACTICS —NOT EUROPEAN BUT AMERICAN 

By Colonel P. S. Bond, U. S. Army. 



Before the World War, most books on this subject were written either by 
foreigners unfamiliar with our regulations, customs, and psychology, or by Ameri¬ 
can officers who based their works largely on foreign publications. 

The World War demonstrated to Europe the unsoundness of such a condition. 
We went to Europe with knapsacks filled with foreign trench warfare manuals, 
and came home with sound American ideas and doctrines based on our own war 
experiences and our own tactical conceptions, which in principle had proven sound. 

The new book on Tactics, by Colonel P. S. Bond, U. S. Army, author of “ Tech¬ 
nique of Modern Tactics,” is for the American student what Balck’s books on the 
subject are for the German. 

Based on American doctrines, as taught at Fort Benning, and other service 
schools, containing 500 pages with 126 original and cleverly drawn illustrations, 
it is a military classic, which should be in the library of every Regular, or National 
Guard and Reserve Corps officer who wishes to keep abreast of his profession. It 
makes no difference whether your command is a squad, or a division, you should 
study this book which treats the subject, not in an abstract and general way, but 
as “ The practical art of leading troops in zvar.” It contains not only the theory but 
also numerous carefully prepared practical exercises and problems. 


Order a copy to-day. 
Price, $2.75, postpaid. 

The following brief synopsis of the contents of “Tactics,” 
thoroughness: 


Suggestions for the conduct of a 
course in Tactics. 

Organization. 

The weapons of modern warfare. 

General procedure of battle. 

The applicatory system of instruc¬ 
tion. Preparation and solution 
of problems. Use of sand table- 
Orders. 

General problems of the attack. 

Principles of offensive combat, 
and their application to the 
problems of the attack. 


General problems of the defense. 
Tactics of the defense. 
Intelligence and inter-communi¬ 
cation. 

The battalion in attack. 

The company in attack. 

The platoon in attack. 
Dispositions and plans of the 
defense. 

The battalion in defense. 

The company in defense. 

The platoon in defense. 


will indicate its scope and 

Duty in the trenches. 

Marches. 

Advance guards. 

Rear guards. 

Retreat and delaying action. 
Withdrawal from action. 
Outposts. 

Practical exercises. 

Tables of Organization. 

Pictorial studies of American 
Tactics in the World War. 


“The book is as entertaining as a novel.” Major J. C. H. Lee, USA. 







































SPECIAL OFFER 

TO 

COMMISSIONED OFFICERS OF THE 

Regular Army 
U. S. Marine Corps 
National Guard 
Organized Reserves 

We have so much faith in this New Military Library that we are willing to 
make you the following attractive offer: 

“ We will send upon request and at our expense the entire Library or any 
book or books in it to any commissioned officer of either the Regular Army, U. S. 
Marine Corps, National Guard, or Reserve Corps. If you don’t like them send 
them back within two weeks after arrival and we will refund postage. If you 
do like them, send us a check for the listed selling price.” 

Thousands of these books have been sent out on this plan and not one set has 
been returned. 

Would you like to see this library? 

THE NEW MILITARY LIBRARY, BALTIMORE, MD. 


Infantry Drill Regulations.$1.25 

Scouting, Patroling and Musketry. 1.50 

Map Reading and Military Sketching. 1.25 

Field Engineering. 1.50 

Infantry Weapons. 2.50 

Red, White and Blue Manual. 1.25 

Tactics. 2.75 

Military History of United States. 2.00 


MANUSCRIPTS DESIRED. 

The New Military Library Company is constantly 
seeking original manuscripts of a military and his¬ 
torical nature, provided that they possess real merit. 
It is prepared to either purchase such manuscripts 
or publish and market them on a royalty or partner¬ 
ship basis. 

Address all communications to 

THE NEW MILITARY LIBRARY 

BALTIMORE, MD. 



















Scouting, Patroling 
and Musketry 

A Complete Course of Practical Training 

for Small Infantry Units 


BY 

P. S. BOND, Lt. Col., U. S. Army 

E. B. GAREY, Major, U. S. Army 

O. O. ELLIS, formerly Major, U. S. Army 

T. L. McMURRAY, Captain, U. S. Army 

E. H. CROUCH, formerly 1st Lieut., U. S. Army 



Second Edition 


THE NEW MILITARY LIBRARY 
BALTIMORE, MD. 

1923 

Price, $ 1.50 




U.2.2,0 

B* 


I9£ 3 


Copyright 1923 
by 

Major E. B. Garey, Baltimore, Md. 



; 1 


rwmiK 

0CT r 2,4i1?8fc 


i | 





Borb Q0afftmore (puee 

BALTIMORE. MD.. U. S. A. 











PREFACE. 

^Correct military training is based upon the requirements of battle. The most 
important element in battle is the small infantry unit in the aggregate. Upon the 
morale and training of these small units, and the skill and devotion of their leaders, 
the issue of battle chiefly depends. Accordingly the combat training of the small 
infantry units is the essence of any proper course of military instruction. 

The training of the infantry includes four phases, all closely related to each 
other, to-wit: Physical, disciplinary, technical and tactical. Infantry drill and 
physical training are the means of physical and disciplinary instruction. Technical 
training is that which makes the officer and the soldier familiar with the character¬ 
istics and expert in the use of weapons. For the small infantry unit these weapons 
include the rifle and bayonet, automatic rifle and grenades. The technique of these 
weapons is covered in the courses in rifle marksmanship and other courses in 
infantry weapons. 

His muscles having been hardened by physical exercise and his mind and body 
trained and disciplined by drill to prompt and intelligent obedience, and being 
familiar with his weapons, the soldier must next learn to play his part as a member 
of the team in combat. 


Teamwork of an organization in combat is known as Tactics, which is the culmi¬ 
nation of the course in combat training. That part of Tactics which pertains to the 
conduct of the individual soldier and the fire units (infantry squad and section) 
is included in the courses in Scouting, Patroling and Musketry, set forth in this 
volume. The Tactics of the platoon and larger units are covered in the course in 
Tactics, proper. 

The infantry soldier must know how to perform the duties of a scout, how to 
play his part as a member of a patrol, and how to combine fire and movement in 
combat, whether attack or defense. He must know how to move, take cover, 
observe, report what he sees, locate a target, point it out to others, how to direct, 
control and distribute his fire in accordance with the commands of his leader, etc. 


Non-commissioned officers and junior officers must know how to lead their men 
in battle, and how to train them in the performance of their duties. 


In this volume the simple principles governing the conduct of the individual and 
the fire units in combat, are set forth in plain language, and illustrated wherever 
necessary by diagrams and perspectives. They can be readily comprehended by any 
man of sufficient intelligence to make a good infantry soldier. The duties of the 
soldier and his leaders in combat are carefully explained and illustrated, answering 
the pertinent questions: “ What must I do? ” and “ How do I do it? ” 


The practical exercises, forming the most important part of the course, have 
been carefully selected from amongst those which have been tested and proven 
successful in the actual training of troops. 

The method of instruction followed in this text, both in the individual training 
of the scout and the combined training of the patrol or fire unit (in Musketry), is 
what is known as the applicatory system. This system is now generally recognized 
as the best method of tactical training, and is employed in the armies of all civilized 

nations. „ 

As applied to this course the applicatory system will cover the following 

sequence: . „ , . , « , . 

a. The principles involved will be stated and carefully explained and their prac¬ 
tical application discussed. . 

b. Practical demonstrations of the application of the principles will be given, 
showing the student how each duty of the scout, patrol, or fire unit is performed. 


SCOUTING, PATROLING AND MUSKETRY 

The demonstration should be carefully prepared and described in detail as it 
progresses. 

c. The demonstrations will be followed by simple exercises in which the student 
himself will perform the actions and show the application of the principles taught. 

d. Having been sufficiently practiced the student (soldier or leader) should then 
be given a test to make certain that he is thoroughly conversant with his duties. 

Practice should take place under the supervision of the instructor and no mistakes 
should go uncorrected. It is important that the instructor insist on perfect execu¬ 
tion of all movements for bad habits acquired in training will not disappear in 
combat. 

No course of instruction can be regarded as complete which does not include 
these four elements in order: 

a. Explanation. 

b. Demonstration. 

c. Practice. 

d. Test. 

For example, the student is first instructed as to the necessity for crawling and 
how to crawl. The proper method of crawling is then demonstrated in his presence. 
The student is then required to practice the crawl and finally to crawl in the 
presence of his instructor, thus indicating what he has learned of the subject. 

The volume as a whole is designed to meet the needs of all soldiers who wish to 
familiarize themselves with their duties in combat; and of all officers and non¬ 
commissioned officers who desire to fit themselves for successful leadership, and to 
prepare and conduct practical courses of training for their commands. 

The subjects included in this course are of fundamental and paramount impor¬ 
tance in the combat training of Infantry. 

For the Authors, 

P. S. Bond. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

SCOUTING AND PATROLING. 

SCOUTING. 


CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION . 

Importance of information. 

Sources and means of information. The intelligence service. .. 
Aerial reconnaissance . 

Scouting and patroling by small units. 

Importance of the scout. 

Development of successful scouts . 

Qualifications and selection of scouts. 

Equipment . 

Duties of scouts. ...... 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

CHAPTER II. 

CONCEALMENT BY DAY. 

PRINCIPLES OF CONCEALMENT. 

Additional precautions as to concealment. 

Individual movement . 

The prone position . 

To rise . 

To move at a. run . 

To take the prone position from a run, with ride . 

To take the prone position from a run, without ride . 

To take the prone position from a walk, or halt, with ride . 

To take the prone position from a walk, or halt, without ride.. . 

To creep . 

To crawl . 

Swimming . 

The advance by bounds. 

Conduct if captured . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER III. 

CONCEALMENT BY NIGHT. 

Precautions as to concealment by night. 

MOVEMENT BY NIGHT. 

Routes for night movement. 

Advance by bounds. 

Scouting in a trench area. 

Passage of obstacles. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

CHAPTER IV. 

USE OF COMPASS AND FIELD GLASS. 

Direction—Bearing and Azimuth. 

THE COMPASS . 

Description of the compass. 

Use of the compass. 

1. To determine the direction of magnetic north . 

2. To dnd the azimuth (bearing) of any object from the obser¬ 

ver's position . 

By day. 

By night . 


PAGE 

i 

i 

i 

i 

1 

2 
2 
2 
2 

3 

3 

3 

4 
4 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 

9 

12 

12 

12 

13 

13 

14 
14 


15 

15 

16 
18 

18 

19 

20 
21 

22 

23 

24 

24 

25 
27 


SPM -2 


I 


27 

27 

27 













































II 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


PAGE 

3. To lay out a given course from a given point on the terrain .. 28 

4. To follow a course by night . 28 

5. To orient a map . 28 

6. To measure an azimuth or lay out a direction on the map . ... 30 

Direction without a compass. 3 ° 

Trees . 3 ° 

Sun . 3 ° 

Sun and watch . 3 ° 

Stars . 3 1 

Moon . 3 1 

Wind . S 1 

Blazing a trail . 3 2 

Landmarks .. 3 2 

FIELD GLASSES . 3 2 

Adjustments of the field glass. 32 

Adjusting the focus . 3 2 

Adjusting the inter pupillary distance . 32 

Use of field glasses. 32 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 3 2 

CHAPTER V. 

OBSERVATION BY DAY AND NIGHT. 33 

OBSERVATION BY DAY. 34 

Selection of observation posts. . 34 

Moving to the observation posts. . 34 

Searching ground from observation post. 36 

Accuracy of observation . 36 

Interpretation of signs and trails. 36 

OBSERVATION BY NIGHT. 38 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 38 

CHAPTER VI. 

MESSAGES . 39 

Importance of messages and reports. 39 

Forms of messages. 39 

1. The serial number of the message . 39 

2. The place from which the message is sent . 39 

3. The date and hour at zvhich the message is sent . 40 

4. The name of the person to whom sent . 40 

5. A description of the objects or events zvhich form the subject 

of the message . 41 

6. The exact locality at zvhich an event occurs or an object is 

seen ..... 41 

7. The time at which an event occurs . 41 

8. A resume of previous messages . 41 

9. A statement of the next move of the scout or patrol . 41 

10. The signature and rank of the sender . 41 

Wording of messages . 43 

Terrain nomenclature . 43 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 43 

CHAPTER VII. 

SCOUTS IN OFFENSIVE COMBAT. 44 

The scout pair. 44 

The approach march. 44 

FUNCTIONS OF THE SCOUTS DURING THE ATTACK. ...!. 44 

Maintaining the direction of advance. 47 

Reconnoitering suspicious localities. 47 

Maintaining contact. Signals and messages. 48 



















































TABLE OF CONTENTS 


III 


Reconnaissance of a wood. 

Drawing the hostile fire. 

Seizing a fire position. 

Security during a halt. 

Scouts of support and reserve units . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER VIII. 

SCOUTS IN DEFENSIVE COMBAT. 

Functions of the scouts in a defensive position.. 

OBSERVATION IN A DEFENSIVE POSITION. .. . 

The scout pair as observers .. 

Organization and conduct of the observation post. . 

Reports of observation. 

Locating the observation post. Concealment. 

Equipment of the observation post . 

SNIPING. 

Functions of snipers. 

Snipers* posts. Location. Concealment. 

Organizing the sector. 

Designating targets. 

Duties of the rifleman. 

Telescopic sights . 

Records and reports. Reliefs. 

Locating the hostile snipers. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

CHAPTER IX. 

LISTENING POSTS. 

Location of listening posts. Concealment and cover 

Scouts as listeners . 

Interpretation and location of sounds heard at night 

Recording the observations. 

Reading compass at night . 

Guides. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 


PAGE 

49 

49 

49 

49 

49 

50 

50 

50 

5 1 
5i 
5i 
53 

53 

54 
54 
54 
54 
56 

56 

57 

58 
58 

■ 58 

■ 58 

■ 59 
• 59 

■ 59 
60 

. 60 
60 
. 60 
. 61 


PATROLING. 


CHAPTER X. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES. TACTICAL USE OF PATROLS 

Definition of patrol . 

Classes of patrols. 

Information and security patrols . 

Strategic and tactical patrols . 

Importance of patroling. 

TACTICAL USE OF PATROLS. 

Advance guards . 

Rear and dank guards . 

Outposts . 

Attack . 

Defense . 

Withdrawal . 

Summary . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER XI. 

DAY PATROLING . 

Responsibilities of commanders . 


62 

62 

62 

62 

62 

62 

63 
63 
63 
63 

63 

64 
64 
64 
64 

64 

64 



















































IV SCOUTING AND PATROLING 

PAGE 

Number of patrols required. 65 

Radius of action of a patrol . 65 

Strength . 65 

Composition . 66 

Leader . 66 

Orders to the patrol leader. 66 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 67 

CHAPTER XII. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 67 

PLAN OF THE PATROL LEADER. 67 

Plans and orders . 67 * 

The mission . 68 

Route . 68 

The enemy . 69 

Friendly troops . 69 

The terrain . 69 

Rendezvous points . 7 ° 

Route of return . 7 ° 

Advance by bounds . 70 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 71 

CHAPTER XIII. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 71 

SELECTION OF A ROUTE FROM THE MAP. 71 

Situation . 7 1 

Picking the route . 7 1 

Bounds of advance . 73 

Preparation of sketch . 74 

Map reading. 74 

Contours . 74 

Visibility problems . 74 

Profiles . 74 

Use of rubber band in solving visibility problems . 74 

Summary of information derived from a map. 76 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 77 

CHAPTER XIV. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 77 

Equipment of the patrol. 77 

Equipment of the leader . 77 

Organization and formations. 77 

Duties of various elements . 78 

Distances and intervals . 78 

Signals . 79 

Authorized arm signals. 79 

Action of the patrol leader before the start. 82 

Inspection of the patrol . 82 

Orders of the patrol leader . 82 

Reports made before starting . 83 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 83 

CHAPTER XV. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 83 

CONDUCT OF THE PATROL. 83 

Advance by bounds. 85 

Approaching a suspicious locality . 85 

Crossing an open space . 85 

Moving up a valley . 85 

Approaching a skyline or crest . 85 






















































TABLE OF CONTENTS 


V 


PAGE 

Crossing a bridge or ford . 86 

Approaching and reconnoitering a building . 86 

Approaching a wood . 92 

Passing through and reconnoitering a wood . 92 

Passing through a village . 92 

Reconnoitering a village . 92 

Security during halts . 92 

Interviewing local inhabitants. 92 

Observation and reconnaissance. 94 

What to observe .. 94 

Bridges . 94 

Fords . 94 

Towns . 94 

Buildings . 94 

Railroads . 94 

Roads . 94 

Water supply .' 94 

Camp sites . 95 

Combat by information patrols. 95 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 95 

CHAPTER XVI. 

NIGHT PATROLING. 96 

Necessity for night patroling. 96 

Reconnaissance by night. 96 

Night combat patrols. 96 

Mission, number, strength, composition and leaders of night 

patrols . 97 

Orders to the patrol leader . 97 

PLAN OF THE PATROL LEADER. 97 

Mission. 97 

Route . 97 

Equipment of the patrol. 98 

Weapons . 98 

Clothing . 98 

Shoes . 98 

Equipment of the leader . 98 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 98 

CHAPTER XVII. 

NIGHT PATROLING (Continued). 99 

Organization and formations. 99 

Typical formation . 99 

Distances and intervals . 99 

Control. Signals . 99 

Difficulty of control by night . 99 

Simple formations. Pre-arranged plans . 99 

Sound signals . 100 

Summary . 100 

'Action of the patrol leader before the start. 100 

CONDUCT OF THE PATROL.101 

Advance by bounds. 101 

Inspecting wire entanglements. 101 

Formation of the patrol . 102 

Locating the gaps . 102 

Inspecting hostile entanglements . 102 

Reconnoitering special localities. 102 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 103 























































VI 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

NIGHT PATROLING (Continued). 

Listening patrols . 

Example . 

Capturing enemy patrols. 

Silent raids . 

Example of a silent raid . 

Combat by night. 

Pre-arranged plans in case of attack .. 

Conduct in case of defeat . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER XIX. 

MESSAGES AND REPORTS. 

What to report . 

Negative messages .. 

Form and contents of messages. 

Importance of accuracy in messages and reports.. 

Examples of good and of poor messages . 

Patrol reports. 

Consolidated reports .. 

Example of the report of a day patrol . 

Example of the report of a night wire patrol . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER XX. 

TACTICS OF SECURITY PATROLS. 

Introductory remarks . 

THE INFANTRY POINT. 

Formation .. 

Conduct . 

Commander . 

FLANK PATROLING ON THE MARCH. 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER XXI. 

TACTICS OF SECURITY PATROLS (Continued). .. 

OUTPOST PATROLS . 

Visiting patrols. 

Outpost reconnoitering patrols. 

Combat patrols . 

QUESTIONNAIRE .'_ 

CHAPTER XXII. 

COMBAT PATROLS. 

When employed . 

COMBAT FLANK RECONNAISSANCE.. 

Flank covering detachments. 

Adjacent units . 

Summary . 

Patrol preceding a support unit in enveloping attack. 
COMBAT PATROLS IN MANEUVER INTERVALS 
Example of the conduct of a flank combat patrol.... 

Orders to the patrol leader . 

Duties of the patrol leader. 

Conduct of the patrol. 

QUESTIONNAIRE .* * ’ ’ 


















































TABLE OF CONTENTS VII 

PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

PAGE 

1. Demonstration. Use of cover. 133 

2. Practice. Use of cover. 134 

3. Practice. Rapid use of cover. 134 

4. Demonstration and Practice. Individual movement. 134 

5. Practice. Movement by bounds. 135 

6. Demonstration and Practice. Night movement. 135 

7. Demonstration and Practice. Night movement. Passage of obstacles. 136 

8. Practice. Night movement. 136 

9. Practice. Night movement. 136 

10. Demonstration and Practice. Use of the compass by day and by night 137 

11. Practice. Direction without a compass. 137 

12. Practice. Use of the compass. 137 

13. Demonstration and Practice. Use of field glasses. 137 

14. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 138 

15. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 138 

16. Practice. Observation . 138 

17. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 139 

18. Practice. Observation . 139 

19. Demonstration and Practice. Observation by night. 140 

20. Practice. Messages. 140 

21. Practice. Locating danger areas. 140 

22. Demonstration. Scout pair in the approach march. . 141 

23. Problem. Scout pair in the attack; open warfare. 145 

24. Problem. Scout pair as observers in attack. 148 

25. Practice. Scout pair as observer and sniper. 151 

26. Demonstration. A day reconnoitering patrol. 152 

27. Demonstration and Practice. Sound signals. 161 

28. Demonstration. Inspection of wire entanglements by night. 161 

29. Demonstration. Inspection of enemy entanglements by night. 166 

30. Demonstration. Night listening patrol. 166 

31. Demonstration. Conduct of a night patrol when attacked. . 170 

Practical problems . 17° 

Security patrols. 170 

































LIST OF PLATES. 

SCOUTING. 

PLATE PAGE 

1. Concealment during Observation. 4 

2. Concealment during Observation. 5 

3. Concealment during Observation. 5 

4. Scout firing from Cover. 7 

5. Scout springing up from Prone Position. 8 

6. Scout taking the Prone Position from a Run. 10 

7. Scout taking the Prone Firing Position from Walk or Halt. 11 

8. Scout Creeping. 12 

9. The Slow Crawl. 12 

10. The Rapid Crawl. 13 . 

11. Advance by Bounds. !4 

12. Walking through Grass or Weeds and on Hard Ground. 17 

13. Route for Night Movement in Low Ground. 18 

14. Scouting in a Trench Area. 19 

15. Passage of Obstacles. 20 

16. Cutting Wire. 21 

17. Azimuth and Bearing. 23 

18. The Compass. 2 4 

19. Use of the Compass. 25 

20. Use of the Compass. Azimuth and Bearing. 26 

21. Use of the Compass. Taking an Azimuth. 27 

22. Use of the Compass. Laying out a Course. 28 

23. Orienting the Map. 29 

24. Direction by Watch and Sun. 31 

25. Direction by the Pole Star... 31 

26. Scouts selecting Observation Point and Route thereto. 35 

27. Scout searching Ground by Zones. 37 

28. Location Sketch accompanying a Message. 4a 

29. A Scout’s Report. 42 

30. Assault Echelon advancing to the Attack. 45 

31. Assault Platoon advancing to Attack. 46 

32. Suspicious Localities . 47 

33. Arm Signals. 48 

34. Platoon Leader watching for Signal from Scout in Edge of Wood. 49 

35. Observation Post and Personnel. 51 

36. Report of an Observation Post. 52 

37. Observation Posts . 53 

38. Sniper and Observer in a Tree. 55 

39. Location and Fields of Fire of Snipers’ Posts. 56 

40. Sniping ._. 57 

41. Sketch with Notes for Night Movement. 61 

PATROLING. 

42. Selection of a Patrol Route from a Map. 72 

43. Sketch of Patrol Route made by Leader from Map. 73 

44. Construction of a Profile. 75 

45. Use of Rubber Band in the Solution of Visibility Problems. 76 

46. Arm Signals. 80 

47. Arm Signals . 81 

48. Patrol advancing by Bounds. 84 

49. Patrol crossing Open Space. 85 

50. Patrol moving up a Valley. 86 

51. Patrol crossing Open Country and Bridge. 87 

52. Patrol reconnoitering a Building. 88 

53. Patrol moving in a Wood. gg 

VIII 























































LIST OF PLATES 


IX 


PLATE PAGE 

54. Patrol passing through a Village... 90 

55. Patrol Tactics, Reconnoitering Patrols. 91 

56. Patrol Tactics, Reconnoitering Patrols. 93 

57. Patrol inspecting Friendly Wire at Night. 101 

58. Night Wire Patrol marking a Gap. 102 

59. Patrol investigating Gap in Enemy’s Wire. 103 

60. Capture of a Hostile Patrol. 105 

61. A Silent Raid . 106 

62. Night Patrol Combat Plans. 108 

63. A careless Message, showing many common Mistakes. no 

64. How the Message in Plate 63 should have been written. no 

65. Sketch on Back of Message (Plate 64). in 

66. Formation of the Infantry Point. 114 

67. Patrol Tactics, Security Patrols, Open Warfare. Point of Advance Guard. 116 

68. A Company of Infantry as an Advance Guard to a Battalion. 118 

69. Patrol Tactics. 119 

70. Diagrammatic Plan of Outpost Dispositions. 121 

71. Diagram of Routine Visiting Patrols of an Outpost. 123 

72. Flank Combat Patrols. 127 

73. Flank Combat Patrols in Maneuver Intervals. 13° 

PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

74. Scouting and Patroling. 14 2 

75. Scouting and Patroling. 146 

76. Scouting and Patroling. 149 

77. Scouting and Patroling. 154 

78. Scouting and Patroling. 163 






































SCOUTING. 

CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 

Importance of Information. 

In war a knowledge of the enemy, his strength and position, and what he is 
doing, is indispensable for our guidance. The plans of commanders are based 
very largely on the information concerning the enemy which they receive from a 
variety of sources. History shows that many disastrous defeats on the one hand and 
many golden opportunities lost on the other, have been the result of a lack of 
information or of faulty information. A commander without accurate and timely 
intelligence of the enemy is like a man fighting in the dark. Not knowing where 
the foe is, or what he may be doing, he does not know when or where to strike or 
how to defend himself. 

Sources and means of information. The intelligence service. The collection, 
study, interpretation and distribution of information are duties of the intelligence 
service of the army. All tactical units are now provided with intelligence personnel, 
which varies from the two scouts of a squad, to the elaborate organization at the 
headquarters of an army. Every possible means of collecting information is utilized 
and every possible source is investigated. The usual sources of intelligence or 
information are prisoners of war, spies, local inhabitants, captured documents, 
newspapers, maps, observation from ground stations, the air service (including 
aerial photography), and reconnaissance (scouting and patroling) by all arms, but 
especially by the infantry. 

The information derived from these various sources is collated, weighed, com¬ 
pared, verified and pieced together by the intelligence service. The mosaic thus 
constructed is the commander’s picture of the situation as a whole. 

No information is too insignificant or too doubtful to be reported and investigated. 
Though of little weight alone it may furnish just the confirmation needed for im¬ 
portant information from other sources. 

Aerial reconnaissance. Aerial reconnaissance is a most rapid means of gathering 
information, and for tactical purposes its range is practically unlimited. But it 
cannot relieve the foot troops of their responsibilities. Such information as is 
obtained by the air service usually pertains to the larger aspects of the combat and is 
lacking in the detail which is so essential to the smaller units. By reason of weather 
conditions and the opposition of the hostile air service, aerial observation is fre¬ 
quently intermittent. It is lacking in detail and never immediately available. It 
may have great positive value but usually little negative value. That is to say the 
air service may learn that the enemy is at a certain place or doing certain things, 
but it can seldom be sure that he is not at a certain place and not doing certain things. 
In brief the aeroplane cannot replace the infantry scout and the infantry patrol. 

Scouting and Patroling by Small Units. 

The information from the headquarters of the larger units is disseminated to 
the subordinate units by means of intelligence bulletins, orders, maps, etc. It is 
valuable for their general guidance, but it cannot provide the intimate, detailed, up- 
to-the-minute knowledge that is essential for the small infantry units in contact with 
the enemy or moving to gain contact with him. For example, intelligence bulletins 
are seldom issued oftener than once a day, whereas the tactical situation of a small 
unit may change in a moment. No map, however accurate and detailed, can furnish 

i 


2 


SCOUTING 


all the information that can be gained from an examination of the ground itself. 
And frequently in the operations of the smaller units both maps and information 
from above will be lacking. 

The leader of the small infantry unit by his own exertions and those of his scouts 
and patrols, must gather most of the detailed information on which his actions are 
based. Intelligence from above may indicate to the leader the nature and extent of 
the reconnaissance which he should conduct, but in every case this general informa¬ 
tion must be verified and greatly amplified as to details. 

In spite of the great developments of air reconnaissance and other means of 
intelligence, the World War like all other wars, demonstrated conclusively that the 
infantry leader must look to his scouts and patrols as the main source of accurate 
and detailed information of the enemy. We learned in fact, that in the great * 
operations of these days we need more scouts and better scouts than in the lesser 
conflicts of the past. 

Importance of the Scout. 

The primary purpose of all scouting and patroling is the seeking of information 
which is necessary as a guide for our actions and also as the means of our security. 

In view of the necessity for such information the scout is perhaps the most im¬ 
portant member of an infantry unit. He is the eye of the leader. So important 
are scouts that their number has been increased from a few per regiment to two in 
each squad. All infantry, to be good infantry, should have some knowledge of 
scouting. To make every man a scout would be difficult, probably impossible. The 
scout is a specialist. Accordingly the men best fitted for this specialty, an ample 
number of them, should be selected and trained. 

Development of successful scouts. Prior to the World War it was believed that 
a successful scout must possess certain innate qualities and certain special experience 
found only amongst frontiersmen, Indians, and the like—men who had spent their 
lives on the plains, or in the woods and mountains. We can no longer obtain such 
men in sufficient numbers. Moreover, we learned during the late war that the 
ability to become a successful scout is not limited to woodsmen. We had to use 
drafted men from the factory, the store and the farm. We found that if carefully 
selected and properly trained many such men made excellent scouts. 

Qualifications and Selection of Scouts. 

It is the duty of the platoon leader to select and train his scouts. The men 
selected for this training should be above the average in intelligence, and of good 
physique, that is especially, good eye-sight, hearing and endurance. It is desirable 
that as far as possible they be volunteers, who will be most interested in their 
specialty. They should be expert shots and able to read and write. It is also 
desirable that they should be able to interpret a map, use a compass and make a 
simple sketch. But all these accomplishments can be acquired by men of good 
intelligence under careful training. 

A scout is a man who is specially trained in marksmanship, in movement in the 
presence of the enemy, in the use of ground and cover, in observing and interpreting 
and reporting his observations. 

The scouts of a squad and preferably all the scouts of a platoon should be “ bud¬ 
dies,” having a knowledge of, friendship for, and confidence in each other. 

The training of scouts in marksmanship is covered in the course in Rifle Marks¬ 
manship. 

Equipment. The scouts have the same equipment as other riflemen in the squad. 

In addition they are provided with tracer ammunition, and it is desirable that each 
should possess a watch, compass, pencil and note book. A scout should always be 
provided with this equipment when sent out on any mission requiring its use, but 
any unnecessary equipment which might limit his mobility, should be avoided. 

When operating at night or on certain special missions scouts may be provided 
with additional special equipment. In many cases field glasses may be used to 
advantage. 


DUTIES OF SCOUTS 


3 


A scout must be mobile, therefore his equipment should be limited to absolute 
necessities. 


Duties of Scouts. 

An appreciation of the importance of scouts is best gained by a consideration of 
the great variety of duties they are called upon to perform in campaign and battle. 

1. When a command is stationary in camp, scouts and patrols are utilized to 
provide for its security. They are sent to front and flanks to gain contact with 
the enemy and to gather information of many kinds. 

2. On the march they perform the most important duty in the point of the 
advance (or rear) guard and as flank patrols. In movements by night or in 
dense woods they serve as guides. 

3. In the approach march and entry into the attack they precede and cover 
the advance of the platoon, maintain the direction of advance, investigate 
danger areas, select cover, etc. 

4. During the progress of the attack, except when following a barrage, they 
precede and cover the platoon, maintain direction and guard the troops against 
surprise by hostile fire or counter-attack, they select and occupy firing posi¬ 
tions, identify and designate targets, etc. They lead the platoon in the advance 
by infiltration. 

5. In a defensive position they serve as lookouts, observers, listeners and 
snipers. They drive off hostile scouts or patrols who may attempt to recon- 
noiter the position. When the opposing lines are in close contact the scouts 
gain touch with the enemy, locating his defensive works, outguards, machine 
guns, etc., they harass the enemy by sniping, act as guides for reconnoitering 
patrols and raiding parties, both by day and by night. During battle they en¬ 
deavor to break up the attack by picking off its leaders. 

It will be manifest that thorough training is essential to the efficient performance 
of these many important duties. 

In treating the subjects of scouting and patroling we naturally take up first the 
individual training of the scout followed by the teamwork of trained men as mem¬ 
bers of a patrol. An ideal patrol would be one consisting entirely of scouts. An 
important patrol should always contain a number of scouts at least, and the leader 
should be an expert scout. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Why is information of the enemy important? 

2. What are the usual sources of information? 

3. What is the intelligence service? Of whom does the intelligence personnel 
of a squad consist? 

4. Why should every item of information be reported ? 

5. Why is aerial reconnaissance insufficient for the needs of the small units? 

6. Why is intelligence from above insufficient? Of what value is it to the 
small unit? 

7. What is a scout ? What special training should he receive ? 

8. What are the qualifications of an efficient scout? 

9. What equipment should a scout carry? 

10. Discuss in general terms the duties of scouts in campaign. 

CHAPTER II. 

CONCEALMENT BY DAY. 

To accomplish his mission of gathering information the scout must know how 
to evade hostile observation. He must see without being seen. There are a few 
simple but very important principles which the scout must know and apply if he is 
to remain in position or move about in an area subject to hostile observation, with¬ 
out being detected. They are as follows : 


4 


SCOUTING 




PRINCIPLES OF CONCEALMENT. 


1. Immobility, behind cover or in the open, is the surest means of concealment. 
Remain motionless at all times except when it is absolutely necessary to move. The 
eye of an observer is very sensitive to motion. 

2. A scout should expose himself to view as little as possible, both when in posi¬ 
tion and when moving. That is to say he should take full advantage of every 
natural or artificial feature of the terrain which affords concealment. 

3. A man in a prone position is far less conspicuous than when standing. Ac¬ 
cordingly except when well covered, a scout should habitually observe from a prone 
position. In moving across open terrain especially subject to observation, he 
advances by creeping or crawling. If he runs he does so in a crouching position. 

4. In deciding what method of movement to adopt the scout must balance the 
probability of detection while in a nearly erect posture against the time required to 
creep or crawl. 

5. Whenever it is necessary to cross open terrain, and whatever method of move¬ 
ment is adopted, the scout should move as rapidly as possible in order to reduce 
the time during which he is exposed to view. 

6. A scout seldom moves continuously. His usual method of advance should 
be by “ bounds ” from one covered position to another. 

7. Before making a bound the scout should select the exact locality to which he 
will move, the exact route he will follow, and the manner in which he will move. 

These principles are instinctively observed by all predatory wild animals. 


Whenever he halts in the open, and even as a rule behind cover, the scout lies 
prone and absolutely still with all parts of his body as close as possible to the ground 
(not forgetting his heels). To observe he raises his head very slowly, avoiding any 
rapid, distinct or noticeable movement. When he decides to change position, any 
route or locality or any action which might give the enemy an indication of his 
presence are carefully avoided. 

The scout must be expert in the use of every class of cover. Every precaution 
must be taken to screen himself from view, both while stationary and while moving. 
No detail is too small to be neglected. Even when the scout believes that he is not 
under observation he should take no chances, but conduct himself at all times as if 
he were being watched. 

The successful scout must know how objects appear to an observer, what de¬ 
tails of form, color and movement at¬ 
tract the eye. Remembering that the 
observer usually has a wide field to 
watch the scout neglects no means of 
concealment and no detail of conduct, 
however slight, which will serve to ren¬ 
der him less conspicuous. 



Additional Precautions as to 
Concealment. 

The following detailed precautions 
to insure concealment should be ob¬ 
served by the scout: 

1. Avoid skylines, even at night. 
Objects are most conspicuous when 
seen against the sky. 

2. It is better if practicable to look around the end of a bowlder, wall or other 
object rather than over the top, even if not on a skyline. It is better to look through 
a bush or hedge rather than over or around. 

3. If it be necessaiy to look over a crest, especially one forming a skyline, choose 

a point where the crest is irregular or broken by depressions, vegetation, rocks etc 
See Plate 11, B. * 




Plate i.— Concealment during Observation. 








PRINCIPLES OF CONCEALMENT 


4. Avoid appearing against a back¬ 
ground in sharp contrast to the uni¬ 
form. The uniform blends well with 
foliage, especially foliage of a dull 
color, sand, clay, etc. 

5. If it be necessary to appear 
against a contrasting background, it is 
well to keep close to it. 

6. In moving, the scout should en¬ 
deavor to keep a screen, that is any fea¬ 
ture of the terrain which will conceal 
him, between himself and any localities 
which might be occupied by hostile ob¬ 
servers. 

7. Where there is any choice of 
routes, select a terrain favorable for 
concealment. The most favorable ter¬ 
rain is of course, any covered by woods 
or vegetation (brush, weeds, crops, 
etc.) of sufficient height and density to 
afford concealment; also ravines or 
small valleys, especially if wooded. 

If the country be open, terrain which 
is diversified, that is covered with 
brush, weeds, stumps, bowlders, etc., 
especially if there be shadows, is more 
favorable to concealment than terrain 
of a uniform appearance or texture 
with no diversification. 

Rolling terrain, even if open, is 
favorable for concealment. A fold in 
the ground a foot deep will afford good 
cover for a man in a prone position. 





II ^ 

d; 1 ‘ lt A\ , '' y * . - 

»IU 


w 





The wrong way 




The right way 

Plate 2. —Concealment during Observation. 



Plate 3.—Concealment during Observation. 








6 


SCOUTING 


8. Objects are often betrayed by their shadows especially in a uniform terrain 
exhibiting no natural shadows. Therefore the scout should endeavor both when 
in position and especially when moving, to keep in the shade, that is to blend his 
shadow with the shadows of the terrain. In looking around a bush, stump, bowlder, 
etc., choose the shady side. Shadows are less conspicuous near noon than in the 
early morning or late afternoon. Shade also reduces contrast. A small bush in the 
shade of a larger may be a less conspicuous place than the larger bush. 

9. In firing from cover, such as a tree or window, fire around the right side, thus 
exposing the body as little as possible. 

10. Single bushes or small clumps, or other objects standing alone, and which 
afford concealment, but no protection from fire, should generally be avoided. If 
the scout is seen to drop behind them they afford excellent markers and aiming 
points for the enemy. 

11. In observing from a house, keep well back from the openings. Do not stand 
in a doorway or lean out of a window. A hole in roof or wall is more favorable for 
observation than a door or window. If on a roof, utilize the shadow of a chimney 
or dormer. 

12. In crossing plowed land move in a furrow, or at the edge of the field, not 
across furrows when the body bobs up and down, and which also leaves conspicuous 
tracks. 

13. Always move under cover of a ridge if practicable, that is on the reverse 
slope or that farthest from the enemy. In moving through a small wood keep just 
inside the edge nearest the enemy. 

14. Wear nothing that is conspicuous, as for example, a uniform that is bleached 
white, equipment which glistens in the sun. White faces and hands are conspicuous, 
especially in the sunlight. Glistening articles should be dulled by smearing with 
mud or paint. Hands and faces may be smeared with mud. Gloves may be worn. 
Keep the hat pulled well down over the eyes and do not upturn the face in observing. 

15. It is a fundamental rule of concealment that the scout should avoid localities 
where his person will be in sharp contrast with the natural appearance of the terrain, 
or positions and movements which will similarly be noticeable. For example, the 
uniform blends well with a cornfield, but would be very noticeable in a field of red 
poppies, or against a background of brilliantly colored evergreens. In a terrain 
where the natural objects are vertical, as a burned wood, a man in an upright posi¬ 
tion may be less conspicuous than if prone. Ordinarily, of course, the prone 
position is preferable. 

16. Artificial means of rendering a person less conspicuous may at times be 
employed to advantage, for example “ snipers’ suits ” matching the terrain, leaves 
under the hat, a tree or bush held in front of the person, a sandbag placed over the 
head when looking over a parapet or crest, etc. 

17. The scout should take advantage of any occurrence which affords him con¬ 
cealment or diverts the enemy’s attention. For example, a sudden gust of wind 
which waves the foliage and stirs the fallen leaves, or a cloud passing over the sun, 
gives opportunity for a bound. 

18. The scout should be careful not to alarm birds or animals, whose actions 
might betray the presence of a human being. 

19. A man prone with his face down cannot be detected from an aeroplane at 
a height of 1200 feet or more, even in good light. A man moving can frequently be 
detected from an aeroplane at heights up to 2000 feet. A man either prone or mov¬ 
ing in a deep shadow or in brush or tall weeds can seldom be detected from an 
aeroplane. 

20. The enemy’s attention may often be distracted by some form of diversion at 
another point, such as a fire, movement of men, a smoke cloud, a hat raised above 
a parapet, etc. 

Many other precautions suggested by local conditions will occur to the resourceful 
scout. 


FIRING FROM COVER 


.. - 



Plate 4 .—Scout firing from Cover. 


SPM-3 




























































8 


SCOUTING 



Plate 5.— Scout springing up from Prone Position. 









INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT 


9 


Individual Movement. 

Individual movement in the presence of the enemy is an important part of a 
scout’s training. The necessary methods of moving are simple and few in number. 
They should become second nature to the scout. 

The prone position. In this position the scout lies on his stomach, every part of 
his body as close as possible to the ground. The legs are extended and well 
separated with heels down; the left side of the face is on the ground; the arms 
are extended overhead (to the front) and flat; the rifle, if carried, lies on the 
ground, grasped in the right hand at the balance. See the upper figure of Plate 5. 

If firing, the scout takes the usual prone position shown in Plate 6, lower figure, 
and described in Rifle Marksmanship. 

To rise, (a) Draw the arms back slowly until the hands are opposite the chin, 
rifle grasped in right hand at the balance. See Plate 5. 

(b) Rise on the hands and toes by straightening the arms, keeping the knees stiff, 
weight of the body on the left arm and leg. 

(c) Swing the right leg forward and jump off to the right front. Swing the 
rifle across the body, grasping it with the left hand at the rear sight and the right 
hand at the small of the stock. 

To move at a run. Move fast, bending as low as possible, left shoulder forward, 
rifle grasped in both hands. See lower figure of Plate 5. 

To take the prone position from a run, with rifle, (a) Start falling as the right 
foot strikes the ground. Advance and plant the left foot in front of the right, toe of 
the left foot pointing well to the right. See Plate 6. 

(b) Fall forward on the outside of the left knee. The rifle, grasped at the small 
of the stock by the right hand and at the rear sight with left hand, in a vertical 
position, is thrown forward to full extent of the right arm. 

(c) Extend the body and break the fall by planting the butt of the rifle on the 
ground as far to the front as possible. With the weight of the body on the left knee 
and on the piece, roll forward on to the left side. 

(d) As the body strikes the ground the butt of the rifle is forced up and carried 
back to the right shoulder. Drop the right elbow to the ground. Meantime engage 
the left arm quickly in the hasty sling, and lower the left elbow to the ground. 
Spread the legs and lower the heels to the ground. 

This is the prone position for firing. If he does not intend to fire the scout takes 
the position shown in the upper figure of Plate 5, after breaking the fall with the 
rifle as described. 

To take the prone position from a run, without rifle. Executed as in the preceding 
movement, except break the fall with the left side and shoulder, throwing the arms 
well to the front and taking the prone position, not firing. See upper figure, Plate 5. 

In executing either of the foregoing movements care must be taken not to allow 
the right leg to flop up. 

To take the prone position from a walk or halt, with rifle, (a) If walking come 
to a halt. Place the left arm in the hasty (or loop) sling. 

(b) Stoop and throw the right foot as far as possible to the rear. Grasp the 
rifle in both hands as heretofore described. Plant the toe of the butt on the ground 
about 6 inches in front of and the same distance to the right of the toe of the left 
foot. No. 1, Plate 7. 

(c) Without releasing the hold on the rifle or moving the feet or the butt of the 
piece, place the right elbow on the ground. No. 2, Plate 7. 

(d) Force the legs and body to the rear, spread the legs apart, heels down, and 
lower the body to the ground, keeping the butt of the piece in place. No. 3, Plate 7. 

(e) Carry the butt of the piece to the right shoulder. No. 4, Plate 7. 

(f) Lower the left elbow to the ground, taking the prone position for firing. 
No. 5, Plate 7. 

If it is not intended to fire the sling is not taken, and after lowering the body to 
the ground as described, the scout takes the position shown in Plate 5. 


10 


SCOUTING 



Plate 6.— Scout taking the Prone Position from a Run. 













INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT 


11 



No. 4. 



No. 5. 


Plate 7.—Scout taking the Prone Firing Position from Walk or Halt. 





















12 


SCOUTING 


To take the prone position from a walk or halt, without rifle. If walking come 
to a halt. Dive forward, breaking the fall with the hands, and take the position 
shown in Plate 5. 

With practice all of the foregoing movements may be performed smoothly and 
continuously, with great rapidity, and without unnecessary shock. 

To adjust or slightly change his position the scout should move so slowly, keeping 
his body close to the ground, that such movement could not be detected by an 
observer looking directly at him. 

To creep. Being in the prone position, raise the body slightly on the hands and 
knees, head and buttocks well down, elbows bent to rear, knees drawn up slightly, 
not as far forward as the hip joints. In this position creep forward, moving the 



knees slightly, keeping the head and buttocks always well down. This movement is 
not the same as the usual “ hands and knees.” The body is lower and less con¬ 
spicuous. While moving the elbows are on the ground and the knees never come as 
far forward as the hip joints. This insures that there will be no conspicuous raising 
of the shoulders or buttocks. The rifle is held in the right hand just above the 
balance, care being taken to keep the muzzle off the ground. See Plate 8. 

To crawl. Being in the prone position as in Plate 5 : 

(a) Draw back the hands to positions opposite the chin, keeping the elbows on 
the ground. 

(b) Draw up the right leg, keeping the knee and heel on the ground. 



Plate 9.—The Slow Crawl. 


(c) Slide the body forward by propelling with the right leg, supporting the 
weight of the upper part on the forearms. 

No part of the body should be raised from the ground in this movement. In 
particular the forearms should remain on the ground, care being taken not to raise 
the elbows. 

The rifle is held as in creeping. 

Continue by drawing up the right leg and sliding the forearms forward. See 
Plate 9. 

A more rapid but more conspicuous method of crawling is to raise the body 
slightly on the elbows and push forward alternately with both legs. The rifle, if 
carried, is laid in the crook of the elbows. See Plate 10. 

Creeping and crawling are slow and tiresome methods of moving. They are em¬ 
ployed when the scout is greatly exposed to view in the open or behind inadequate 
cover. 










THE ADVANCE BY BOUNDS 


13 


The various movements should be practiced first by the numbers, slowly, until 
they can be done with perfect precision. Afterwards the speed is increased until 
they can be executed smoothly in the shortest possible time. 

The particular method of movement to be employed in any case must be deter¬ 
mined by the scout’s mission, especially the distance to be travelled and the time 
at his disposal, the nature of the available cover, and the probability that the locality 
is under observation by the enemy. 

As a general rule it may be stated that when cover is good and while at a con¬ 
siderable distance from the enemy, the scout may move at a run. As he approaches 




Plate io.— The Rapid Crawl. 


the enemy or as cover becomes poor the scout becomes progressively more cautious, 
adopting the slower but less conspicuous methods of moving. 

Swimming. If it be necessary to swim in the presence of the enemy the scout 
may escape discovery by concealing his head in, or behind a branch of a tree, some 
brush, a raft of driftwood or any other natural looking flotsam which will serve the 
purpose. He should carefully avoid splashing, keeping his feet always below the 
surface. 

The Advance by Bounds. 

The usual mode of advance is by bounds. Having gained a covered position 
favorable for observation, the scout selects the next such position in the general 
direction of his advance. He then selects the most direct route affording reasonable 
concealment, by which he can reach the advanced station. He selects intermediate 
stopping places if necessary. These should always afford concealment. He decides 
what method of movement he will use on each portion of his journey. 

For example: in the case shown in Plate n, a scout at A has selected B as his 
next observation post. From B he can certainly see things not visible from his 
present position; there are no intermediate points suitable for observation; and it is 
not advisable to move beyond B until he has observed the foreground from that 
point and picked out another suitable observation post. 

He decides to crawl along the dead tree to the cover of the bank, and thence creep 
along the bank to a point near the bush and tree. He might then either crawl the 
short distance from the bank to the tree or spring up and rush quickly across this 
open space. As to which method should be adopted this would depend upon his 
mission, the amount of time at his disposal, and his knowledge of the situation as 
to the proximity and watchfulness of the enemy and the probability of his being 
observed during the rush. 

In moving from the tree to the clump of bushes near the crest a similar line of 
thought would determine the method to be adopted. In any case he would be care- 






14 SCOUTING 

ful to keep well down on the reverse slope so that not even his head would appear 
above the skyline. 

Conduct if captured. In case a scout or any member of a patrol is captured the 
enemy should be unable to secure from him any valuable information such as orders, 
maps showing location of our troops, or any information about any organization. 

4 th 



Plate ii. —Advance by Bounds. 


The only information he should allow the enemy to obtain is his name and rank. 
No reference should be made to his organization or the names of any of its officers. 

A scout, trained to watch his flanks, take advantage of cover, return by a detour, 
is not very liable to be captured, especially if he is imbued with that pride which 
knows no defeat. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Why must a scout be skilled in concealing himself? 

2. What are the important principles of concealment ? 

3. What is the habitual position of a scout when not moving, and why? 

4. What is the rule concerning skylines? 

5. What is the rule as to observing from behind a bush, bowlder, or other 
similar object? 

6. What part of a crest should be selected as an observation point? 

7. What precautions should be observed with reference to backgrounds? 

8. What kind of terrain affords the most favorable routes for movement? 

9. Why should a scout keep in the shade? 

10. From which side of a tree, bowlder, etc., should a scout fire, and why? 

11. Why should isolated bushes not be used for concealment? 

12. How should a scout observe from a door or window? 

13. How should a scout move across a plowed field? Why? 

14. How should a scout move through a small wood? Why? 

15. What precautions should a scout observe with reference to his clothing, his 
hands and face? Why? 

16. What artificial means may a scout use to render himself less conspicuous? 

17. How does a gust of wind, a cloud passing over the sun, etc., favor a scout’s 
movement ? 

18. Why should a scout be careful not to disturb birds or animals? 

19. At what heights may a man, (a) prone, and (b) erect and moving, be detected 
from an aeroplane. 







CONCEALMENT BY NIGHT 


15 


20. Describe and demonstrate the prone position: 

(a) When firing. 

(b) When not firing. 

21. Describe and demonstrate the manner of rising and starting off from the 
prone position? 

22. What is the posture of the body and how is the rifle held while running? 

23. Describe and demonstrate how to take the prone position from a run: 

(a) With rifle. 

(b) Without rifle. 

24. Describe and demonstrate how to take the prone position from a walk or 
halt: 

(a) With rifle. 

(b) Without rifle. 

25. Describe and demonstrate the creep. 

26. Describe and demonstrate the slow crawl and rapid crawl. 

27. Under what general conditions are the run, walk, creep and crawl employed? 

28. If compelled to swim in the presence of the enemy what precautions does the 
scout take to avoid detection? 

29. Explain the meaning of the “ advance by bounds ” and illustrate by an 
example. 

30. How should a scout conduct himself if captured by the enemy ? 

Note. 

Practical Exercises, Nos. 1 to 5 inclusive, Scouting and Patroling, should be taken 
in connection with this chapter. These will be found at the end of the subject. 

CHAPTER III. 

CONCEALMENT BY NIGHT. 

Under the conditions of stabilized warfare, night scouting and patroling will be 
carried out on a large scale, and even in open warfare will frequently be necessary. 
The scout must accordingly be trained to operate in darkness. 

The power of observation is of course, greatly reduced and in fact on a dark 
night is almost nil. The scout is hence less apt to be seen. But on the other hand, 
it is more difficult for the scout to accomplish his mission of gathering information, 
as he can see little and must depend chiefly on hearing. He must, therefore, approach 
much closer to the enemy and has less chance to protect himself. On the whole 
scouting by night is probably more difficult and more dangerous than by day. 

Precautions as to Concealment by Night. 

The following suggestions and cautions should be observed by the scout during 
night movement. 

1. At night the scout is far more apt to be detected by the noise he makes than by 
being seen. Accordingly noiselessness is the prime essential of concealment by 
night. A trained scout can often approach by night to within 5 yards of a sentry 
without being heard, whereas an untrained man will rarely get closer than 50 yards. 

2. The scout should take advantage of any other noise to conceal the noise of his 
own movements. 

3. If challenged or fired upon the scout should remain absolutely motionless and 
noiseless. The enemy will then often conclude that he has made a mistake. The 
scout should not return the fire unless the enemy advances towards him. 

4. Any equipment which rattles or glistens in the moonlight should either be left 
behind or remedied. Steel helmets are particularly disadvantageous as they click 
loudly on striking branches, twigs or barbed wire in the dark. They also show an 
unmistakable outline. At night a visor is not necessary and a soft skull cap, like the 
“ overseas cap ” of the late war, will be the best headgear, or headgear may be 
entirely omitted. 


16 


SCOUTING 


5. Men who have colds in the head or throat and are apt to sneeze or cough 
should not be sent on night scouting duty. If inclined to sneeze press with the 
finger in the angle between the nose and the upper lip. If jnclined to cough, close 
the mouth, hold the breath and press on the “ Adam’s apple.” 

6. Do not chew tobacco. You will spit and make a noise. 

7. If it be necessary to whisper, exhale nearly all the breath and thus avoid a 

hissing sound. . , 

8. Next to noiselessness the most important precaution to be observed in night 
scouting is to keep off the skyline. Even on a dark night objects which would be 
quite invisible against a dark background may be seen in outline against the sky, 
and the figure of a man, especially if moving, is unmistakable. Skylines are not 
limited to the principal hills and ridges. It should be remembered that a very slight 
elevation may form a skyline for an observer in a prone position in low ground 
nearby. 

Accordingly the scout should prefer low ground for his movement, where he 
may be able to see the enemy on the skyline instead of the enemy seeing him. Care 
must be exercised to avoid hollows and shell holes which might contain gas, 
especially in damp weather. 

9. The scout should remain motionless when a flare is set off or any other light 
appears. The best time to move is immediately after the flare goes out. Do not 
look at flares, as this contracts the pupils of the eyes and temporarily blinds one. 
Look out for recurring flares. 

If the enemy is setting off many flares he probably has few patrols out. Other¬ 
wise his patrols may be encountered. 

10. Luminous watches or compasses should not be exposed to hostile view. 
Carry them in the pockets or concealed in the hand, not on the wrist or suspended 
from the neck. When using the instruments shield them from view of the enemy. 

11. Moonlight is probably more favorable to the scout than to the observer. If 
clouds are racing across the moon, utilize the darkness for movements and the light 
for observation. Make use of moon shadows for concealment. 

12. Before attempting any operation by night, and especially before any move¬ 
ment, the scout should make sure that he has his “ night eyes,” that is that the 
pupils are expanded so that he can see as well as it is possible for him to see in the 
dark. The eyes are thus adjusted by looking into the darkness for a few minutes. 
Looking at flares or other lights contracts the pupils and causes temporary blindness. 
The scout should avoid straining his eyes by attempting the impossible or by staring 
too long at any one object. If an object cannot be seen with sufficient distinctness 
move closer to it. 


MOVEMENT BY NIGHT. 

The methods of movement by night differ somewhat from those employed by day. 
Thus except in emergency, as to escape from an ambuscade, the scout seldom runs 
by night. The reason for running by day is to reduce the time of exposure to 
hostile observation. This reason does not exist at night because of the darkness. 
Moreover by running the scout would collide with material objects, fall into ditches, 
shell holes, etc., thus making a great deal of noise and betraying his presence. 

The usual method of movement by night will be a cautious walk in a slightly 
stooping posture, the rifle (if carried) being held in both hands. It will usually be 
possible to continue to walk, if no noise is made, until in quite close proximity to 
the enemy, and in localities where in daylight it would be necessary to creep or 
even crawl. 

In walking through grass or low weeds the scout should raise his foot until it 
clears the top of the vegetation, planting it carefully heel first. This avoids the 
swishing noise caused by forcing the feet through the weeds. In walking on 
gravelly or rocky ground the scout should avoid shuffling. The foot should be 
raised well clear of the ground and planted toe first, the heel being then gently and 


MOVEMENT BY NIGHT 


17 


noiselessly lowered. This enables the scout to feel his footing, to avoid stepping on 
loose stones, etc., and it also suppresses the click of the heel on striking hard ground. 

Creeping and crawling by night are executed in the same manner as by day, with 
the additional precaution that as he cannot see clearly the scout must investigate the 
ground immediately in front of him as he moves, by feeling with his hands. 

The rapid methods of taking the prone position and of rising and jumping off 
employed during the day and heretofore described, find little application at night. 



Left. Walking through Grass or Weeds. 

Right. Walking on Hard Ground. 

The necessity for great speed does not exist. Also it is unsafe to fall suddenly upon 
ground that cannot be seen. It is apt to make a noise and may even result in personal 
injury. Accordingly, to take the prone position at night the scout comes to a 
halt with his right foot advanced, lowers himself on his left knee and feels the 
ground in front of him with his left hand (or both hands if not carrying the rifle). 
He then lowers his body slowly by extending both legs to the rear, weight sup¬ 
ported by hands and toes. He rises by drawing back the hands to a position oppo¬ 
site the chin, raising the body first on the left knee and finally on the right foot. 

Bounds should be short and the scout should frequently STOP, LOOK and 
LISTEN. 

Unless the night is very bright (moonlight) or many flares are being sent up, it 
should be possible for a trained scout to advance by careful walking and creeping to 
within ioo yards of an enemy position. Thereafter it will usually be advisable to 
advance by creeping and crawling to within 15 or 20 yards. Thereafter the move¬ 
ment should be by inches. 








18 


SCOUTING 


Routes for Night Movement. 

In movement by day concealment is obtained by choosing routes through close 
terrain, such as woods, brush, standing crops, ravines, ditches, etc. At night this is 
unnecessary as darkness gives the desired concealment. Also it is difficult to move 
through close or broken terrain at night without making a noise. Accordingly 
routes for night movement should be as far as possible in the open, where the travel 
is easy. It is also desirable that such routes be in low ground in order to keep off 
the skyline, and to enable the scout to see landmarks, etc., in silhouette against the 
sky (Plate 13). 

During the day the scout will have opportunity to view the terrain after each 
bound, select his next stopping place and the best route thereto. At night this will 
not be possible. Except for very short distances or in ground with which he is per¬ 
fectly familiar the scout at night must usually follow a route which has been care¬ 
fully selected in advance, using his compass and checking his position frequently. 
The bounds should be relatively short and the route as direct as possible. It will 



Plate 13.— Route for Night Movement in Low Ground. Objects Silhouetted against the 

Sky are Visible to the Scout. 


seldom be necessary to make wide detours for the sake of security, as must often be 
done during the day. 

If scouts or patrols are being sent out frequently, care should be taken that they 
do not always move over exactly the same routes, as this gives the enemy an 
opportunity to prepare ambuscades and capture them. It will usually be advisable 
to return by a different route. 

If he loses his bearings the scout should never wander aimlessly about but should 
halt and think over his situation, endeavor to locate some landmarks by which he 
may determine his own position, using his compass if he has one. 

Advance by Bounds. 

As we have noted the method of advance by bounds is employed by night, as by 
day, and whenever practicable the bounds should be determined in advance. 

When practicable and when the route would not thus be too devious each bound 
should follow some feature of the terrain which will serve as a guide, for example, 
the edge of a wood, a stream, road, path, railroad, etc. The probability that the 
enemy may be encountered on the natural routes of movement, especially as his 
position is approached, should not be overlooked. When there are no such features 
to serve as a guide the bound should generally be in a straight or nearly straight line 
from one locality to the next, generally in open terrain where movement is not too 
difficult and landmarks may be observed. 

Directions are determined in advance from the map, and if he is provided with a 
compass (as he should be), the scout uses it to follow the courses laid out. If he has 
no compass the scout must determine direction by the north star, and his direction 
and position by any landmarks conspicuous enough to be seen by night, such as hill 
tops and gaps, woods, towns, large buildings, etc., and the direction of the wind. 

Each bound should end at, or near, some prominent object or feature of the 
terrain which the scout can identify at some distance. For example, one bound 
might be from the edge of a wood to a freight house on a railroad, running perpen¬ 
dicular to the scout’s route. Even if he does not maintain exactly the proper 


19 


SCOUTING IN A TRENCH AREA 

direction he will strike the railroad at some point and probably be able to see the 
freight house. If not, he moves along the track in one, or if necessary, both direc¬ 
tions, until he finds it. He is then oriented for his next bound. 

Changes of direction en route should be made at the end of bounds, not at inter¬ 
mediate points, except when following some well-defined route. 

As he proceeds the scout should note any landmarks that are visible and his posi¬ 
tion with reference to them from time to time. This will aid him both during his 
advance and his subsequent return to his own lines. 



Plate 14.—Scouting in a Trench Area. 


Scouting in a Trench Area. 

If operating in a hostile trench area the scout should generally keep out of the 
trenches as he is very likely to encounter the enemy therein. 

If necessary to enter a trench, it is better to cross to the rear, move along the 
trench a short distance, and then enter from the rear, rather than to enter from 
the front. Sentries in the trench will be more alert as to things happening in their 
front than in their rear. 








20 


SCOUTING 


A trench should not be crossed near its junction with another trench, as this is the 
locality most apt to be occupied by enemy sentinels. 

To cross a narrow trench lie still and listen on the parapet and look into the trench. 
Spring up and leap across the trench with the legs spread well apart. Drop into the 
prone position in the rear of the trench (behind the parados) and again listen 
before proceeding. (The parados is the bank of earth in rear of a trench.) 

To cross a wide trench listen on the parapet and look into the trench. Place 
the body parallel to the trench on the parapet. Lower the feet carefully to the fire 
step. Leap across to the rear berm and hug the rear interior slope. Keeping the 
body close against the rear slope climb out of the trench and over the parados. 
Take the prone position and again listen before proceeding. 

If the width of the trench cannot be seen the scout should of course assume that 
it is a wide one. (See Plate 14.) 

Passage of Obstacles. 

The noiseless passage of obstacles is an important part of the scout’s operations. 

Existing breaches or gaps in the enemy’s wire should be located and utilized, but 
there is always a possibility that they may be guarded. 



Fig. 1 Examining the wire 



Fig.2 Stepping over low wire 



Fig.3 Crawling under high wire 

Plate 15.—Passage of Obstacles. 

Usually there will be no gap at the locality where it is desired to pass through the 
wire. To cut a gap, especially when there are several belts of entanglement, requires 
a long time. 


» 
















PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 


21 


The scout will usually walk over the entanglement if low, and crawl under it if 
high, cutting only such strands as interfere unduly with his progress, for which 
purpose he should be provided with wire cutters. 

On encountering an obstacle the scout takes a prone position in front of it, 
endeavors to see it against the skyline and study the construction of the obstacle. 
He decides whether to attempt to walk over the obstacle or to slide under it. In 
the latter case he slides on his back, propelling himself with legs and shoulders, 
feeling ahead and raising the wire with hands; or on his stomach, cutting the lower 
strands as he goes. (Plate 15.) 

In walking over a low obstacle strands are found and pressed down with the 
hands and a clear space found for the foot before it is moved. This careful explor¬ 
ing with the hands precedes each step. 

It is better to pass through the obstacle midway between pickets, as here there are 
fewer wires, and they are more slack and more readily pushed out of the way. 

When it is necessary to cut a strand it is grasped in the left hand close to the 
point of attachment to the picket and severed with a wire cutter. The long end is 
then carefully and noiselessly placed aside. If 
a wire be cut midway between pickets the end 
not grasped in the left hand is apt to spring back, 
making a noise. The scout should wear leather 
gloves. 

A piece of burlap (sand bag) or a handkerchief 
wrapped around the wire cutting pliers will deaden 
the sound. Care should be taken that no metal 
parts of the scout’s equipment strike against the 


wire. 



A gap in an obstacle should run obliquely (not 
perpendicular) to the front. The scout should cut 
no more strands than necessary for his passage. 

In cutting through a high entanglement the top 
wires should be left intact. The gap is then not 
so easily discovered. 

The scout should note the location of the gap in order that it may be used on his 
return trip. He should know also where the gaps in the friendly obstacles are 
located in order that no time may be wasted cutting new gaps. 


Plate 16.—Cutting Wire. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Under what conditions of warfare is night scouting and patroling most 
frequent? 

2. By what means, chiefly, does a scout gather information concerning the enemy 
at night ? 

3. Why is scouting by night more difficult than by day? 

4. What is the most essential precaution which a scout should observe to avoid 
being discovered by the enemy at night ? 

5. How close to a hostile sentinel should a trained scout be able to approach 
by night? 

6. What should a scout do if challenged or fired upon by night? 

7. What precautions should be observed with reference to personal equipment? 

8. What is the best type of headgear for night scouting, and why? 

9. Why should men with colds not be sent on night scouting duty? 

10. How may sneezing and coughing be checked? 

11. What precaution should be taken in whispering? 

12. What is a skyline and what precaution should be taken with reference to 
skylines ? 

13. Why is low ground preferred for night movement? 

14. What should a scout do when a flare or other light appears? What effect 
has a flare on the eyes ? 




22 


SCOUTING 


15. If the enemy is setting off many flares what does this indicate? 

16. What precautions should be taken with reference to luminous watches and 
compasses ? 

17. What are moon shadows? How does the scout take advantage of clouds 
passing over the face of the moon? 

18. What are “ night eyes ” and how are they acquired? 

19. Does a scout run by night? Why? 

20. Explain the precautions to be taken in walking at night: 

(a) Through low weeds or undergrowth. 

(b) Over hard ground (rocky or gravelly). 

21. What additional precaution should be taken in creeping or crawling by night? 

22. Why are the rapid methods of taking the prone position not employed by 
night? How does the scout take the prone position by night? 

23. How close to the enemy may a scout ordinarily approach by walking, at 
night ? 

24. What are the characteristics of routes for night movements of scouts, and 
how do such routes differ from the routes which would be selected for a day 
movement ? 

25. Why is it inadvisable to continually use the same route? 

26. If a scout gets lost by night what should he do? 

27. By what various means does a scout maintain the proper direction of advance 
by night ? Explain each. Which do you consider the best of these ? 

28. What is the advance by bounds, and why is it employed in night movement ? 
What determines the length of a bound and the place where it ends ? 

29. How is a feature of the terrain which crosses a route at right angles or nearly 
so, helpful in determining the scout’s position? Explain fully. 

30. At what points in his progress should the scout make necessary changes of 
direction ? 

31. Should hostile trenches be entered by night? Why? 

32. From which side should a trench be entered? Why? 

33. At what point in a trench should it be crossed ? Why ? 

34. Explain the method of crossing: 

(a) A narrow trench. 

(b) A wide trench. 

35. At what points should a scout pass through the enemy’s obstacles? 

36. What does the scout do first upon encountering a wire entanglement ? 

37. Explain how the scout passes through: 

(a) A low entanglement. 

(b) A high entanglement. 

38. Explain the proper method of cutting a strand of wire. What precaution may 
be taken to prevent noise ? 

39. Why should the top wires of a high entanglement be left uncut? 

Note. 

Practical Exercises Nos. 6 to 9 inclusive, Scouting and Patroling, should be 
taken in connection with this chapter. 

CHAPTER IV. 

USE OF COMPASS AND FIELD GLASS. 

The scout will frequently use the following items of equipment in his work 

Rifle 

(Pistol or revolver) 

Compass 
Field glasses. 



AZIMUTH AND BEARING 


23 


Instruction in the use of the rifle and pistol or revolver is outside the scope of this 
work. One of the essential requirements of a scout is that he be an expert rifleman, 
and it is desirable that he be also an expert pistol shot. Soldiers with these qualifica¬ 
tions are selected to be trained as scouts. 

The scout must use the compass to aid him in maintaining the proper direction 
in his movements both by day and by night, and to enable him to make simple, 
accurate reports of information he gathers. 

The scout must often use field glasses to study distant points in order to gain his 
information or to gain more detailed information about localities observed at long 
range with the naked eye. 

It is therefore essential that before taking up the training of the scout in observa¬ 
tion and in the preparation of messages and reports, he be thoroughly familiar with 
the use of these important items of equipment. 


Direction—Bearing and Azimuth. 

As a preliminary to the use of the compass the scout should learn the meanings 
of the terms azimuth and bearing as employed to designate or measure the direc- 



lion from one point to another. These terms are interchangeable, and many com¬ 
passes read both bearing and azimuth in degrees. Bearings are measured from the 








24 


SCOUTING 




north to the east and to the west, and from the south to the east and to the west. 
Azimuth is measured continuously from the north in the direction in which the 
hands of a clock move, around through the south to north again. See Plate 17. 

The angular distance between two points one due north and one due east of the 
observer is 90° or \ of the circumference from north around to north again. 

The bearing of a line running 45 0 east of north is expressed as N. 45 0 E. Its 
azimuth is 45 0 . The bearing of a line running 8o° east of the south point is 
S. 8o° E. Its azimuth is ioo°. A line running 30° west of south has a bearing 
S. 30° W. and an azimuth of 210°. A line running 8o° west of north has a bearing 


N. 8o° W. and an azimuth of 280°, etc. 


The opposite direction is called reverse bearing or back azimuth. If we move 
in the opposite direction on the line bearing N. 30° E. we shall evidently move in the 
direction S. 30° W. Hence any bearing is changed to its reverse bearing by chang¬ 
ing both letters. The reverse bearing of S. 6o° E. is N. 6o° W. Azimuth is changed 
to back azimuth by adding 180° if the azimuth is less than 180° or subtracting 180° 
if it is more than 180°. Thus the back azimuth of 35 0 is 180 + 35 = 215°, and the 
back azimuth of 215° is 215— 180 = 35°. 

The meaning of the terms azimuth and bearing will be made clear by reference 
to Plate 17. A thorough understanding of the meaning of direction should precede 
instruction in the use of the compass. The compass is an instrument for determin¬ 
ing direction. 

THE COMPASS. 


The compass is a most important item of the scout’s equipment and he should be 
thoroughly familiar with its care and use. 

It is a delicate instrument, and if out of order may be worse than useless. It 
should be handled carefully, never shaken, struck or dropped. It should never 
be held or carried in any but a horizontal position unless the needle or card is 
clamped. Be sure to clamp the needle before placing the compass in the pocket. 
Never “ tease ” the instrument by attracting the needle with a piece of steel, this is 
harmful to its accuracy. 


Description of the Compass. 

There are many varieties of compass, but the essential feature is the same in all. 


This is a magnetized needle balanced on 



r 


Plate 18.—The Compass. 

Lfcend. 

A. Sighting line or front sight. 

B. Index mark on case. 

C. Movable index on crystal (luminous). 

D. Rear sight. 

E. Compass card. 

F. Clamp for compass card. 

G. Holding ring. 


i pivot which, when allowed to swing 
freely, and not deranged by the near 
presence of some steel object, points 
always to the magnetic north. The 
whole is inclosed in a case, either square 
or circular, with a glass crystal and a 
protecting cover or cap of metal, hing¬ 
ed to the case. A clamp is provided, 
which lifts the needle off its delicate 
pivot and holds it firmly when not in 
use. In most compasses the act of clos¬ 
ing the metal cap clamps the needle. 

The north end of the needle is 
marked in some distinctive manner. 

Graduations are provided to read 
bearings or azimuths (sometimes 
both). These are marked on the inside 
(bottom of the case, or on a card like 
the face of a watch, which is attached 
to and swings with the needle). 

In a needle compass the azimuth (or 
bearing) is read on the scale inside the 
case, under the north end of the needle. 
In a card compass the azimuth (or 
















USE OF THE COMPASS 25 

bearing) is read on the movable card at the index mark on the inside of the case, 
under the line of sight. 

The compasses used in the army, including the marching, prismatic and lensatic 
compasses, have additional features, desirable, but not all essential, for military use. 
These may include: a line of sight for more accurate work in the field; a prism 
or lens for taking readings ; a level; a fluid in the case to check excessive oscillation 
of the needle ; and luminous markings for the north end of the needle, an adjustable 
index point on the case, and the line of sight, very essential for night use. 

It is to be remarked at this point that the most painstaking and complete descrip¬ 
tion of a compass must be hopelessly confusing to an uninstructed man except when 
read in connection with an examination of the instrument itself. The scout should 
have a compass, there are many good types, and should familiarize himself with its 
various parts. Then, and only then, will this preachment on the instrument be 
intelligible. (See Plate 18.) 

Use of the Compass. 

For use, the compass should be placed on a horizontal surface, a box, table, fence 
post, on the ground; or else held horizontally in the hand or on the knee, so that the 
needle or card turns freely. Steel objects, such as an automobile or railroad, will 



derange the needle. It will point correctly if moved io or 12 feet away from any 

steel object. . c 

Be sure your compass is reliable, your life may depend upon it sometime. See 

that all movable parts are snug, but not tight.. See that the needle revolves free y, 
indicating a good pivot and strong magnetization. Test north pointing by compar¬ 
ing with another instrument known to be correct. 











26 


SCOUTING 



Plate 20.—Use of the Compass. Azimuth and Bearing. 






27 


USE OF THE COMPASS 

The following instructions apply to compasses having a line of sight and a card 
attached to the needle, graduated to read bearing and azimuth. All good army 
compasses are thus equipped. 

The following operations may be performed with the compass. Each should be 
practiced by the scout, following the instructions given. 

1. To determine the direction of magnetic north. 

2. To find the azimuth or bearing (direction) of any object from the ob¬ 
server’s position. By day or night. 

3. To lay out a given course from a given point, on the terrain. 

4. To follow a course by night. 

5. To orient a map 

6. To measure an azimuth (bearing) or lay out a direction line on a map. 

1. To determine the direction of magnetic north. Allow the needle to come to 
rest. Turn the case gently until the north end of the needle coincides with the front 
sight or mark on the case in line with the sights. Look through the sights and select 
an object on the line, or set a stake. A line from the compass to the stake is the 
direction of magnetic north. Fig. A, Plate 20. 

2. To find the azimuth (or bearing') of any object, from the observer’s position. 
By day. Set up the compass on a level place, unclamp the needle and point the 



Plate 21. —Use of the Compass. Taking an Azimuth. 


sights at the object. Allow the needle to come to rest. Read the azimuth on the 
card opposite the index mark on the case, under the front sight. (If it be a needle 
compass, read the azimuth on the graduated scale at the bottom of the case, exactly 
under the north point of the needle.) By night. Proceed as by day. Read the 
bearing by the aid of a match or flashlight, if practicable. Figs. B and C, Plate 20. 

It is impossible to read an azimuth closely at night without an artificial light. If 
the situation is such that it is not safe to use a light, rotate the movable ring holding 
the glass crystal, until the luminous mark on the glass is exactly over the luminous 
north end of the needle, indicated on the card. Again make certain that the sights 
are pointed at the object whose azimuth is desired. Now carefully clamp the needle, 
and verify the fact that as clamped the luminous north point is still exactly under 
the luminous mark on the glass. Carry the compass to a sheltered place (dugout, 
etc.) where it may be read by artificial light. The azimuth may then be read, without 
unclamping the needle or card. If it appears that the luminous north point is not 
directly under the mark on the glass, their relative positions have been disturbed 
in the act of clamping the needle in the dark. In this case set up the compass, un¬ 
clamp the card, allow the needle to come to rest, and then rotate the entire case until 
the north point on the card and the mark on the glass again coincide. The azimuth 
may then be read at the index point. 







28 


SCOUTING 


If there are several azimuths to be determined, and if the compass cannot be read 
until the scout (or patrol) has returned to his own lines, it will be necessary to use 
a separate compass, as described, for each azimuth desired. If there be a clamp 
for the card, independent of closure of the case, two azimuths may be recorded on 
one compass, using the luminous mark on the glass for the first and the clamped 
card for the second. 

3. To lay out a given course from a given point on the terrain. The compass 
being set up at the given point: Allow the needle to come to rest. Turn the entire 
case gently until the azimuth or bearing of the given course is at the index mark on 
the case under the front sight. Look through the sight and pick out one or more 
prominent distant objects on the line. These will be direction points for the march. 
(See Plates 20 and 22.) 

4. To follozv a course by night. During the day preceding, or by aid of a light, 
set up the compass. Allow the needle to come to rest. Turn the case gently until 
the azimuth and bearing of the given course are opposite the mark under the front 



Plate 22.— Use of the Compass. Laying out a Course. 
A and B are Direction Points Selected by use of Compass. 


sight. Holding the case firmly, rotate the movable ring until the luminous mark 
on the glass is exactly over the north end of the needle. If the needle has vibrated 
again, allow it to come to rest and correct the error, if any. 

The compass is now set for the given course. To follow it by night set up the 
compass on a horizontal surface or hold in the hand. Turn the entire case until 
the movable luminous mark coincides with the luminous north end of the needle. 
The sights (which are also luminous) now indicate the direction of march. 

Unless it is possible to pick out some landmark visible by night, this operation 
must be constantly repeated. 

It will generally be possible to see some object in line a short distance away. If 
not, a man may be sent out on this line. He halts at the limit of visibility and the 
man with the compass joins him. This operation is then repeated. 

5. To orient a map. This means to place the map so that the north and south line 
on the map will be pointing in the same direction as the north and south line on the 
ground. Then all other lines on the map will be parallel to the lines on the ground 
which they represent. (Plate 23.) 

















USE OF THE COMPASS 


29 



Plate 23.— Orienting the Map. 
Determining Azimuth with Map and Compass. 














































30 


SCOUTING 


It is assumed that the map shows a magnetic meridian. If not, one should be 
placed on it. 1 Place the compass on the map on top of the magnetic meridian with 
the line of sight pointing in the same direction as the arrow on the map indicating 
north. Turn the map, with the compass upon it until the needle of the compass 
coincides with the line of sight. The map is now oriented, since the north an 
south line on the map coincides with the north and south line on the ground, indi¬ 
cated by the compass needle (or arrow on the card). 

To orient a map which has no meridian the scout must identify two points, such 
as A and B, Plate 23, both on the ground and on the map. He takes position at A, 
lays his compass on the map, as shown in Plate 23, with its line of sight on the line 
AB (on the map). He then rotates the map with the compass on it until the 
point B (on the ground) is seen through the sights of the compass. The map is 
now oriented, and the magnetic meridian, a line drawn parallel to the needle after 
it has come to rest, should be placed on it for future use. 

6 . To measure an azimuth or lay out a direction on the map. Suppose it be 
desired to determine the azimuth of a point B from a point A. Draw the line AB 
and through A draw a line parallel to the magnetic meridian, putting an arrow at its 
north end. (Plate 23.) 

Around A as a center draw a circle a little larger than the compass case, and use 
this as a guide in placing the compass with its center at A. 

Now orient the map as in (5). Rotate the compass, keeping its center on A and 
without moving the map until a pencil held vertically at B is in line with the sights. 
When the needle comes to rest, read the azimuth (bearing) of B from A at the 
mark on the case under the sight. (Plate 23.) 

Suppose it be desired to locate any point B having a given azimuth from A. Draw 
a magnetic meridian through A, place the compass on A and orient the map. Turn 
the compass case as above until the desired azimuth is opposite the mark under the 
sight. Line a pencil with the sights as in preceding paragraph. The point of the 
pencil is at B, and a line AB has the desired azimuth. 

Direction without a Compass. 

A scout will frequently have occasion to determine direction without a compass, 
by day or by night, and should know the methods by which this is done. 

Trees. Moss grows on the shady side of trees, and in the northern hemisphere 
this is on the north side. The longest and thickest branches are generally on the 
south side. It is never safe to draw conclusions from one tree, but by examining 
several the direction of north can often be determined. 

Sun. The sun is in the east at sunrise and in the west at sunset. At noon (in 
the northern hemisphere) the shadows of vertical objects usually point to the north. 
Sun time is not the same as standard time. If there be opportunity to observe the 
shadow of a tree or vertical object for a short time near noon, the exact time when 
the sun is on the meridian may be determined by noting when the shadow is shortest, 
at which time it points due north (not magnetic north). 

Sun and watch. Place the watch on a level surface. Point the hour hand at the 
sun. To do this, hold a pencil vertical over the outer end of the hour hand. Turn 
the watch until the shadow of the pencil falls along the hour hand. A line drawn 
through the center of the crystal, halfway between the hour hand and XII o’clock 
will point north and south. East and west are determined by remembering that 
the sun is in the east in the AM and in the west in the PM. 

This method is fairly accurate in the early morning or late afternoon. It is much 
less accurate near noon. 

1 It is not regarded as necessary to teach the scout the relation between true north and 
magnetic north. All of his work will be by compass. His directions should be given him by 
compass. His reports will give magnetic or compass azimuths. The officer to whom he reports 
may convert these to true azimuths if necessary. See course in Map Reading and Sketching. 





DIRECTION WITHOUT A COMPASS 


31 


Stars. Many people find it interesting to learn to tell direction by the stars. For 
the scout in the northern hemisphere it will be sufficient to know how to locate the 
north star, the only one in the heavens that is not continually changing its position. 
The north star is almost in the north, and its movement is so slight that it may be 
taken as always exactly in the north. 

The scout must learn to recognize the Great Dipper, which is very easily done 
as it is a most conspicuous constellation. (See Plate 25.) The two stars at the 
outer edge of the bowl of the dipper (farthest from the handle) are called the 
pointers. Follow the pointers from the bottom of the bowl to the top. In line 
with them you will find a large star. This is the north star. The dipper moves 
constantly and turns upside down or vice versa so that the dipper may be above 




Moon. The full moon, 

•fc Polaris 

Pole 


\ 


1 

l 

l 

1 

I 

1 

l 

1 

l 

\ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


vO 


& 


or below, or to the right or left of the pole star. But the pole star is always found 
by following the pointers. 

like the sun, rises approximately in the east and sets 
approximately in the west. In a crescent or 
gibbous moon the middle point of the cir¬ 
cular arc or rim of the moon is opposite 
~ the sun. That is: if the crescent moon be 
regarded as a bow, an arrow shot from this 
bow would pass through the sun. 

Wind. For a short night movement the 
scout may often maintain his direction by 
noting the direction of the wind before 
starting out. If it does not shift, it serves 
as a continuous check on direction. To tell 
the direction of the wind, wet the index 
(first) finger in the mouth and hold it 
vertically in the wind. It will feel cold on 
the windward side. 


\ 




xy 








Plate 25.—Direction by the Pole Star. 






















32 


SCOUTING 


Biasing a trail. If it be necessary or desirable to return over the same route, the 
scout should “ blaze his trail ” by cutting off the bark of trees (on the side toward 
which he is traveling) with a hatchet or bayonet, thus leaving a white spot 
(“ blaze ”). Broken limbs, poles leaned against trees, grass tied in knots, will also 
serve as markers. 

Landmarks. Prominent landmarks, noted upon starting out and at various times 
during his progress, will enable a skilful scout to maintain his direction without the 
aid of either compass or sun. Distant landmarks are of course as a rule of more 
value than those nearby, as they are more easily kept in sight, and do not change 
their direction so rapidly as the scout advances. But local features will often be of 
great value, especially at night. 

To avoid becoming lost the scout should look back occasionally, note the relative 
positions of various landmarks, the slope of the ground, direction of flow of streams, 
etc. This will be especially helpful on his return journey. 

FIELD GLASSES. 

Scouts may be equipped with field glasses (binoculars) for observation by day. 
They should know how to adjust and use the glasses. 

Adjustments of the Field Glass. 

Adjusting the focus. Look through the glass with both eyes open at a distant 
object which has well-defined points, as the casing of a window, telegraph poles, etc. 
Hold the hand over one object glass and adjust the other eye piece until the object 
is seen as distinctly as possible. It is well to pass beyond the correct focus (until 
the object begins to blur) and then carefully adjust back into focus. Proceed in 
like manner for the other eye. 

Adjusting the inter pupillary distance. Good glasses are adjustable to suit the 
varying distance between the eyes of different individuals. Look through the glasses 
with both eyes at a patch of clear sky. If two circular fields are seen the glasses are 
out of adjustment. Open or close the hinge until but one sharply defined circular 
field can be seen. Test the glass for focus, as above. 

Use of Field Glasses. 

Field glasses should not be used to search a wide expanse of terrain as the field 
of view is too small. Search the terrain with the naked eye, using the glasses for 
a close examination of important or suspicious localities or objects. 

Vision is greatly hampered if the sun shines directly into the glasses. Therefore, 
when it is necessary to look in the direction of the sun, shade the object (outer) 
glasses with the hand, or better, observe from a shady spot if practicable. 

To use the glasses for observation, steady them by lying in a prone position with 
the elbows on the ground or in a sitting position with the elbows on the knees. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What are the meanings of the terms azimuth and bearing? 

2. In what unit are azimuths measured? 

3. What is the origin of azimuths or point from which they are measured in 
military operations ? 

4. In what direction are azimuths measured ? Bearings ? 

5. What are the meanings of the terms back azimuth and reverse bearing? 

6. A line has a bearing of N 40 W. 

(a) What is its azimuth? 

(b) What is its reverse bearing? 

(c) What is its back azimuth? 

Explain how you obtain these results. 


OBSERVATION BY DAY AND NIGHT 


33 


7. Convert: 

(a) The following azimuths to bearings: o°, 43 0 , 90°, 136°, 180°, 223 0 , 
270°, 340°, 360°. 

(b) The following bearings to azimuths: N, N ^°E, E, S E, S, 
S 42° W, W, N 39 0 W. 

8. In question 7, convert (a) into back azimuths, and (b) into reverse bearings. 

9. What precautions should be exercised in handling the compass ? Why ? 

10.. With any compass in your hand, point out its essential parts, and explain the 
function of each. 

11. How are needle compasses graduated to read azimuths, and where is the 
index point at which the graduation is read ? 

12. Same as 11 for card compass. 

13. What is the purpose of luminous markings on a compass ? 

14. How should a compass be placed or held when taking readings? 

15. What effect have steel objects upon a compass? How is this avoided? 

16. How is a compass tested to make certain that it points accurately to magnetic 

north ? 

17. Explain how to determine the direction of north with a compass ? 

18 . Explain how to find the azimuth of any object from the observer’s position, 
using a compass: 

(a) By day. 

(b) By night. 

What is done when there are several azimuths to be measured by night, and no 
light can be used ? 

19. You are required to move across country on a course having an azimuth of 
315 0 . Explain fully how you would use your compass in doing this. 

20. Set the compass to follow a course having an azimuth of 155°, by night. 

21. What is meant by “ orienting a map? ” 

22. Explain and demonstrate orienting a map. 

23. Explain and demonstrate how to measure the direction of a point B from a 
point A on the map. 

24. Explain how to determine direction on the ground: 

(a) By the trees. 

(b) By the sun. 

(c) By the sun and a watch. 

(d) By the stars. 

25. How may the wind be used to maintain direction at night ? 

26. What is “ blazing a trail ” ? How is it done ? 

27. Explain and demonstrate the adjustment for focus of field glasses. 

28. Explain and demonstrate the adjustment for interpupillary distance. 

29. For what purpose should field glasses be used ? 

30. How is the sun kept out of the object glasses? 

31. In what posture should the observer be in using the glasses? 

Note. 

Practical Exercises Nos. 10 to 13, inclusive, Scouting and Patroling, should be 
taken in connection with this chapter. 

CHAPTER V. 

OBSERVATION BY DAY AND NIGHT. 

The purposes of the scout’s training in concealment, while moving or while sta¬ 
tionary, as discussed heretofore, are to enable him to move unobserved to a favor¬ 
able observation point, and to conceal himself in that position. We will now con¬ 
sider how the scout observes the terrain and the action of the enemy, and how 
he thus gathers information. 


34 


SCOUTING 


OBSERVATION BY DAY. 

The essential requirements of the scout’s training for observation by day include : 

a. Selection of observation points. 

b. Movement to and occupation of observation points. 

c. Study of the terrain and of the enemy. 

Selection of Observation Posts. 

In order to carry out his mission of gathering information the scout must occupy 
one or more observation points. He must be skilled in selecting favorable points, 
which afford good observation and can be reached without undue exposure. 

Before starting out, if he carefully thinks over his mission and decides on a way 
of accomplishing it, he can readily tell from his map where he should go to observe. 
But his actual observation stations can usually be selected only on the terrain itself. 
The map guides him to the proper locality and he then selects the exact points he will 
utilize. 

Commanding positions, that is, those elevated above the surrounding terrain, 
will be chosen as a rule. But not always. There will be times when the bottom of a 
valley may be the most suitable place. Hilltops, crestlines, trees and buildings are 
favorable for observation. 

But the scout must conceal himself. His presence must not even be suspected. 
Therefore, of several good observation points he should choose the least con¬ 
spicuous. It may be wise to sacrifice something for the sake of concealment. 

For example: if the observation post be a tree, he selects one having a back¬ 
ground which does not mark the tree in strong relief. Also the tree should have 
enough foliage to hide the scout while he is in it, and it is desirable that its trunk 
be concealed by other trees so the scout will not be seen climbing it. A tall tree 
in a wood or grove will be favorable. If the observation post be a building the 
scout should avoid exposing himself at a door or window, as heretofore noted. If 
he occupies a crest he should choose a point where the line of the crest is broken by 
a depression, by rocks, trees or bushes. 

It is an invariable rule that all unnecessary movement while at the observation 
post is to be avoided. 


Moving to the Observation Post. 

Having arrived in the general vicinity of a good observation post, the scout 
observes it closely for a few minutes. He notes all places which might be occupied 
by the enemy and from which he might be seen, either in his position or on the way 
thereto. He selects a route to his position, with intermediate stopping places if 
necessary, so as to be hidden as far as possible from any enemy observers in the 
suspicious places. 

Sometimes it may be necessary to make a wide detour to avoid crossing open 
spaces. Sometimes the known or suspected presence of a hostile patrol or observer 
may cause the scout to choose a devious route or seek a different locality for 
observation. 

In any event the route will seldom be a straight line. It is governed by two 
things, available cover or concealment and the enemy. In general the route will 
lie in the edges of woods, in hollows or ravines, behind ridges, hedges, etc. Ad¬ 
vantage should be taken of such cover, even if a considerable detour be necessary. 

All positions which might be occupied by the enemy are noted and the scout 
moves as though he were subject to observation from such points. 

The scout also decides before each move the manner in which he will move (run, 
walk, creep, crawl). 

In entering the observation post, the scout is particularly careful not to be seen. 
He observes all the precautions as to concealment hitherto discussed. 


SELECTING AN OBSERVATION POST 


35 


Good observation 
post (House) 


Point from which to 
observe house before 
entering 



Plate 26. —Scouts selecting Observation Post and Route thereto. 

















































































36 


SCOUTING 


Searching Ground from Observation Post. 

The ability to pick up even indistinct objects which are moving can be acquired 
by practice without regard to a system of searching, since the eye is naturally 
attracted to moving things. But to pick out motionless objects requires systematic 
search. 

The trained scout searches the ground within his range of vision in belts or 
zones parallel to the front, at successively increasing ranges. He begins with the 
zone nearest him, that is in his immediate front, for here he may find his most 
dangerous enemy. He searches the belt systematically from right to left, omitting 
no portion of it. Places where an enemy might be concealed hold his eye longer 
than open spaces. In this manner, with his eye properly focused, he searches all 
places at the same range. He then proceeds to another belt farther out, but over¬ 
lapping the first, and searches back from left to right, and thus proceeds until he 
has thoroughly examined all terrain to the front and well to the flanks within 
practicable range of vision. This search is made with the naked eye. If he is 
equipped with field glasses, the scout uses them for a closer examination of any 
suspicious spots. See Plate 27. 

Accuracy of observation. On all his missions the scout is the eye of his com¬ 
mander. If the scout’s reports are wrong the commander’s plans and dispositions 
based on these reports will be faulty, and perhaps result in disaster. Therefore the 
scout should be absolutely accurate in his observations and reports. He should omit 
nothing, but should never relate more than he knows. He should not report as a 
fact something that has been told him or that he has deduced from his observation. 
Statements of others and deductions made on the spot may be of value and should 
be reported, but the report should make it clear that these are not facts. 

Interpretation of Signs and Trails. 

Certain deductions are warranted from certain facts and the trained scout should 
be able to properly interpret what he sees. 

For example, the scout should be familiar with the appearance of tactical units 
on the march, in camps or deployed. This knowledge is gained by frequently 
observing units of known strength at varying distances, as during maneuvers. 

The scout should be able, as a result of practice, to interpret the tracks of men, 
animals and vehicles, on the road or in camps. A few of these will serve as 
examples. The length of the stride and the nature of the footprints will indicate 
whether a man was running or walking. A man running digs in his toes. Animals 
pulling a heavy load close in towards each other and dig in their toes. Deep wheel 
tracks indicate heavy loads. Footprints indicate the direction of travel. A motor 
vehicle passing through a puddle leaves a muddy track on the side towards its 
direction of travel. It turns to the right (left) in passing another vehicle. Troops 
usually keep to their right in marching. Even when a column has passed, a few 
individual footprints can be found. 

The droppings of animals will indicate the time since a column has passed. Fresh 
droppings are soft anct moist and have an odor. They first lose their odor, next dry 
on the surface, and finally harden. 

Halting places are easily recognized. Tracks leading to farm houses, wells or 
orchards indicate poor discipline. 

The strength of a column may be estimated quite closely by noting its length 
or the time required to pass a given point. Thus 175 infantry (in column of squads), 
110 cavalry at a walk or 200 at a trot, and 5 guns or caissons, will pass in one minute! 

Dust clouds indicate the kind of troops, thus: a low dense cloud, infantry; a high 
dense cloud, cavalry; an irregular cloud, animal transport; a rapidly moving cloud, 
motor transport. 

The scout should know the appearance of the usual works of field fortification, 
trenches, obstacles, machine gun emplacements. He should be able to judge the 
approximate caliber of a gun from its appearance, or from the appearance and sound 





SEARCHING GROUND 


37 



Plate 27.—Scout searching Ground by Zones. 

Each zone is searched in succession from one side to the other. The arrows denote the 
localities to which the scout specially devotes his attention, as possible places of concealment 
for the enemy. 




















































































38 


SCOUTING 


of a bursting shell. He should be able to recognize a machine gun or howitzer 
unit from the characteristic appearance of its transport. Such information is of 
great value to the scout’s commander. 

On arriving at a locality recently occupied by the enemy, the scout should be able 
to determine the kind of troops (infantry, cavalry, artillery, trains) from the tracks 
they leave. He should search for identifications such as insignia, characteristic arti¬ 
cles of uniform or equipment, etc. 

A properly trained and fully observant scout can gather much information from 
tracks, etc., which would be meaningless to an untrained man. 

OBSERVATION BY NIGHT. 

The scout will see very little at night and must depend chiefly on his hearing to 
obtain most of his information of the enemy. 

As he moves about he should stop every once in a while, and listen intently. The 
ability to listen for long periods in perfect silence must be cultivated, for it holds 
the same place of importance in night scouting that observation does in day work. 

During the war enemy outguards were constantly located by scouts who lay out¬ 
side of the enemy position and listened intently for the inevitable whisper, cough or 
movement, which disclosed their location. 

The trained scout who has a compass will take an azimuth on sounds made 
in the enemy lines at night, estimate the distance to them and make a note of it so 
as to be able to plot their position on his return. 

The distance that an object can be seen at night is very limited. But by getting 
the eye close to the ground and the object against the sky, it can be seen more 
clearly. Low-powered field glasses will also extend the range of vision. 

Before starting on night reconnaissance the scout should have studied the terrain 
in which he will move, from day observation posts, from maps and airplane photo¬ 
graphs. Compass directions to all prominent points should be noted in advance. 

Routes for night movement should be in defiladed (dead) ground as far as 
possible, that is, ground which cannot be reached by hostile fire. 

Practice should be had in accustoming the eye and ear to different impressions 
which objects and sounds make under night conditons. Estimation of distance 
by eye, and of nature, direction and distance of sounds should be practiced. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What are the essential items of a scout’s training for observation? 

2. What places make good observation posts ? 

3. What kind of tree makes a good observation post? 

4. What precautions should be taken in observing from a building, a hill, a ridge ? 

5. How does a scout move to an observation post? 

6. What kind of route should be followed? 

7. Describe the method by which a scout systematically searches the terrain from 
an observation post. 

8. Why is it essential that a scout’s observations should be accurate and accu¬ 
rately reported ? 

9. Why is it important that a scout should know the appearance of units of 
various size in various formations and at various distances ? How is this knowledge 
acquired ? 

10. What is the characteristic appearance of the footprints of a man running, 
of horses pulling a heavy load ? 

11. How can a scout tell from its tracks the direction in which a motor vehicle 
was moving ? 

12. How can a scout determine the time since a column on the march passed a 
certain locality ? 

13. What do dust clouds indicate? 


MESSAGES 


39 


14. What should a scout know as to works of field fortification, the sound and 
appearance of a bursting shell, and the characteristic appearance of various kinds of 
transport ? Why ? 

15. Why are hostile insignia and characteristic articles of clothing and equipment 
of importance? 

16. How does a scout gather information at night? 

17. How does a scout determine the location of sounds heard at night? 

18. How may objects best be seen by night? 

19. What is defiladed terrain? 

Note. 

Practical Exercises Nos. 14 to 19, inclusive, Scouting and Patroling, should be 
taken in connection with this chapter. 

CHAPTER VI. 

MESSAGES. 

Importance of Messages and Reports. 

It is the function of the scout not only to observe, but to report the results of his 
observations. The trained scout should be able to do this with absolute accuracy, 
in the recognized manner or form, and with no unnecessary verbiage. The natural 
ability to make a good report or send a correct message is surprisingly rare, but 
this ability can be acquired from proper training and practice. 

Messages and reports are characteristic of the operations of a patrol. Individual 
scouts cannot, of course, send messages except by signaling. If there be a pair of 
scouts, one may carry a message. In a patrol a number of men are often attached 
for the purpose of carrying back messages. 

Every scout must make a report upon returning from reconnaissance. And as a 
scout should be qualified to lead a patrol, the preparation of messages should be a 
part of his training. 

A distinction is made between messages and reports. The former are sent in 
from time to time during the progress of reconnaissance, the latter is made by the 
scout (or patrol leader) upon his return. Reports are further discussed under the 
subject of Patroling. 

In order to render a correct report a scout, or patrol leader, should keep necessary 
notes of things seen during his reconnaissance. A patrol leader should in addition 
keep a record of all messages he sends. 

Forms of Messages. 

Messages, like orders, may be either verbal or written. Verbal messages are 
commonly employed in combat, when distances are very short, when the messages 
are simple and the location of the scout or patrol sending the message is known or 
known approximately to the person to whom the message is sent. Verbal messages 
also have the advantage that they cannot fall into the hands of the enemy. But they 
are exceedingly apt to become distorted in transmission. When a message is sent 
to a considerable distance, and especially when it is necessary to report the location 
of the sender (as will usually be the case), written messages often accompanied by 
simple sketches, will be the rule. A complete written message is like an order also, 
in that it follows a systematic, standard form, with heading, body and ending. 

The items included in the standard message form are as follows: 

1. The serial number of the message (or title of the report.) Where several 

messages are sent by a patrol during a single journey of reconnaissance they should 
be numbered in chronological order, for identification, and so that the commander 
may know whether or not any are missing. When a single complete report is made 
by a scout or patrol upon returning, it should be headed “ Report of-.” 

2. The place from which the message is sent, so described that it can be located 
on the map by the person who receives it. If this be some definite point marked 

SPM -4 



40 


SCOUTING 


by a conspicuous feature, it is so described, thus: “ church at junction of REES- 
VILLE-LOWELL roads; ” “ Observation Post No. 3 ; ” will be sufficient (if this 
is an established post whose location is known to the receiver). 

If the location is at no definite point it may be identified by reference to one or 

more conspicuous points in its vicinity, viz.: 

(a) The distance and direction from a single prominent point, as: In wheat- 

field, 500 yards N 30° E (Azimuth 
30 0 ,) from junction of REESVILLE- 
LOWELL roads. 

(b) The direction from two prominent 
points, as : “Azimuth 30° from junction of 
REESVILLE-LOWELL roads, Azi¬ 
muth 295 0 from bridge over SILVER 
RUN on LOWELL road.” 

The scout estimates the distances (See 
Range Estimation, Musketry) and takes 
direction with his compass. Hence the 
bearing (or azimuth) will be the magnetic 
bearing (or azimuth), and is always so 
understood. 

In the case of a final report of a recon¬ 
naissance during which several observa¬ 
tion posts have been occupied, the report 
should describe the route followed by the 
scout or patrol. 

The position may best be located by a 
simple sketch, giving the direction and 
distance from the scoufs position to one 
or more prominent objects, by means of 
which the location may be plotted on the 
map. See Plates 28-29. This sketch may Plate 28.—Location Sketch accompanying a 

be drawn on the back of the message. essage. 

3. The date and hour at which the message is sent, as: “July 30, 1922— 
4:30 PM.” 

The time at which some event occurred is always of the greatest importance. 
For example: one scout may report seeing a regiment of hostile infantry on the 
march at a certain locality. Another scout makes a similar report from a different 
locality. Unless the times of these observations are stated, the officer receiving 
the reports has no means of knowing whether or not the same regiment was seen 
by both scouts. 

4. The name of the person to whom sent. The message is usually sent to the 
officer who dispatched the patrol. To insure proper delivery it would appear to be 
advisable to include his rank, organization and location, thus: “ To Lt A. B. Jones, 
Co A 1st Inf, CLAREMONT.” But should the message be captured this would 
convey information of great value to the enemy. Accordingly if there is any 
possibility of the message falling into his hands, it should be addressed simply, 
“ To Lt Jones,” or “ To CO.” The messenger is informed as to just who the CO 
may be, and where he may be found or where the message is to be taken. If it be 
necessary to relay the message, the messenger should write on it (upon delivery) 
the full name, rank, organization and location of the officer for whom it is intended. 

If there be any doubt as to the destination of the message it may be delivered to 
any officer or any organization headquarters, with a report by the messenger as to 
where it came from, etc. 

Following the name of the person to whom sent, should be a notation of the 
manner of transmission: “By runner,” “By motorcycle,” “By telephone, from 
etc. 

Items 1, 2, 3 and 4 form the heading of the message. 








CONTENTS OF A MESSAGE 


41 


5. A description of the objects or events which form the subject of the message. 
The body of the message should include a brief but clear description of the objects 
or events reported. The scout should carefully distinguish between what he actually 
sees with his own eyes and what he deduces from his observations, unless the deduc¬ 
tions are so plain and inevitable as to be correct beyond a reasonable doubt. Also, 
he should not report as a fact or as his own observation something he has learned 
by hearsay, but important information from any source should be reported. An 
unqualified statement is understood to mean that the sender of the message is 
personally aware of the facts related or alleged. If this is not the case, the 
message should show clearly the source of the information, as: “ Pvt Jones saw 

or “ A local farmer states . . . . ,” etc. Objects or events should be 
described in correct military language. 

6. The exact locality at which an event occurs or an object is seen. The necessity 
of this item will be evident. The location of defensive works, or of hostile troops 
at a given time, are matters of great importance. 

The scout furnishes this information by giving the estimated range in yards 
and the compass azimuth (bearing) from his own position to the object or locality 
reported. Often a sketch may be used to advantage. Important locations may be 
shown on the same sketch as that indicating the position of the patrol. 

7. The time at which an event occurs. Usually this will be the same or nearly the 
same as the time at which the message is sent, but there should be no room for any 
doubt. Thus the report may state: “ Just now . . . . ,” or “ About 5 minutes ago 
....,” etc. (meaning 5 minutes prior to time stated at head of message), or the 
exact time of the event may be given. 

The time at which an important event occurred is, of course, of even greater 
moment than the time at which the message was sent, both times should be given. 

If several events are reported in one message, they may be related as one event, 
or in succession, with all necessary information pertaining to each. 

8. A resume of previous messages. This item should ordinarily be unnecessary. 
But if the sender of the message has any reason to fear that previous important 
messages may not have been delivered he should include in each message a resume 
of the most important information in previous messages. 

9. A statement of the next move of the scout or patrol. This will usually be a 
brief remark such as, “ Remain in observation,” or “ Continue on mission.” If 
the conditions force the scout to abandon the further pursuance of his mission, or 
if he adopts some alternative, this should be conveyed to his commander. If there 
is any danger that the message may fall into the hands of the enemy, it should 
contain no information which might lead to the capture of the patrol. Thus, “ I 
continue to LOWELL,” would convey to the enemy (if the message were captured) 
information of the exact route of the patrol, as the place from which it sent the 
message would also be given. If Lowell were the place to which the patrol was 
directed to go, “ Continue on my mission,” would convey the same information to 
the commander, and no definite information to the enemy. 

Items 5 to 9, inclusive, form the body of the message. 

10. The signature and rank of the sender. The message concludes with these 
items. Unless his signature is very legible the scout should print his name under it 
in CAPITALS so that there may be no doubt as to his identity. The name of his 
organization should not be given, as this is usually unnecessary, and would convey 
valuable information to the enemy in case the message were captured. 

It will be seldom that any one message will include all of the items listed. Those 
which are not applicable are omitted. Thus to take an extreme case, the message 
of a scout may be conveyed by firing tracer bullets at an enemy he has located. 
This single action includes most of the items we have listed. The message is sent 
to his section or platoon leader. The location of the scout, the date and hour, the 
identity of the scout, the general nature of what he sees and its exact location, will 
all be apparent to the leader who observes him firing. If necessary the leader may 
examine with his glasses the locality at which the scout is firing. 


42 


SCOUTING 


ROAD JUNCTION 

rlSffi&Y ,5C0UT knows to 




FIG 1-WHAT THE 
, PATROL SEIS 


O O 

2 US PM. 12/12/22 



Wood: 


M G m edge -w 
of woods 0/ 


^lURoodjunction 



I mile south of 
Goinesvi/ /e 


On hi// 

200yds west of 
L ombert Rood 


Fig. 2.—How Scout reports his 
Observation. 


Edcf e. 

I300^d&.53(^cjf A 



— N5°E. 

drawn thru road 
junction 


800 yds. from junction 

Fig. 3.—How Officer receiving Re¬ 
port plots it on his Map. 


Plate 29.—A Scout’s Report. 























































































WORDING OF MESSAGES 


43 


Wording of Messages. 

Messages should be written in a brief, compact style, somewhat similar to 
“ telegraphic ” language, but no words necessary to perfect clearness should be 
omitted. Military language should be used. 

The items should follow the sequence given. Names of localities should be 
printed in CAPITALS, and the authorized abbreviations and punctuation should 
be employed. 

Messages may be written on blank forms prepared for the purpose, or on a sheet 
of paper torn from a notebook. Sketches should be placed on the same sheet, usu¬ 
ally on the back. 

Terrain nomenclature. In order to send a correct message or to make a proper 
report the scout must be familiar with the characteristic features of the terrain, 
and their usual names. He must know how to estimate distances, how to tell direc¬ 
tion including the use of the compass, how to make a simple sketch. It is desirable 
that he know how to read a map. All of these should be included in scout training. 

Practically every order that a scout receives has in it some reference to a military 
feature of the terrain, and the usefulness of nearly every message he sends depends 
upon a proper understanding and employment of terrain nomenclature. 

Instruction in terrain nomenclature is included under Target Designation in the 
course in Musketry. The manner of estimating ranges is also included in Musketry. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is a message? 

2. What is a report? 

3. When are verbal messages used? 

4. When are written messages used ? 

5. What are the advantages and disadvantages of each? 

6. State briefly the items included in the standard message form ? 

7. Why should messages be serially numbered ? 

8. How is the place from which a message is sent indicated? Why is this 
important ? 

9. Why are the date and hour at which a message is sent important ? 

10. How should a message be addressed, and why ? What is the disadvantage of 
making the address too complete and definite ? 

11. How should events and objects be described ? 

12. What is hearsay ? 

13. Should hearsay evidence be reported? If so with what precaution? 

14. How is the locality at which an event occurred indicated in a message? 

15. What is the value of a sketch in indicating locations? Where should the 
sketch be placed ? 

16. When should a resume of previous messages be included in a message? 

17. How should the future operations of the scout or patrol be indicated in a 
message ? Why are these precautions necessary ? 

18. How should a message be signed, and why? 

19. Explain how tracer bullets, fired by a scout at an enemy he has located, con¬ 
stitute a message including practically all of the items in the standard form. 

19. What kind of language should be used in writing messages? 

20. Why is a knowledge of terrain nomenclature necessary both in writing and 
interpreting messages ? 

Note. 

Practical Exercise No. 20, Scouting and Patroling, should be taken in connection 
with this chapter. 


44 


SCOUTING 


CHAPTER VII. 

SCOUTS IN OFFENSIVE COMBAT. 

The Scout Pair. 

Each squad of the infantry platoon includes two men designated as scouts, who 
should be specially trained for their important duties. In ranks these men are 
Nos. i, of the front and rear rank. They are known as the scout pair, one being 
the scout, and the' other alternate or assistant. 

At least one and preferably both of the scout pair should have the equipment of a 
scout (heretofore discussed), especially a compass. Both are equipped with tracer 
ammunition for designating targets. (See Musketry.) 

The Approach March. 

During the approach march to combat and after leaving the company column the 
assault platoons continue the advance in column of squads or section columns. 
During this phase the six scouts of the leading section usually form a small advance 
guard or point, under the lead of the senior scout. Their duties are in all respects 
those of an advance guard, that is to provide for the safe, and as far as practicable, 
uninterrupted advance of the platoon. The scouts of the rear section may be 
employed for flank protection and maintaining contact with adjacent units, when 
necessary. 

As the advance continues the platoon deploys into lines of squad columns and 
ultimately as skirmishers, in two waves, one section in each. As this deployment 
is effected the scouts likewise deploy, each pair forming a small point or advance 
guard covering its own squad. (See Plates 30 and 31.) 

These are the usual formations for the approach march and entry into combat in 
open warfare; that is the scouts guide and protect the platoon during its advance. 
When the infantry is following a rolling barrage with which it is desired to keep 
the closest possible contact, the scouts do not precede the platoon, but are in line 
with the other skirmishers. 

The distance at which the scouts precede the assault troops will be regulated by 
the platoon or higher leader, and may vary from as little as 50 to as much as 
500 yards, dependent entirely on the situation and the terrain. 

The scouts should reach and enter, or at least thoroughly reconnoiter, all 
dangerous localities which might be occupied by the enemy, before the platoon has 
approached close enough to be unduly exposed to fire from such places. If neces¬ 
sary the platoon is halted in a safe place while the scouts reconnoiter suspicious 
localities. 

FUNCTIONS OF THE SCOUTS DURING THE ATTACK. 

The mission of the scouts during the combat is highly important and requires 
thorough training. In brief their duties are those of an advance guard under con¬ 
ditions involving considerable exposure and risk. Specifically, they must: 

1. Advance aggressively in the assigned direction, always covering the front of the 
platoon, or when in pairs each pair covering its own squad. 

2. Maintain contact (visual) with each other, and with the platoon leader in 
rear, either directly or through the platoon runners who follow in rear of the scouts 
and keep them in view. 

3. Investigate either by observation or by actually visiting all localities, both 
within the platoon’s zone of action and to the flanks, which might be occupied by the 
enemy, and from which fire might be directed against the platoon. Ordinarily, the 
scouts remain within the zone of action of the platoon. 

4. Fire upon the enemy with tracer bullets whenever he is discovered (unless 
otherwise ordered), thus giving notice to the platoon of his presence and location. 
The scouts drive back hostile scouts and continue their advance, exercising due 
caution, until compelled to stop by an enemy in force, or by heavy fire. 


g>* 


SCOUTS IN OFFENSIVE COMBAT 












































46 


SCOUTING 



Plate 31. 























DUTIES OF SCOUTS IN THE ATTACK 


47 


5* On encountering the enemy in force, seize the best available fire position for 
their squads, locate the target, especially its flanks, estimate the range, and outline 
the target by firing tracer bullets. (See Musketry.) As the squad comes on the 
line the scouts indicate the target to members of the squad. 

In their advance the scouts observe the usual practice as to individual movement 
and the use of cover. The scouts of a pair should be separated by such a distance 
as to avoid undue exposure to hostile fire. At the same time they should be within 
easy speaking distance of each other, and not farther apart than the frontage of 
their squad, which is usually about 40 yards. They will accordingly usually be 
separated by from 10 to 30 yards. 

In moving to an exposed position one scout usually works forward, while the other 
watches and covers him. 

Maintaining the Direction of Advance. 

In maintaining the proper direction of advance the scouts may be guided by 
signals from the platoon or section leader in rear. They may be given a distant 
direction point for their guidance. Or they may be given the compass direction 
of advance if no suitable direction points are available. 

Usually the center squad of the leading section will be the guide for the platoon, 
and if marching by compass the principal scout, or the scout of the base squad 
uses his compass to select suitable direction points as often as necessary. The 
other scouts guide on him. It is well to have two direction points, preferably both 
to the front, which may be lined in. 

If the scout finds it necessary to temporarily leave his line of advance, or if he 
temporarily loses sight of his distant directing point by reason of intervening terrain, 
he should select one or more intermediate points on his route to guide him in 
returning to it. 

Reconnoitering Suspicious Localities. 

Localities which are most apt to be occupied by the enemy are those which afford 
concealment from view, cover from fire and a good field of fire, especially to the 
flanks. 

For example, referring to Plate 32. 



The house and barn at E and G and the woods at B afford concealment and cover 
and have good fields of fire. They are danger localities in the immediate front. 
The edge of the woods at C, D, F and I and the crest at K and M are more distant 
danger localities to the front. The woods and hill at A and H are likely hostile 
positions and are especially dangerous as from them flanking fire can be delivered. 
The scouts must be especially watchful of such localities. 



























48 


SCOUTING 


Maintaining Contact. Signals and Messages. 

The scouts must maintain contact to the rear at all times. During the approach, 
or when the platoon is not firing, the platoon leader will usually be in advance of his 



Fig. i.—H alt. 



Fig. 3. —“ Enemy in Sight in Force. 
Plate 33. —Arm Signals. 


Fig. 2.—Forward. 

leading section. He is at all times as 
close as practicable to the front and he 
and the scouts must maintain contact, 
assisted by the platoon runners. 

Whenever they discover any signs of 
the enemy the scouts should promptly 
transmit this information to the platoon 
leader. This is ordinarily conveyed by 
simple arm signals ; “ Halt,” “ Forward,” 
and “ Enemy in sight,” and the use of 
tracer bullets to indicate an enemy’s posi¬ 
tion. (See Plate 33.) 

For example, the scouts decide that it 
will be wise for the platoon to halt in a 
certain covered area while they (the 
scouts) investigate some suspicious area 
to the front. As the scouts reach the 
locality at which they believe the platoon 
should halt, they signal “ Halt.” This 
signal means: “We think the platoon 


should halt here (where the scouts are) while we investigate to the front.” Having 
made their reconnaissance and decided that it is safe to resume the advance the 
scouts signal “ Forward.” 












DUTIES OF SCOUTS IN THE ATTACK 


49 


If the scouts believe that an exposed area should be crossed rapidly, they signal; 
Double time (or Increase the gait”), at the same time pointing out the 
locality from which hostile fire might be delivered. 

When it is necessary to send the platoon leader information which cannot be 
conveyed by these simple signals, one of the scouts goes back with a message. 
Occasionally also, the platoon leader may move up to the line of scouts. 


Reconnaissance of a Wood. 

The near edges of woods should always be approached with caution, the platoon 
being halted if necessary. The scouts should reconnoiter them in pairs, one man 
entering the wood, the other remaining at the edge to maintain contact with the 
platoon. The scout who enters proceeds to the limit of visibility, that is as far as 
possible while still keeping the other scout in view. If no signs of the enemy are 
discovered, he signals “ Forward,” which signal is transmitted to the platoon by the 
scout at the edge of the wood (Plate 34). The scouts remain as they are until the 
advanced elements of the platoon reach the edge of the wood. 

In passing through a wood distances and intervals are reduced until adjacent 
pairs of scouts can see each other and also the platoon runners in rear. 


Drawing the Hostile Fire. 

The most important function of the scouts m attack is to cause the enemy to 
open fire and thus disclose his presence and locations before the platoon is so close 
as to be subjected to surprise fire at short range, especially from the flank. The 
scouts brush aside or drive back enemy scouts and snipers. They move aggres¬ 
sively and continuously, and by carefully observing the rules as to the use of cover 
they conceal themselves so that their number 
only an occasional glimpse of men advancing. 

This will very frequently cause him to open 
fire and disclose his position. 

Seizing a Fire Position. 

On encountering the enemy in force, or 
being fired upon, the scouts seize the nearest 
suitable fire position, either to the front or 
rear, outline the position for their squads, 
and open fire with tracer bullets. 

If the platoon leader orders fire opened 
from a position in rear of that outlined by 
the scouts the latter must unmask the fire 
of the platoon by taking cover, moving into 
low ground or working ofif to the flanks. 

Security During a Halt. 

When, for any reason it becomes neces¬ 
sary for the platoon to halt for a consider¬ 
able period during the course of an attack, 
especially during the reorganization following the assault, it assumes a temporary 
defensive attitude to guard against the possibility of counter attack. During this 
time the duties of the scouts are the same as in defense, as discussed in the following 
chapter. 

Scouts of support and reserve units. Scouts of support and reserve units are 
employed as flank combat patrols, discussed under Patroling, or are posted as 


is unknown to the enemy, who catches 



Plate 34. — Platoon Leader watching for 
Signal from Scout in Edge of Wood. 





50 


SCOUTING 


observers to guard the fronts or flanks of their units, in which duty they function 
in the same manner as observers in defense, discussed in the following chapter. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. How many scouts in an infantry rifle squad ? How are they equipped ? What 
are their positions in ranks ? 

2. How are the scouts of a platoon employed during the approach march into 
combat, while the platoon is advancing in column of squads or section columns? 

3. What do the scouts of the leading section do when the platoon deploys in lines 
of squad columns or as skirmishers ? 

4. What is the position of the scouts when the platoon is advancing close behind 
a rolling barrage of artillery fire? 

5. At what distances do the scouts precede the leading wave of the assault 
echelon, and who decides this ? 

6. To what localities do the scouts devote particular attention, and what is their 
procedure ? 

7. What, in general terms, is the function of the scouts during combat, and what 
specific duties do they perform? 

8. What do the scouts do upon discovering an enemy ? 

9. What are tracer bullets and how are they used by the scouts ? 

10. At what distance from each other do the scouts of a squad operate during 
combat, and why? 

11. How does a scout pair move to an exposed position? 

12. How do the scouts maintain the proper direction of advance? 

13. If it be necessary to temporarily leave the line of advance, how do the scouts 
return thereto? 

14. What kinds of localities are most apt to be occupied by the enemy? 

15. With whom, particularly, should a scout pair maintain contact during combat, 
and how is this done? 

16. What are the usual signals employed by scouts during combat? Demonstrate 
these signals. 

17. Under what circumstances is each of these signals used? 

18. What does the signal “ Halt,” given by a scout to his platoon in rear ordi¬ 
narily mean ? 

19. If it be necessary for the scouts to transmit more information than can be 
conveyed by a simple signal, how is this done ? 

20. Describe the procedure of a scout pair in reconnoitering the near edge of a 
wood ? 

21. What determines the intervals and distances between scouts in passing through 
a wood? 

22. How do the scouts cause the enemy to open fire, and why is this desirable? 

23. What action do the scouts take on encountering the enemy in force? 

24. What do the scouts do if the platoon takes up a fire position in rear of them ? 

25. How are the scouts employed during a temporary halt of the platoon? 

26. How are the scouts of support and reserve units employed during the attack? 

CHAPTER VIII. 

SCOUTS IN DEFENSIVE COMBAT. 

Functions of the Scouts in a Defensive Position. 

When the opposing forces are at some distance each combatant provides for 
his own security by covering his front with an outpost. The opposing outposts send 
out patrols to reconnoiter the intervening terrain to the front and to gain contact 
with the enemy. The conduct of these patrols is discussed under the subject of 
Patroling. The conduct of the individual scout, as a member of such a patrol, is 
governed by the principles we have heretofore outlined. 



OBSERVATION IN A DEFENSIVE POSITION 


51 


When the opposing front lines are in close contact and highly organized in con¬ 
sequence of long occupation, there commonly occurs under modern conditions a 
state of more or less complete deadlock, known as stabilized warfare. The space 
between the opposing front lines is called “No Man’s Land.” 

When the opposing lines are in such close contact, and as they become stabilized 
and facilities for observation and sniping are perfected, patroling by day becomes 
increasingly difficult and dangerous. Under these conditions the duties of the 
scouts are those of observing, sniping, listening, and night patroling and small raids. 
These are very specialized duties, for whose proper performance actual experience is 
necessary. On an active front they are conducted continuously and aggressively. 
The purpose of these measures is to keep constant surveillance over the enemy, to 
gather information as to any changes in his defensive works, personnel or organiza¬ 
tion, from which his intentions may be divined, and to harass and wear down his 
troops. The operations are carried on by highly trained scout specialists. 

Even in open warfare, however, scouts will frequently be called upon to act as 
observers and snipers, both in defense and frequently also in offense. They should 
be trained for such duties. 

OBSERVATION IN A DEFENSIVE POSITION. 

The scout pair as observers. In the defense small observation posts are estab¬ 
lished along the entire line and as close to the front as the proximity and aggressive¬ 
ness of the enemy permits. These small posts are usually manned by a pair of 
scouts. See Plate 35. 

One scout, equipped with field glasses, acts as observer, the other as recorder. 
As the duty of constant observation is a strain on the eyes and nerves, the two 
scouts should change places every 20 to 30 minutes. The pair should be relieved 
by a fresh pair every two to four hours. 

Organization and Conduct of the Observation Post. 

Each post is assigned a certain sector or field of view to watch. The observer 
divides his sector into zones parallel to the front and searches these in succession in 
the manner heretofore described. Localities which might be occupied by the enemy 
he studies in detail with his glasses. If the post has been established for some time 



the ranges to important points in the foreground will have been determined and the 
post may be provided with a map and panorama of the field of view. 

Whenever the observer sees any new object or any activity of any kind he causes 
it to be recorded. Everything seen is recorded. An apparently insignificant occur¬ 
rence may be of great importance in the light of other information. 







52 


SCOUTING 


0 

0 


7/zH/zx 

<Sc<nx>£o <1.0 . ^AjZyc/ 

00 ” 

C ^ , S. 03 Oo*Jvv\a^L-> 

77rue 

Azimuth 

Haruje 

Description 

F/n. 

12:31 

l*tH° 

jtfoo yd* 

KKoM. JxouuL (Aarvvv dcLctf. 




U 0 

&L W"otytLo "to 

IZ\H- 7 


U 00 





d V 

&<DrruCtJ~lA*ci jua (jx\xJajLo % 

12.69 

139° 

1300 

I 

Men di^qtnQ iust“ 




• t / j ... — ■— 

* § 

mstde €dqe o-f vvooc/s, 

i.os 

M8° 

900 

/ j - 

Alan jrjovirrQ <rt 




f -—-- 

bushes. 














• 


• 


Plate 36 . 


































OBSERVATION POSTS 


53 


The observer takes the azimuth of the object or occurrence with his compass, and 
estimates the range. He calls this data to his companion, who records it, together 
with the time. 


Reports of Observation. 

The report sheets are transmitted to a designated officer at stated intervals. 
Matters of great importance should be reported at once, and for this purpose one 
or more men may be attached to the post as messengers. 

The report of an observation post should include: 

(1) The number of the post, and its location if necessary. 

(2) The date. 

(3) Names of scout pair responsible for the report. 

(4) The time of each observation. 

(5) Azimuth (or bearing) of each object or event reported. 

(6) Range (distance) of each thing reported. 

(7) A brief description of each thing reported. 

An example of such a report is shown in Plate 36. 

When a new relief enters a post the former occupants should give them any 
information which might assist them in their duties. The newcomers should care¬ 
fully examine the reports of previous observation. 

Locating the Observation Post. Concealment. 

The number and location of the posts should be such that the entire front is 
under continuous observation. The posts should be carefully concealed from both 


SMALL OBSERVATION POSTS 


Bullet proof 
plate 




CAMOUFLAGED COVEIL 
cm- FRONT PLATE OF 
OBSERVATION CUPOLA 


jullace/ 

.curtain 


Concrete 
bursters ■ 


VIEW OF STANDARD POJLTABLL x 

(KNOCKDOWN) CABIN WITH OBSERVATION^ 
CUPOLX FOIL USE IN TRENCH. 


Tar paper on 
horizontal surfaces 



INSIDE VIEW OF 

OBSERVATION CUPOLA % 





SMALL OBSERVATION POST 
LOCATED IN A FORWARD SLOPE 


TRENCH ACCESSORIES 

» 

PORTABLE TRENCH PERISCOPE 




Plate 37.—Observation Posts. 


aerial and all terrestrial observation. All unnecessary activity in or near the posts 
should be suppressed. Men going to and from the posts should go one at a time 
and conceal themselves, and should avoid making tracks ending at the post. To 






























































































54 


SCOUTING 


prevent this the entrance may be wired in. (See course in Field Engineering.) As 
a rule no firing should be done from observation posts. At night the same stations 
may serve as listening posts, but listening posts may often be placed closer to the 
enemy than day observation posts. 

Trees, houses, etc., are frequently utilized as temporary observation posts. In 
a stabilized sector the posts are located at the most favorable (highest) points of the 
terrain, and dug in and camouflaged to avoid detection. They are often placed in 
the front line trenches or in subterranean cabins in front of the trenches. See 
Plate 37. 

If an observation post is subject to constant fire by the enemy it should be 
abandoned until such fire is discontinued. In order that this may not leave any 
portion of the front unobserved a number of alternative posts should be provided, 
ready for immediate occupancy. 

Equipment of the observation post. Each post should be provided with sketches, 
maps, and when practicable, panoramas of the field of view. In case of a raid these 
should be destroyed to prevent their capture. Each post should also have a signal 
pistol for giving the alarm in case of a raid or attack. 

SNIPING. 

Functions of Snipers. 

Snipers are expert riflemen stationed in the forward lines of a defensive position 
for the purpose of killing individuals of the enemy who may expose themselves. 

Specifically their duties are: 

1. To kill enemy scouts or patrols who may attempt to approach or observe the 
position. 

2. To protect observers and sentinels by killing hostile snipers who are firing at 
them. 

3. In case of attack by the enemy: 

(a) To kill the leaders of the attack, thus disorganizing it. 

(b) To compel deployment at long range and caution in approaching the 
position, thereby delaying the attack. 

(c) To pick off individuals who are specially active in filtering to the front, 
also automatic riflemen and machine gunners. 

In the attack, whenever the platoon halts for any purpose, as for reorganization 
following a successful assault, snipers are placed in favorable locations to the front 
and flanks to prevent hostile reconnaissance and delay attacks in force. 

When a force withdraws from a battle front snipers are usually left in position 
to prevent hostile scouts or patrols learning of the withdrawal by reconnoitering the 
abandoned position. 

Sniping is characteristic of both open and stabilized warfare. It will naturally be 
most intensively employed in the latter. 

Snipers should operate in pairs, when sufficient men are available, and the scout 
pairs are habitually employed and should be trained for this duty. 

Snipers’ Posts. Location, Concealment. 

Snipers’ posts or nests are generally located in the same terrain as the advanced 
observation points heretofore described. In fact sniping and observation posts are 
sometimes combined, and snipers always observe and report what they see. Usually 
the observation posts proper will occupy the highest ground favorable for observa¬ 
tion, while the snipers’ posts will be in somewhat lower ground, more favorable for 
fire. 

Snipers’ posts or nests are in general similar to small observation posts. They 
are located and constructed in much the same way, and all the precautions as to 
concealment noted in the case of observation posts should be observed. 

Temporary posts may be located in trees, (preferably trees with plenty of foliage), 
behind rocks, stumps or bushes. Shell holes are a favorable location. More per- 



SNIPERS 


55 



Plate 38.—Sniper and Observer in a Tree. 





















56 


SCOUTING 


manent posts should be dug into the ground, without disturbing its former appear¬ 
ance, and provided with overhead cover. (See course in Field Engineering.) 

Individual snipers’ nests of steel, in sections which may be carried up and installed 
by the sniper, are provided. (See Plate 35.) 

A curtain should be hung at the rear entrance to prevent light showing through the 
aperture or loophole and thus betraying the location of the post. When the station 
is not in use, a curtain should be hung behind the loophole. 

If the opposing lines are in close contact, snipers’ posts should not be assigned 
to sectors of fire directly opposite their positions, but to the flank. (See Plate 39 ’) 
The various posts thus cross fire along the front. Oblique fire is most effective, 
and it is also much more difficult for the enemy to discover the source of fire from 
the flank. 



Sniper’s post Sniper’s post 


Plate 39.— Location and Fields of Fire of Snipers’ Posts. 

When a sniper’s post is manned by a single individual, he performs the duties 
of both observer and sniper. When there are two men, one acts as observer and 
the other as sniper or rifleman. 

Organizing the Sector. 

As soon as the post is occupied the scouts organize their observation. Their 
sector of fire and limiting range will be assigned to them. They divide the sector 
laterally into three parts, right, center and left. (See Plate 40). These parts should 
be approximately equal, but the limits of each should be well defined by some feature 
of the terrain, thus: 

Right. Church spire to red barn. 

Center. Red barn to lone pine. 

Left. Lone pine to large oak. 

Each of these subsectors is again divided into three parts, right, center and left. 
Thus the right portion of the left subsector would be designated “ Left-Right.” 

The ranges to all important points in the sector are carefully estimated, or if there 
be opportunity, may be actually measured, thus : (all ranges in yards) 

Road junction (Right-left) 600 
Red barn (Center-right) 650 
Fence corner (Left-right) 400 
Large oak (Left-left) 250 

As soon as practicable a range card is prepared showing the division of the sector, 
the important features, and their ranges (Plate 40, also Musketry). 

Designating Targets. 

The observer now searches the field of view by successive overlapping zones, as 
heretofore described. Whenever he discovers a target he estimates the range, and 
designates it to the rifleman, thus: (Plate 40.) 



ORGANIZING A SNIPERS’ POST 


57 


Range, 500. 

The rifleman sets his sight at 500 yds., and looks towards the crest, which he 
knows is at that range. The observer next announces: 

Right-left. 

The rifleman directs his gaze to the left portion of the right subsector at a 
range of 500 yds. The observer then announces: 

Scout in tree. 

The rifleman promptly picks up the target and immediately fires on it. 

The complete designation is simple, definite, quickly given and quickly understood, 
thus : “ Range 500. Right-left. Scout in tree.” 



Plate 40.—Sniping. 

Organization of a Sector. Target Designation. 


This is a specialized form of target designation (See course in Musketry), pos¬ 
sible only in a fixed post whose sector of fire is accurately defined and systematically 
organized. 

Duties of the Rifleman. 

The rifleman should of course, be an expert shot. He must be able to fire quickly 
and accurately on moving targets if necessary. The flash of the shot should be 
concealed. If in a tree it is fired through the foliage, if in a house the rifleman is 
some distance back from the window. If the post is on the ground it is desirable 
to have some weeds or a branch in front, unless this would be conspicuous. 

Usually the rifleman fires one shot a time. Several shots at short intervals may 
enable the enemy to locate the post. If necessary to take advantage of a fleeting 
opportunity, several shots may of course, be fired. 






















58 


SCOUTING 


Ranging shots should not be fired from a sniper’s post. Snipers should test 
their rifles at known ranges before going to the post. 

As the rifleman fires, the observer, if equipped with field glasses, watches the 
effect of the shot. 

Telescopic sights. When snipers are equipped with ordinary sights and using the 
naked eye, sniping operations are generally limited to a range of 600 or 700 yards, 
for the reason that at greater ranges the results obtained seldom justify the effort. 

Long range sniping may be carried on with rifles equipped with telescopic sights. 
This is usually advisable only in very stabilized positions, or where there is rela¬ 
tively little movement of the opposing forces. Telescopic sights are also used to 
give better definition to poor targets at near ranges. 

Riflemen using telescopic sights must be familiar with their adjustments. In 
particular the sights must be carefully “ zeroed ” by firing on a measured range. 
Unless the sights are carefully adjusted and the riflemen familiar with them, the 
results obtained will be nil. 

Records and Reports. Reliefs. 

A sniper’s post records and reports all its observations in the same manner as an 
observation post. The results of its fire, if known, are also reported. 

The sniper and observer change places every 20 to 30 minutes and the pair 
should be relieved every two to four hours. 

Locating the Hostile Snipers. 

If a sniper’s post is repeatedly fired at, it shows that the enemy has located it, 
and it should be abandoned, at least temporarily, in favor of an alternative post. 

The snipers should endeavor to determine the position of any hostile snipers 
who are firing on them or on any observation post or other establishment nearby. 
This may often be done by intently and continually watching suspicious localities 
with field glasses. 

The direction from which shots come, if this can be determined by their sound, 
or the mark of the bullet on a parapet, will aid in locating the enemy. Another 
method of determining the direction from which the enemy’s fire comes is to expose 
dummy heads of papier mache, or a hat, over the parapet—not too close to the post. 
The positions of the two holes through the dummy head made by the enemy’s bullet 
indicate the direction from which it came. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. How does a force on the defensive, in line of battle, provide for the security 
of its own front? 

2. What is stabilized warfare? 

3. When the opposing front lines are in close contact what is the space between 
them called ? 

4. Why are scouting and patroling by day especially difficult in a stabilized 
position ? 

5. What are the usual duties of scouts in this situation ? 

6. What are the purposes of these operations ? 

7. How does a scout pair divide the duty in a small observation post? How 
often should they change places and how often should both be relieved? 

8. Explain how the scouts organize their sector and conduct their observation. 

9. What are the duties of the observer? Of the recorder? 

10. What information should be recorded? 

11. To whom are the reports of observation submitted, and how often? 

12. What items are included in the report of an observation post? Give an 
example. 

13. What information should be given to the scouts relieving other scouts in an 
observation post ? 

14. How is the number and location of observation posts determined? 


LISTENING POSTS 


59 


I 5 - What precautions should be taken to prevent discovery of a post by the 
enemy ? 

16. What places are suitable as temporary observation posts? 

17. Where are the observation posts in a stabilized sector located ? 

18. What should be done if the enemy constantly fires at an observation post? 

19. What should be the equipment of an observation post? 

20. What are snipers ? 

21. What are the duties of snipers: 

a. In defense? 

b. In attack? 

c. In withdrawal from a position? 

22. Where are snipers’ posts usually located? 

23. How should a sniper’s post be sited with reference to the field of fire assigned 
to it, and why ? 

24. Explain the method of target designation used in sniping from an organized 
post, and give an example. 

25. Draw a diagram showing the field of a sniper’s post, as usually organized? 

26. What precautions, in addition to those taken for an observation post, should 
a sniper’s post observe to avoid being discovered by the enemy? 

27. What records and reports are kept or made by a sniper’s post ? 

28. How are the positions of hostile snipers located? 

29. What is the usual limit of range of sniping with ordinary sights? 

30. What are telescopic sights, for what purpose and under what conditions 
may they be used ? 


CHAPTER IX. 

LISTENING POSTS. 

During the hours of darkness observation as conducted in the daytime is impos¬ 
sible. Hearing must take the place of vision, and the front of a defensive position 
is accordingly covered by listening posts. 

Location of Listening Posts. Concealment and Cover. 

The elaborate precautions as to concealment so necessary in the case of day obser¬ 
vation posts are not essential in the case of listening posts. They are usually located 
in open ground, either on the surface or in pits which are covered with camouflage 
nets during the day. Such pits may be provided with subterranean or camouflaged 
communications from a nearby trench. (See course in Field Engineering.) 

Day observation posts in the front lines may of course be utilized also as listening 
posts, but in general listening posts in situations where the opposing lines are in 
close contact are placed closer to the enemy than it would be possible for men to 
go by day. They are often located in the obstacles in front of the trenches, or even 
in no man’s land. Scouts or small patrols may be sent forward to the enemy’s 
obstacles for very close range listening. 

Although listening posts are usually in open ground they should not be placed in 
localities especially subject to hostile fire. This means that they will ordinarily 
be in low ground rather than high ground. 

This has the further advantage that the observers will often be able to see 
objects in silhouette against the sky, thus supplementing listening by a measure 
of observation. 

Scouts as listeners. Listening posts are manned by one or two scouts. 

The listener lies prone, with his head close to the ground. He is thus best con¬ 
cealed and most comfortable. Also with his head close to ground he will hear the 
better, and occasionally be able to see objects in silhouette against the sky. The 
noise of movement or of anything striking the ground can best be heard by placing 
the ear to the ground. 


60 


SCOUTING 


Interpretation and Location of Sounds Heard at Night. 

The scout acting as listener should be able to interpret the usual sounds heard by 
night, such as: footfalls in various kinds of soil, the manipulation of a rifle, the 
rattle of equipment, a gun butt or other object striking the ground, conversation, 
whispers, laughter, coughing, sneezing, excavation of earth (digging), driving 
pickets, erecting wire, etc. He must be able to judge the distances and directions 
from which such sounds come. He will be aided occasionally by his vision. 

Recording the Observations. 

The essential items of equipment for a listener are a pad or notebook, a pencil, 
luminous watch and compass. 

The notebook should be small and bound at the top. The pages are numbered, and 
a rubber band is employed to separate used pages from blank pages, to avoid the 
possibility of writing one entry on top of another in the dark. 

Unless the location of the post is already plotted on a map the scout’s first opera¬ 
tion is to fix his own position. This he does by taking the compass azimuths (or 
bearings) of two landmarks which are visible by night and are known to be on the 
map. These points should be selected in advance, during daylight. 

The scout now listens for significant noises and records them in his notebook, 
using a page for each observation. Four entries are required for a complete obser¬ 
vation, thus: 

1105 (Time) 

70 (Azimuth) 

150 (Range) 

Outguard (Description) 

These four entries always in the same order, may be made in the dark by using a 
quarter of the page for each. The page is then turned and the next observation 
recorded on a fresh page. If the “ description ” involves a number of words it may 
be written on the back of the page. 

The compass and watch are placed on level ground under the scout’s eye, the 
ground being leveled off with the hand or a stick, if necessary. As soon as a sound 
is heard the scout notes its direction and points his compass sights toward it. While 
the needle is coming to rest he estimates the range. 

He then determines the compass azimuth, notes the time, and enters the entire 
observation in his book. 

Reading compass at night. As we have heretofore noted it is impossible to read 
the compass closely in the dark. By the aid of the luminous points, however, it is 
possible to take compass readings to the nearest io°, and a skillful man can read 
them to the nearest 5 0 . For observations at close range this will usually be sufficient. 
For the more distant sights by which the scout locates his own position a closer read¬ 
ing is desirable. This may be accomplished as follows: The compass being set on 
a level spot, direct the sights on the first of the distant objects whose azimuths are 
to be read. When the needle or card comes to rest, turn the ring until the luminous 
mark on the glass is exactly over the needle. Now direct the sights on the second 
point and when the needle comes to rest clamp it carefully in its position. The com¬ 
pass may now be closed and taken back within the lines, where both readings may be 
made by artificial light, one being recorded by the luminous mark on the glass, the 
other by the clamped card. It will be evident that to thus record two readings for 
future examination it is necessary to have a compass in which the card is not 
unclamped by opening the case. 


Guides. 

Scouts will frequently be employed as guides in night movements. They should 
study their route from a map, and with the aid of an officer select their bounds, 
scale off distances and direction of each and record in their notebooks or make a 
rough sketch. They should also note any landmarks which would be visible or 


SCOUTS AS GUIDES 


61 


might be identified by night to aid them in checking their positions. Nearby land¬ 
marks are of course, much preferable to distant. Roads, railroads, streams and 
valleys which cross the route of march are especially useful. Usually the bounds 
should be from one such feature to another. 

Finally if practicable, as it often will be, the scouts should go carefully over the 
selected route by day. 

When the march commences the scouts move out in the indicated compass direc¬ 
tion, endeavoring to keep in a straight line (except when following a route of 
travel) and checking direction frequently by any available means. They measure the 
distance traveled, and at the end of each bound locate the landmark thereat before 
starting the next bound. 

A sketch and notes for such a movement are shown in Plate 41. 

Bound / ~ Old born foS. edge of woods,of rood. Az. 68 ° Disfonce 600poces. 

Bound 2 ~ 5oufh edge of woods fo N.edge ofwoods(a/ong rood fhru woods) Az.350°'Dist 4/0pcs 
Bound 3- North edge of woods to R. R. frock (near bridge) Az.5° Disfonce 400paces. 
Bound 4-R R. to bend in sfreom (otong stream bed) Az. 355° Distance 200paces. 
Bound 5- Bend in stream bed fo french junction. Az . 285° Disfonce 270poces 



1. What is a listening post? When are listening posts used and why? 

2. Where are listening posts located ? 

3. What is the advantage of low ground? 

4. What position should be taken by listeners ? 

5. For what sounds should a scout listen? 

6. How does he interpret sounds and determine their direction and distance? 

7. What are the essential items of equipment for a listener? 

8. How are observations recorded ? Give an example. 

9. How does the scout fix his own position ? 

10. How closely may compass azimuths be read in the dark? 

11. How may closer readings be obtained for fixing the scout’s position? 

12. What does a scout do in preparing to act as guide for a night movement? 

13. What kind of landmarks are useful in night movements? 

14. What determines the limits of the bounds in a night movement? 





62 


PATROLING 


PATROLING. 

CHAPTER X. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES. TACTICAL USE OF PATROLS. 

Definition of patrol. A patrol is a small detachment or group of men sent out 
from a larger body, and having an independent mission. The term is usually applied 
to a mobile body, that is one which moves from place to place in the performance 
of its duties. 

Classes of Patrols. 

Patrols are employed for a great many purposes, but practically all of these may 
be classified under two general headings, viz.: 

1. To gain information. 

2. To provide security. 

Information and security patrols. Accordingly patrols are generally classified 
according to their missions as information patrols and security patrols. Whatever 
the particular mission assigned to a patrol it resolves itself into one or the other, or 
both of these functions. 

Also it is not always possible to draw a sharp distinction between these two classes. 
Information of the enemy is necessary to our plans for operations against him. 
But it is also the chief element of security. Accordingly in gaining information 
a patrol contributes to the security of the body which sent it out. 

Information patrols as a rule endeavor to keep concealed and avoid combat with 
the enemy. But often they seek combat for the express purpose of capturing 
prisoners from whom valuable information may be gained. 

It is necessary to prevent the enemy from gaining information, and patrols are 
frequently employed for this purpose. This is a function of security. 

Strategic and tactical patrols. There are various other classifications of patrols, 
of less significance than those already mentioned, but which may greatly influence 
the size of the patrol and the nature and extent of its operations. Thus we have 
mounted and dismounted patrols, officers’ and non-commissioned officers’ patrols, 
strategic patrols and tactical patrols, contact patrols, combat patrols, flank patrols, 
advance guard patrols outpost patrols, etc. The names usually indicate the nature 
of the duties performed by various patrols. An officer’s patrol is one led by an 
officer. 

Strategic patrols are those which seek information for general guidance and 
which would ordinarily not be immediately connected with the tactical operations of 
any particular unit. They would usually operate to a relatively great distance and 
hence would as a rule be mounted, officers' patrols. Tactical patrols seek informa¬ 
tion essential for the immediate tactical operations of their main bodies, and hence 
operate within a less range than strategic patrols. Contact patrols maintain con¬ 
nection between adjacent units. Combat patrols are those employed during combat, 
usually for security. 

The reader should not allow himself to become confused by these classifications, 
which are of no great importance. Information and security, either or both com¬ 
bined, are the functions of all patrols. The same general principles, which are 
discussed in the following chapters, should govern the conduct of all patrols, what¬ 
ever the special missions with which they are charged. 

Importance of Patroling. 

The importance of information concerning the enemy has been discussed under 
the subject of Scouting. It is essential for guidance and for security. When in the 


TACTICAL USE OF PATROLS 


63 


presence of the enemy every body of troops, whether moving or stationary, main¬ 
tains touch with the enemy and covers its front and flanks as well as its rear, if 
necessary, by continual patroling. To neglect the use of patrols either in camp, on 
the march or during combat, is to invite disaster. Every commander must know 
how best to employ patrols for information and security in any situation which may 
confront him. Every officer and non-commissioned officer of the combatant arms 
should know how to lead a patrol, and every soldier should be trained to perform 
his duties as a member of a patrol. As this will not always be possible with hastily 
trained troops the leaders and members of important patrols will frequently be 
specially selected for such duty. 


TACTICAL USE OF PATROLS. 

The following summary of the usual operations of a combatant unit in campaign 
will indicate the various situations in which patrols are commonly employed. 

Advance guards. The formation of the advance guard must be such that the 
first element to encounter the enemy will be a relatively small patrol. In this manner 
information of the enemy is gained and the larger bodies are protected from sur¬ 
prise. On the route of march the leading element is a patrol called the point. The 
advance guard covers its flanks by means of patrols which are sent to investigate 
localities which might be occupied by the enemy, or from which terrain not visible 
from the route of march may be observed. These flank patrols may march parallel 
to the column when suitable routes at the proper distance are available. If there 
are other units on the flanks contact with them is maintained by means of patrols. 
If the enemy is encountered in force, patrols are utilized to determine his strength 
and position. 

Rear and flank guards. These bodies employ patrols in much the same manner 
and for the same purposes as advance guards. 

Outposts. An outpost provides for the security of a stationary command by a 
combination of observation and patroling. Observation groups are posted at the 
most favorable localities and the unoccupied intervals are constantly reconnoitered 
by patrols, which also maintain contact between the stationary groups. The terrain 
to the front and flanks is reconnoitered by patrols, and patrols, mounted if necessary, 
are sent to the front to gain contact with the enemy, ascertain his strength and dis¬ 
positions, keep him under observation and give warning of his movements and other 
activities. 

At night, when observation from fixed stations is much less efficient than in the 
day time, a correspondingly greater use is made of patrols. 

Attack. Prior to an attack reconnoitering patrols are sent to the front to deter¬ 
mine the enemy’s location, strength and dispositions and the nature of the terrain 
over which the attack must be made. In particular these patrols endeavor to ascer¬ 
tain the location of the hostile flanks and defensive works, if any. Except in 
emergency, such as a rencontre or sudden meeting, an attack should never be 
launched except in the light of information gained by such preliminary recon¬ 
naissance. 

During the approach march systematic reconnaissance is conducted in the zone 
of action of each front line unit, by scouts and small patrols. They locate and 
investigate all danger areas, and maintain the proper direction and rate of advance. 
This procedure provides for the security of the advancing troops and furnishes 
necessary information concerning the terrain and the enemy when he is encountered. 

Upon gaining contact with the enemy the scouts and patrols reconnoiter his posi¬ 
tions, draw his fire, seize advantageous fire positions for the troops which are 
following, and designate the targets they have located. (See Scouting.) 

During both the approach march and the fire fight all front line units place small 
patrols in the maneuver intervals between themselves and adjacent units. The 
functions of these patrols are: 

i. To maintain contact with adjacent units. 


64 


PATROLING 


2. To guard the flanks of their own units, if exposed, by driving back small 
parties of the enemy attempting to approach from the flank or penetrate the intervals, 
and by delaying and giving warning of the approach of larger bodies. 

3. To facilitate the progress of their units by oblique or enfilade fire against 
enemy resistance which is delaying the advance. 

The size of these flank patrols varies from the scout pairs of a platoon to complete 
tactical units, platoons or even companies, guarding the flanks of the larger 
organizations. 

Flank combat patrols usually operate slightly in rear of the assault or leading 
echelon of the unit which sends them out. 

Defense. During the occupation and preparation of a defensive position patrols 
are sent to the front to give warning of the enemy’s approach and to gain contact 
with him if he be not too distant. 

When the opposing forces are in close contact, patrols are utilized to harass the 
enemy, to oppose his reconnaissance, to locate his works and outguards, to execute 
small raids for the capture of prisoners and documents and the destruction of works 
and armament. 

Withdrawal. During a withdrawal at night or when not under fire, patrols may 
be left in position to prevent the enemy’s patrols from gaining information of the 
movement, and to delay pursuit by compelling the enemy to deploy and exercise 
caution in his advance. 

Summary. From this brief survey it will be noted that patrols are continuously 
employed for the purposes of information and security during all the tactical opera¬ 
tions of combatant units, and even by units which are stationary. It will also be 
noted that to obtain necessary information it is usually necessary to gain contact 
with the enemy and that such contact is also the chief element of security. 

To gain contact with the enemy, to obtain necessary information, and to escape 
with information gained, evidently requires a higher degree of skill and more train¬ 
ing than maintaining contact between units or reconnoitering terrain. It is on this 
requirement that training in patroling should be based. The ideal patrol would 
evidently be one consisting entirely of well-trained scouts. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is a patrol? 

2. What are the two principal purposes for which patrols are employed? 

3. Under what conditions do information patrols seek combat with the enemy? 

4. Mention the various classes of patrols. 

5. What are strategic and what are tactical patrols and how do their operations 
differ? 

6. What is the relation between security and information? May the same patrol 
perform both duties? 

7. What patrols are employed by an advance guard, and for what purposes ? 

8. What patrols are employed by an outpost, and for what purposes? 

9. How are patrols employed during the approach march into combat ? 

10. How are patrols employed by a front line unit in attack? 

11. What are the functions of patrols in the maneuver intervals between front 
line units in the attack ? What are such patrols called ? 

12. How are patrols employed in a defensive position? 

13. How are patrols employed in withdrawal? 

CHAPTER XI. 

DAY PATROLING. 

Responsibilities of commanders. The decision as to when patrols are required, 
how many should be sent, what should be the strength and composition of each, and 
the orders to be given to the patrol leaders, are functions of the commanders who 
send out patrols, and are not strictly within the scope of this course, which has to 


STRENGTH OF DAY PATROLS 65 

do with the leadership of patrols, and the conduct of their members. However, a 

brief resume of these matters will enable the patrol leader better to interpret and 
carry out his orders. 

A commander must have clearly in mind the purpose for which he sends out his 
patrols in order to determine the number to be sent the strength and composition of 
each, and the mission to be assigned it. For important patrols he will often select 
the leaders and give them his orders in person. 


Number of Patrols Required. 

Every detachment weakens an organization and unnecessary detachments are to 
be avoided. This rule applies to patrols. The commander should send out the 
number of patrols necessary to gain the desired information or provide requisite 
security, and no more. The duty is arduous and rapidly wears out the men engaged 
on it, especially by night. 

Radius of action of a patrol. In sending out a dismounted patrol it is necessary 
to consider the distance to be traveled as compared to the time available. The 
marching rate of infantry, including halts, is 2\ miles per hour. As a patrol must 
halt frequently for observation it can seldom equal this rate. In the near presence of 
the enemy when frequent halts or crawling and creeping are necessary, the rate may 
be very much less than the marching rate. In broken country or at night the rate 
of travel of a patrol may be a mile an hour, or even less. The return trip can usually 
be made at a greater rate. At best, under very favorable conditions, the rate can 
seldom exceed 2 miles per hour, and will often be not over half of this. 

Strength. 

The strength of a patrol is determined by its mission and the situation which 
confronts it, and may vary from two or three men to a company. Where the pur¬ 
pose is to seek information, the smaller it is, the better chance it has of getting through 
without being seen; but on the other hand, the information is of no value unless 
sent back to the officer who sent out the patrol. Therefore enough men must be 
detailed to bring back the number of messages to be sent, and not reduce the 
strength of the patrol below two. (Carrier pigeons are used when practicable.) 
In friendly country, one messenger will probably be sufficient for each message; but 
if in hostile country, it will be -better to send two. Therefore, in hostile territory 
patrols will have to be stronger than in friendly country. If hostile patrols are 
likely to be met and have to be driven off, the patrols must be strong enough for 
this purpose. 

The following additional matters should be taken into consideration: Distance 
to which patrol is sent; time it is to remain out; probable resistance by the enemy; 
nature of the terrain as affecting concealment; whether prisoners are wanted; etc. 

For a reconnoitering foot patrol, less than 5 men is usually too few to allow for 
sending back messengers and more than 10 makes concealment and control difficult. 

The foregoing pertains to information patrols. Combat patrols are usually pro¬ 
portionate to the size of the unit which sends them out, and may be made large 
enough, to offer considerable resistance, in which case they are virtually covering 
detachments. For example to provide flank protection a platoon in a general line of 
battle may employ only a runner observing to each flank, or if the exposure be great 
or the interval on the flank wide, 2 scouts or a half squad. A company may employ 
a half squad or a squad ; a battalion, a section or a platoon ; a regiment, a platoon or a 
company. 

A large body, such as a company, detailed as a patrol, constitutes a central resisting 
detachment and sends out smaller patrols, both to accomplish its mission and to 
provide for its own security while so doing. 


66 


PATROLING 


Composition. 

We have seen that the ideal patrol would be one composed entirely of scouts, 
led by an experienced officer. Important reconnoitering patrols are often composed 
of selected men led by selected officers. 

When a considerable number of patrols is to be sent out it will usually be im¬ 
practicable to specially select all the men who are to compose them, as this would 
result in disrupting tactical units, for example depriving a platoon of all of its 
scouts at a time when they were needed. 

Accordingly in organizing flank patrols, both on the march and in combat, outpost 
patrols, and in general all routine patrols as distinguished from special patrols with 
important missions, it is customary to respect the integrity of tactical units. For 
example, suppose that a patrol of 6 men is required for the point of an advance 
guard. Instead of selecting 6 men from the leading battalion or company it would 
be usual to take an entire squad from the platoon forming the advance party. 
Although only 6 men are actually required the entire squad is used in order to keep 
it intact. If two flank patrols of 3 or 4 men are needed they would be composed 
of the two halves of a squad, one under the corporal, the other under the second 
in command. 

Leader. The leader of an important patrol should, when practicable, be selected 
because of his qualifications to accomplish the desired mission. One man might do 
well with a combat patrol and be a failure with a reconnoitering patrol. The charac¬ 
ter of the leader selected for the patrol depends upon the nature and the importance 
of the work in hand. 

For patroling between the groups or along the line of an outpost, or for patrols 
sent out from a covering detachment, the average trained soldier will make a satis¬ 
factory leader. 

For a patrol sent out to gain important information, the leader is usually specially 
selected, and it is well, if possible, to send an officer. He must be able to cover large 
areas with few men, estimate the strength of hostile forces, report intelligently as 
to their dispositions, read indications, and judge as to the importance of the informa¬ 
tion gained. He should also be able to read maps and to write clear and intelli¬ 
gent messages. In a foreign country the leader, or at least one member of his 
patrol should be able to speak the language. 

1 

Orders to the Patrol Leader. 

The orders to the patrol leader are usually given verbally by the officer sending 
out the patrol. They should be clear and explicit as to what is desired, but the 
patrol leader must not be hampered with details. In other words he should be told 
exactly what he is to do, but not how to do it, as the situations which he will 
encounter cannot be foreseen, and his mission must be his guide. 

Generally a patrol should have a single definite mission. If required to do a 
number of things these are almost certain to conflict, the patrol leader will become 
confused and may fail to accomplish any of his missions. For example a patrol 
should not be sent to a flank, “To provide security for our flank and to ascertain 
whether the enemy is at (such place).” To provide security the patrol might have to 
go to quite a different locality than that at which it would seek information. In 
seeking information it should avoid combat with the enemy, whereas in providing 
security it should fire on the enemy whenever he is seen. The two missions are not 
only too much for one small patrol but their requirements are in conflict. If there are 
several distinct missions to be performed a separate patrol should be provided 
for each. 

In the case of an information or reconnoitering patrol sent out on an independent 
mission the information and instructions given to the leader should include the 
following: 

1. Information of the enemy and friendly supporting troops. 

2. Plan of the commander sending out the patrol. 

3. Mission of the patrol—explain very carefully exactly what is wanted. 


PLANS OF PATROL LEADER 


67 


4. Size of the patrol and where men are to be obtained. 

5. Furnish patrol leader with a map if he has not one already. 

6. General route of patrol and hour of departure. 

7. Limits of the country it is to observe, and location of other friendly patrols. 

8. Time patrol is to return, and if necessary latest hour by which first message 

should be back. s 

9 - When and where messages are to be sent. Whether or not negative messages 
are wanted. 

10. Location of Blue (friendly) outposts. 

11. Contemplated movements of the command during patrol’s absence, if any. 

12. Cause patrol leader to set his watch with commander’s. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Who determines the number, strength and composition of patrols? 

2. What guides the commander in determining the number and strength of 
patrols ? 

3. Why should an excessive number of patrols be avoided? 

4. What determines the strength of a patrol ? 

5. What is the usual size of a reconnoitering foot patrol, and why? 

6 . Under what conditions would the maximum strength for such a patrol be 
advisable ? 

7. How is the strength of a combat patrol determined ? 

8. What would be an ideal composition for a patrol ? 

9. When a considerable number of patrols is being sent out how are they 
actually composed ? 

10. What should be the composition of an important reconnoitering patrol with 
a special and difficult mission ? 

11. What is meant by “ the integrity of tactical units ” and how does it apply to 
the organization of routine patrols? Give an example. 

12. What should be the qualifications of a patrol leader? 

13. What is the radius of action of a patrol, and what conditions affect it? 

14. What should be included in and what omitted from the orders given a patrol 
leader? Give the items of a proper order. 

15. What kind of a mission should be given to a patrol? Why? 

CHAPTER XII. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 

PLAN OF THE PATROL LEADER. 

Having received his orders the patrol leader’s first duty is to prepare his plan 
for carrying them out. 

Such plan may vary from the hasty decision of the leader of a half squad sent out 
as a flank patrol from the advance party, to the detailed and often carefully rehearsed 
arrangements for a night raid in a trench area. The patrol leader may have several 
hours or he may have but a minute or so in which to formulate his plans and complete 
his preliminary arrangements. In any case, however, the procedure is much the 
same and governed by the same principles. The amount of detail in the plans will 
vary with the situation and the time available. 

Plans laid in advance must necessarily be tentative, as a rule. It is impossible to 
foresee everything that may happen, especially everything that the enemy may do. 
Unexpected obstacles or unexpected facilities may be encountered. Plans must ac¬ 
cordingly be modified to meet actual conditions, but it will seldom be either wise 
or necessary to entirely abandon a well laid plan. 

Plans and orders. While the plans of the leader usually look well into the future 
and may even, in a general way at least, cover the entire operation of the patrol, 
the same is not true of the orders which the leader gives to his subordinates. His 
orders are generally given for immediate execution. Even though it be unnecessary 


68 


PATROLING 


to modify his plans, details of execution can seldom be foreseen. The leader of a 
small patrol is at all times with his men and can immediately control or direct their 
actions. He gives the necessary orders from time to time as the patrol progresses. 
He tells his men, and especially his second in command, the mission of the patrol 
and so much of his plans for the future as is necessary to insure their intelligent 
co-operation. 

The Mission. 

The first step in the leader’s plan is to properly interpret and fully understand 
his mission. His mission, or what he is required to accomplish, must be his guiding 
star especially in unexpected situations not contemplated either in the orders he 
has received or in his own preliminary plans. He must, in emergency, seek the best 
alternative means to achieve his mission, and never abandon it while there is any 
hope of success. His plan at any time is in fact, merely the best apparent means 
of achieving his fixed mission. 

The patrol leader must put his mission into his own words. For example: “ I am 
to move 3 miles east on the Baltimore Pike and look for signs of the enemy.” 

It might be supposed that there was no possibility of misunderstanding or for¬ 
getting so simple and definite a mission. But let us suppose that after proceeding 
for one mile the patrol leader meets a friendly farmer who says: “There is no 
enemy on or near this road between here and my place, which is io miles east.” The 
patrol leader says to himself: “ That is what I wanted to know.” And he returns 
at once to his commander. When he makes his report his commander severely cen¬ 
sures him for accepting the word of an unknown man instead of finding out the 
facts for himself, as he was ordered to do. The patrol leader has failed to carry 
out his mission. 

Or suppose that the farmer informed the patrol leader: “ There are no troops 
on this road, but about two hours ago I saw a number of the enemy at X—” (naming 
a town some 2 miles north of the road on which the patrol is moving). The patrol 
leader decides to verify this important information. He leaves the route on which 
he was ordered to move for 3 miles and visits the town of X—, where he finds the 
enemy. Again the patrol leader has failed in his mission and proven himself unre¬ 
liable or improperly trained. Had the commander desired information as to the 
enemy at X—, he would have instructed the patrol to go there or have sent another 
patrol. In this latter case he should of course have informed the patrol leader as 
to other patrols in his vicinity. 

If the commander cannot depend on his patrols he cannot gain the information 
he needs. It is for him to decide and to order the mission of each patrol, and it is 
the duty of the patrol leader to carry out his assigned mission and not to be led 
astray or diverted by anything that may happen. 

Had the information in this case been of sufficient importance, and had the patrol 
leader not been informed that another patrol would go to X—, he should have sent 
back a message to his commander, giving the information and the source thereof 
after which he should have continued on his own mission. 

In carrying out his mission the patrol leader should of course report, either by 
messenger or upon his return, any other information he may pick up. 

Route. 

The next step in the patrol leader’s plan is to select the route by which he will 
move. 

In some cases the route may be prescribed in his orders as: “ Move east along 
the X-Y road.” Even in this case, however, the patrol leader may properly decide 
not to move on the road mentioned, at all times. There may be certain parallel 
routes by which he would be less apt to be seen by the enemy, while still able to keep 
the main route under observation. Hostile patrols who might block his progress are 
usually most apt to be encountered on the main routes. 


SELECTION OF THE ROUTE 


69 


Often no definite route will be assigned, the patrol being ordered simply to proceed 
to certain definite localities or to reconnoiter in a certain direction or within a 
certain sector or zone of the terrain. In such cases the selection of the exact route 
to be followed is left to the judgment of the patrol leader. 

In making his decision as to his route the leader will be guided by what he 
knows of: 

1. His mission. 

2. The enemy. 

3. Friendly troops. 

4. The terrain. 

The Enemy. 

As to the enemy the leader will desire to avoid any contact with him which might 
result in his being prevented from accomplishing his mission. If he has been 
ordered to “ look for signs of the enemy ” he will wish to investigate all localities on 
his general route which might be occupied by hostile troops. If he has been ordered 
to proceed to a certain definite locality and there look for signs of the enemy, he 
will give as wide a berth as practicable to all intermediate points which might be 
occupied. In any event he will be careful to keep concealed in passing or investi¬ 
gating all suspicious localities. 


Friendly Troops. 

His knowledge of the friendly troops in the vicinity will also influence the choice 
of route. For example if the patrol leader has been told that another patrol will move 
by a certain definite route he will usually select a different route for his own move¬ 
ment. The position of the friendly outposts will influence the choice of route. For 
example: Some portion of the easiest practicable route may be plainly visible from 
a certain hill. If the leader knows that this hill is occupied by friendly troops he 
will have no need to fear enemy observation. 

The Terrain. 

The terrain, taken in connection with his mission and his knowledge of the enemy, 
will chiefly determine the patrol leader’s route. His mission and knowledge of the 
enemy will enable him to decide what localities he should visit in order to carry out 
his mission. Other things being equal, he moves by the shortest route from one 
locality to the next. The shortest route will of course be a straight line between 
the two localities. Sometimes the patrol may move on such a line, as for example in 
a wood or on a trackless plain. But in average terrain a straight line, while shortest 
in distance would seldom be so when measured in time required to travel it. So 
the patrol leader looks for actual, practicable routes of travel which are most direct 
or nearest to a straight line. 

But it is also necessary that the route should afford concealment, both from the 
enemy and, especially in hostile territory, from inhabitants who might give informa¬ 
tion to the enemy of the patrol’s movement. A route which is little traveled is less 
apt to be observed than a more important route, and may often be preferred for this 
reason. Features favorable to concealment, such as woods and ravines, should be 
utilized. It will usually be well worth while to increase the distance to be traveled 
for the sake of better concealment. It is usually advisable to skirt the woods when 
practicable, that is to move just inside the edge nearest the enemy, which permits 
a view of the open country beyond while still affording concealment. 

A roundabout route consumes time, and is usually more difficult to identify and 
to move over than the customary routes of travel. The necessity for moving 
promptly or in the least possible time, must be balanced against the need for con¬ 
cealment. If the patrol has a considerable distance to travel before it is likely that 
it will come under hostile observation it may often use the most direct usually 
traveled route for the early portion of its journey, abandoning this route for one 
affording better concealment as it approaches the enemy. 


70 


PATROLING 


A good map will usually furnish the patrol leader who is able to read it, with 
most of the information necessary to enable him to intelligently select his route. 
This may often be supplemented by an examination of the terrain from some favor¬ 
able elevated point, or consultation with some person who is familiar with the 
country to be traversed. 

If several apparently good routes are available the patrol leader weighs the 
advantages and disadvantages of each in making his selection. 

While it is very desirable to plan his movements in advance as far as possible, the 
exact route for each “ bound ” during his progress will be determined on the ground 
itself. 

The selection of routes for night movement has been discussed under the subject 
of Scouting. 

Rendezvous points. The leader should note on his map any localities which are 
favorable for rendezvous or assembly points in case the patrol is defeated and 
scattered by a larger hostile force, or in any other manner. In order that the patrol 
should be reassembled as promptly as possible it is necessary that at each stage of 
its progress a rendezvous at some locality in rear be selected and carefully desig¬ 
nated to all members of the patrol. The leader selects a number of such points 
from his map, if practicable, and verifies their suitability upon the ground. They 
are pointed out to his subordinates. Of course but one rendezvous should be desig¬ 
nated at a time. 

These rendezvous or assembly points should be localities which are easily identi¬ 
fied and reached on the terrain but they should also afford concealment and cover, 
as well as a covered approach. Accordingly they should usually be near but not at 
some conspicuous feature of the terrain, for example: “ In the woods 300 yds. 
south of crossroads X —,” “ In the wooded ravine east of the village of Y —,” etc. 

If the patrol is scattered its members proceed individually to the locality 
designated. 

Route of return. If there are hostile troops in the locality and a possibility of 
enemy patrols or other organizations being encountered during the return to the 
friendly lines, it will often be advisable for a patrol to return by a different route 
from that by which it went out. In planning his operations the patrol leader should 
select possible alternative routes for his return journey. 


Advance by Bounds. 

A patrol advances by bounds in much the same manner, and for the same reasons 
as an individual scout. (See Scouting.) 

The limits of a patrol’s bounds in the advance by bounds, may be determined by: 

(a) A change in direction, making it necessary to halt and determine a new 
direction, select new guiding points, etc. 

(b) Arrival at some important landmark, enabling the leader to verify his posi¬ 
tion and lay the course of his next bound. 

(c) The beginning or end of a stretch where the patrol is greatly exposed to view, 
as leaving or entering a wood, leaving a ridge which has afforded concealment, etc! 

(d) A change in the nature of the terrain, necessitating a change in the forma¬ 
tion of the patrol. 

(e) Arrival at a point favorable for observation, where it is advisable to halt and 
view the terrain before proceeding. 

(f) Encounter with the enemy. If he is seen or his presence suspected, the 
patrol should halt, take cover, and observe before proceeding. 

(g) Arrival in the vicinity of some dangerous locality which should be recon- 
noitered before the patrol passes through or beyond it. 

Halts should always be made in localities affording concealment and if oossible 
favorable for observation. 


SELECTION OF THE ROUTE 


71 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What determines the amount of detail included in a patrol leader’s plan? 

2. Why must plans be tentative or subject to change? 

3. Do the orders of a patrol leader cover all details of his plan? Why? 

4. What is the mission of the patrol leader? 

5. Why is the mission important, and how does it influence the leader’s plan? 

6. Why is it important for the patrol leader to put his mission into definite 
words ? 

7. What are the considerations which guide the patrol leader in selecting his 
route ? 

8. What influence has his knowledge of the enemy on the selection of a route? 

9. How do friendly troops affect the selection of a route? 

10. How does the terrain affect the selection of a route? 

11. What are the advantages and disadvantages of using the main routes of 
travel ? To what extent are they used ? 

12. How does the requirement of concealment influence the choice of route? 

13. If several routes are available how does the patrol leader decide which one 
to use? 

14. What are rendezvous points and why are they necessary? 

15. What are the requirements for a rendezvous point? 

16. Under what conditions is it advisable to return by a different route? 

17. Why does a patrol use the method of advance by bounds? 

18. What determines the limits of bounds? 

CHAPTER XIII. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 

SELECTION OF A ROUTE FROM THE MAP. 

The following example indicates the manner in which the patrol leaders selects 
his route by the aid of a good map. (See Plate 42.) 

Situation. The patrol is at A, and is ordered to proceed to B, ascertain and report 
upon the condition of the railroad bridge over Rock River. The country is hostile. 
Enemy patrols and observers have been seen at various places in the locality. The 
patrol leader believes that caution is necessary. He desires to proceed to B by the 
shortest route that will provide reasonable concealment. 

Picking the route. The patrol leader draws on the map a pencil line from A to B. 
This is the shortest line between the two points, but such a line is seldom the best 
route. In this case the line passes close to the village of Reedville. Even if this 
village were not occupied by the hostile troops the patrol would almost certainly be 
noted by the inhabitants, who would probably report its presence to the enemy. 
Also this line passes through the pond, and after leaving the woods east of the 
pond it is greatly exposed to view from the surrounding high ground until it reaches 
B. Almost the entire route would be visible from the high ground or buildings at R, 
which are very apt to be occupied by the enemy. If there were any hostile troops 
about, the patrol would almost certainly be seen. 

The patrol leader notes that he can move under cover of the woods along Turtle 
Creek, east of A, downstream to the point C. Here he is much closer to the woods 
to the east (south of the pond) which he must reach. He also judges from the map 
that in moving from C to these woods, on the line CD, he will be out of sight of 
any observers in Reedville or near R, even if such observers are on the roofs of 
the buildings. He may be visible from the church, if it has a spire. The patrol 
leader decides that he will verify all this by personal observation from C after he 
is there, and before he crosses the open ground. 

In crossing this open ground he will certainly be visible to any enemy on the 
high ground at P or in the woods at S or Z, or any point in between. Before leaving 
C he plans to very carefully search the high ground around P and the edge of the 

SPM -5 


72 


PATROLING 













Plate 42. —Selection of Patrol Route from a Map. 



























SELECTING A ROUTE FROM THE MAP 


73 


woods, SZ. He cannot go any farther down the creek (below C ) as this would 
take him too much out of his way. He must cross the open space to gain the woods 
to the east, and he believes the line CD is the most favorable route. 

The leader notes that if he proceeds through the woods ( SZD ) to D he can from 
there see the bridge, the line of the railroad, the south edge of the woods along 
Crystal Creek, the eastern slope of the ridge near P, and the high ground across 
Rock River. He will carefully search all of this terrain for signs of the enemy. 

Having made his observations from D the leader then plans to proceed through 
the woods to the edge of Crystal Pond. Here he believes he can see Reedville, 
the high ground at R, and the entire eastern slope of the ridge R. If necessary 
he will climb a tree to get a better view. Having completed his observations at this 
point he will have seen practically all of the terrain from which he might be 
observed by the enemy. 

Leaving the pond the patrol leader plans to continue in the woods down Crystal 
Creek to E, near where the creek enters the river. Here he will be only 400 yds. 
from the bridge. But that is too far for a thorough examination, and he must con¬ 
tinue to B. 

The map shows no trees along the river. But the patrol leader believes that the 
river bank will probably afford him some cover. Arrived at E he will study it care¬ 
fully, look for signs of the enemy along the river and at the bridge, and select on 
the ground the best route from E to B. 

Bounds of advance. The leader now decides on the “ bounds ” to be made in 
passing over this tentative route. His first bound will be from A to where the road 
from Reedville crosses the creek. He will look for signs of the enemy on this 
road before allowing his patrol to cross it. His next bound will be to C, where he 
will again halt and observe. From C he will cross the open ground to the woods 
{SZ) as rapidly as possible. Arrived at the edge ( SZ ) he will again halt and 
observe. His next bound will be to D, thence to the pond, thence to E, and 
finally to B. 



74 


PATROLING 


Preparation of sketch. Unless he can carry the map with him the patrol leader 
will make from it a sketch, showing his selected route, with magnetic azimuths and 
distances, and the important features of the terrain in outline. Such a sketch may 
be traced from the map, and would appear as in Plate 43. From A to C he will 
follow Turtle Creek. From C to D he must proceed by compass bearing (or 
azimuth) to reach D. Thereafter he will be guided by the pond, Crystal Creek and 
Rock River. 


Map Reading. 

All distances may be scaled (measured) from the map. To determine the 
magnetic azimuth of the line CD, the patrol leader draws through C a line parallel 
to the magnetic meridian as shown on the map (the half arrow). He then places 
his compass with its center at C (on the map) and the pointing line of the compass 
along the magnetic meridian he has drawn through C. (Plates 42 and 43.) He 
next rotates map and compass together until the arrow point or zero of the compass 
card is at the index mark of the pointing line. The map is now oriented. He now 
rotates the compass about C as a center (without disturbing the map) until the 
pointing line or sights coincide with the line CD, and reads the azimuth of this 
line at the index mark on the case, under the sighting line. (See Scouting.) 

From the distances as scaled from the map the patrol leader can determine 
approximately the time required for his journey, and can check his position at any 
time if in the woods where he can see no landmarks. 

From the foregoing example we see that a patrol leader may intelligently select 
his route in advance, if he is provided with a good map. But to do so he must be 
able to read a map. He must understand what contours are, and be able to interpret 
the ground forms which the contours represent. 

Contours. A contour is a line on the map connecting all points which on the 
ground have the same elevation. The numbers shown on the contours represent 
their constant elevation in feet. (See Plate 42.) 

Visibility problems. An important problem which a patrol leader is often called 
upon to solve from his map is whether a certain point is visible from some other 
point. In the example just given the patrol leader decided that the ground near C 
was not visible from Reedville. How did he do this? 

Profiles. To solve this problem one must make, either in his mind or upon a piece 
of paper, what is called a profile. Plates 44 and 45 show what is meant by a profile, 
and how it is made by means of the contours of the map. When the profile is made 
it is possible to determine the mutual visibility or invisibility of any two points on 
the profile. Thus in Fig. 2, Plate 44, is y visible from D ? Yes, because the straight 
line Dy, (Fig. 2) representing the line of sight, does not cut the ground at any 
point. Is n visible from D? No, because the straight line from D to n would pass 
through the ground below x. 

To illustrate what is meant by a mental profile, let us ask again, is y visible from 
D? (Fig. 2, Plate 44.) The elevation of D as shown by the contours is 960 ft. 
That of y is 845 ft., or 115 ft. lower. From D towards y the ground at first goes 
rapidly down, but it rises again at x. Does the ground at x interfere with view? 
The point x is very roughly half the distance from D to y. Its height as shown by 
the contours, is about 870 ft. The line of sight drops uniformly from 960 ft. at D 
to 845 ft. at y. Half way between it will have dropped half the difference or 60 ft. 
(about) and will be at an elevation of 960 — 60 = 900 ft. near x. Hence it is well 
above the ground near x, which is only 870 ft. high, and hence the ground does not 
interfere with view. Similarly it may be determined that the high ground near C 
does not interfere with the view. The expert map reader solves such problems as 
these by a quick inspection of the map without any conscious mental calculation. 

If the decision as to visibility is a close one it may be necessary to construct a 
profile. A profile is a line or cross-section cut from the ground by a vertical plane. 

Use of rubber band in solving visibility problems. The most rapid method of 
solving visibility problems (which cannot be solved mentally) is by the use of a 


CONSTRUCTION OF A PROFILE 


75 



Plate 44.—Construction of a Profile. 

(The vertical scale of the profile is greatly exaggerated.) 



































































































76 


PATROLING 


graduated rubber band. The band should be of red rubber with black graduations 
at any convenient interval, the numbers on the band being the same as those of the 
contours of the map with which it is to be used. 

Referring now to Plate 45, is B visible from A? By inspection we note that the 
critical points which may interfere with view are the high points X and Y. The 
elevation of A is 70 and of B 20. Stretch the rubber band from A to B so that the 



Plate 45.— Use of Rubber Band in the Solution of Visibility Problems. 


70 mark is at A and the 20 at B. Then the reading on the band at any point will 
be the height of the line of sight at that point. At Y it is more than 30 ft. and at X 
more than 40 ft. Hence at both these points it is higher than the ground, as shown 
by the contours. Hence A and B are mutually visible, each from each. 

If the observer is standing, so that his eye is some 5 ft. above ground, or if there 
are trees or buildings on the line of sight, these facts must be taken into consideration. 

It is not the function of this course to teach map reading, which is thoroughly 
covered in the course in Map Reading and Military Sketching. The foregoing 
examples are given to show that a competent patrol leader must be able to read a 
map, and to indicate the nature and extent of the information he may obtain from 
a map if he is able to read it readily. 

Summary of Information Derived from a Map. 

To summarize the preceding, the patrol leader may obtain from a good map the 
following essential information concerning his route: 

(a) The best covered route to his destination. 






















EQUIPMENT OF TPIE PATROL 77 

(b) The directions and distances on each portion of the route. The total distance 
and general direction. 

(c) The number of bounds necessary, and the limits of each. 

(d) The nature of the terrain to be traversed. 

(e) The important land marks which may be used as guides. 

(f) The dangerous localities, or places from which the patrol may be observed 
or fired upon by the enemy, and how to evade them. 

(g) The favorable points for observation en route. 

(h) Visibility problems. 

The skilled map reader can solve all these problems in a very short time. The 
map conveys almost unconsciously to his mind a picture of the terrain over which 
he must pass. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Assume a simple situation in which a patrol is required to go from a point A 
to a point B on a certain mission. Select the best route from the map, and give 
reasons for the choice. 

2. Having selected a route, draw the sketch which the patrol leader would pre¬ 
pare if unable to carry the map with him. 

3. Why is it essential that a patrol leader be able to read a map? 

4. What are contours ? What do they portray ? 

5. What are “ visibility problems ” ? Why are they important in the operations 
of a patrol ? How are they solved ? 

6. What is a profile ? How is it used ? 

7. Explain and demonstrate the construction of a profile. 

8. What is a mental profile ? Demonstrate on a map. 

9. Demonstrate the use of a rubber band in solving visibility problems. 

10. What are the items of information as to his route which a patrol leader may 
obtain from a good map? 


CHAPTER XIV. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 

Equipment of the Patrol. 

The next step in the plan of the patrol leader is to decide upon the equipment of 
his patrol. The less weight the men carry the more freely they will move. Accord¬ 
ingly the equipment should be held to the minimum that is actually required for 
the duty. 

As an infantry patrol will seldom be out more than 12 hours as a maximum, 
packs may usually be left behind. Canteens should be carried and if the patrol 
is to be out over 6 or 8 hours a cooked meal may be provided. The usual weapons 
will ordinarily be sufficient. If combat is unlikely bayonets and scabbards may be 
discarded, especially any that have a tendency to rattle. Steel helmets should not 
be worn. 

If the patrol is operating in a trench area bayonets will be needed and it will 
also be advisable to carry a few grenades. 

Equipment of the leader. The equipment of the leader is of great importance. 
For a reconnoitering patrol on an independent mission it should include the 
following: (in addition to equipment carried by other members of the patrol) : 

1. Compass. 4- Map or sketch 

2. Watch. 5 - Wire cutters. 

3. Field glasses. 6. Pad or notebook and pencils. 


Organization and Formations. 

The organization and formation of a patrol is similar to that of any other body 
of troops on the march. It includes a main body, an advance guard, flank guards 
and rear guard. In view of the small size and often exposed position of the patrol 


78 


PATROLING 


all of these elements may be included. The covering detachments (advance rear 
and flank guards) may be represented by only one man each, but their duties are 
not thereby affected. 

Duties of various elements. The main body or central nucleus of the patrol 
includes men for combat (in case of encounter with the enemy), for sending mes¬ 
sages, and for replacing other elements of the patrol in case of casualties. 

The men assigned as advance, flank and rear guards, are charged with the duty 
of observing to the front, to a flank or to the rear. One man or one group observes 
in each direction. 

The rearmost man of the patrol is called the “ getaway man.” He is charged 
with the additional particular duty of escaping and conveying information to the 
rear in case the patrol is surprised and captured or dispersed. In case of combat 
with a hostile patrol he takes no part in it. 

Each of these individuals is given a single definite duty, to observe in a given 
direction and report anything of importance that he sees. 

The advance guard or point always precedes the patrol and the rear guard or 
getaway man follows it. The flank observers may be placed on the flank and usually 
would be if the patrol were moving across country. But if the patrol is marching on 
the road its progress would be delayed by flankers moving across country, or else 
the flankers would be greatly fatigued in the effort to keep pace with the patrol. 
In this case the men charged with observation to the flank may remain on the road 
with the rest of the patrol, usually next in rear of the point. Their duties remain 
unchanged. 

These observers are the eyes of the patrol leader. The leader himself constantly 
observes the terrain in all directions. But as he cannot watch the entire horizon at 
the same time, and as he has other duties to perform, such as giving orders, con¬ 
sulting his map, taking compass azimuths, making notes, etc., it is necessary that 
other men be charged with unremitting observation in various directions. 

The leader goes wherever his presence may be necessary. Usually he will be near 
the center of his patrol or a little in advance thereof. 

One member of the patrol is designated as second in command. 

The leader selects from the members of his patrol the men to perform the duties 
of observation and “ getaway.” 

The. combat members of the patrol including automatic riflemen and rifle grena¬ 
diers, if any, are in the center of the patrol, near the leader and under his control. 
They take advantage of available cover to keep concealed as well as possible. The 
men for messenger duty, who are also available for combat as long as they are 
with the patrol, are also near the leader. 

Distances and intervals. A patrol should never move in a bunch, that is, with 
the men close together. Observation will be more effective if the point is out in 
front and the flankers out to the flank. Moreover, the greater the distance over 
which the patrol is spread the less its vulnerability to hostile fire and the less the 
probability of all members being captured in case of an ambush. On the other 
hand the distances separating the members of the patrol must not be so great that 
they cannot easily communicate with each other or be easily controlled by the voice 
or signal of the leader. Since it is essential that one man, the leader, should per¬ 
sonally, command the entire patrol, it will be evident that the distances separating 
the various elements should not be much greater in a patrol of 12 men, for example, 
than in one of half that number. These distances will vary with the terrain the 
proximity of the enemy, the visibility (light or darkness). At night, or in Very 
close country, they are less than in open country in daylight. Ordinarily in the day¬ 
time a patrol of 8 or 10 men will cover a road space of not less than 100 yds or more 
than 250 yds., averaging 150 to 200 (See Plate 66). In a very small patrol of 
course the total dispersion would be less, for example 30 to 50 yds. and up. In a 
dense wood or at night distances are greatly reduced. At night the entire patrol 
may be within a radius of 5 yds. from the leader, or within whispering distance. 



ARM SIGNALS 


79 


The distances separating the members of the patrol should be such as to permit 
of observation, reduce vulnerability, permit intercommunication and control, and 
favor the escape of at least one man in case of attack by the enemy. If the mem¬ 
bers be too close together they can see no more than one man, and would be 
vulnerable to attack. If too widely dispersed they are more apt to be observed by 
the enemy, and intercommunication and control are difficult. The distances should 
be such as to insure visual and ordinarily easy verbal communication between adja¬ 
cent men, and the leader should occupy a position from which he can easily control 
the conduct of his men. The patrol should never be separated for more than a very 
short period. Especially for a small patrol advancing in single file, cover for one 
usually means cover for all. As an approximate rule it may be stated that the dis¬ 
tances between adjacent members will usually vary from about io to about 30 yards, 
depending on the terrain and time of day. 

The formation of any patrol, whatever its size, should provide for a point, 
flankers and get-away man. If a patrol consists of only two men one acts as a 
point, the other performs the functions of leader, right and left flankers and get¬ 
away man. 

Subject to these general considerations the actual formation of the patrol at any 
time will be dictated by its mission, the nature of the country, proximity of the 
enemy and time of day. The leader adapts his formations to the requirements of 
the situation, avoiding crowding on the one hand and undue dispersion on the other. 
The smaller the patrol the greater as a rule, will be the mistake of dispersing it. A 
patrol should not be subdivided into two or more smaller patrols. If more patrols 
are needed they should be sent out independently in the first place. 

Details of the organization and formation of a patrol in various situations are 
discussed hereinafter. The foregoing are the basic considerations which should 
guide the patrol leader in disposing his men. 

Signals. 

Signals are habitually employed by the patrol leader in controling the actions of 
his patrol and by the members in transmitting information to the leader. They are 
essential when the presence of the enemy makes spoken commands dangerous, and 
convenient when the members of the patrol are separated by the maximum distances. 

Arm signals are easily misunderstood, and accordingly all such signals should 
be simple and definite, and their number should be limited. 

The following simple signals are authorized for use by day patrols. They should 
be known to all infantry soldiers. See Plates 46 and 47, also Plate 33 (Scouting). 

Authorized Arm Signals. 

(1) FORWARD, (or BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK) ; (or TO THE 
REAR) ; Face and move in the direction of march; at the same time, extend the 
arm vertically to its full extent and lower it to the front (flank, rear) until horizontal. 

(2) HALT. Carry the hand to the shoulder, thrust hand upward and hold the 
arm vertically. 

(3) ENEMY IN SIGHT IN SMALL NUMBERS. Hold the rifle horizontally 
above the head. 

(4) ENEMY IN SIGHT IN FORCE. Same as preceding, raising and lower- 
the rifle several times. 

(5) HAVE IMPORTANT INFORMATION. Extend both arms laterally to 
full extent. 

(6) LIE DOWN (or TAKE COVER). Turn toward the patrol and raise the 
hand in front of the elbow, forearm horizontal; thrust the hand downward several 
times, palm toward the ground. 

(7) DOUBLE TIME, or RUSH. Carry the hand to the shoulder, rapidly 
thrust this hand upward to the full extent of the arm, and repeat several times. 


80 


PATROLING 


1 



Fig. i. 

Enemy in sight in small numbers. 





Fig. 4. 

Double time or rush. 


Plate 46 . 















ARM SIGNALS 



Fig. i. 

Change direction to the right. 


* 


• 




Fig. 3. 

As skirmishers. 



ready)? 



Fig. 5. 

Fix bayonets. 


81 


Plate 47. 

























82 


PATROLING 


(8) CHANGE DIRECTION. The hand on the side towards which the change 
of direction is to be made is carried across the body to the opposite shoulder, fore¬ 
arm horizontal; then swung in horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in new 
direction. 

(9) ASSEMBLE. Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and describe large 
horizontal circles. 

(10) AS SKIRMISHERS. Raise both arms laterally until horizontal. If nec¬ 
essary, lower the arm in the direction of march after completion of signal, as in 
forward march, etc. 

(n) ARE YOU READY? (or I AM READY). Raise the hand, fingers ex¬ 
tended and joined, palm towards the person addressed. 

(12) FIX BAYONETS. Simulate the movement of the right hand in fix 
bayonet. 

In addition to these regulation signals a limited number of private signals may be 
agreed upon. Examples of such signals are: 

REPORT TO ME. The ordinary beckon or signal COME HERE. 

PUT ON YOUR GAS MASKS. The leader raises his gas mask in sight of the 
members of the patrol, and puts it on. 

OBSERVE IN YOUR DIRECTION. The leader cups his hands and places 
them to his eyes as if using a binocular. 

In giving a signal the leader faces and looks toward the man to whom he is 
signaling. If the signal is intended for all the leader turns his head and includes 
all the men in his glance while giving the signal. 

Upon receiving a signal a man repeats it back to the leader to show that it is 
understood. 

Each member of the patrol should know his position when “ As skirmishers ” 
is signaled. 

Each man should occasionally look towards the leader for signals. 

Before starting out the leader should rehearse the signals to be used and make 
certain that all of his men fully understand them. 

Action of the Patrol Leader Before the Start. 

Having prepared his plans the leader selects the men for his patrol or assembles 
the men who have been detailed. He informs them of the duty for which they are 
detailed, the equipment to be carried, and the time and place of assembly for the 
start, unless this is to be made at once. 

He arranges for the issue of a cooked meal, ammunition and any special equip¬ 
ment, so far as necessary. 

Inspection of the patrol. The patrol being assembled for the start the leader 
carefully inspects it. He notes in particular the following: 

1. Whether all men are physically fit for duty. In the case of a mounted patrol 
he similarly inspects the horses. 

2. Whether each man is wearing the prescribed uniform and carrying the 
prescribed equipment, including filled canteens and a cooked meal, if ordered. 

3. Whether any man is carrying any unnecessary equipment. This he requires 
him to discard. 

4. Whether any equipment glistens or rattles unduly. Equipment which is 
defective in these particulars should be replaced. 

5. Whether any man is carrying any letters, maps or documents which might be 
of value to the enemy if captured. Any such should be discarded. It will often be 
advisable to remove any collar insignia which would enable the enemy, if he captures 
anybody, to identify the organization to which the patrol belongs. 

Orders of the patrol leader. Having satisfied himself that his men are in all 
respects ready for the duty, or having corrected any deficiencies, the leader explains 
in detail the mission of the patrol. He tells them what is known of the enemy and 
so much of his own plans as necessary to insure their intelligent co-operation. With 
the aid of his map or sketch the leader points out and describes the route of the 
patrol, and the important features along the route. 


CONDUCT OF A DAY PATROL 


83 


He designates a second in command, and assigns to each man his position and 
duties within the patrol. 

He explains where messages sent back by the patrol are to be delivered, and to 
whom. 

He rehearses with his men the signals to be employed. 

Reports made before starting. He reports to the officer sending out the patrol, 
informing him of the route he intends to follow, and the plans he has made. He 
leaves with the proper authority a list of the men composing the patrol as a means 
of checking casualties (missing). 

All of the foregoing precautions should be carried out in the case of an important 
reconnoitering patrol sent to a considerable distance on an important mission. Some 
of them would manifestly be unnecessary in the case of a small flank patrol which 
would seldom if ever be entirely out of sight of the body from which it was sent. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What considerations determine the equipment to be carried by a patrol? 

2. Should an infantry patrol carry food and water? 

3. Should packs be carried ? 

4. When should bayonets and grenades be taken ? 

5. What items should the equipment of the leader include? 

6. What is the fundamental rule which governs the organization and forma¬ 
tion of a patrol? Why? 

7. What is the function of the main body ? 

8. What are the duties of the point and flankers? 

9. What is the position of the “ getaway man/’ and what are his duties ? 

10. Does a patrol moving on a road ordinarily send out flankers? Why? 

11. What is the usual position of the leader? 

12. What is the usual position of automatic riflemen and men designated for 
messenger duty? 

13. Why should a patrol never move in a compact body? 

14. What determines the distances separating the various elements of a patrol? 

15. What are the usual limits of this separation? 

16. What is the danger of too great dispersion? 

17. Why are signals commonly employed by patrols? What kind of signals are 
used by day ? 

18. Why should the number of signals be limited? 

19. Demonstrate each of the authorized arm signals. 

20. How does the leader give his signals ? 

21. How are signals acknowledged? 

22. What details should be noted by the leader in inspecting his patrol before 
starting ? 

23. What orders and instructions does the leader give to his patrol before the 
start ? 

24. What reports does a patrol leader make before starting, and to whom? 

CHAPTER XV. 

DAY PATROLING (Continued). 

CONDUCT OF THE PATROL. 

While the conduct of the patrol will, of course, vary greatly with the situation, 
there are a number of fundamental principles which should govern its operations. 
These principles are nothing more than applied common sense. 

A patrol being a group of scouts the precautions as to individual movement 
which are applicable to the conduct of the scout are likewise applicable to the 
members of the patrol. These have been discussed under Scouting. 



IS TO RECON NO ITER THE TOWN 


84 


PATROLING 



O 

■*-> 

<V 

u 

<u 


in 


in 

% 

<v 


•o 

c 

rt 

<v 

> 

O 

E 


£ 

<D 


o 

£ 

-U ^ 
C co 
3 C 
O O 
PC ‘-M 

>■ o 

^ o, 

be <u 

c .g 

U 

C <*) 

w 4-* 

£? a 

« & 

O C 
*— • *—< 

CC u, 

d E 

I ~ 

OO « 

^•5 

W co 
H <D 

5 ’-s 

£ 5 

co 


<v 

*o 

ccS 

a> 

<D 

.C 

H 


c 

o 
• *-* 
- 4 -* 

aJ 

> 

u 

4 J 

CO 

o 


'O 

<u 

-*-> 

CTj 

.C 


O 

u. 

■*-< 

al 

O- 

<u 

.C 

H 
















































THE ADVANCE BY BOUNDS 


85 


Advance by Bounds. 

A patrol does not advance continuously, but employs the method of successive 
bounds, in a manner similar to that of an individual scout. In brief this means that 
from one covered position the terrain to the front is carefully searched and 
another covered position selected, with the best route thereto. It being ascertained 
that all is clear the patrol moves rapidly to the new position, where the process is 
repeated. In the near presence of the enemy the advance is made with great 
caution, usually one or two men at a time move rapidly to a new position, the 
others watching and covering their advance. 

The following cases illustrate various applications of the procedure of advance 
by bounds. 

Approaching a suspicions locality. In approaching a suspicious locality where 
the enemy might be concealed, such as a wood, house or inclosure, one or two men, 
usually the point of the patrol, advance and investigate the locality while the 
other members remain in concealment ready to cover them with fire. If the 
locality is occupied by the enemy he will thus be unable to kill or capture more than 
one or two men. As soon as the investigation shows that no enemy is present 
the remainder of the patrol advances. It is a fundamental principle in all such 
cases, that the entire patrol should not be exposed to fire or capture. 

Crossing an open space. On reaching a locality affording little or no cover for 
movement the patrol halts in the last covered position. From here the leader ex¬ 
amines the terrain to the front, picks his next halting place and the route thereto and 
notes any localities which might be occupied by the enemy. One or two men then 


When point reaches here and 
finds no enemy he will signal for¬ 
ward to remaider of patrol. 


Observing possible enemy 
positions to flank before 
crossing open space. 


Point ready to move across 
open space when sure no 
enemy is reasonably near. 




■ -- Route ^oin iwilHbl low 

Patrol halted in covered position^ 
observing before crossing open Observing possible enemy 
ground. positions to flank before. 

crossing open space. 




Plate 49.—Patrol crossing Open Space. 


move across the open space to the next covered position, observing the methods of 
individual movement discussed under Scouting. Having investigated the new 
locality they signal: “ Forward.’’ The rest of the patrol then advances, moving 
one at a time if necessary. 

Moving up a valley. In moving up a valley or ravine the patrol takes a staggered 
formation, keeping close to the sides of the ravine, or utilizing the best cover avail¬ 
able. If there is reason to believe that the enemy is near, one man moves at a time, 
the others covering his movement. 

Approaching a skyline or crest. On approaching a crest, especially if it be also 
a skyline, one man of the point approaches the crest at a place where a depression 
a rock or bush affords concealment, and carefully views the terrain to the front. If 
no signs of the enemy are observed he signals: “ Forward.” The patrol crosses the 

crest rapidly, one man at a time. 






86 


PATROLING 


Crossing a bridge or ford. Stream crossings, whether bridges or fords, are 
extremely apt to be under observation by the enemy. On approaching the crossing 
the patrol halts under cover and carefully observes it as well as all possible enemy 
positions nearby. One man of the point then crosses the bridge at a run and takes 
a favorable covered position for observation on the far side. From here he again 
carefully observes the terrain, and seeing no signs of the enemy, signals: bor- 
ward.” The patrol crosses rapidly in single file with ample distances (20 yds. 

or more). 



Plate 50. —Patrol moving up a Valley. 


Approaching and reconnoitering a building. In reconnoitering a building the 
patrol occupies covered positions at safe distances, from which it can observe at least 
two and if possible all four sides of the building, and the terrain surrounding it, 
and closely watches the doors and windows to learn whether the building is occupied. 
One or two men then work their way towards a side of the house which is under 
observation. The man who is to enter should not advance directly to the door, but 
should gain the shelter of the wall and approach the door from the side, being 
careful not to expose himself to view or fire from the windows. On reaching the 
door he should jump in quickly, with his rifle ready to fire to his front. 




CROSSING A STREAM 



87 


Plate 5t. —Patrol crossing Open Country and Bridge. 

Members of patrol observe country, especially possible enemy positions, while one man at a time moves forward. Leader plans future 

movements and directs the conduct of his men. 


































































88 


PATROLING 



Plate 52. Patrol reconnoitering a Building. 



























PASSING THROUGH A WOOD 


89 













90 


PATROLING 




Plate 54.—Patrol passing through a Village 






































































PATROL FORMATIONS 


PATROL TACTICS 

RECONNOITERING PATROLS - OPEN WARFARE 


FTG. 1 ROAD FORMATION 


2 nd in Command 


Getaway Man c 


FlC .2 ADVANCING BY BOUNDS 


iHP 


y Leader 


FIG. 3 RAILROAD CUT 


V 


s 


Leader 

© 


*w»©»*2g 


n(,omma'nd®V „, .i,,.,,,, 

| vi|V4 I’iffV 

iPpL ^ |» Getaway Man 


FIG.4 PASSAGE OF BRIDGE 


Getaway Man" 

The patrol leader inspects the country in 
advance with fieldglasses from A. —The 
patrol, preceded at 50 to 100 yds by scout* 
movjs mpidly ahead to next dominating 


poi 


FIG .5 RECONNAISSANCEOFA HILL 


4111 ^ 


in»" """£ a. A-"'"' ® 




ider 


il I///, 

.eader 

Command 


in Command 


Getaway Man 


After the bridge has been inspected to 
determine its condition and whether 
any explosives have been placed todeitroy 
it,one man crosses rapidly and advances 
to a place from which be can obtain a 
coo a view ahead. When he signals that 
fhe way is clear, remainder of patrol re 
sumes march. 


The leading man examines the crest and 
country in advance, Keepina in sidni of 
men in rear. He signals wnen sate to 
advance. Usually the patrol leader in 
person will examine the country before 
potrol proceeds. 


Plate 55 . 











































92 


PATROLING 


Approaching a wood. A wood is approached in the same manner as any other 
suspicious locality. The patrol halts under cover where it can observe the edge of 
the wood, and if necessary fire upon it. One or two men then move toward the 
wood and reconnoiter its near edge. Finding no signs of the enemy, they signal: 
“ Forward.” 

Passing through and reconnoitering a zvood. If the purpose of the patrol is 
simply to pass through the wood it advances in single file, or with flankers close in. 
If, however, it is necessary to reconnoiter the wood on a broad front the patrol 
advances through the wood in a thin skirmish line, the interval between men being 
such that each can see his neighbors on either side. Care must be exercised that 
each man maintains constant visual contact with the men next to him towards 
the center of the line or base element. 

Passing through a village. A small patrol should generally stay out of villages, 
unless ordered to reconnoiter them, especially in hostile country. It is usually better 
to pass around them. But if it is necessary to pass through a village the patrol 
moves on one street, preferably that which is the continuation of the road by which 
it entered. 

Half of the patrol moves on each side of the street, the leading man on each 
side observing to the front, and all watching the buildings opposite them on the 
other side of the street. As in many other situations the advance is made by 
bounds. When the leading man on the right side moves forward, the man next 
in rear of him on that side and the leading man on the opposite side halt and cover 
the doors and windows on both sides. The leading man on the left then advances 
similarly, after which the remainder of the patrol closes up, a man at a time. 

When the leading man on either side reaches a cross street he halts on the 
near side and carefully observes the cross street in both directions before 
proceeding. 

If no danger is feared, as when it is reasonably certain that there is no enemy in 
the village, the patrol may move continuously along the street, but each man should 
constantly watch the houses opposite him. 

Reconnoitering a village. If it be necessary to reconnoiter the village instead 
of merely to pass through it, a part of the patrol remains outside while the others 
reconnoiter the village, street by street, in the manner just described. The patrol 
in the village must not become dangerously dispersed by attempting to reconnoiter 
too large an area at one time. 

Security during halts. A patrol when halted for observation or for any other 
purpose, must protect itself from hostile observation and from surprise attacks. 
The locality selected for the halt should be one that can be approached under cover, 
it should be favorable for observation and concealment and should have a good 
covered line of retreat, in case of need. All men should carefully conceal them¬ 
selves. The men detailed to observe to front, flanks and rear, continue to perform 
this duty during all halts. When necessary they may move short distances to 
occupy convenient lookouts. The leader takes the most favorable position for 
general observation to front and flanks. 

Interviewing Local Inhabitants. 

The patrol should exercise caution in questioning the inhabitants of a hostile 
country. They should be given no information which could be of value to the 
enemy. Women and children will often be the best sources of information. They 
should be questioned separately by one man of the patrol (usually the leader). 
Civilians will not be allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol leaders are authorized 
to arrest individuals, to seize mail or telegrams, and private papers. 

In deriving information from local inhabitants or prisoners it is best not to ask 
too many questions. They should be engaged in conversation and encouraged to 
talk while the patrol leader listens. The average civilian (especially a woman) will 
give more information in conversation than in answer to questions, which may 
render them suspicious and reticent. Questions may be resorted to later, if necessary. 


RECONNOITERING WOODS AND VILLAGES 


93 


\ 


PATROL TACTICS 

RECONNOITERING PATROLS OPEN WARFARE 
FlC.I RECONNAISSANCE OF A WOOD. FlG.3 RECONNAISSANCE OFA HOUSE 


<*• »?.\C« 


9 ...v. 

<a r ; ° 





* • 3 


3 


QV V ^ 


No l enters the wood ond reconnoiters the 
edce keepinc in sic,ht of No.2 who remains 
outside. No.3 from a concealed position in 
rear observes No 2 and transmits sicnals to 
remainder of pairol who are concealed further 
to rear. .Advance is resumed on sicnal from 
No. 1. "all clear '. 



Leader 


No. I enters the house keepinc, in contact - 
by siCjht or voice with No. 2. No.3observej 
rear entrance and outbuildings 


FlC.2 REGONNAISSANCE OFANENCLOSURE FlG.4 RECONNAISSANCE OFAVILLAGE 



eadeK 

2^10 Command 

hi I 

Getaway ManX^N 



Nos. I and 2 enter the enclosure followed at 
a distance by No.3 No’s. 4 and 5 remain out¬ 
side. 


Several men enter the village and ohservi 
and reconnoiter for sic,ns of enemy.The 


examine streets ieadmc, off frorn line ot 
maran, but remain always in contact by 


? 


sichFor voice. Part of patrol remains gu 
side until reconnaissance is completed. 


U- 


Plate 56. 
















94 


PATROLING 


Information thus derived should be taken for what it is worth and no more. At 
best it is hearsay, even when the inhabitants are friendly, and should be verified in 
some other way if of importance. When several persons interviewed separately 
make similar statements this is very good evidence that the statements are correct. 

An important reconnoitering patrol in a foreign country should include at least 
one man able to speak the language. 

Observation and Reconnaissance. 

What to observe . If the mission of the patrol be to ascertain the nature of the 
terrain through which it passes, the country must be carefully observed. The 
leader will note and record everything of military importance, utilizing his map. 
But if the patrol has a definite mission at a distance, for example, to ascertain 
whether a certain town is occupied by the enemy, it must not waste time by investi¬ 
gating everything on the way. In this case reconnaissance along the route of 
advance will be limited to what is demanded by security and rapidity of advance. 
Houses, inclosures and villages should generally be avoided entirely. In any case 
they should be approached with caution, and not entered until they have been care¬ 
fully reconnoitered from a distance. 

In any case a patrol should generally have a well-defined mission, limited in 
extent. If too much is demanded unsatisfactory reports will probably result. 

Nevertheless patrol leaders should cultivate the habit of observation until it 
becomes second nature. While pursuing a definite mission they should nevertheless 
not fail to note other matters of military importance, and be able to interpret and 
remember the things they see. 

The interpretation of signs and trails has been discussed under Scouting. When 
an enemy has occupied an area he almost inevitably leaves behind many signs from 
which a good deal of information concerning him may be derived. In investigating 
such areas a patrol must be careful not to set off any mines or “ booby-traps ” left 
by the enemy. Innocent objects such as tools and equipment are often arranged to 
explode such traps when moved. 

The following are a few subjects of military importance with the salient features 
to be noted if a report upon them is called for. In all cases a patrol should look 
for any signs of the enemy. 

Bridges. Span. Width of roadway. Height above water. Nature of founda¬ 
tion and type of super-structure (truss, suspension, etc.). Grade of approaches. 
Probable safe loads. Condition of all parts of the structure. Repairs needed. 
Defensibility. 

Fords. Width. Depth. Nature of bottom. Swiftness of current. Nature and 
grade of approaches. Access to roads on either bank. Cover and defensive facilities 
available. Work required to make practicable. 

Towns. Population. Number and type of buildings. Billeting capacity—men 
and animals. Large buildings available as hospitals, headquarters, etc. Railroads 
and telegraph lines, including depots, sidings, loading facilities. Roads. Principal 
industries. Stocks of food, lumber and other materials on hand. Water supply. 
Defensive features. Attitude of inhabitants. 

Buildings. Size. Nature of construction. Suitability and capacity for billeting. 
Availability for storage or hospitalization. Protection from fire. Has it a cellar? 
Suitability as an observation post. Can it be approached under cover ? 

Railroads. Name. Termini. Single or double track. Nature of roadbed. 
Gauge. Weight of rail.. Important bridges, tunnels, cuts and embankments. 
Grades and curves. Stations, sidings, loading platforms. Water tanks. Repair 
shops and roundhouses. Turntables. Rolling stock available. 

Roads. Width. Nature and condition of surface. Drainage. Grades, includ¬ 
ing length of important grades. Bridges, cuts and embankments. Can infantry 
march in fields alongside? Branch roads—where to? Exposure to enemv fire or 
view. Defiles. 

Water supply. Streams, lakes, springs, wells and town water systems; location 
and probable capacity. Potability of water. 


COMBAT BY INFORMATION PATROLS 


95 


Camp sites. Area available. Shelter from wind, view and fire. Trees. Water, 
forage and fuel. Nature of soil and drainage. Access to roads and railroads. 
Has site been previously occupied ? Where would the outpost be placed ? 

Combat by Information Patrols 

Combat is not the mission of a reconnoitering patrol, and should generally be 
avoided except in self-defense, or when it is plainly necessary to the accomplish¬ 
ment of the mission. The patrol should see without being seen. The most skilful 
leader is he who achieves his mission and returns without having been seen by the 
enemy. If the patrol allows itself to be drawn into unnecessary combats it will 
usually fail to accomplish its mission of gathering information. There will be cases, 
however, in which combat is permissible or even necessary: 

a. In self-defense, to avoid capture when concealment is impossible. If attacked 
by superior numbers the patrol will usually scatter, to reassemble at the designated 
rendezvous, whence it may resume its advance by a new route. 

b. When necessary to gain important information, or to escape with information 
gained. 

c. In exceptional cases to capture prisoners, usually individuals or weaker patrols, 
when it is quite probable that important information may thus be gained. The mere 
killing or capturing of the enemy is not part of the mission of a reconnoitering 
patrol. 

In any case the leader must decide whether his chances of accomplishing the 
definite mission assigned him will be increased by engaging in combat. The decision 
will usually be in the negative. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is the advance by bounds ? 

2. How does a patrol approach a locality where the enemy might be concealed ? 

3. What is the fundamental rule applied in all such cases ? 

4. How does a patrol cross an open space, affording little or no concealment 
or cover ? 

5. How does a patrol move up a valley or ravine? 

6. How does a patrol approach a crest or skyline ? 

7. How does a patrol cross a bridge or ford? 

8. How does a patrol approach and reconnoiter a building? 

9. How does a patrol approach a wood? 

10. How does a patrol pass through a wood ? 

11. How does a patrol reconnoiter a wood ? 

12. Under what conditions does a reconnoitering patrol enter a village? 

13. How does a patrol pass through a village which it is not required to 
reconnoiter ? 

14. How does a patrol reconnoiter a village? 

15. What localities should be selected as the halting places of patrols? 

16. What are the measures which the patrol takes to provide for its own security 
during a halt? 

17. How should civilians be interviewed? 

18. What value may be attached to statements of civilians ? 

19. When does a patrol investigate the terrain? What features should be noted? 

20. When the patrol has a definite mission at a distant point what reconnaissance 
should it make en route thereto? 

21. What is the rule as to entering buildings and inclosures? 

22. What does a patrol look for in a locality supposed to have been recently 
occupied by the enemy ? 

23. What precaution should be observed in such a locality? 

24. What features should be noted in the reconnaissance of: 


96 


PATROLING 


a. A bridge? c. A town? e. A railroad? g. Water supply? 

b. A ford? d. A building? f. A road? h. A camp site? 

25. What is the general rule for a reconnoitering patrol with reference to en¬ 
gaging in combat? 

26. In what cases may a reconnoitering patrol engage in combat ? 

27. How does the patrol leader determine in any particular situation whether or 
not to engage in combat ? 

CHAPTER XVI. 

NIGHT PATROLING. 

Necessity for Night Patroling. 

When two opposing forces have halted opposite and in close proximity to each 
other, and the situation has become stabilized, patroling by day will be very difficult 
if not impossible. Yet the necessity for continuous reconnaissance of the enemy 
under such conditions is even greater than when the opposing forces are not in 
close contact. 

During the day, by reason of the close proximity of the enemy, this continuous 
reconnaissance can be conducted by ground observers in fixed observation posts 
within the lines, supplemented by aerial observation. But at night observers in 
fixed positions within the lines can see little or nothing, aerial observation is im¬ 
possible, and continuous reconnaissance must be carried on by means of night 
patrols. A patrol of trained men can move at night over ground where, in daylight, 
discovery by the enemy would be certain. 

Night patroling is difficult, and will not give satisfactory results unless carried 
out by trained men, familiar with the ground over which they operate. Successful 
night patroling therefore demands trained men, accustomed to this duty, and oper¬ 
ating for short distances over ground with which they are familiar from careful 
observation by day. 

The security measures of an outpost guarding a camp or bivouac on the line of 
battle, by day and especially by night, consist very largely of patroling. Outpost 
patrols are discussed in a later chapter. 

Mounted patroling by night is out of question, and the radius of action or dis¬ 
tance to which infantry patrols can go by night is of course very limited. Accord¬ 
ingly night patroling, as we have noted, will be most characteristic of situations 
where the opposing forces are in close contact. 

Night patrols may be sent out solely for reconnaissance, or for combat. In 
either case, however, they gather information, and thus contribute to the security 
of the command. 

Reconnaissance by Night. 

Reconnoitering patrols at night will most frequently be used to: 

1. Investigate the condition of the friendly wire entanglements and note 
places where repairs are needed. This cannot safely be done by day in close prox¬ 
imity to the enemy. 

2. Investigate the enemy’s entanglements. 

3. Lie in no man’s land, outside the enemy’s wire, and by listening locate his 
outguards, etc. 

4. Investigate routes of approach. 

5. Move to definite localities in no man’s land or within the enemy’s lines and 
investigate such localities. 

Night Combat Patrols. 

Combat patrols at night are used to: 

1. Capture or drive off enemy patrols. 

2. Execute silent raids into the enemy’s lines for the purpose of capturing 
prisoners, destroying works or material, capturing maps and documents and other¬ 
wise gathering information. 


PLAN OF THE PATROL LEADER 


97 


Night raids for the express purpose of harassing the enemy are executed by 
larger parties, and are not within the scope of this course. 

Mission, Number, Strength, Composition and Leaders, etc., of Night Patrols. 

The preceding discussion with reference to these matters as applied to day 
patrols, including also the instructions to be given to patrol leaders, and the 
measures to be carried out preliminary to the start are, with some exceptions, in 
general applicable also to night patrols. Because of the difficulty of controlling 
men in the dark, night patrols are usually smaller than day patrols. Where 8 to 
io men might be used by day 4 or 5 would be preferable by night. A large num¬ 
ber of small patrols will gain more information than a few large ones. This, of 
course, applies to reconnoitering, not combat patrols. Night patrols, as they sel¬ 
dom go to a great distance, seldom send messages unless specially directed to do 
so. Accordingly no men are needed as messengers. Only trained men can hope to 
be successful in night patroling, and as a rule both leader and men should be 
specially selected. 

The formations, routes, signals employed and certain other details of the 
conduct of a night patrol are different from those of a patrol operating by day. 

Orders to the patrol leader. The orders given to the leader of a night patrol 
are subject to the same remarks as in the case of orders to a day patrol. 

PLAN OF THE PATROL LEADER. 

Mission. 

The mission of a night patrol should be as definite as, and in fact even more 
definite than that of a day patrol, inasmuch as anything in the nature of a general 
reconnaissance is out of question by night. A night patrol should usually have 
one simple task to perform. 

As in all other cases when it is necessary to lay plans, the patrol leader must 
thoroughly understand his mission. Each step in his plan and every detail of his 
conduct should be tested by asking the question: “ Will this help to accomplish 
my mission? ” 

Route. 

The selection of routes for night movement has been discussed under Scouting. 
The same considerations apply to the selection of routes for a patrol. 

A route for a movement in daylight should fulfill these conditions: 

1. It should lead as directly as practicable to the objective or place where the 
patrol is going. 

2. It should afford concealment from view and cover from fire. 

3. It should be easy to identify and to follow. 

For a night movement a route should also satisfy these requirements, but condi¬ 
tions will be different from those of the day time. 

Because of the slowness of movement and the difficulty of recognizing and 
following a route by night it is desirable that the route be as nearly as practicable 
a straight line which can be followed by compass. On the other hand if such direct 
route leads through very difficult country it may be better to utilize a regular 
route of travel such as a road or trail, or some well-defined line which can be 
readily followed in the dark, such as a railroad or stream bed, provided such 
route is not too roundabout or circuitous. The chances of missing direction when 
moving by compass increase rapidly with the distance traveled. Accordingly 
well-defined landmarks should be utilized for frequent check on position and 
direction, except when the distance to be traveled is very short. 

In the day time concealment from view is of great importance and accordingly 
open terrain is avoided as far as practicable. At night the chances of being seen, 
even in open terrain, are greatly reduced. Movement in close (broken or wooded) 
terrain will be difficult, and the chances of making a noise greater. Accordingly 
open terrain will be utilized for night movements more frequently than for move- 


98 PATROLING 

ments by day, and close or broken country so favorable for day movement, should 
be avoided at night. 

In movement by day high ground is to be preferred, provided concealment is 
practicable, as it affords the best view of surrounding terrain. The route of a 
night patrol, on the contrary, should be in low ground, where the patrol will not 
appear on the skyline and can better observe individuals and other objects in sil¬ 
houette against the sky. 

The necessity for utilizing available features of the terrain to maintain direction 
and check position, has been discussed under Scouting. A night patrol having a 
considerable distance to go moves from one locality to another by bounds, as does 
a day patrol, but for different reasons. 

Features of the terrain which cross the route of the patrol, such as roads, 
railroads, streams, fences, are of special value as a check on position and direction 
(See Scouting.) 

Equipment of the Patrol 

Movement by night being at best a difficult matter, a night patrol should carry 
only such weapons and equipment as are really necessary to the accomplishment of 
its mission, including its own security. 

Weapons. The usual weapons will indeed often be carried. But as any com¬ 
bat by night is certain to be at very close range, pistols, blackjacks (clubs), and 
trench knives are more convenient weapons than the rifle and bayonet. 

As a night patrol will never be out more than a few hours, rations, extra cloth¬ 
ing and bedding, and even water may be dispensed with, and accordingly canteens 
and packs should not be carried. 

Clothing. Woolen clothing and wrapped leggins are preferable to stiff cotton 
clothing and canvas or leather leggins, as they are less apt to make noise when 
moving through woods or brush. Waterproof clothing is likewise objectionable, 
and long coats which interfere with the movement of the legs should never be 
used. Steel helmets are not employed, and any hat with a stiff brim or visor is 
objectionable. The best headgear is a close-fitting skull cap, or in mild weather, 
nothing at all. Woolen shirts are much preferable to coats. 

Shoes, Hobnailed or squeaking shoes or boots should not be worn. An easy 
fitting and well broken-in pair of leather shoes should be worn. Squeaking of 
shoes may be stopped by soaking in neatsfoot oil. 

Equipment of the leader. The leader will require about the same equipment 
as by day, except that field glasses will be unnecessary. His watch and compass 
should of course be of the luminous type for night use, and should be carried 
in the pockets, not on the wrist or suspended from the neck. For investigating 
buildings, dugouts, etc., and for checking notes and compass readings an electric 
flashlight will be useful. It should be of a compact type which can be carried in 
the pocket. The flashlight should of course not be used in finding the route nor 
under any circumstances where the flash could possibly be seen by an enemy. 

Smoking and chewing tobacco should never be permitted on night patrol. 

The leader should carefully inspect the equipment and clothing of his men to 
make certain that they have nothing which will be noisy or conspicuous (rattling, 
squeaking, glistening or shining, etc.). 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Under what conditions of warfare is night patroling most commonly em¬ 
ployed, and why is it necessary ? 

2. What is essential to success in night patroling? 

3. For what special purposes are night reconnoitering patrols commonly em¬ 
ployed ? 

4. For what special purposes are night combat patrols commonly employed? 

5. Why should a night patrol have a very simple and definite mission? 

6. What conditions should be fulfilled by a route for a day patrol, and how are 
these affected by darkness ? 



ORGANIZATION OF NIGHT PATROLS 


99 


7. Why should a night route be as nearly as practicable a straight line? 

8. Why should rough or close terrain be avoided by night ? 

9. Why is low ground preferred for night movement ? 

10. What features of the terrain are of special value in enabling a night patrol 
to check its position ? 

11. What considerations determine the equipment of a night patrol? 

12. What are the usual weapons of a night patrol? 

13. Should rations, water and packs be carried by a night patrol? Why? 

14. What kind of clothing, including headgear, should be worn for night patrol- 
ing ? Explain why. 

15. What precautions should be taken with reference to shoes? 

16. What additional equipment should be carried by the leader of a night patrol? 

17. What precautions should be taken with reference to luminous watches and 
compasses ? 

18. What is the rule with reference to rattling, squeaking or glistening articles 
of equipment? 


CHAPTER XVII. 

NIGHT PATROLING (Continued). 

Organization and Formations. 

A night patrol is organized in the same manner as a day patrol, that is to say 
each man is given a definite task, a second in command is designated, etc. 

Typical formation. The basic principles applicable to the formation of any body 
of troops in motion in the presence of the enemy are applicable to night patrols. 
The patrol usually assumes a diamond or lozenge formation, with a point, flankers 
on either side, and rear point. In a small patrol each of these may be represented 
by one man, in a larger patrol by two or more men each. The leader and remaining 
men form a central nucleus or main body. 

This formation provides for security, and permits the patrol to form front for 
action in any desired direction. 

Distances and intervals. Distances and intervals in a night patrol will be much 
less than by day, but the patrol should never be closely bunched in one group. 
Such a group could see or hear no more than one man, and in fact would hear less 
than one man because of the slight noises made by the patrol itself. If the enemy 
be encountered the entire patrol may be surrounded so that the escape of even one 
man becomes impossible. A single grenade or shell-burst or a volley of machine 
gun or rifle fire may wipe out the entire patrol. 

Visual contact between the leader and all elements of the patrol is desirable, but 
on a very dark night may not be possible without too close grouping of the men. 
Verbal contact, that is easy speaking distance, should be maintained, and check-up 
or identification signals are employed. 

Control. Signals. 

Difficulty of control by night. The control of a night patrol is a matter of great 
difficulty. Darkness prevents the use of the ordinary arm signals used by day, and 
as the patrol will seldom be aware of the presence of the enemy until he is very 
close, the usual spoken commands cannot safely be employed. Moreover the leader 
often cannot see his men, or at best can see them but indistinctly, and cannot be 
certain that his commands are being obeyed. Different elements of the patrol can¬ 
not see each other. Under these difficult conditions special measures for control and 
intercommunication are necessary. 

Simple formations. Pre-arranged plans. The first precaution to be observed 
is a simple formation, as heretofore described, which is constantly maintained, 
both when moving and at a halt, all members remaining in the same relative positions. 

The next essential precaution is a number of very simple pre-arranged plans in 
accordance with which each element of the patrol and each man knows exactly 


100 


PATROLING 


what he is to do in case the enemy is encountered in any direction (see Combat, 
post), and in various other situations. 

Sound signals. For intercommunication a number of simple audible or sound 
signals are agreed upon and rehearsed. These signals should resemble the human 
voice as little as possible, and should be low and not apt to attract the attention of 
the enemy. Mimicry of the calls of birds and animals has often been employed by 
Indians and other skilled woodsmen or scouts. Two untrained men can seldom 
make such sounds alike, and some more simple or mechanical sounds may be pref¬ 
erable, for example: A hiss or “ cluck,” blowing gently across the top of an empty 
cartridge shell, tapping with the finger nail on the butt of a rifle or pistol or on a 
match box, running the nail or a pencil across the teeth, rubbing a sleeve or trouser 
leg, etc. 

Each member of the patrol should be able to halt the patrol if he sees or hears 
anything suspicious. Hence a simple signal, “ Halt,” which may be given by the 
leader or any other man, is necessary. 

The next important signal is the “ check-up ” signal. The purpose of this is 
to enable the leader to verify the presence and the position of each element of 
his patrol. As this signal is given at a halt it may be the same as the halt signal, 
for example, the halt signal repeated twice. The signal should be given in a regular 
sequence, thus: The leader sounds the signal, and it is repeated in order at a fixed 
interval by the point, right flanker, rear point or get-away man, left flanker. 

The signals “ Forward,” and “ By the right (left) flank,” should be given only 
by the leader. 

The number of different signals employed should be limited to bare essentials 
to avoid confusion, and the various signals should differ sufficiently to avoid 
the chance of mistaking one for another. 

When any element of the patrol encounters the enemy it gives a distinctive 
danger signal upon which the agreed plan to meet the emergency is carried out, 
as described under Combat. During a melee with the enemy there should be 
a recognition or identification signal to the end that two members of the patrol 
may not attack each other instead of the enemy. This signal will of course be 
heard by the enemy and so it should be one not easily interpreted. A single word 
or number would be at once understood. A suitable signal might be three con¬ 
secutive numbers, as 1-2-3, 10-11-12, or a number containing 5, as 25, 250, 305, etc. 

Summary. To summarize then the arrangements for control by night include: 

1. A simple formation, constantly maintained. 

2. Simple plans by which each man knows exactly what he is to do in various 
emergencies. 

3. Selection and rehearsal of a small number of simple sound signals. 

Action of the Patrol Leader before the Start. 

The preliminary measures taken by the leader of a night patrol before starting 
out are quite similar to those taken by the leader of a day patrol, heretofore 
discussed. 

The leader designates the time and place of departure and the equipment to be 
carried. He carefully explains the mission of the patrol, what is known of the 
enemy, the route to be followed, conduct in case of attack, duties of each man, 
signals to be used, etc. If there be time the signals and formations should be 
rehearsed. 

He inspects his men and their equipment. Men with colds who are coughing or 
sneezing, and any who appear to be nervous, should be left behind. 

The route of the patrol, its time of departure and probable time of return should 
be known to the officer sending out the patrol, who should also give notice of these 
details to the machine gun and howitzer officers, to the artillery and to the out- 
guards near the points of departure and return. The purpose of this precaution is 
to insure that the patrol shall not be mistaken for the enemy or for any reason 
accidentally fired upon, and that no unnecessary alarms shall be raised. 



INSPECTING WIRE ENTANGLEMENTS 


101 


CONDUCT OF THE PATROL. 

The patrol proceeds in single file until it passes the line of outguards or listening 
posts. If there be an obstacle in front the patrol passes in single file through a 
gap previously selected, and halts just outside. The various groups (point and 
flankers) take their assigned positions under the supervision of the leader. The 
check-up signal is then given, after which the leader signals: “ Forward.” 

Advance by Bounds. 

In moving the patrol guides on the leader. The leader may be able to designate 
some distant direction point which all can see as a guide for the movement. If 
this be not practicable the leader sends the point forward in the direction indicated 
by the compass, to the limit of visibility. He then halts the patrol, moves up to 
the point and again sends him forward. 

This careful method of advance by bounds, while slow, has two distinct advan¬ 
tages : It maintains the proper direction of advance, and it applies a rule of funda¬ 
mental importance in night patroling, “ Stop-Look-Listen.” As a patrol can see 
little at night it depends almost entirely on hearing to locate the enemy. Usually 
only the faintest sounds will be made by the enemy and it is usually impossible to 
hear such sounds while moving. Accordingly, even when a direction point is 
available the patrol should move thus by short bounds, listening intently at every 
halt. Some member of the patrol should be halted, listening, while the others are 
moving, and all should be halted occasionally. 

Inspecting Wire Entanglements. 

A very common mission of night patrols is the close inspection of wire entangle¬ 
ments, both friendly and hostile, which is usually impracticable by day. The pur¬ 
pose of the inspection of the friendly obstacles is to ascertain localities where 



repairs are needed. These repairs are made later by night working parties. The 
enemy’s entanglements are inspected also to note their condition and the effects 
of fire directed upon them, and to locate gaps used by hostile patrols, or which 
may be used for the passage of friendly troops in night raids or larger attacks. 








102 


PATROLING 


Formation of the patrol. In investigating friendly obstacles on. the front of <l 
position the bulk of the patrol moves along the outer face of the wire, in no man s 
land. The leader is close to the wire and is covered by a front and rear point and 
a flanker on the side towards the enemy. These groups may consist of one or two 
men each. Another man moves along the parapet of the trench in rear of the 
obstacle and if necessary one or more additional men move in the interval between 
the trench and the obstacle or between belts of obstacles, to maintain contact between 
the leader and the man on the parapet. The man on the parapet warns sentries 
that the patrol is in front so that they will not fire on it. 



\ 


Plate 58.—Night Wire Patrol marking a Gap. 


Locating the gaps. When the leader comes to a gap or damaged place in the 
obstacle he signals: “ Halt,” to his patrol. He investigates the gap, notes its width 
and whether it extends clear through the obstacle. He passes the order: “ MARK,” 
to the man on the parapet, who places a stake on the interior slope opposite the gap 
as a means of locating its position subsequently. 

As an additional means of locating the damaged section the leader may take one 
or more compass azimuths on prominent points on the skyline, which he can see 
and which he knows are on the map. Two or three such points should be selected 
in advance. The leader then enters in his notebook any necessary description of 
the gap and the compass azimuths he has taken. The method of making notes by 
night is described under Scouting. The notes pertaining to any one gap should 
be on a separate page by themselves. By means of these notes and the stakes in the 
parapet the officer who receives the report can plot the gaps on his battle map. 

Having completed his investigation the leader moves back to the outer face of the 
obstacle and signals: “ Forward ” to the patrol. 

Inspecting hostile entanglements. The enemy’s entanglements are investigated 
in a similar manner, except that no stakes are placed in the parapet and compass 
bearings must always be taken. One man may pass through the gaps to the inner 
face of the obstacle to cover the leader during his investigations. 

Reconnoitering Special Localities. 

When a patrol is sent to reconnoiter some special locality to the front or within 
the enemy’s lines, it proceeds by the selected route as directly as practicable. The 












































RECONNOITERING SPECIAL LOCALITIES 


103 


route should lie along some guiding line of the terrain (edge of a wood, fence, 
path, ravine, etc.) when such is available. Otherwise the patrol proceeds by com¬ 
pass bearing, in the usual formation. 

Arrived near the locality to be investigated the leader halts his patrol and he 
and one other man move carefully forward to reconnoiter. The rest of the patrol 
remains in position to cover the leader’s flanks and rear. 



Plate 59. —Patrol investigating Gap in Enemy’s Wire. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is the characteristic formation of a night patrol? What are the advan¬ 
tages of this formation? 

2. What determines the distances and intervals between members of a night 
patrol ? 

3. How do distances and intervals at night compare to those by day? 

4. What are the disadvantages by night of : 

a. Too great distances between individuals? 

b. Too small distances? 

5. Why is it difficult to control the movements of a night patrol? 

6. What are the special measures adopted to facilitate control by night? 

7. Why is a simple and constant formation necessary? 

8. Why are simple, pre-arranged plans essential in night patroling? 

9. What are the usual means of intercommunication employed by a night patrol ? 

10. What kinds of sound signals are employed by night, and why? 

11. Explain the necessity for and nature of the following signals: 

a. Halt. 

b. Forward. 

c. Check-up. 

d. By the right (left) flank. 

e. Danger. 

f. Recognition. 

12. By whom may the signal, “ Halt,” be given? The signal, “ Forward ”? 

13. Why should the number of night signals be limited? 

14. What measures are taken by the leader of a night patrol prior to starting out? 

15. What precautions are taken to insure that a night patrol shall not be fired 
upon by friendly troops? 

16. What formation is taken by a night patrol in passing through the line of 
outguards ? 

SPM-6 








104 


PATROLING 


17. How does the patrol pass through an obstacle? 

18. What individual is the guide for the movement of a night patrol? 

19. How does the leader provide for maintaining the proper direction of advance? 

20. Why are short bounds used by night? 

21. What is the purpose of inspecting friendly wire entanglements, and why 
must this usually be done by night ? 

22. Describe the formation of a night wire patrol, and the reasons therefor. 

23. Describe the procedure of the patrol upon encountering a gap or damaged 
section in the obstacle. 

24. How is the location of the gap fixed ? 

25. Describe the procedure of a patrol in the inspection of hostile entanglements. 

26. Describe the procedure of a night patrol in the reconnaissance of a definite 
locality. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

NIGHT PATROLING (Continued). 

Listening Patrols. 

When two opposing forces are in position opposite each other, it is possible by 
systematic night reconnaissance to determine the position of every enemy outguard, 
combat group, observation post, or other place where men are stationed, in or very 
near to the front line. The value of this knowledge, particularly as the warfare 
becomes more stabilized, cannot be overestimated. It will prevent raids being 
made on places that the enemy is not occupying, prisoners when needed for identifi¬ 
cation of the unit opposite will be easy to capture, and harassing fire can be accurately 
placed on enemy groups. The battalion intelligence officer should coordinate this 
reconnaissance. He will send small patrols out from certain points in his line. 
These patrols follow designated compass directions and halt about 50 yards out¬ 
side the hostile wire, lie there and listen. They identify, take the compass azimuth, 
and estimate the distance to any sound they hear. When they have reported back 
the information thus obtained is plotted on the map. The same sound will probably 
be heard by another patrol, which serves as a check on the locality from which it 
came. Thus, conversation, the inevitable cough or whisper, will betray the position 
of an enemy group. 

Example. A listening patrol is sent out from a known point of the line to 
advance in the direction azimuth 320°, halt outside the enemy wire and listen. The 
patrol’s position when halted can be plotted on the map, since the location of the 
hostile obstacle is already known. The leader, on his return, reports: That at 
11: 10 PM he heard several men in conversation in the direction azimuth 300°, 
and about 100 yards from him. The battalion intelligence officer measures off 
on his map 100 yards in the reported direction, from the known position of the 
patrol, and thus locates the hostile position. (See Scouting and Practical Exercises.) 


Capturing Enemy Patrols. 

Except by accident an enemy patrol can ordinarily be captured only when it 
habitually moves in the same locality at or about the same time each night. Its 
habits thus become known to the enemy who can lay plans to capture it. To 
capture an enemy patrol it is necessary to obtain information as to its size, route 
and formation, by previous reconnaissance. For example, it is learned that the 
enemy sends a patrol of three men to a certain shell hole, each night at about the 
same hour, listening patrols on three successive nights have observed a hostile 
patrol of five men issue from a certain gap and move south. With such informa¬ 
tion it is possible to ambush such a patrol, as follows: 

Take out a patrol of about twice the strength of the hostile patrol to be ambushed. 
Assign to each man the enemy he is to attack. Go out early and take a position, as 
favorable as possible for concealment and security, on the route of the hostile patrol. 


SILENT RAIDS 


105 


Provide one or more auto rifles for security and to cover the retreat. Arrange a 
signal for the attack. Form a pocket into which the hostile patrol will march. 
Have an identification signal to avoid confusion. Jump on each man from the 
rear, if possible. Use bayonets, knives or clubs (no grenades). (See Plate 60.) 






Leader 


*,3 1 Av 

% / 

/\ 


/ 




\ 


^ <o 



xxxxxxxx 
xxxxxxx X 
xxxx xxxx 

Enemy 

patrol 


£ Auto, 
rifleman 


Plate 6o.— Capture of a Hostile Patrol. 


Silent Raids. 

Silent raids (unsupported by machine gun or artillery fire) on the enemy for¬ 
ward lines by night are made for the purpose of capturing prisoners, destroying 
enemy machine guns or emplacements or other works, searching dugouts for maps, 
documents, etc., or some other single, definite task. A silent raid is one conducted 
without artillery preparation or support, by a relatively small force. 

It is necessary to know exactly the location of the place to be visited, the nature 
of the works of the enemy in the vicinity, and the enemy groups which are at or 
near the locality. All this is ascertained by previous reconnaissance. A gap is 
located in the enemy wire at a suitable place. If no gap exists one will be cut. The 
party should generally not exceed about 20 men. 

Example of a silent raid. The following is an example of the organization and 
conduct of a silent raid. 

The patrol is divided into 5 groups. (See Plate 61.) 

Group 1 consists of 4 scouts armed with pistols, knives and clubs. The group, 
in suitable formation, passes through the gap and advances carefully on the point 
to be raided. At the leader’s signal, or when discovered, they rush the enemy, 
seize a prisoner, kill those who resist, and rush the prisoner to the rear. 

Group 2 consists of the patrol leader and two men armed with hand grenades. 
These men pass through the gap in the enemy’s wire, one taking post on either 
side of the outlet. By signal they guide the raiding party (Group 1) back through 
the gap, and if necessary hold it open until they have passed. The leader enters 
the gap and takes post where he can best direct the operations of his patrol. 

Group 3 consists of 4 men, including an automatic rifleman and substitute. They 
form a right flank covering group in no man’s land, and during the raid take post 
to the right of the entrance to the gap. 

Group 4 is organized like Group 3, and performs the same functions as left 
flank covering group. 

Group 5 is organized like Groups 3 and 4. It forms the rear guard of the patrol 
and during the raid takes post in no man’s land, about 30 yds. from and opposite 
the entrance to the gap. 

The patrol employs the usual signals for night operations: Halt, Forward, 
Check-up, Danger, Recognition, etc. 

The patrol is formed as shown in Fig. 1, Plate 61, to pass through a gap in the 
friendly obstacle. 




106 


PATROLING 



©Lead man 


1?* group 
raiding group 

@ Leader of first group. 
^ Leader of patrol excepted 
O' he should be the best man. 


1© 


20^group 
leadersgroup 

Leader of patrol 

©1 

0jMen with hand grenades 


3^ group 

'0 Leader of 3^ group 
© 


right group 

© 


© Auto rifle 
© Leader of 4 tb group 

©] 

4 tb group 

© 

© 

left group 

© 

© 

© Auto rifle 
© Leader of 5tb group 
© 

©1 

5 tb group 

rear group * 

© 



© 



Fig. 1 

TYPICAL FORMATION NOT IN 
IMMEDIATE PRESENCE OF ENEMY 


©) 

© 

©. 


1?? or raiding 
group . 


2^ or leaders 

0j 9 rou P 

r © 

3^ orright 4 < 
group 


<D 

© 


4tb or left 
group 

© 

© 

©J 


„ 5tb or rear 
group 


Fig. 2 

FORMATION FOR PASSAGE 
OF NO MAN’S LAND 


© @1?* group 


Prisoner 


Enemy 



trench 


Enemy 



e> 


'^2^ group 

X X X X X XXX^XXXXXXXX 

xxxxxxxx ixxxxxxxx 

1 . © 

3” group 0 

© 

© 

■*— © 

© 4tb group 

© 

© 

© 

© 5tb group 


® \W 

z~s \ trench 

Ly ^Prisoner / 

© $ / 


X XXXXXXXIXXX xxxx X 

/ 

xxxxxxxx / xxxxxxxx 

' ® 


c r e 

n\ 






3 ^ 


V# 


X © 

© 

© ✓ 4 l .b qroup 

/© 


group 0 

%, 

/ © 


5 th 


ft 


s© 


group 


Fid. 3 

FORMATION FOR ENTERING 
HOSTILE LINES 


The leader blows his whistle 3 times.This 
means that 3 ^ group should open fire cover¬ 
ing the retirement of the other groups. 

Fig. 4 

FORMATION FOR WITHDRAWAL 

In any direction 


Plate 6i.— A Silent Raid. 






























COMBAT BY NIGHT 


107 


Upon reaching no man’s land it takes the formation shown in Fig. 2, and moves 
directly to the gap in the enemy’s wire. Groups 1 and 2 pass through the gap, 
Groups 3, 4 and 5 deploy as shown and hold the gap open against an attack from 
no man’s land or from the hostile trench. 

The raiders (Group 1) should endeavor to reach the rear of the point to be raided 
and to approach it from that direction. 

During the raid there should be no shouting, nor any unnecessary firing or other 
noise. 

Having captured the prisoners Groups 1 and 2 return directly to their own lines, 
the remaining groups covering their retreat. In case of a hostile attack from any 
direction Groups 1 and 2 retreat away from the attack. 

The leader, by whistle signals, indicates the order of retirement. The group in 
the direction from which the enemy has attacked will be the last to retire, as soon 
as the escape of the others is assured. It may retire in a body but if the enemy’s 
fire is heavy the group will usually scatter (when ready to retreat), each individual 
making his own way back to the lines. 

Raiding parties always bring their dead and wounded back with them. 

Combat by Night. 

Encounter with the enemy by night will usually be sudden, often unexpected 
and always at close quarters. There will be no time nor opportunity for the patrol 
leader to observe the situation, make plans or issue detailed orders to meet the 
special circumstances. 

Pre-arranged plans in case of attack. Under such conditions it is necessary 
to have a few very simple plans of action prepared in advance, and which are 
carried out almost automatically as the situation arises. (See Plate 62.) 

In its diamond formation the patrol presents four salients or points, one to the 
front, one to each flank and one to the rear. One of these will be the first to 
encounter the enemy, and should at once give the danger signal indicating the point 
of attack. 

Thus if the point or leading element encounters the enemy it calls or signals: 
“ Front.” This indicates the point of attack. The leader and the men with him 
near the center of the patrol rush at once to the point of attack, to assist the men 
who have jumped or been jumped by the enemy. 

The two flanking groups, closing in if necessary, join the combat by attacking 
the enemy’s flanks. The rear element or the men farthest from the point of attack, 
remain out of the combat, prepared to cover the rear or, in the last resort in case of 
defeat, to escape and report the occurrence. 

A similar plan is carried out in case another element of the patrol first encounters 
the enemy. For example if he is met by the left flank group it calls or signals: 
“ Left.” The leader and the central group move in this direction, the point and 
rear point attack the enemy’s flanks, and the right flank group stays out of the fight, 
prepared to make a “ getaway.” If the attack is on the right or in rear a similar 
procedure is followed, the signals being: “ Right,” or “ Rear.” 

Conduct in case of defeat. In case the patrol is defeated'or scattered, each man 
individually makes his way back to the friendly lines. It will usually be imprac¬ 
ticable by night to reassemble at any rendezvous point in advance of the friendly 
lines. Each man returning reports at the command post of the organization which 
sent out the patrol. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What are listening patrols, and for what purposes are such patrols used? 

2. Describe the procedure of a listening patrol, and give an example? 

3. Under what conditions is it possible to capture enemy patrols? 

4. Describe the procedure in capturing an enemy patrol. 

5. What is a silent raid, and for what purpose is it carried out? 

6. What information is necessary to the success of a silent raid? 


108 


PATROLING 


7. Give an example of a silent raid under the following headings: 

a. Organization and equipment. 

b. Duties of each group. 

c. Passage through friendly obstacle. 

d. Formation in crossing no man’s land. 

e. Procedure upon reaching gap in the enemy’s wire. 


4 

1 / 
1 ! 


1 


I 


66 


t 

vr 

o o 

i t 

\ 6 i 

b 6 


I 


o 6 


Remain out of fight 
(Getaway men) 


Pig. 1 “FRONT” 

t 

cro-Zr^ 


x 




1- o 


T° . 6 x 

Remain out of fight 
(Get away men) 

clotS'- 


* ’ 


Fig.3 “RIGHT” 


r 


o 


.--00 

Remain out of fight 
(Get away men) 

- 4 . 

o 6 


'OjD 


Fig. 2 “LEFT 

t 


» 


99 

/ 1 

1 \ 

1 1 

1 \ 

\ \ 

\ \ 

V 


°.° 

\Remain out of fight 
(Get away men) 

?i? 

Ft 


o o 

i \ 


n 
' / 


Fig. 4 “REAR” 


Members of patrol.O 

Leader of patrol. 

Enemy..• 


Plate 62.— Night Patrol Combat Plans. 


f. Operations within the enemy’s lines. 

g. Retirement or withdrawal upon accomplishing its mission. 

h. Conduct in case of hostile attack. 

8. What is the rule with reference to dead or wounded men of the patrol? 

9. Why are simple pre-arranged plans for combat with the enemy necessary 
for night patrols ? 

10. Describe the procedure of a night patrol when its point (left flanking group) 
is attacked by a hostile patrol. 

11. What does a night patrol do if defeated and scattered by the enemy? 





MESSAGES AND REPORTS 


109 


CHAPTER XIX. 

MESSAGES AND REPORTS. 

The mission of a reconnoitering patrol is not alone to gain certain information, 
but to transmit it promptly to the officer who sent out the patrol. This last duty 
may be the more difficult of the two. 

Information to be of value must generally be transmitted promptly. Accordingly 
patrols are usually made strong enough to send back one or more messages. In 
a friendly country one man will usually be sufficient to carry back a message. In 
hostile country, or if there is a reason to believe that there are bodies of the enemy 
between the patrol and its own lines, two men are usually sent, each having a copy 
of the message. The patrol leader will designate the general routes to be followed 
by the messengers. 

Two messengers may return by entirely separate routes, or together. If together 
they move as a two-man patrol, exercising the usual precaution, and so separated 
that at least one should be able to escape in case of an unexpected attack. Messen¬ 
gers, as a rule, do not rejoin the patrol. 

What to report. The first certain information of the enemy should always be 
promptly reported, a messenger being sent back. Thereafter it will not be neces¬ 
sary to report every patrol seen, as the commander will be already aware that there 
are hostile troops in the locality. The next information of value will usually be the 
presence of a considerable force of the enemy, or information that a certain locality 
is occupied in force. Any information which it is a part of the patrol’s specific 
mission to obtain, should generally be promptly transmitted by messenger. Other 
information of a less urgent nature is reported by the patrol leader upon his return 
to his own lines. Such reports should of course also include all information pre¬ 
viously sent by messenger. 

Negative messages. As a rule negative information is not sent back by messen¬ 
ger. If the patrol does not report the presence of the enemy at a certain locality, 
this is generally presumed to mean that it has not found him there. But at times 
negative information may be of great value. If so, the officer sending out the patrol 
should so inform the leader, as for example, when he desires to verify his belief that 
the enemy is not occupying some locality of importance. Also the patrol may be 
instructed to send back a message at a certain stated time, reporting anything that 
has or has not been learned up to that time. 

Form and Contents of Messages. 

Messages may be either verbal (oral) or written. Verbal messages should usually 
be limited to a single sentence, and even then are very apt to go astray or to be 
garbled in transmission. They have the advantage of conveying no information to 
the enemy in case the messenger is captured. It is desirable that the messenger 
himself be a witness of the event which he reports. He should be required to 
repeat the message before starting. 

As a rule messages should be written and accompanied by such simple sketches 
as necessary to make their meaning clear. The form and contents of written mes¬ 
sages has been discussed in detail under Scouting. 

The man who carries a written message should be required to read it and have 
its contents clearly explained to him. If the written message be lost he will still 
be able to deliver an oral message. If captured by the enemy he should destroy the 
message. 

Importance of Accuracy in Messages and Reports. 

Accurate messages and reports are, after all, the ultimate aim of an information 
patrol, and the test of its efficiency. However skilfully the patrol leader and his 
men may conduct their reconnaissance, their efforts wifi be wasted unless the leader 
accurately observes and reports what he has opportunity to see. A carelessly or 
unskilfully prepared message or report may not only fail to convey the desired 
information, but may actually be misleading. 


110 


PATROLING 



Examples of good and of poor messages. The message shown in Plate 63 is 
defective in many vital particulars. Actually it would convey far more valuable 
information to the enemy, should it fall into his hands, than to the officer for whom 
it is intended. Plate 64 shows how the message should be written. 


O 


JO 


(2) _»- 



4, /?2Z 


S7o 

(5)- *'*Co-co-e-&C 

f * 'P 


© 


*7 


o cl* 


As -cas-o-o-xX^^ 

<** - » t r '"X. 7tCcx^<TytAE^ 




&r-i+LS. _j g> 

j&ft Co. a 


@ 


o 


N9J 


o 


Lowell-Peesv/lle 
Cx^L 4 /L>r-vL 0 t SOOytCa,. /V /7*E 
3:30 PM 4- - 22. 

Jo C.O. Co. A 
( (TO LZo 2 G&.Q <ryu^J 

/ L2& 3:20 PM J Aiduur- llS-ctuJL 30 sulcC 

jE+utixt sCv-rrmPx/ / 000 -^xC<La. 5 20 0 W. 

t<r-CSUL* -VU^CTV-CAyc^, /3-cr-c^oCA_s _ 

•**ri■ lc^. 0 ^ jJuslljC' SOO /V 77 a El <r^-/ jUjl.. 

3 a/s<r&LCLO O-CsCj AoAsvcCCaLa <^cr-C^UH_ 

0J oJCcjSLLZts <**£, 

t£c Oi^^XdyLso-tx^eC^ Pi^jUr^^cEEi^, 

a^t^C aC-*cJSc, /CLtLo<y— 0 iJls 
200 /ULcE <Co MA VSVfLLE oJ-ckLO 

'&-c£cla*. «yiyt2v<^C 9:00 AM. 

4 'TU/ls. / ^9 cCc<j-cll{£o /lEjiLtrCtiA f <ro /O * 6 < uv 6 h 4 

■ < -»v oAl. <-c> v 3~O O /V E 


^OL-1^4^' AC-1+j t£c* 

y Ma YSV/EEET. 


r 


5 (^Ia0~laelP aES 'ItOlL/** ^U^tAC-t^cXJLA oyL. 
su^Lcts A*. 1*^ Ma YSy/lle a~<AdC £) -Ao-laEc^ 


'-HLt 


JlPla&-CaU~> c—' 

J3A?0 1'V/V' 




Plate 63.—A careless Message showing many Plate 64.—How the Message in Plate 63 
common Mistakes. should have been written. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE 63. 

1. What is the number of the message? 

2. Where is this wheat field? 

3. At what time was the message sent? 

4-5. The enemy might send many patrols and spies to learn that the 2nd Bn 4th Infantry was 
in Lowell. This information is too important to risk giving it to the enemy by the capture of 
the message. 

6. How many minutes, and from what time? 

7. How large a body. 

8. What kind of troops? In what direction were they moving? 

9. Where are you and where are these woods? 

10. How many enemy and what kind of troops in Maysville? 

11. Names of places should be printed in CAPITALS. 

12. Where are these woods, how close to Maysville and in what direction? 

13. Where did you obtain this information? 

14. Name should also be PRINTED under signature. 

15. Same as 4-5. 

16. What will you do next. 

17. A sketch or two would help greatly to elucidate this hazy report. (See Plate 65.) 






















PATROL REPORTS 


111 


Patrol Reports. 

Upon his return from a patrol the leader should make a report to his commander. 
The report is usually written. It covers in detail the following points: 

a. Size of patrol. 

b. Name of leader. 

c. Mission. 

d. Time of departure. 

e. Route. 

f. Number of enemy seen. Kind of troops. Where seen. Actions. 

g. The attitude of the enemy. (Alert or careless.) 

h. The condition of the enemy defenses (wire, trenches, etc.). 

i. General character of the ground passed over. 

j. Route of return. 

k. Time of return. 

/. Condition of patrol. (Casualties.) 

m. Any other information of importance, not included in the specific orders to 
the patrol. 

The officer who sends out the patrol will transmit such reports to his next superior 
for the latter’s information. 

Consolidated reports . When several patrols are sent out on similar missions 
their reports may be received by an officer who then makes a consolidated report for 
his superior. If necessary he may take one or more of the patrol leaders, and any 
prisoners brought in, to his commander, to allow the latter to question them. 



Example of the report of a day patrol. The following is an example of the 
report of a day patrol. 

Report of Patrol No. i. 

Co A, 4th Inf. 

1st Plat Co A 
7: 30 PM, June 12, 22. 


ToC 0 Co A. 

Strength. Five men. 

Leader. Corp A (bearer of report). 

Mission. Reconnoiter co zone of action to village of ELLIS inc. 



112 


PATROLING 


Time of dep. i152 PM June 12. 

Route. Down SHELL CREEK to junction, up branch creek to edge of woods, 
to ELLIS and return. 

Time of ret. 6:20 PM. 

Information reported. SHELL CREEK fordable. Woods unoccupied. Limit 
of visibility, 40 yards. ELLIS unoccupied but signs of recent departure of enemy. 
Houses intact, water supply destroyed. Bridge over SHELL CREEK on road to 
ELLIS, strong steel tr., roadway 16 feet, 10 feet above creek. In good condition. 

Enemy seen. Trooper and four horses near bridge, 2:20 PM. Mtd patrol, four 
men passed through ELLIS 3 155 PM. One scout in woods south of town, 5 145 
PM. Captured, with message (herewith). 

Remarks. One written message, forwarded from ELLIS 4:00 PM, received 
4:45 PM. Sent to C O Co A with hostile insignia and scrap of order. 

Prisoner and message found on his person forwarded herewith. No casualties. 

X, Lt. 

The company commander reads the report and questions the prisoner. He then 
sends the report by indorsement to the battalion intelligence officer, with Corp A 
and the prisoner. 

Example of the report of a night mire patrol. The following is an example of 
the form and substance of the report of a night wire patrol, prepared by the leader 
from his notes taken in the dark. 

Report of Wire Patrol No. 1. 

Date. June 12-13, 1922. 

Leader. Lt A, Co A 1st Inf 

Strength. Six men. 

Mission. Inspect wire on front of 1st Bn 1st Inf 

Time of dep. Left trench 10: 05 PM June 12 

Time of ret. Returned to trench 1:17 AM June 13 

Through gaps located. 

Time Azimuth X 

I. 10:30 250° 

250° 

7. 12:48 300° 

295 ° 


Damaged wire located. 

* * * * * * 

4. 11:40 255 0 

****** 

(Azimuth X to pine tree, Y to old 

Remarks. 

a. General condition of wire good. Some wooden pickets rotting. 

b. Inner belt intact except at through gaps reported. 

c. No enemy encountered. 

d. No casualties. 

e. While halted near outer gap at 11: 40 Pvt Black thinks he saw patrol of three 
men moving parallel to wire about 100 yards distant. Pvt Jones heard men moving 
at same time. I neither saw nor heard anything. 

A Lt 

This report is sent by Lt A to his company commander, who reads and forwards 
to Bn 2 (battalion intelligence officer). Bn 2 plots on his battle map anv new infor¬ 
mation contained in the report. 


Azimuth Y 
170° 
175° 


55‘ 

55 ( 


Stake in parapet 
Yes 


Yes 


Remarks 
Inside 
Outside 
About 4 yds. 

wide 
Inside 
Outside 
4 yds. wide 
narrower inside 


120 


No 


Gap 10 yds. wide 
in 2 outer belts 


* 


house, shown on battle map of Bn 2.) 


THE POINT OF THE ADVANCE GUARD 


113 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. How does a patrol send important information to the officer who dispatched 
the patrol ? 

2. Under what circumstances may single messengers be employed, and when 
should two men be sent? 

3. How do two messengers proceed on their return journey? 

4. Do messengers rejoin the patrol? 

5. What kind of information should be at once transmitted by messenger, 
and what should be reported by the patrol leader on his return? 

6. What is a negative message? 

7. When should negative messages be sent? 

8. What are the two classes of messages ? 

9. How much should be included in a verbal message? 

10. What are the relative advantages and disadvantages of written and verbal 
messages ? 

11. What should a man carrying a written message do, if captured by the 
enemy ? 

12. Referring to Plate 63, point out the defects in each part of the message 
shown. Write the message as it should be. 

13. What items should be included in the report made by the patrol leader upon 
his return? 

14. Write out an example of a patrol leader’s report in correct form. 

CHAPTER XX. 

TACTICS OF SECURITY PATROLS. 

Introductory remarks. We have seen that patrols generally may be classified 
into two groups: 

1. Those whose mission is primarily to gather information. 

2. Those whose mission is primarily to provide security for a body of troops, 
either moving or stationary. 

Previous chapters have been devoted to the principles of Scouting and Patroling, 
and the application of these principles primarily to the conduct of information 
patrols. We will now consider the application of these same principles to the 
conduct of security patrols. 

Security patrols are employed by all tactical units: on the march, with the 
advance, rear and flank guards; when stationary in camp or in line of battle, with 
outposts; and during combat, both offensive and defensive. 

The tactics of such security patrols are treated in detail in the course in Tactics. 
We will here consider such details of the tactics of security patrols as should be 
known to officers charged with sending out such patrols, and to the non-commis¬ 
sioned officers or privates who will lead them. 

THE INFANTRY POINT. 

The infantry point is the leading, dismounted element of an advance guard. In 
a small advance guard it consists usually of a single complete squad. There would 
seldom be any occasion to make it smaller. In a large advance guard a platoon 
might be designated as the point. If so it would put out a squad to cover its front. 
Accordingly, the point is ordinarily a squad, and every squad should be trained 
to perform the important duties of the point. Each squad includes an automatic 
rifle. If the point be less than a squad it should still include the automatic rifle. 

The point is a patrol. It is organized as a patrol, marches in patrol formation, 
and conducts its operations in accordance with the principles of patroling. How¬ 
ever, the situation of the point is quite different from that of an independent recon- 
noitering patrol, seeking information. The point is part of a column on the march. 
Therefore, it must maintain a steady rate of advance and follow a prescribed route. 


114 


PATROLING 


Its principal duties are not to gather information and keep concealed, but to push 
resolutely forward and to facilitate the progress and provide for the security of the 

troops in rear. # .... 

Formation. As there are no troops in front to protect the point, it marches in 
some invulnerable patrol formation, with extended distances. As in any patrol the 
leading men observe to the front and flanks, the leader with the main body of the 
patrol follows, and in rear is a “ get-away ” man, who is also charged with watching 
for signals from the rear. Plate 66 indicates two suitable formations of the point. 

With reference to Fig. I: The two leading men are the scouts of the squad. 
One observes to the front and right, one to the front and left. Because they 
are exposed they are separated by a considerable distance, being on opposite sides 
of the road, one of them io to 20 yards in rear of the other. Next in rear is the 
corporal in command. He takes a position where he can himself observe, where he 
is in verbal contact with his scouts, and also with his principal fire power—the auto- 



PL ate 66.— Formation of the 



I F 5cocrt 



IR 5cQLfh 



Plat Sg+ (Leader) 
4FCorp 
3R AR 


o 


O 2 F RG. 

_ 3F Sub AR 

O 2 R 


O 

O 

o 


4 -R 

} Intelligence 
Fbtrol 


Fig. £ 

Infantry Point. 


matic rifleman. The remaining members of the squad (except No. 4, rear rank) 
constitute the main body of the patrol. They are not charged with observation and 
hence keep themselves concealed as much as possible. The distances between them 
may be the same as or less than the distance between scouts. The automatic 
rifleman and rifle grenadier are close to the squad leader, that he may easily direct 
and control their fire. No. 4 of the rear rank (2nd in command) marches in rear. 
It;is his duty to watch the conduct of the men in front, and escape with information 
in case of surprise. He is also charged with watching for signals from the rear. 

It will be noted that the men march alternately on opposite sides of the road. The 
distances given are typical. In very close country, at night or in a fog, all distances 
might be reduced to 5 yards or even less. 









FLANK PATROLING ON THE MARCH 115 

Conduct. The point should remain intact as a unit. It makes no detachments for 
purposes of reconnaissance, which latter duty is the function of the elements in rear. 

If the route is lined by wire fences, two or three members of the point should be 
equipped with wire cutters to open gaps when necessary. 

The point is a feeler to the front. It must remain on the road, unless forced off. 
It performs no flank reconnaissance other than flank observation to the limit of 
vision from the road. It does not halt to investigate buildings, enclosures or woods 
along the route, but pushes resolutely forward. It observes everything within sight 
from the road and exercises such precautions as are compatible with continuous 
advance, but it does not leave the road to investigate and does not halt until com¬ 
pelled to do so by the fire of the enemy. 

On approaching a turn or crest in the road which limits vision to the front, the 
leading men (scouts) move up to the turn or crest and search the country to the 
limit of vision to make reasonably sure that it contains no enemy before the rest of 
the point exposes itself. This procedure is known as “ advance by bounds/’ While 
the point must maintain a continuous advance and a prescribed distance in front of 
the fraction in rear, yet a certain flexibility of gait is permissible, and slight varia¬ 
tions in distance from the party in rear are permissible. This allows of reasonable 
caution in advancing into an exposed terrain. 

The point makes a hasty examination of any bridges along the route to note any 
evidence that they have been tampered with by the enemy, or are for any other 
reason unsafe. If so, word is sent to the rear. 

Any information concerning the enemy is transmitted to the advance party by 
signal or messenger. 

Civilians are not allowed to precede the point. 

During the march the point guides upon and maintains its distance from the 
advance party. It halts upon signal from the rear or when the advance party 
halts. At every halt the point forms as a march outpost for its own security. 

If fired upon by the enemy the point promptly deploys, takes cover and ascertains 
the locality from which the fire is coming. If from the front, or nearly from the 
front, the point promptly attacks, and if possible drives off the hostile party and 
continues the march. If the enemy is in too great strength for the point to drive 
him out, the advance party deploys and attacks. If the hostile fire is from the flank 
the point should not leave the route of march to attack. It deploys on or near the 
road and opens fire. If this is not sufficient to drive off the enemy an attack is made 
by the advance party, the point remaining on the road to oppose any hostile advance 
along it. As soon as the hostile fire is silenced and the attacking troops reassemble, 
the march is promptly resumed. 

The commander of the point transmits to the commander of the advance party 
any information of importance; especially as to the enemy, his position and esti¬ 
mated strength. If any portion of the route is being subjected to artillery fire the 
point makes a detour around it and returns to the road, sending a message to the 
advance party, if necessary. 

Commander. The commander of the point of an advance guard occupies an im¬ 
portant and responsible position. Except in a small command, the responsibility is 
greater than should ordinarily be borne by the corporal of the squad which forms 
the point. When this is the case a sergeant should be detailed as commander. The 
section leader of the leading section, one squad of which forms the point, should not 
be separated from the bulk of his section. The platoon sergeant of the leading 
platoon, who has no regular command, is the logical man to command the point. 

FLANK PATROLING ON THE MARCH. 

Dismounted patrols sent out from a column on the march cannot do more than 
afford reasonable security against rifle fire, or an attack by hostile infantry. To 
provide security against artillery fire other measures, ordinarily beyond the power 
of a small advance guard, must be taken. 


116 


PATROLING 


I 


The advance guard and its component units must not delay the march by overly 
cautious and excessive patroling. However, the fact that cavalry and aeroplanes are 
reconnoitering at a distance does not relieve the advance guard of its duty of 

nearby reconnaissance. # . 

The patrols of an advance guard are combat, covering or security patrols. Such 
information as they seek is only that which is necessary for security. They conduct 
their operations in an aggressive manner, and usually fire on any enemy seen. 

The decision as to when to send out flank patrols, where to send them, the 
strength of the patrol, the orders to be given its leader, etc., is a responsibility of 
the commander of the fraction sending out the patrol. Actually, the duty may be 
delegated in part to a competent subordinate officer. 


. o 


o 


^ \ v) « *'/ / •’ . ^ : & 4 

% yin'* ’ & v 

o , • * //• ° ^ 

•,$ » \ ,a( I ^ V '* * ’ 


.5 




$ 


V ■ :Q \f " • V 

&y * y ^.' W' ^ N 3 a 

/ C3 -V > : A\ • - • v3» •. • . 



Conneclinq 

r ucs 


The wood is reconnoitered on a broad 
front,distance between men varying 
according to visibility and difficulty 
of maintaining contact In addition to 
reconnaissance shown small patrols 
are sent well out on both flanks 


Fig. 1 RECONNAISSANCE 
OF A WOOD 



Upon sighting the enemy the point takes 
cover in suitable formation for observation 
and resistance The leader signals to the 
rear,"Enemy in sight (or in force),the signal 
being repeated, if necessary by connecting 
files. A messenger is sent to rear with re¬ 
port of information, which cannot be 
signaled.Subsequent action according 
to developments. 

Fig.2 ACTION UPON SIGHTING 
ENEMY 


Plate 67.—Patrol Tactics, Security Patrols, Open Warfare. Point of Advance Guard. 


Nearby patroling is not as a rule performed by causing men to march through the 
country alongside the road. Usually they would thus be able to see little that could 
not be seen from the road itself, and would thus be useless. The work would be 
very exhausting, and the patrols could not keep up with the column. Nevertheless, 
every locality along the route from which effective rifle fire might be delivered 
against the column should be investigated. 

It is not always necessary to visit the suspicious locality itself, as some favorable 
point may afford a sufficient view of this and other localities. 

The officer who sends out the patrols must constantly view the country through 
which he is passing, select the favorable vantage points which afford a view of all 
suspicious terrain, and send patrols by the shortest line to such points. For example: 





FLANK PATROLING ON THE MARCH 


117 


If there be a crest a few hundred yards from the road, affording a view of a wide 
valley on the flank, an occasional patrol sent to this crest would make it impossible 
for the enemy to occupy or approach it without detection. 

If there be branch roads leading to the flank, these are of course utilized in send¬ 
ing out flank patrols, which would thus be able to go to a greater distance than 
would be practicable in moving across country. 

Woods, buildings and inclosures must be actually visited and examined, as it is of 
course impossible, by viewing them from a distance, to make certain that they are 
not occupied by the enemy. 

If there be roads parallel to the route of march, on either flank, and at a suitable 
distance, patrols may be sent along such roads. These patrols should occasionally 
rejoin, report and be relieved by fresh patrols. 

In passing through a wood or agricultural crops which might afford concealment 
for riflemen or machine gunners (such as corn in the shock), the advance may be 
preceded by a line of scouts, or skirmishers at extended intervals, as far to the 
flanks as necessary to discover any enemy in a position to fire on the column. The 
visibility in such terrain is always restricted, so that fire from any considerable dis¬ 
tance is not to be expected. The intervals between scouts should not exceed the 
range of visibility in the wood. 

In passing a defile its flanks should be thoroughly reconnoitered before any con¬ 
siderable body of troops is allowed to enter. The point pushes through promptly, 
and reconnoiters the outlet and the terrain beyond. The advance party sends patrols 
to both flanks. 

The usual method of flank reconnaissance, accordingly, is to select the natural 
points of observation, and to send patrols from the column, by the shortest route 
across country to such points. The patrols remain in observation as long as 
directed; for example, until the reserve has passed or until the head of the main 
body is opposite. They then return to the column by the shortest route and report 
to the first officer they meet. They rejoin their own command during a halt 
(especially the long halt at noon), or if very far to the rear, at the end of the march. 

The strength of such patrols varies with the distance to which they are sent, the 
time they are to remain out, the importance of their mission, the probability of 
encountering the enemy and being compelled to fight, the necessity for sending back 
messages, etc. Two men would be the minimum and it would seldom be necessary 
to send more than a squad. 

The function of these patrols is to observe and reconnoiter for any signs of the 
enemy, to signal or send a messenger in case important information is gained, to fire 
upon and disperse small parties of the enemy, and to give prompt warning and 
delay the advance of any larger party. 

The unit must never be halted for the purpose of sending out patrols, though the 
regular halts may of course be utilized. 

Men in the columns are detailed to watch for signals from the patrols. 

The patrols are organized and their leaders designated in advance, and they are 
then sent out successively. 

The officer sending out the patrol tells the leader where to go, what route to 
follow (if necessary), exactly what to look for and to do, signals or messages 
expected, when to return to the column, and when to rejoin. 

The orders to a flank patrol given by the advance party commander would be 
about as follows: “Jones, do you see that wooded hill? (pointing). Take your 
patrol there, occupy the hill, reconnoiter the woods, and view the terrain beyond. 
Fire on any of the enemy who approach the column. If they are in force, delay 
their advance, signal back and send a messenger. Remain there until the next halt 
(until such time, until the tail of the reserve has cleared this point, etc.). Then 
return to the column and report to the nearest officer. Rejoin us at the next halt 
(at the end of the march, when directed, etc.). Move fast but don’t exhaust your 
men. Go at once.” 


118 


PATROLING 


COMPANY OF INFANTRY AS AN 
GUARD TO A BATTALION 

Point: , 

serceant and 
one squad. 


Patrol 

on hill civinc 
view to nortn 
and west 



Do 0>C) 

Od 


(jt 

'W&frol 

returninc from 
small Wood 


aauaiion «►— n * I 

commander u t c* Pot ro I 

, ^^«ft d 1 ^ re ' n ^ n5 i n , 
14 l dl S e wood until 







^( 5*0 

»»?,??■> i# 


a 


G>' 


a> | 

3 • ® o •* ^ 
,Qi® 3 o •*.% 

taro o • • '3% 




or® ap^s e 
$«& bod > 
Sc? 


mam 


a 

»ir: 

. * t 

or 


Main body- 

battalion (less 
one company) 


Patrol (from adv. 
cd.) returning 
from wood 


Note: Patrols- sent ahead 


to critical 


sen 

>ts. 


poim 

Not drawn to scale. 


Plate 68. 


















FLANK PATROLING ON THE MARCH 


PATROL TACTICS 

SECURITY PATROLS - OPEN WARFARE 

FLANK PATROLS ON THE MARCH. 


FIG.l FLANK RECONNAISSANCE IN 
DIVERSIFIED,CLOSE TERRAIN, STAND- 
'' INC CROPS, WOODS,UNDERBRUSH etc 

IN 

Head of the. 


advance ^uord 


• • 


<*• 


Hank patrols reconnoiter on a broad 
front at such intervals as necessary to 
maintain contact.. As procres's is more 
difficult than on the road the patrol 
replaced as necessary. 


>are 


FlG.2- FLANK RECON NAI55 ANCE 
IN OPEN TERRAIN 

im 


- Head of lb* 
lodvoncegjanJ 


m 


Patrols are sent to the flanks fpro 
vafion from commanding points o 
ruin which cannot be seen from 
of march. 


FIG.3 CONDUCT OF FLANK PATROL 
IN OPEN TERRAIN 

Advance tjuard 


Main body 


The patrol leader, on reachinc, the designated 
locality, taKes a position favorable for observa 
tion. The patrol surrounds the leader to 
$uard him From surprise and transmit his 
signals, 

FIG.4 RELIEF OF FLANK PATROL 

. . ♦ mm 

idvance cuard . cpssr# 


ittain bod> 


Patrol has been sent to hill A. Astheadvance 
party approaches hill B a new patrol is 
sent to tbar locality. When it has taken 
station the patrol at A is relieved and re¬ 
joins the reserve or mam body. 


Plate 69 

















120 


PATROLING 


The patrol leader conducts his operations in accordance with the principles of 
patroling heretofore discussed, except that excessive caution and concealment are 
of less importance than in the case of an independent reconnoitering patrol. 

When deemed necessary by the battalion intelligence officer or his representative, 
intelligence personnel may accompany any patrol sent out by the advance party or 
support. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is a security patrol? 

2. By what units and under what conditions are security patrols employed ? 

3. What is the infantry point? 

4. Wffiat is the usual strength of the infantry point? 

5. What are the principal duties of the point ? 

6. What are the usual formations of the point? Illustrate by diagram, giving 
distances. 

7. Discuss the duties of the various members. 

8. Does the point ever: 

a. Leave the road ? 

b. Reconnoiter localities to the flank? 

c. Halt to investigate buildings, etc ? 

d. Make detachments for any purpose? 

9. Does the point employ the advance by bounds? If so, how? 

10. On what other body does the point regulate its march and how? 

11. How does the point communicate with the advance party in rear of it? 

12. What information of special importance does the point transmit? 

13. What does the point do if fired upon by the enemy: (a) From the front; 
(b) From a flank? 

14. Who should be the leader of the point ? 

15. What measure of security can be afforded by dismounted patrols sent to 
the flanks by a column on the march ? 

16. To what extent do such patrols seek information? 

17. Do flank patrols of a column march through the fields alongside the road? 
If not what is their procedure? 

18. What localities should be reconnoitered by flank patrols? Do the patrols 
actually visit such localities? 

19. How are branch and parallel roads utilized in flank patroling. 

20. What determines the strength of a flank patrol, and what are the usual limits 
of strength for a foot patrol. 

21. What precautions should be taken in passing a defile? 

22. What precautions should be taken in passing through a wood or standing 
crops ? 

23. When and how do flank patrols rejoin the column, and what do they do 
thereafter? 

24. Does a column on the march halt for the purpose of sending out flank 
patrols ? 

25. How is communication maintained between flank patrols and the main 
column ? 

26. What orders should be given to the leader of a flank patrol, and by whom 
are they given ? Give an example of such orders. 

27. How does the leader of a flank patrol organize his patrol and conduct his 
operations ? 

CHAPTER XXI. 

TACTICS OF SECURITY PATROLS (Continued). 

OUTPOST PATROLS. 

For purposes of local observation alone an outpost consisting of a line of skir¬ 
mishers would be the simplest and most effective. Such a cordon would have two 
great disadvantages: First it would be too weak to oppose an effective resistance 
to a determined advance, and second it would be wasteful of men and would 


OUTPOST PATROLS 


121 



O 

N 

W 

H 

5 

Ph 


































122 


PATROLING 


impose a great burden on the command. Accordingly, to fulfill its two functions of 
observation and resistance the outpost is organized as a line of resisting detach¬ 
ments with observing and listening groups in front. 

These observing groups or outguards may be placed so close together that the 
enemy cannot pass between them without being seen or heard. This is called the 
“ cordon system ” of outposts. Or the outguards may be placed at the more 
important localities only, the unoccupied intervals being guarded (usually at night 
only) by constant patroling. This is known as the “ patrol system.” 

As a rule, both observation and patroling are employed, the latter being especially 
required by night. 

But an outpost thus organized, however tight it might be against penetration by 
hostile patrols, is incomplete in that it fails to establish contact with the enemy 
(unless he is very close), and fails to give warning of his approach until he is within 
sight of or, at night or in a very close country, actually upon the outguards. 

The greatest measure of security is afforded by establishing contact with the 
enemy, whereby his position, strength, movements and often his intentions become 
known, and surprise impossible. 

Accordingly, in addition to the stationary observers and listeners and the local 
patrols, every outpost should send other patrols to the front or towards the enemy, 
to gain touch with him if possible, or at least to give warning of his advance a con¬ 
siderable time before he arrives within view or hearing of the line of outguards. 

The patrols which pass between the elements of the outposts are known as visiting 
patrols. Those which investigate the terrain and situation to the front are known 
as reconnoitering patrols. (See Plate 70.) Every outpost should employ both 
visiting and reconnoitering patrols. 

The distance to the front to which reconnaissance is conducted will vary witlv 
the size and composition of the force. A large force requires more time to pre¬ 
pare to meet the enemy than does a small one, and accordingly should receive earlier 
warning of a hostile advance. The commander of a large force, upon halting, will 
usually send a number of mounted officers’ patrols well to the front, to reconnoiter 
the country and gather information concerning the enemy, as a guide for his future 
plans. Such patrols are independent of the outpost, as the function of the latter is 
security rather than information for future guidance. 

Visiting Patrols. 

These are small patrols of two or three men, which reconnoiter the intervals and 
maintain connection between the stationary groups of the outpost. The reserve 
sends patrols to make the rounds of the supports, and each support sends patrols 
to make the rounds of it own outguards and to connect with the immediately 
adjacent outguards on each flank. 

Patrols from the supports pass along the line of outguards, visiting each in turn. 
Usually they do not go beyond this line, but may, when necessary, make visits to 
special localities immediately in front of the line. The patrols verify the presence 
of the outguards at their assigned stations, reconnoiter the intervals, return to the 
support and report the results of their investigation. These patrols arc commanded 
by a non-commissioned officer or an experienced private. They are sent out at 
intervals of from 30 minutes to 1 hour, and three or more full reliefs should be 
provided. As the distances to be traversed, within the sector of any one support, 
are limited, and as the patrols must move across country by night, foot patrols are 
usually preferable to mounted. These patrols send no messages, except in grave 
emergency, but make report to the officer in charge of patroling upon completing 
their round. 

The supports may also, when necessary, send visiting patrols at regular intervals, 
or occasionally, to the adjacent supports on either flank. 

The reserve sends visiting patrols, every hour or every 2 hours, to each support 
of the outpost or of its particular sector thereof. In a large outpost these patrols 
may be mounted. 


OUTPOST VISITING PATROLS 


123 








124 


PATROLING 


When reliable means of intercommunication have been established between 
reserve and supports these visiting patrols (from reserve to supports) may be 
dispensed with. 

Visiting patrols may also be sent by the reserve, or by units in the main body, to 
important detached posts. 

Visiting patrols will usually be unnecessary during daylight, when the adjacent 
outguards are within sight of each other, and can see all of the intervals between 
them. Accordingly visiting patrols usually start their rounds at dusk, and continue 
until broad daylight. In very close (wooded and diversified) country or in fog, 
patroling by day may be necessary. 

Visiting patrols should usually approach an outguard from the rear. They 
exchange information with the outguard on all matters which may be of importance. 

Visiting patrols serve not only to gather information, but their continual visits 
also insure vigilance on the part of the sentries of the outguard. 

Both reconnoitering and visiting patrols which are to go out at night, should 
have passed over their routes by daylight, so as to be familiar therewith. 

Portions of the outpost, especially on the flanks, where the danger of attack is 
relatively small, may be guarded by patroling alone, supports and outguards being 
omitted. 

Visiting patrols of an outpost operate chiefly by night. But (unlike the night 
patrols hitherto discussed) it is not their special function to gain contact with and 
gather information concerning the enemy. 

If a visiting patrol consists of 4 or more men it is organized with a point, flankers 
and getaway man, like other patrols. If, as is usually the case, the patrol consists 
of 2 or 3 men each must perform more than one duty. For example if there be 2 
men one may observe to the front and right, and one to the front and left, both 
looking occasionally to the rear. 

As there is always a possibility of a visiting patrol encountering the enemy it 
employs the usual simple tactics of night patrols, including the use of sound 
signals (Halt, Forward, Check-up, Danger, etc.) and simple plans to be carried out 
if attacked by the enemy. 

A visiting patrol, as it performs a routine duty and must complete its round 
without undue delay, cannot afford to spend much time in checking its route and 
position. It seldom employs a compass but depends upon landmarks and general 
sense of direction. The patrol should pass over and familiarize itself with its route 
by daylight so that it can easily find its way in the dark. In very difficult country 
wires or tapes may be strung between outguards to guide the patrols. 

Outpost Reconnoitering Patrols. 

These are patrols sent beyond the lines of observation to reconnoiter in the direc¬ 
tion of the enemy and to gain contact with him when practicable. They should 
generally consist of at least three men, and if sent to a considerable distance (more 
than a mile beyond the line of outguards), if in hostile country or if messages are 
to be sent back, the strength is increased accordingly. A patrol greater in strength 
than 8 to 10 men would seldom be employed. They are not required to delay the 
advance of an enemy, but may have to fight to gain information, or for their own 
protection. Their operations are conducted in accordance with the principles of 
Scouting and Patroling heretofore discussed. 

Reconnoitering patrols are sent out by supports to investigate the foreground in 
their own sectors. These patrols are usually, like visiting patrols, a matter of 
routine. They should be organized in reliefs, and the round of any one patrol 
should generally be limited to 2 hours, and should seldom exceed 3 hours. If com¬ 
posed of dismounted men their maximum rate of travel would seldom exceed 
2 miles per hour, in view of the necessity for reconnaissance, occasional halts, etc. 
Accordingly the distance beyond the line of resistance to which they can go is 
limited to 3 miles and would usually be less than 2 miles. 


OUTPOST RECONNOITERING PATROLS 


125 


Reconnoitering patrols may also be sent out by the reserve. They would be of 
greater strength and have a greater radius of action than those of the supports, and 
would almost invariably consist of mounted men. They would usually be given a 
very definite mission, such as to proceed to a certain locality and ascertain whether 
any enemy is there. Ordinarily the patrols of the reserve are not organized in 
reliefs like those of the supports. Important special patrols may be commanded 
by an officer. Routine reconnoitering patrols of three to five men are commanded 
by non-commissioned officers. 

Reconnoitering patrols, especially mounted patrols which during darkness are 
limited to the roads, can accomplish relatively little at night. Accordingly such 
patroling is usually omitted or considerably reduced between dusk and daylight, 
except in stabilized positions where the lines are in close contact. 

Reconnoitering patrols on passing out through the line of observation should visit 
the nearest outguard and learn from its commander or sentry all pertinent informa¬ 
tion as to the enemy, the terrain in the foreground, etc., in possession of the out¬ 
guard. The patrol should inform the outguard as to the direction in which they 
are going, and if returning by the same route, the probable time of their return. 
This is to guard against the patrol being taken for an enemy and fired upon by the 
outguards. In returning through the line the patrol is halted at the sentry’s 
challenge or when close to the outguard, and the patrol leader goes forward and 
identifies himself. 

Routine patrols going a limited distance beyond the line of observation usually 
send no messages. More distant patrols may send back messages as necessary. 
The leader of every patrol makes a report to the officer designated to receive reports 
upon his return. 

Special mounted patrols may observe the flanks of the enemy’s outpost line, but 
usually no attempt will be made to pierce the hostile line of resistance in order to 
gain information concerning the main force unless special orders to that effect 
have been received. Information concerning the enemy’s main body is generally 
gathered by the air service, independent cavalry, or by special officers’ patrols sent 
out by the supreme commander, or by his direction, and by other agencies of the 
general intelligence service. These patrols have no connection with the regular 
outpost, the duty of the latter being primarily security, rather than information. 

The organization, equipment, formations and conduct of the reconnoitering 
patrols of an outpost are in all respects similar to those of other reconnoitering 
patrols, as described in previous chapters. These patrols will frequently have 
occasion to send back negative messages, that is information that the enemy is not 
at certain localities. 

Contact reconnoitering patrols are in effect mobile observation groups. They 
move forward as reconnoitering patrols until they locate the enemy, whereupon 
they take up good positions and keep him under observation. 

One or two men of such a patrol must watch the enemy, other members watch 
the flanks and rear of the patrol’s position, to guard against surprises by enemy 
patrols. Still other members of the patrol are held ready to act as messengers 
back to the outpost. 

Combat patrols. An outpost, especially if in close contact with the enemy, may 
send out covering combat patrols for the purpose of discovering and driving off 
reconnoitering patrols of the enemy. Such patrols conduct themselves like other 
combat patrols (see following chapter). They seek the enemy and fire upon him 
whenever he is seen. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Why are patrols essential to an outpost? 

2. Why is it desirable to gain touch with the enemy and how is this accom¬ 
plished ? 

3. What are the two classes of patrols employed by an outpost, and what, 
briefly, are the functions of each ? 


126 


PATROLING 


4. What is the usual strength of visiting patrols ? 

5. What is the route of a visiting patrol and what duties does it perform? 

6. Why are foot patrols preferable to mounted, as visiting patrols in an outpost ? 

7. How often are visiting patrols sent out? 

8. During what time of the day are visiting patrols employed? Why? 

9. What is the formation of a visiting patrol of four men? Of two men? 

10. What signals and pre-arranged plans are used by visiting patrols? 

11. How does a visiting patrol familiarize itself with its route? 

12. Do visiting patrols use the compass to maintain direction ? 

13. What is the usual strength of outpost reconnoitering patrols? 

14. How long should a routine foot reconnoitering patrol remain out, and how 
far beyond the line of outguards does it usually go ? 

15. Do outpost patrols send messages? 

16. Discuss the organization, formations and conduct of outpost reconnoitering 
patrols. 

17. What do outpost reconnoitering patrols do upon gaining contact with the 
enemy ? 

18. What are outpost combat patrols, and how do they conduct their operations ? 

CHAPTER XXII. 

COMBAT PATROLS. 

When employed. Units engaged in combat gain contact with and gather 
information concerning the enemy, and provide for the security of their own fronts, 
and especially their flanks, by the extensive use of scouts and patrols. The func¬ 
tions of the scout pairs in attack and defense have been discussed under Scouting. 

The patrols employed during combat and preliminary thereto are known as 
combat patrols, both because they are used during the engagement and also because 
they attack the enemy whenever necessary to the security of the command which 
they are covering. Such patrols should never be omitted at any stage of the 
combat. 

During the approach march or advance into combat each company or platoon 
covers its front by small patrols, usually consisting entirely of scouts. The duty 
of such patrols is similar to that of the point of an advance guard with an aggres¬ 
sive mission, except that they do not move on one road, but usually in the character¬ 
istic diamond formation, or as a thin line of skirmishers. 

COMBAT FLANK RECONNAISSANCE. 

The flanks are the most vulnerable portions of a unit, either deployed or in 
column. Irrespective of any other measures which may have been taken, every 
unit is responsible for the security of its own flanks. For the fire units (squad and 
section) the measures of security are usually limited to flank observation by the 
scouts in front, and by the leaders and the men on the flanks of the line. In case 
of a threat against their flanks these small units can readily make provisions to 
meet it. They are, moreover, protected by the presence of the other units, close 
in rear or on the flanks. 

Flank protection for the platoon in combat is provided by the presence of the 
support section close in rear of the leading section. In case both sections are 
deployed and engaged, scouts may be placed on the exposed flank. 

The company and larger units protect their flanks by the use of flank combat 
patrols. If a flank be greatly exposed, as when there is no other unit in that direc¬ 
tion, the higher command may make special provisions for security. In the absence 
of such provisions the use of small combat patrols at all stages of the combat is a 
matter of routine. The commander of the flank unit of a general line is responsible 
for the security of that flank. In the absence of any special orders from higher 
command he will take such measures as he deems necessary. 


FLANK COMBAT PATROLS 


127 


Unless the exposure be great, a small unit will not ordinarily detach any con¬ 
siderable portion of its strength for the purpose of flank protection. Flank patrols 
provide protection primarily by giving prompt warning of any danger from the 
flank, in order that measures may be taken to meet it. The strength of such patrols 
might be about as follows: For a platoon, 2 men to a squad, for a company 4 men 
to a section, for a battalion, a section to a platoon. This will depend upon the 
extent of exposure. If more than this is considered necessary it should generally 
be provided for in the orders of higher command. 

These flank patrols move slightly in rear of the assault echelon of the unit. They 
should be able to see their own command, and if possible should establish contact 
with other units or similar patrols from other units, on the flank. Their distance 
from the flank will depend on the terrain and the strength of the unit. It should 


ENEMY 


| F R O N 


V III III v 6 

X * / 

X CO.5 B 


o o 
0.0 0,0 






/ 


,o° 


* 


\ 

<*Vo\ 1 ST 

^ c 0.\ 

**//**£ N 


o Flank patrol 

010 from adjacent 
^ battalion 

\ 4 = / 

\ C O Ci A /Patrol sent o 
\ * /from support- ° 

^ II /platoon of com- 0 A 

' ||/ pany to operate ^ 0 

on flank of company 

' ' s Battalion 

^/'patrol sent 
/ irom reserve 
/Co.(C) to operate 
in interval to right 


6 ^ III 111/ 

CO. u « ----- - 

/f rom su 

11/ 


.0^ 


ir 


of battalion. 


BATTALION 


< 11 

'V^ o> co.||6 || c. 




Vlk^ ]l 


Plate 72.— Flank Combat Patrols. 


be such that they can prevent the command from being taken by surprise in flank, 
either fire alone or counter attack. In a dense wood this might be not over 30 to 
40 yards. In open terrain it might be several hundred yards. A large unit may be 
subjected to rifle fire at ranges of 1000 yards where the terrain permits, and it 
requires more time to prepare to meet attack than does a small unit. 

The flank patrols will seek positions on elevated ground, where they can see their 
units and observe the terrain to the flanks. They keep pace with the advance of the 
unit, moving from one favorable observation point to another. A patrol which can 
see nothing that cannot be seen by the unit itself is not very useful as a measure of 
security. 

Combat patrols are usually complete squads or half squads, rather than selected 
men as would ordinarily be the case in a reconnoitering patrol. The formation of a 
combat patrol is that of any body of troops on the march. The point (or advance 
party) consists of the scouts, who are specially trained in reconnaissance. Next in 
rear of the scouts is the squad or patrol leader, who can here best control his squad. 
Near the squad leader is his principal fire power, the automatic rifleman. He should 
not be used for reconnoitering, but should be held as a reserve of fire power, close 
to and under the control of the squad leader. The “ get-away man/’ usually the 
second in command, is to the rear of the squad. 





128 


PATROLING 


Unlike reconnoitering patrols, whose function is solely to gather information, 
flank combat patrols will fight whenever necessary for the security of the command. 
They will fire upon and drive back small patrols of the enemy endeavoring to gain 
the flanks of the unit. In case of the approach of a unit of greater strength than the 
patrol, the latter will promptly signal or dispatch a messenger to the unit, giving 
warning of the impending danger, and will then seek a favorable position and by 
its fire delay the enemy’s advance. 

A man should be detailed on the flank of the unit to watch for signals from the 
flank patrol. 


Flank Covering Detachments. 

For a small unit ample warning of danger from the flank will usually be sufficient, 
as little time is required to prepare to meet it. For a large unit in an exposed 
situation more than this may be necessary. When this is the case the flank combat 
patrols may be of such a strength as to have considerable power of resistance,. in 
which case they are called flank covering detachments. They may include machine 
guns in addition to infantry. A large flank covering detachment is a flank guard, 
and in the case of a large unit may include all arms. 

The covering detachment proceeds to a locality favorable for observation and 
defense, and advances by bounds from one such locality to another, keeping pace 
with the progress of the command. It moves in the formation usual for all units, 
that is, with a small advance guard and flank patrols of its own. The main body of 
the detachment is held in readiness to meet an attack. 

A flank detachment may be sent for the express purpose of concerted participa¬ 
tion in the attack at some stage of the action, for example, to envelop the flank of 
the enemy. In such case it should have a strength appropriate to its mission, and 
may include machine guns and other accompanying weapons. 

The maneuver intervals between the units in line are covered by combat patrols or 
detachments of a size dependent upon the terrain, the width of the interval and the 
size of units. 

Adjacent units. In a general line of battle adjacent units mutually protect each 
other’s flanks. To insure such protection contact between the units should be 
maintained. Flank contact patrols are used for this purpose. 

Summary. Combat reconnaissance to the front and flanks is continuous by all 
units. For the smaller units this involves constant observation by the leader in 
person, by scouts and men on the flanks of the line. For the larger units it involves 
the use of combat patrols to give warning, or detachments to offer resistance, 
according to the size of the unit and the extent of exposure. 

The following examples will serve to illustrate the characteristic procedure of 
combat patrols. 

Patrol preceding a Support Unit in Enveloping Attack. 

When, during an attack, a section or platoon in the assault echelon is held up by 
a hostile resistance, a support section or platoon is sent through a maneuver interval 
by the best covered route available, to a position on the flank of the hostile area of 
resistance, to attack by fire or assault or both. From 4 to 6 of the platoon scouts 
are designated as a patrol to precede the unit, covering it during its advance to its 
position. 

The leader at once organizes his patrol in diamond formation, with point, 
flankers and get-away man who, in this case, is the connecting file between the 
patrol and the unit following. 

The leader very briefly explains to his men the mission of the patrol, what is 
known as to the enemy, the plan of the unit, the locality to be reached and the 
route to be followed. The patrol may be required simply to lead the way to the 
designated locality or it may be required also to locate the enemy and designate 
his position by tracer bullets or otherwise. (See Musketrv). 


COMBAT PATROLS IN MANEUVER INTERVALS 


129 


The leader controls the movements of his men by simple arm signals or by 
spoken command. 

As it approaches the enemy the patrol moves with great caution, utilizing all 
available cover, if necessary creeping or crawling. 

Upon reaching the designated position or, if no exact position has been desig¬ 
nated, when the leader believes the point has reached the most advanced fire 
position which it is practicable to attain, the patrol is halted. The flankers work 
forward on a line with the point, and the entire patrol deploys on the line selected, 
at wide intervals, covering a front about equal to the deploying front of the unit 
following. 

The scouts closely observe the enemy and prepare to open fire and outline his 
position as the unit following deploys on the line. 

The patrol leader remains in a covered position in rear of his patrol where he 
can see the enemy, his patrol and the advancing unit. As the leader of the unit 
arrives the patrol leader points out the line occupied by his scouts and assists in 
directing the squads to their proper places on this line. 

COMBAT PATROLS IN MANEUVER INTERVALS. 

Assault units in the attack usually deploy with open or unoccupied intervals 
between adjacent units, for example, 150 to 200 yds. between companies, 300 to 
400 yds. between battalions. These are known as maneuver intervals, and their 
purpose is to permit the maneuver of supports and reserves, especially for envelop¬ 
ing attacks. 

As we have just noted, all units cover their flanks and maintain contact with 
adjacent units by the use of patrols which occupy these maneuver intervals. 

Example of the Conduct of a Flank Combat Patrol. 

Referring now to Plate 73, the battalion commander of the 1st Battalion orders 
the commander of the reserve company (Co C) to send flank combat patrols of one 
squad each to operate in the maneuver intervals on either flank of the battalion. 

Orders to the patrol leader. The company commander designates one squad of 
his 3rd platoon as the right combat patrol. He tells the squad leader what he 
knows of the enemy, for example that he “ occupies the woods and hill to our front 
with infantry and machine guns, etc.” He indicates the position of the flank of 
the battalion and tells the patrol (squad) leader how great an interval there should 
be between the battalion and the next battalion on the right, and about where the 
flank of the neighboring battalion should be (in the wood). He directs the patrol 
to operate approximately abreast of the position of the reserve company or slightly 
in advance thereof. He may indicate to the patrol leader a suitable route to his 
initial position. Finally he informs him where the battalion and company com¬ 
mand posts are (pointing them out). 

Duties of the Patrol Leader. 

In this situation the patrol leader is charged with the following duties: 

1. He must operate in the designated interval, keeping pace with the advance 
(or retirement) of the battalion. 

2. He must keep in sight of the flank of his battalion, or know exactly where it is 
at all times. This means the flank of the assault echelon. 

3. He must know the location of the battalion command post and the best route 
by which a messenger can reach it. 

4. He must be within sight or know the location at all times of the flank of the 
assault echelon of the adjacent battalion. 

5. He must establish and maintain touch and co-operate with other patrols in 
the same interval, especially: 

a. The corresponding patrol from the adjacent battalion. 

b. The smaller patrol on the same flank of the nearest assault company 
of his own battalion. 


130 


PATROLING 























CONDUCT OF A FLANK COMBAT PATROL 


131 


c. The corresponding patrol on the near flank of the assault company of 
the adjacent battalion. 

6. He must know the position of the enemy opposite the interval. 

7. He must observe and send word promptly to battalion headquarters of any 
undue increase in the width of the interval between the two battalions. 

8. He must likewise observe and give notice should the advance of the adjacent 
battalion be delayed for any reason, thus exposing the flank of his own battalion. 

9. He must promptly report the presence of any enemy in the interval or in 
any position from which he threatens the flank of the battalion. 

10. He must deploy, open fire and check the advance of any hostile troops moving 
against the flank of his own or the adjacent battalion. 

11. He must be on the lookout for and take prompt advantage of any oppor¬ 
tunities to deliver oblique fire against enemy troops in front of his own or the 
adjacent battalion. 

These important duties call for unremitting vigilance and the exercise of a con¬ 
siderable degree of judgment and initiative on the part of the patrol leader. 

Conduct of the Patrol. 

Having received his orders and selected his route, the patrol leader moves rapidly 
through the woods (Plate 73) to a position a little to the left of the middle of the 
maneuver interval, and abreast of or slightly in advance of the reserve company. 

He forms his patrol in diamond formation, with two men in the point, two in 
each flanking group, and one man in rear available as messenger. 

The point is charged with the duty of observing to the front, and seeing the 
enemy positions. The left flank group observes the flank of the battalion and 
establishes contact with the patrol on the flank of the adjacent assault company. 
The right flank group observes the flank of the adjacent battalion and establishes 
contact with the patrols sent out by that battalion and by its left assault company. 

Each of these groups, while maintaining its proper relative position, moves to a 
locality where it is under shelter from fire and able to see the things it is required 
to see. 

The leader takes a position from which he can see and direct the elements of 
his patrol, and also see as much as possible of the terrain, especially to the front. 

The remaining man takes station in rear of the leader. He observes his leader 
and the positions of battalion headquarters and the headquarters of the reserve 
company, and from time to time plans the routes he will follow if sent to either of 
these places with a message. 

The leader regulates the advance of the patrol, which moves by relatively short 
bounds from one favorable position to the next, keeping pace with the advance of 
the battalion. It seldom moves as a body, but usually one or two men at a time. 

If the point discovers a hostile machine gun at Y (Plate 73) which is firing into 
the adjacent battalion, the patrol promptly opens fire on it with all available men. 
Similarly for any enemy discovered at X, firing on its own battalion. Such fire 
being oblique and frequently coming as a surprise, will often be very effective. 

If a hostile attack is launched from the wood Y, the patrol leader will at once 
warn the battalion, form line facing the hostile attack, and oppose it stoutly to the 
last man of his patrol. 

If the interval between the two battalions is greatly widened, or if the flank of his 
own battalion is exposed by reason of the failure of the adjacent battalion to keep 
pace with it, the patrol leader sends a message to the battalion commander advising 
him of this condition. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. How do units in combat gain contact with the enemy and provide for their 
own security ? 

2. What are combat patrols? 

3. How are patrols employed by platoons or companies in the approach march 
into combat? What are the general duties of such patrols? 


132 


PATROLING 


4. What is the usual strength and composition of the combat patrols of infantry 
platoons and companies ? 

5. What is combat flank reconnaissance, and why is it important? 

6. How does the platoon protect its flanks during combat? 

7. What is the usual position of flank combat patrols with reference to the 
unit which sends them out? 

8. What effect has the nature of the terrain on the positions of the combat 
patrols ? 

9. What kind of positions should flank combat patrols occupy? 

10. What is the usual formation of a flank patrol? 

11. What do the patrols do upon the approach of an enemy patrol? Of a larger 
body of the enemy? 

12. What are flank covering detachments, when are they employed, and how do 
they resemble flank patrols? 

13. How do adjacent units in line of battle maintain contact with each other 
across the intervals between them ? 

14. Describe the procedure of a patrol detailed to cover the movement of a sup¬ 
port section or platoon to a position on the flank of the enemy. 

15. What would be the strength, composition and formation of such a patrol 
covering the movement of a section? 

16. What does the patrol do upon reaching the fire position to be occupied by 
its unit? 

17. What are maneuver intervals? 

18. What orders would be given to a patrol designated to operate in a maneuver 
interval? 

19. What are the duties of the leader of such a patrol? 

20. How does the patrol maintain contact with the adjacent unit on the flank? 

21. What messages does the patrol leader send to his commander? 

22. Under what circumstances does the patrol fire on the enemy? 

23. Illustrate by diagram the formation, and explain the functions of each of the 
elements of a flank combat patrol. 

24. What determines the post of the patrol leader ? 

25. What action does the patrol leader take in the event of a great increase in the 
width of the interval between his own and the adjacent unit? 

Publisher’s Note. 

The many references in this text to Map Reading and Sketching, Infantry Drill 
Regulations, and Tactics, indicate the necessity for a successful patrol leader to be 
informed in these subjects. 

The reader is therefore referred to the texts on these subjects by same authors, 
described at the front of this volume. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

A study of the principles and methods of Scouting and Patroling as set forth 
in this text is not sufficient to make a soldier a capable scout or a competent patrol 
leader. He must see these principles and methods illustrated and demonstrated 
in a practical manner, and he must be given practice, and lots of it, in applying the 
principles himself. And finally, before being pronounced qualified, he should be 
subjected to a practical examination and test as a proof that he has a working 
knowledge of the principles and methods of Scouting and Patroling. 

There follows a number of simple exercises, demonstrations and tests, illustrating 
the practical application of the principles that have been discussed in the text. 
These should be taken in connection with the study of the theory. Additional 
exercises of a similar kind may be devised by the instructor or by the student. 

Exercise i. Demonstration. Use of Cover. 

Purpose: To show the proper and improper use of cover. 

Equipment: Three or four trained or partly trained scouts with usual equipment. 

Note. —Untrained men may be used if necessary, being carefully directed by the instructor. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: Halt the class in a group at any convenient point. 

1. Have a scout move on a skyline. Point out to the class how easily and quickly 
he is seen. 

2. Have a scout look over a rock, a bush, a log, etc. Point out to the class how 
much he is exposed. Now have the same man look around the rock or log, etc., 
or through the bush. Point out how much less exposed he is. 

3. Have the scout on the skyline, look over it toward the class, choosing a bare 
unbroken part of the crest. Next have the same scout observe the class from a part 
of the crest broken by a depression, bush, weeds, etc. Point out to the class how 
much more exposed the scout was in the first case. 

4. Have a scout at a suitable distance move in front of a red barn or other build¬ 
ing which contrasts with the uniform. Next have a scout move close in front of 
some bushes. Next have a scout move in front of an irregular clay or sand bank. 

Point out to the class how in the first case the scout is very plainly visible against 
the vividly contrasting background; how in the second case the changing, varied, 
background of the bush blends to a certain extent with the uniform, making it 
harder to pick up the scout; and how in the last case the varied background of the 
same color as the uniform makes it very hard to pick up the scout. Point out that 
the closer the scout is to his background the better he blends in it. 

5. Have a scout observe from a position in the shadow of a tree or building. 
Have another observe from the sunny side of the tree. Point out to the class how 
much easier it is to pick up the man in the sunlight. 

Have the scouts crawl forward, one moving in the shade, the other in the sun¬ 
light. Point out to the class how much easier the movement betrays the scout who 
is not taking advantage of the shade. 

6. Have scouts fire (or simulate firing) (a) over a stump, (b) around the left 
side of a tree, (c) from the left side of a door or window, (d) from the top of a 
bank, and (e) over a parapet. 

Next have the same scouts fire around the right of the stump, around the right 
of the tree, from the right sidd of the door, from behind the bank, and through a 
scooped out loop-hole in the parapet. Point out how much less the scouts are 
exposed in the second case. 

7. Have a scout look out of a window and a door standing close to the window 
and in the doorway. Next have the scout move back from the window and door 
still looking through. Have him go to the cellar and look out of a cellar window. 
Point out to the class how much less likely the scout is to be noticed in the second 
case. 


133 


134 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


8. Have a man lie behind a thin bush exposing his face and hands, and moving his 
heels and other parts of his body. Have another man lie behind the same or a 
similar bush covering his face and hands, and remaining absolutely motionless. 
Point out how the white face and hands of the first man indicate his presence, and 
how even a very slight movement of the body is noticeable. 

Have three men, one in white clothes, one in blue clothes and one in service 
uniform lie partly concealed by thin bushes. Point out how the conspicuous uniform 
shows the position of the scout. 

9. Have two scouts lie, partly concealed, in the sunlight. Have one carry a tin 
cup and the other some glistening objects and have them move these slightly. Show 
how these objects indicate the scout’s position by reflecting the sunlight. 

10. Have a scout in a green gunny sack suit lie still in some green grass quite 
close to the class. Have another in a mud covered ordinary gunny sack suit lie in 
some muddy or sandy ground. Point out how these crude, easily constructed suits 
make an observer very difficult to detect. 

Other expedients to illustrate the points covered in Chapter II may be readily 
devised. Encourage discussion and comment. 

Exercise 2. Practice. Use of Cover. 

Purpose: To practice scouts in the proper use of cover. 

Equipment: Usual equipment of a scout (rifle etc.) for each man. 

Place: Any moderately diversified terrain. 

Procedure: Divide the class into two groups. Move group one into a house. Let 
group two scatter, and take up partially concealed positions, indicated by the 
instructor, within 300 yds. of the house. Give group one, ten minutes to locate by 
observing from a point near the house, the various men in group two. Change 
groups and repeat. Grade each group—each man found counting one point for 
the observers. 


Exercise 3. Practice. Rapid Use of Cover. 

Purpose: To practice scouts in the rapid use of nearest cover available. 

Equipment: Usual equipment. 

Place: Any moderately diversified terrain. 

Procedure: Divide the class into several groups. Have all groups but one face 
in one direction. Have remaining group deploy with 10 yards interval and move 
150 yards in opposite direction. Halt them by blast of whistle and allow them one- 
half minute to get under cover. Give observers two minutes to locate scouts. 
Grade each group as in Exercise 2. Repeat exercise, using other groups. Compare 
results. 

Exercise 4. Demonstration and Practice. Individual Movement. 

Purpose: 1. To show scouts how to execute correctly the various individual 
movements. 

2. To practice scouts in executing these movements. 

Equipment: Usual equipment of a scout (rifle). 

Place: Any piece of terrain. 

Procedure: 1. Have a trained scout take the prone positions firing and not firing. 
(See Chap. II.) Point out all the details of these positions. (If no trained scout 
is available, have one man take the positions as directed.) See Plates 5, 6 and 7. 

Now have each man in the class practice the positions, coached by his rear (front) 
rank file. 

2. Have a trained scout spring up from the prone position, to run forward. 
Have him do it slowly at first and explain each movement to the class as it is per¬ 
formed. Then have the scout execute the movement rapidly and continuously. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


135 


Have each man, coached by his rear rank file, go through the movement until it 
is mastered. Interchange pairs and have the coaches then go through the move¬ 
ment, the front rank coaching. See Plate 5. 

3. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to drop to the prone position from a 
run, first by the numbers and then rapidly. Explain and point out each movement. 

Have each front rank man, coached by his rear rank file, practice the movement 
until proficient. Then have coach and pupil change places. 

4. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to take the prone position from a walk 
or while standing. Explain each movement. Have each man practice the movement 
as before. 

5. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to creep. Explain the details of the 
movement. See Plate 8. Have each front rank file coached by his rear rank file 
practice the movement until proficient. Have coach and pupil change places. 

6. Have a trained scout demonstrate the slow crawl. Explain the movement. 
See Plate 9. 

Have front rank men, coached by rear rank file, practice until proficient. Have 
coach and pupil change places. 

7. Demonstrate and practice the rapid crawl in the same manner. See Plate 10. 

Exercise 5. Practice. Movement by Bounds. 

Purpose: To train scouts in deciding where and how to move and to practice 
them in movement. 

Equipment: Usual (rifle). 

Place: A well diversified piece of ground (rolling, with ditches, bushes, and 
other features). 

Procedure: Divide the class into three equal groups. Place two groups in good 
observing positions about 250 to 350 yards apart. Place the third group at a point 
about 250 yards from each observing group. 

Each man in the third group is to assume that he is a scout moving on a line of 
advance which will force him to pass between the two observing groups who are 
assumed to be enemy observers. Each will: (1) Select the route he is to follow; 
(2) determine his intermediate stopping places; and (3) decide upon the method 
of movement to be employed in making each bound. 

Have the men in succession move over the routes they have selected in the 
manner each has decided upon. 

The observing groups will judge the relative efficiency of the men of the third 
group, based on how well they keep concealed during their advance, and their rate 
of progress. 

The mistakes of the men moving should be pointed out to the observing groups 
as they are made. 

Interchange groups and repeat the exercise. 

Exercise 6. Demonstration and Practice. Night Movement. 

Purpose: To train men to move at night. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment of a scout (no rifles). 

Place: Any open terrain. 

Procedure: (1) Explain the importance of walking properly at night. Demon¬ 
strate how to walk properly in grass. Have the class close their eyes and walk 
between two points without raising the foot above the top of the grass, and without 
planting the toe first. Next cause them to walk over the same ground in the proper 
manner. Call attention to the difference in noise. Have the class practice walking 
in weeds. See Plate 12. 

(2) Repeat the procedure in (1) on hard, rocky ground. 

(3) Have the students crawl and creep, blind-folded. Put wire, cans, rocks, etc., 
in their way and show them how necessary it is to carefully explore the area in 
front with the hands before moving at night, if they would avoid noise and possible 
injury. 

SPM-7 


136 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Exercise 7. Demonstration and Practice. Night Movement. Passage of 

Obstacles. 

Purpose: To train scouts to move at night in a trench area. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment (black glasses). 

Place: Prepared trench area. 

Procedure: 1. Crossing a trench. Explain the method of crossing a trench 
as in Chapter III. Have a trained scout demonstrate (by daylight) how to cross 
a narrow trench, pointing out the details of his movements. See Plate 14. Have 
each front rank man, coached by his rear rank file, practice the movement. Then 
have coach and pupil change places. This exercise should be carried out first by 
daylight, using very dark glasses, and later on a moderately dark night. 

2. Crossing a wide trench. Demonstrate and practice as in 1. See Plate 14. 

3. Crossing a low zaire entanglement. Explain the method of crossing a low 
entanglement. See Plate 15. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to cross a 
wide band of low wire (See Course in Field Engineering for various types of low 
wire). Have each student, coached by his rear (front) rank file, practice the 
movement by daylight. Repeat the exercise with black glasses or blind-folded, and 
by night. 

4. Crossing a high wire entanglement. Expain the method of crossing such an 
obstacle. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to cross a band of French high 
wire. (See Field Engineering.) Have each student, coached by his rear (front) 
rank file, cross the band of wire. Repeat, wearing black glasses, blind-folded or at 
night. 

5. Cutting Wire. Have a trained scout demonstrate how to cut wire. Explain 
the details of the operation. Have each student cut a gap through a double apron 
fence See Plate 16. 

Exercise 8. Practice. Night Movement. 

Purpose: To train men to move noiselessly at night. 

Equipment: Usual (black glasses). 

Place: Trench area, littered with wire, cans, rocks, or any rubbish. 

Procedure: Place several blind-folded listeners 50 yards apart. Divide the class 
into several groups and let one man from each group (wearing black glasses) ap¬ 
proach each listener. 

Each listener will point out any man he hears approaching. If there is a man 
in the direction he points the referee will rule him out. 

Each man’s score equals the number of paces he is from the listening observer 
when ruled out. Thus if he can reach the listener his grade is o. If he is ruled out 
while twenty paces away his grade is 20. 

The group receiving the lowest score wins. 

Repeat with moving men blind-folded. 


Exercise 9. Practice. Night Movement. 

Purpose: To train men to move noiselessly at night. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment. 

Place: Trench area (or simulated area). 

Procedure: Divide the class in half, and post one half as outguards. Let the 
other half try to pass through the outguard line. Rule out men discovered. Change 
sides, repeat and compare results. 

Practice at night against a simulated enemy will develop the ability to move at 
night, provided the essentials of movement have first been mastered. 

In later practice under night patroling the student will have an opportunity to 
use the skill he has developed. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 137 

Exercise io. Demonstration and Practice. Use of the Compass by Day and 

by Night. 

Purpose: To train scouts to use a compass. 

Equipment : Usual (with compass for each man). 

Place : Any open terrain. 

Procedure: I. Explain the different parts of the compass and their functions 
and demonstrate how to use the compass: The adjustment of the sights, the way 
to hold the instrument, the use of the mechanical damper if there be one; how to 
take a sight; how to read azimuth and bearing; how to set the movable mark; etc. 

2. Have each man determine the magnetic north point from his position. 

3. Have each man determine and record the azimuths (bearings) of several 
points from various stations, and select points having given bearings from the 
observer. 

4. Select a course of a mile across country. Deploy the men at wide intervals, 
give each man the compass direction and require him to move in that direction to 
a point on some terrain feature, such as a road. Check up on direction and point out 
mistakes. 

5. Have each scout take the azimuths of several objects at night, and set the 
luminous mark on the glass cover and clamp the card to record such bearings. 
Check the results in a lighted room or with a flash-light. 

6. Have each scout set the luminous mark on the glass of his compass at a given 
direction, and move in this direction at night. Check up as in 4. 

7. Cause each scout to orient a map and determine the compass directions of lines 
on the map, using only his compass. Also require him to locate a point having 
given the compass direction from another point on the map. 

These exercises should be repeated until the men are proficient and can make 
their determinations quickly and accurately. 

Exercise 11. Practice. Direction without a Compass. 

Purpose: To train scouts how to determine direction without using the compass. 

Equipment : Usual. 

Place: Any open terrain. 

Procedure: 1. Observing the trees and sun, require each scout to estimate 
where south is. 

2. Using the watch and sun method have each scout locate an object due south. 

3. Using the compass check up on the above by determining the south point. 

4. Have each scout identify the great dipper, find “ the pointers,” and locate the 
north star, by night. 

Exercise 12. Practice. Use of the Compass. 

Purpose: To practice men in determining direction by compass. 

Equipment: Usual (compass for each man). 

Place: Any open terrain. 

Procedure: Lay out a closed traverse and give each scout a set of azimuths (or 
bearings) and distances, thus: 

58°, 500 paces 
180 0 , 70 paces 

260°, 200 paces 
etc. 

Require the scout to make a written report of the object found at each station. 

Require him to record the bearing of a number of different colored flags from 
each station. 

Check and compare the results. 

Exercise 13. Demonstration and Practice. Use of Field Glasses. 

Purpose: To practice the scout in the use of the Type EE field glasses. 

Equipment: One pair Type EE field glasses for each man, if possible. 


138 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Place: Any open terrain. 

Procedure: i. Explain and demonstrate the adjustment of the glass for focus. 

2. Explain and demonstrate the adjustment for interpupillary distance. 

3. Have each scout adjust his own glasses. 

4. Test the adjustment by having the scouts count telephone wires, window 
panes, read signs, etc., at a distance. 

5. Demonstrate the best positions in which to use the glass and the effect of 
sun shining into the object glasses. 

Exercise 14. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 

Purpose: To train scouts to select observation points. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any average terrain. 

Procedure: 1. To select an observation point and route thereto. Give a simple 
mission of reconnaissance, point out to the student the observation points the scout 
should occupy in carrying out his mission, and the routes he should travel in 
reaching them. Explain the reasons why these positions and routes are selected. 

The demonstration should be given first on a sand table, and later on the terrain. 

2. Repeat the exercise both on the map and on the terrain, requiring the students 
to select observation points and routes and give their reasons for the selections. 

3. Cause half the class to select an observation point on the terrain and occupy 
same. Cause the other half in pairs to approach the position from a distance of 
300 to 400 yards. Any who are discovered are ruled out. Interchange the two 
groups, repeat and compare results. 

Exercise 15. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 

Purpose: To train men how to occupy an observation post. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: 1. Give a mission that will call for observation from a point not too 
far away. Then take the class to the field and show them by men placed in this 
position the contrast between: 

a. A scout occupying a sky line, where it is broken and where it is not. 

b. A scout observing from a roof, concealed in the shadow of a chimney, 
and one not so concealed. 

c. A scout standing in the center of an open door (or window), and a scout 
who is observing from the side of it or from a position back in the room. 

d. A scout in a tree without a background, and not close to the trunk; and 
a scout properly concealed in a well-chosen tree. 

2. Take the class to a point of observation they have chosen from the map, and 
have them answer each of the following questions: 

a. Where to halt in observation before occupying the position. 

b. How long to halt. 

c. How to approach to the position. 

d. How to occupy the position. 

Demonstrate the answer to each question. 

Exercise 16. Practice. Observation. 

Purpose: To train men how to search ground. 

Equipment: Field glasses for each man. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: 1. Explain briefly how to search the ground and when to use field 
glasses. 

2. Take the class to a point overlooking an area in which have been placed at 
varying distances and in various directions, individual men and groups or targets 
partly concealed. Let them search the ground. As each man locates an object, 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


139 


have him determine its compass direction and estimate the range to it, noting these 
with a description of the object on a sheet of paper which he will turn in to be 
graded. Check up on the method of searching ground used by the students. 

3. Divide the class into several groups; send one group to an observing position 
where they will be provided with blank ammunition and told to remain in observa¬ 
tion and fire at any man they see moving about. Cause the other groups to choose 
starting points nearby, select their route for the next hundred yards, and move on 
the position. Instruct them that when a shot is fired every man will halt where 
and as he is until the instructor blows his whistle to continue the advance. When 
a shot is fired the instructor will cause the firer to point out the man he thinks he 
has discovered. When and if this is done the man discovered is ruled out. At 
designated intervals of time groups change position and the maneuver is repeated. 
Grade each observing group 10 for each man discovered in the alloted time (as 
half an hour) and compare grading of groups. (Note that this exercise also 
gives practice in individual movement, and the use of cover.) 

Exercise 17. Demonstration and Practice. Observation. 

Purpose: To develop the faculty of observation and familiarity with military 
features of the terrain. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: 1. Identification of military features of the terrain. Take the class 
to a point affording a good view of a diversified piece of terrain. Cause them to 
indicate examples of typical features named by the instructor, and to name 
features indicated by him. This instruction may also be given on landscape targets, 
or other landscape views (photographs, etc.). 

2. Study of tracks and other signs. On an unused road or in a field have a 
man walk and run, a horse trot and gallop, and troops march at route step. Point 
out to the class the appearance of the tracks immediately after they are made, at 
the end of 20 minutes, after 24 hours, and after three days. 

3. Demonstrate how: 

a. The extent of a camp area will indicate the number of the enemy. 

b. The tracks on the road will show what kind of troops are in the body and 
the direction of the march. 

c. The state of the camp site and the material abandoned will indicate the 
enemy’s condition as to discipline and morale. 

4. Estimating the strength of an enemy. At a distance of 800 or 900 yards 
from the class have a platoon or company advance, using the following formations: 

a. Squad columns at 40 pace intervals. 

b. Skirmish line at 5 pace intervals. 

c. Advance by rushes of varying fractions. 

d. Advance by infiltration. 

In each case have the scouts estimate the size of the various elements moving. 

Exercise 18. Practice. Observation. 

Purpose: To develop the faculty of observation. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: At various times while at drill: 

1. Have class face in a certain direction for one minute, face about and describe 
what they have seen. 

2. Have them describe a building after observing it one minute. 

3. After moving along a road for a certain time or distance have them record: 

a. Houses passed. 

b. Nature of country on side of road. 

c. What vehicles have passed. 

etc., etc. 


140 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


4. For indoor work, use drawings and book illustrations, etc. Have the class 
look at drawings and then either describe them or answer questions concern¬ 
ing them. 

Exercise 19. Demonstration and Practice. Observation by Night. 

Purpose: To teach scouts how to observe (listen) at night. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any average terrain. . . .. . . 

Procedure: I. Identification of sounds. Demonstrate characteristic peculiarities 

of such sounds as: Working bolt of rifle, helmet striking wire, whispers, man walk- 
in 0- , striking a match, trench excavation, erection of wire, driving pickets, and 
other sounds with which the scout should be familiar. Vary the distances to indi¬ 
cate effect on sound. . 

2. Distance, direction and origin of sounds. At night with the class in position 

listening, have certain sounds made at prearranged times and have each man note 
the directions, estimate the distances and tell what caused the sounds. 

The following are suggested: 


Digging. 

Cutting wire. 

Whispering. 

Coughing. 

Sentry challenge. 

Crawling. 

Walking. 


Laughing. 

Striking a match. 

Rattle of equipment. 
Bark of a dog. 

Loading a rifle. 

Driving pickets. 

Helmet striking a wire. 


Exercise 20. Practice. Messages. 

Purpose: To teach scouts how to write messages. 

Equipment: Usual. Watch, compass, pad and pencil for each man. 

Procedure: Point out any terrain object such as a tree, house, etc., and direct 
the scout to write a message to Lt A at some definite point a mile away, locating and 
describing the object. 

Require the scout to make a simple sketch to accompany the message. 

Correct mistakes. 

Repeat this as often as necessary, varying the situation, until each scout can 
write a message, quickly and accurately. 


Exercise 21. Practice. Locating Danger Areas. 

Purpose: To teach scouts how to pick out danger places. 

Equipment: Usual. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: An officer will take a number of men with colored flags ( e . g., red 
for riflemen, white for machine guns) and conceal them in appropriate places on the 
terrain. 

The class now approaches the area and the instructor causes them to point out 
the danger localities or places likely to be occupied by the enemy, giving in each 
case the reason why the place is apt to be occupied, as: (a) Favorable for conceal¬ 
ment; (b) Favorable for observation; (c) Affords cover from fire; (d) Favorable 
for frontal or flanking fire on an advancing enemy, etc. 

Encourage discussion, cause the class to reject localities not favorable for occupa¬ 
tion by the enemy. 

Now cause the concealed flagmen to rise and display their flags. Discuss with 
the class the places thus indicated. 

Repeat the exercise in a different terrain until the principles involved are 
thoroughly understood and the students can pick the danger places quickly and 
accurately. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


141 


Exercise 22. Demonstration. Scout Pair in the Approach March into 

Combat. 

Purpose: To demonstrate the conduct of the platoon scouts and runners in 
covering the advance of the platoon during the approach march into combat. 

Equipment: A platoon of infantry fully equipped, which has been practiced in 
this exercise. If the exercise is given on a map or sand table colored pins will be 
needed to represent the various individuals. 

Place: A moderately diversified terrain, similar to that shown in Plate 74, map 
or sand table. 

Procedure: The instructor conducts the class to the terrain selected, to the map 
room or sand table. If on the terrain the class will successively occupy favorable 
positions from which they can observe the details of the demonstration. 

The instructor now explains the nature of the demonstration and briefly outlines 
the principles to be practically illustrated (See Chap. VII). If the demonstration 
is given on the sand table it should be prepared to represent the terrain shown on 
Plate 74. The preparation of the sand table is described in detail in the course in 
Tactics. The instructor should explain the horizontal scale and the exaggerated 
vertical scale, etc., upon first introducing the students to the sand table. 

The instructor, at each stage of the demonstration, will point out the positions of 
the platoon leader, his headquarters and scouts, and of the two sections of the 
platoon. If the demonstration is given on a map or sand table he will place colored 
pins to indicate the positions of the various individuals. 

The students should be encouraged to ask questions and make comments. 

The instructor now gives a simple “ situation,” as follows : (See Plate 74.) 

General situation. Reds and Blues are at war. 

The territory (shown on this table) is Red. 

The Red forces, on a wide front, have been retiring slowly north before a 
vigorous Blue offensive. 

Special situation. The 1st Battalion 1st Blue Infantry, in the front line of the 
1st Division, with two companies in its assault echelon, holds the line of the road 
AB, from the bridge over Toms Creek to a point 800 yards east thereof. The 
men are occupying the road ditches and fox-holes. 

The 2nd Bn 1st Inf, 1000 yards south of the road in reserve, has been ordered 
to pass through the 1st Bn and continue the advance, at 6: 00 AM. 

Co F 2nd Bn is to be the right assault company of the battalion. The 1st and 2nd 
Platoons of Co F form its assault echelon, with the 1st Platoon (base platoon) on 
the left. 

Demonstration 1. Orders of the platoon leader. Preliminary dispositions of 
scouts and runners. Lt A, leader of the 2nd Plat Co F, moves with his platoon to 
a point from which the platoon’s line of departure on the road AB is visible. Here 
he issues his orders, pointing out the localities referred to: 

“ The enemy has withdrawn from our front. He has gassed those woods. 

“ Our 1st Bn is now in position along that road. We will move forward, pass 
through the 1st Bn and continue the advance. 

“This platoon is the right assault platoon of the battalion, our 1st platoon, the 
base platoon, is on our left, the 4th Inf on our right. Our 3rd platoon in support, 
follows the 1st. 

“ The 1st squad, base squad, will cross that road at the high point of that little 
rise, 700 yards east of the bridge, and advance N 7 0 E. Our zone of action is 
200 yards. 

“Jones (senior scout, 1st section) the scouts of the 1st section, under your com¬ 
mand, will precede the platoon by 200 yards, in diamond formation, covering a 
front of 200 yards. Have you the direction point? Be ready to move out. 

“ Gas masks will be at the ready. 

“ The battalion aid station will be in rear of the battalion reserve, which follows 
Co E, on our left. 

“ Questions ? ” 

Lt A then orders: 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 



0 12 3 4 500 6 7 8 9 I000YDS. 



Plate 74. 










PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


143 


“ Green (runner) report to the company commander (indicating his direction) 
and remain with him. Give him this message: 

“ To Capt B. Second platoon in position, ready to advance.” 

Green repeats the message and departs. 

At 5 : 35 AM Capt B signals: “ Forward.” Lt A acknowledges the signal by re¬ 
peating it back. He orders: “ SCOUTS OUT.” 

To the platoon sergeant: “ Follow me with the platoon at 30 yards in section 
columns without distance.” 

To his runners (who are with him) when the scouts have advanced about 125 
yards: “ Black and White, follow the scouts at that distance, keep about 100 yards 
apart. Each of you observe the troops on your flank. Do you see them now? 
Move out.” 

When the scouts have advanced about 175 yards Lt A and his remaining 
runner move forward, the platoon following at 30 yards with Sgt X (platoon 
sergeant) at its head. 

Comments. This demonstration illustrates how the scouts of a platoon are used 
as a small patrol or advance guard to provide security for the platoon during the 
approach march, or before the opening of the fire fight. 

It also illustrates how the platoon leader disposes his headquarters (platoon 
sergeant and 4 runners) to main contact and intercommunication during the advance. 

Demonstration 2. Advancing in the presence of the enemy. As the scouts reach 
the road AB (line of departure) Lt A signals; “ Halt,” to them and to the platoon. 
He signals to the platoon sergeant; “ Squad columns,” which order is executed at 
once, each section forming line of squad columns at about 50 yard intervals, with¬ 
out advancing. 

Lt A moves to the road and makes a personal reconnaissance of the foreground. 
He checks the direction to the road junction (C) with his compass. He orders 
the scouts as follows: 

“ We advance at 6:00 AM. Do you see that road junction? (pointing to C). 
That is our direction point. Cover the platoon front of 200 yards. Questions?” 

At 6: 00 AM Lt A orders: “ SCOUTS OUT.” 

To the runner who is with him: “Brown: To Sgt X (platoon sgt) ; Platoon 
will follow me at 100 yards, 150 yards distance between sections. Base squad guide 
on me.” 

Comments. This demonstration shows how the platoon leader uses his scouts 
during the advance, and illustrates the simple orders and signals with which he 
controls them. 

Demonstration J. Formation of the scout patrol. While the platoon is moving 
in a single column (section columns without distance) the scouts of the leading 
sections act as a single patrol, in a diamond formation (see Patroling) under the 
command of the senior scout. 

As soon as the platoon deploys into line of squad columns the scouts of the lead¬ 
ing section split up into 3 pairs of squad scouts, each covering the front of its own 
squad. The pairs will thus be separated by intervals of about 40 yds. And the 
scouts in each pair should be 10 to 15 yds. apart. Each pair of squad scouts is 
commanded by the senior of the two. 

Demonstration 4. Approaching a danger area. As the scouts arrive within 
about 200 yds. of the road junction at C they signal; “ Halt.” Lt A interprets this 
signal: “You had better halt here (where the scouts now are) while we investigate 
to the front.” 

Lt A signals; “ Halt,” when he reaches the place from which the scouts 
signaled. The platoon halts in the low ground between the two roads, the men 
lying down. They are here secure from rifle or machine gun fire from the south 
edge of the woods. Lt A had foreseen that a halt would probably be necessary 
while his scouts investigated the near edge of the woods. From his map he had 
noted that this low ground would be a favorable place in which to halt. The scouts 


144 SCOUTING AND PATROLING 

also noted this as they passed over the ground, and gave the signal to halt at the 
right time. 

Lt A moves forward to the road to watch the progress of his scouts from 
the high ground. He sees the scouts put on their gas masks. 

The scouts approach the edge of the woods cautiously, exposing themselves 
as little as possible. One scout of each pair moves while the other watches and 
covers him. 

Upon reaching the edge of the wood one scout of each pair halts and remains 
where he can see and be seen by the platoon leader or runners. The other scout 
advances into the woods to the limit of visibility, that is as far as he can go and 
still keep the other scout at the edge in view. He then carefully examines the wood 
to the front and flanks, as far as he can see, looking for signs of the enemy. Seeing 
or hearing nothing suspicious, he signals; “ Forward ” to the scout in rear. 

The rear scout of each pair repeats the signal; “ Forward,” and as soon as all 
three have thus signaled, Black and White (the runners) repeat the signal, and 
move towards the edge of the wood. 

Lt A signals to the platoon; “ Forward,” and himself moves towards the wood. 

Comments. This demonstration indicates the usual manner in which the scouts 
investigate danger areas, where the enemy may be concealed, before the troops 
following are allowed to expose themselves to surprise fire from such localities. 

The presence of a danger area, the advisability of halting the platoon while it is 
reconnoitered, and the results of the reconnaissance are, in this case, all conveyed 
by the simple signals; “ Halt,” and “ Forward.” 

Demonstration 5. Moving through a dense wood. The scouts remain halted 
in the edge of the wood until Lt A reaches them. He orders; “ Scouts close in 
until you can see Jones or Greer (the center pair). Jones directs the flank scouts, 
by name, to close in. Black and White, as a matter of training, close in until they 
can keep Lt A in view. 

As the leader of the 1st section approaches the woods Lt A orders, “ Squad 
columns, 30 yards.” This order reduces the intervals in the 1st section to what 
Lt A desires for passage through the woods. 

When the leader of the 1st section, still advancing, is about 30 yards behind the 
line of the runners (Black and White), Lt A orders and signals; “ FORWARD.” 
This order sets his scouts and runners in motion through the woods, at the proper 
distances in front of the 1st section. 

Lt A remains in the edge of the woods, and as the section guide of the 1st sec¬ 
tion, who is following about 20 yards in rear of the 1st squad, reaches him he 
orders, “ HALT.” This order is passed up through the 1st section to the runners 
and.scouts. . Except for the 2nd section, the entire platoon is now halted, the 1st 
section just inside the woods, all with the distances and intervals Lt A desires. 

As the platoon sergeant, preceding the 2nd section, approaches him Lt A 
orders, “ Have the 2nd section follow the 1st at 30 yards. Reduce the intervals 
between squads to 30 yards. Send out the scouts of the left squad to maintain con¬ 
tact with our 1st section. Remain with the 2nd section. I will be in front of the 
1st section.” 

When the leader of the 2nd section arrives within 30 yards of the section guide 
of the 1st section, Lt A signals and orders; “ FORWARD.” The order is passed 
up through the 1st section to the runners and scouts. The entire platoon now moves 
forward through the woods with intervals and distances reduced to the limit of 
visibility in the woods as Lt A had planned. Lt A moves rapidly to his place 
in front of the leading section. 

Lt A keeps his compass constantly in his hand. He selects prominent trees 
on his line of march as direction points. As he approaches one such tree he selects 
another, farther in advance, and cautions the center scouts when they are off the 
proper direction line. 

. Comments. This demonstration illustrates how the platoon maintains its direc¬ 
tion of advance and contact in passing through a wood, how it provides for its 
own security, and how the scouts are used for these purposes. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


145 


Demonstration 6. Emerging from a wood into open terrain. As the scouts 
reach the far edge of the wood, they halt and signal; “ Halt,” to the platoon. Lt A 
halts the platoon in the wood, and moves up to the edge, on line with his scouts. 
Lt A and the scouts carefully examine the terrain in their front. 

. Lt A decides to move over the open ground now in his front in the same forma¬ 
tion as when last on open ground. He orders his scouts; “ Do you see that point of 
woods (pointing) about a mile from here? It will be our direction point. Ques¬ 
tions? SCOUTS OUT.” 

When the scouts have advanced about 125 yards he sends out Black and White 
with the usual orders to observe the scouts and the units on the flanks. 

Lt A orders the platoon sergeant (who has joined him at the edge of the woods) ; 
“ Have the 1st section follow me at 100 yards and the 2nd section follow the 1st at 
150 yards. Extend intervals between squads to 50 yards.” 

Lt A and Brown (his 3rd runner) follow about 50 yards in rear of Black and 
White. 

Comments. The preceding demonstration illustrates practically the following 
typical details of conduct of scouts preceding a platoon in the approach march: 

a. Scouts as a single patrol covering the front of a unit advancing in a single 
column. 

b. Scout pairs covering the front of their own squads when the platoon is de¬ 
ployed in line of squad columns. 

c. Intervals between scout pairs in open and in close terrain. 

d. Distances between scouts and platoon in open and in close terrain. 

e. Maintaining the assigned direction of advance in open and in close terrain. 

f. Maintaining communication with the platoon in open and in close terrain. 

g. Transmission of important information by means of simple signals. 

h. Halting the platoon on approaching a danger area. 

i. Reconnaissance of a danger area. 

j. Reporting result of reconnaissance. 

k. Emerging from shelter into open terrain. 

/. Control of scouts by platoon leader. 

Exercise 23. Problem. The Scout Pair in the Attack; Open Warfare. 

This exercise is a continuation of Exercise 22. The terrain shown on Plate 75 
is north of that shown on Plate 74. 

General situation. Same as Exercise 22. 

Special situation 1. (Continuation of Exercise 22.) 

As Lt A orders: “ SCOUTS OUT.” Jones and Greer (the scouts of the 1st 
squad, center pair) move out of the wood (Plate 74). 

Requirement 1. a. A brief statement of Jones’ duties in this situation. 

b. His conduct in detail until he reaches the house at C (Plate 75). 

Solution 1. a. 

(1) To move steadily in the assigned direction (toward the point of woods, 
X). (See Ex. 22.) 

(2) To note all localities which might be occupied by the enemy, and con¬ 
tinually watch them for signs of his presence. 

(3) To take advantage of all available cover to conceal his movements, 
alternating in his advance with his assistant scout, Greer. 

(4) When dangerous places to the front are observed from any covered 
position to signal: “Halt” to the platoon, this signal meaning: “You had 
better halt while I investigate.” 

(5) To investigate the dangerous area and when certain all is clear, to signal, 
“ Forward,” and “ Double time,” if it is advisable for the platoon to cross an 
open space rapidly. 


146 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 



w 

H 

< 

J 

Pu, 



















r 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


147 


(6) To select and occupy covered positions for the forward bounds of the 
platoon, if any are available. 

(7) To fire on the enemy with tracer bullets whenever he is seen, and to send 
word back to the platoon leader (by the alternate scout) if the tracers do not 
fully indicate the enemy’s position. 

(8) If the enemy opens fire, to take cover, search out his position, and indi¬ 
cate it by tracer bullets, or message if necessary. 

b. Jones moves rapidly down the slope, carefully watching the house and the 
woods to his right. He approaches the house while Greer halts on the slope in a 
position from which he can cover Jones. Jones moves to the side of the house which 
Greer is covering, looks through the window and signals: “ Forward,” to Greer. He 
walks around the house, looking in all the windows and observing to front and both 
flanks. On approaching the house he has signaled: “ Halt,” to the platoon. 

When Greer reaches the house Jones enters it, Greer remaining outside in 
observation. Finding the house empty, Jones comes out, signals: “ Forward,” to 
the platoon, and continues his advance, using a new direction point in the right 
direction. 

Note. It is not the duty of this pair of scouts to investigate the entire wood east 
of X. They examine the west edge of this wood as they pass. Other scouts will 
investigate other parts of the wood. 

Special situation 2. As Jones leaves the house he sees the 1st and 2nd squads 
in the valley to the south and the 2nd section crossing the road near B. 

Requirement 2. Actions of the scout at this time. 

Solution 2. Jones says to Greer; “ Remain here where you can see me. I am 
going to that next ridge in front. Don’t allow the platoon to leave the cover of this 
ridge until I signal, ‘ Forward.’ ” 

Jones selects a prominent tree in the edge of the woods to his front as his next 
direction point. He then moves rapidly towards the next ridge to the front. 

Special situation j. As Jones moves down the slope several Reds appear over the 
crest in front and move towards the woods about 350 yards to the northeast. Greer 
also sees them. 

Requirement 5. Action of the scouts in this situation. 

Solution j. The scouts take cover and open fire on the Reds with tracer bullets. 

Jones realizes that Lt A and most of the platoon probably cannot see either the 
Reds or the tracer bullets because of the intervening woods. He therefore orders; 
“ Greer, report the enemy to Lt A.” 

Finding Lt A, Greer makes a concise, definite report as follows; “ About 8 Reds 
came over the crest to the north and entered that wood, 350 yds. northeast of the 
house. We fired tracer bullets at them.” 

Special situation 4. The Reds run forward into the woods. Greer returns at a 
run to report to Lt A. Jones sees that Lt A has moved out of the woods 
(near D ) and is advancing. The scouts on the right have passed the crest and are 

entering the woods (E). 

Jones again starts forward. When he is 50 yards in front of the house a machine 
gun suddenly opens fire from the high ground to his left front (near F). He can¬ 


not see the gun. 

Requirement 4. Actions of the scout in this situation. 

Solution 4. Jones at once takes cover in a prone position, and searches the terrain 
to locate the position of the hostile machine gun. Having found it he immediately 
opens fire on it with tracer ammunition, in order to point out its location. 

Special situation 5. The 1st section of the platoon promptly opens fire on the 

machine gun indicated by Jones’ tracer bullets. 

The gun ceases fire, opens again, and its fire then gradually falls off and finally 
ceases altogether. Members of the gun crew are seen running to the rear. Greer 

has rejoined Jones. . 

Requirement 5. Actions of the scouts in this situation. 


148 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Solution 5. Jones and Greer remain in position, firing on the hostile machine 
gun until its fire has altogether ceased. They then promptly move forward in the 
assigned direction. 

Special situation 6. As Jones reaches the crest at F he is fired on from the woods 
near K. Greer is some 10 yds. to his right rear. 

Requirement 6. Actions of the scouts in this situation. 

Solution 6. Jones and Greer promptly take cover and search for the enemy. 
Jones signals to the platoon; “ Enemy in sight.” 

Special situation 7. The scouts soon discover enemy infantry in fox holes along 
the crest IJK. They locate machine guns at I, J and K. 

Requirement 7. Actions of the scouts. 

Solution 7. Jones signals to the platoon ; “ Enemy in force.” He and Greer then 
fire tracer bullets at the flanks of the hostile line of fox holes, and at the machine 
gun emplacements, I, J and K. They point out the targets to members of their 
squad as the latter arrive on the line of scouts and prepare to open fire. 

Comments. This exercise illustrates the conduct of the scout pair in a number 
of typical situations of the attack in open warfare. The exercise may be given 
either as a demonstration or as a test problem, and either on map or sand table, or 
as a terrain exercise on the ground. In this as in the preceding exercise (No. 22), 
any number of variations and additional situations may be introduced. These 
exercises are intended as examples of the general form of such problems. 

This is an example of what are called continuing problems, in which a number of 
successive special situations are set forth. Each special situation is a logical 
development of those preceding, the general situation remaining the same. 

Although the problem is continuous in that it is based on the same general situa¬ 
tion throughout, each special situation and the requirements which follow, consti¬ 
tute a complete problem in themselves. As given to the students for solution, each 
special situation and the requirements should be issued on a separate sheet of paper, 
one at a time, successively. The students write their solutions on the same sheet, 
using additional sheets if necessary. A certain period is allowed for the solution 
of each situation, when the papers are collected by the instructor, and the next 
situation is handed out. This procedure is necessary, as any situation may include 
the solution for the previous situation, or so much thereof as is necessary. 

It is of course not necessary that all of the situations of a continuing problem 
be presented and solved in a single period of instruction. As each situation is 
complete in itself, the exercise may be extended over two or more days of 
instruction. 

Exercise 24. Problem. The Scout Pair as Observers in Attack. 

Purpose: To demonstrate the conduct of a scout pair as forward observers for 
a reserve unit. 

Equipment: Situation sheets, paper and pencil for each student. 

Place: A moderately diversified terrain similar to that shown in Plate 76, map 
or sand table. 

Procedure: See Exercise 22. 

General situation . The 1st Bn 1st Blue Inf, in the first line of a general attack, 
is disposed as shown in Plate 76. Cos A and B, forming the assault echelon or 
first line of the battalion, are engaged in a fire fight with the enemy, who occupies 
the ridge QQ and the woods at R and T. One platoon of Co D (MG) is support¬ 
ing the attack from a position at D. The other platoon is in support near E. Co C, 
battalion reserve, is in the wood as shown, with company command post in the 
forward edge. 

Special situation 1. Pvts Jones and Greer, scouts of the 1st squad 1st plat Co C, 
have been ordered by Capt C, company commander, to proceed to O, and observe 
from there. 

Requirement 1. A brief statement of the immediate action of the scouts, and of 
their duty in this situation. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


149 



Plate 76. 






















150 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Solution i. Jones, accompanied by Greer, proceeds rapidly by the shortest line 
(which in this case is the most sheltered route) to the hilltop 0 . 

Jones finds the hill, as he expected, occupied by other observers. He takes a 
position for observation a little way down the slope, about 20 yds. away from any 
other observers. 

Arrived in this position the two scouts immediately locate: 

a. The enemy in their front. 

b. The various parts of the assault echelon of the battalion (Cos A, B and 
D) including command posts, and, as far as practicable, any adjacent units on 
their flanks. 

It is the duty of the scouts to continually observe the situation as to the enemy 
and the friendly troops and to keep the company commander informed as to what 
is going on at the front. 

Special situation 2. Ten minutes after the scouts have reached their position 
Co B begins an advance down the slope in their front. When they have advanced 
to the position M-M heavy machine gun fire from the wood at T checks further 
progress. Co B halts and opens a strong rifle fire on the enemy. 

Requirement 2. The action of the scouts from Co C in this situation. 

Solution 2. Pvt Jones sends Pvt Greer to the company commander to report 
what has happened. Greer reports: “ Co B started down the slope to the west of 
our hill, but were checked before reaching the bottom by heavy machine gun fire 
from a point of woods about 1000 yds. northwest of us. Co B is now firing in the 
valley. Co A is still in the far edge of the wood ” (pointing). Having made his 
report and answered any questions of the company commander, Greer rejoins Jones. 

Comments. All important developments should be reported by messenger. Only 
well-trained and experienced scouts are competent to perform this duty. The 
report or message, if verbal, should be carried by a man who has himself seen and 
who understands the meaning of the developments he reports. Such a man can 
intelligently answer the questions of the company commander. 

Special situation 3. The one-pounder section of the howitzer platoon attached 
to the battalion takes position at X, and goes into action against the hostile machine 
guns at T. While observing the hostile line at 00 through his glasses, Jones 
locates a hostile machine gun nest in the edge of the wood at S'. 

Requirement 3. The action of the scouts. 

Solution 3. Jones sends Greer to the one pounder section to point out to its 
commander the machine gun location at S. 

Whenever hostile machine guns are discovered by any observer they should be 
pointed out to the machine gun, howitzer and artillery units, in order that the fire 
of these units may be concentrated upon them. In this manner Pvt Jones co¬ 
operates in assisting the attack of the battalion as a whole. 

Special situation 4. Continuing his observations Pvt Jones detects a movement 
of men in the edge of the woods southwest of the enemy machine gun position near 
T. Examining the locality closely with his glasses he sees a considerable number 
of men just inside the edge of the wood. 

Requirement 4. The action of the scouts. 

Solution 4. Jones points out and explains the situation to Greer, and directs him 
to proceed to the command post of Co B and inform the company commander, and 
thereafter to carry the same message back to Capt C, and to inform him also con¬ 
cerning the howitzer section and the hostile machine guns at S'. 

Greer proceeds under cover of the ridge running west from O to the command 
post of Co B, which is on the high ground. He informs Capt B: “ I am a scout 
from Co C. A Red counter attack is forming in those woods (pointing them out). 
I am taking this message back to Capt C.” 

He then proceeds to Capt C and reports; “ A Red counter attack against the left 
of Co B is forming in the woods northwest of our station. We saw what we 
estimate as at least two platoons. A one pounder has gone into action at the west 
edge of those woods (pointing). It is firing on the machine guns that are holding 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


151 


up Co B. Jones discovered and pointed out another machine gun nest in a wood 
iooo yds. north of us. Co B is still in the valley, about 250 yds. beyond that ridge.” 

Comments. Any important movement of the enemy, especially one which indi¬ 
cates a counter attack, should be promptly reported to the element that is threatened 
(Co B in this case), and to the commander of the reserve company, whose function 
is to oppose such counter attacks. While delivering this message Pvt Greer, as a 
matter of custom, also informs Capt C of all that has happened since his last mes¬ 
sage, and which was not of sufficient importance to warrant a special message. 

As Capt C will probably be provided with a map, Pvt Greer will show him on the 
map any places which cannot be indicated on the ground. 

Special situation 5. Co B holds its position at M-M under heavy fire, but is 
unable to advance. The fire from machine guns and infantry in the wood near T 
continues to increase in intensity. Pvt Jones sees a number of men of Co B 
(estimated at 15 or so) running and creeping to the rear. 

Requirement 5. The action of the scout. 

Solution 5. Jones explains the situation to Greer, who also sees it, and sends 
him with a message to Capt C. Greer delivers the message as follows: “ Co B is 
under very heavy fire and unable to advance. We saw about 15 men running or 
creeping to the rear.” 

The fact that men are trickling to the rear indicates that Co B, under heavy fire, 
is near the breaking point. This is a critical situation. Undoubtedly the battalion 
commander or Capt C on his own initiative will wish to employ a portion of Co C 
to relieve the strain on Co B before the latter breaks. It is not Pvt Jones’ duty to 
make any suggestions as to what action should be taken, but he should promptly 
inform his company commander of the very important development he has just 
seen. 

Comments. This exercise indicates how well-trained scouts, who are able to 
interpret what they see, can keep their commander informed of important develop¬ 
ments. Scouts should also give assistance to other units whenever this can be done 
without neglecting their own particular mission. 

It is probable that much of the information reported by the scouts to their 
company commander and to other officers will also be received from other sources. 
This should never cause a scout to omit or delay his own report. He cannot be 
sure, in many cases, that the facts he has learned have also been learned by others. 
Moreover confirmation of important information is always desirable and often 
vitally necessary. One report may always be wrong, but the probability of error 
is reduced many times when there are two independent reports of the same fact or 
occurrence, and if it is reported from 3 or more independent sources it may be 
regarded as a certainty. 


Exercise 25. Practice. The Scout Pair as Observer and Sniper. 

Purpose: To practice scouts in their duties as snipers. 

Equipment: Usual. One pair of field glasses for each observer. Blank (or ball) 
ammunition. 

Place: Any diversified terrain. 

Procedure: In any suitable limited area place 7 or 8 men in concealed positions, 
giving each a number and signal, so that No. 1, No. 2, etc., may move when signaled. 

Have each scout pair select, within designated limits, a suitable location for a 
sniper’s post to cover the area in which the men are hidden. Allow the scout pair 
15 or 20 minutes in which to organize their area (dividing into sectors and sub¬ 
sectors, selecting landmarks, estimating ranges). Require each pair to make a 
range card of the area, showing sectors, landmarks and ranges. 

Signal No. 1 target to appear. 

Each observer will designate the target to his rifleman, and each rifleman will 
fire one blank cartridge as soon as he locates the target. The observer will then 
record his observation in the prescribed manner. 


152 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Signal No. i target down, and after a short interval signal No. 2 target to appear, 
and repeat the procedure. 

If practicable an umpire may be stationed with each post, and the scout pairs 
may then be rated as to: 

a. Accuracy of target designation.. 

b. Recognition of target from designation. 

c. Time between appearance of target and firing of shot. 

d. Accuracy of sight setting. 

e. Correctness of range cards, including estimation of ranges.. 

Upon completion of the exercise each man concealed should exhibit himself or 
plant a flag at his position. The instructor will then hold a critique of the exercise, 
encouraging questions and discussion. 

This exercise should be repeated on varied ground, until the students are thor¬ 
oughly familiar with the usual procedure of snipers. 

Note. 

If facilities are available (including a safe back-stop for bullets), a number of 
paper targets, operated as explained in the course in Musketry, may be utilized, in 
which case the snipers may fire ball ammunition at such targets. This will add a 
touch of realism and interest to the exercise. 

Exercise 26. Demonstration. A Day Reconnoitering Patrol. 

Purpose: To illustrate the conduct of a reconnoitering patrol in open warfare. 

Equipment: Usual day equipment for each member of demonstration patrol 
(if demonstrated on the terrain). 

Place: Map or sand table, or a terrain similar to that shown on Plate 77. 

Procedure. 

a. The instructor will reproduce the map accompanying this demonstration (Plate 
77) on as many sand tables as necessary, in the proportion of one sand table to each 
12 to 15 men. The method of preparing the sand table is described in the course 
in Tactics. The instructor should explain carefully to the students the scales of 
horizontal distances and vertical heights employed, and point out the way in which 
the various features of the terrain are represented. 

b. Read aloud the introduction to the demonstration, which gives its purpose and 
scope, and the principles it is intended to illustrate. 

c. Read and explain the general and special situations, pointing out on the table 
the localities mentioned. Answer questions and make certain that the situation is 
fully understood by all. 

d. Read each demonstration, explaining in detail each item thereof, and indicate 
on the table by means of colored pins or matches, the positions of the various 
members of the patrol, etc. Read and explain the comments following each 
demonstration. 

e. Upon completion summarize the instruction given and encourage questions 
and discussion by members of the class. 

Introduction. The purpose of this demonstration is to illustrate the operations 
of a reconnoitering patrol in gathering information by day. 

The details of the situations presented to a patrol will never be twice the same. 
But there are certain definite, fundamental problems every such patrol will have to 
solve. These are: 

1. What to do before starting out. 

2. How to move, keep concealed and provide for security in the presence, or 
supposed presence of the enemy. 

3. How to reconnoiter various features of the terrain. 

4. What to do when the enemy is encountered, in various circumstances. 

5. How to observe the activities of the enemy and to discover and interpret signs 
and tracks. 








PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


153 


6. When and how to send back messages. 

7. Final report of patrol leader. 

The demonstration is designed to illustrate the circumstances in which these 
problems might be presented to a patrol, and the manner in which they are solved. 

General principles, stated in general terms, make comparatively little impression 
on the mind of a previously uninstructed man, unless visualized and made definite 
by actual examples. Accordingly in this demonstration the conduct of each member 
of the patrol in each situation is described in minutest detail. 

General situation. The Blues declared war on the Reds two weeks ago. Blue 
forces yesterday drove Red detachments from the wooded ridge shown on south 
edge of map (Plate 77). The resistance of the Reds was chiefly long-range rifle 
and machine gun fire. This is the first resistance encountered by the Blue advance. 

The territory shown on the table is Red. 

Special situation. The 1st Battalion 1st Blue Inf, in the first line of the regiment, 
has just halted upon reaching the wooded ridge. The advance is to be continued 
ro-morrow, and the battalion commander has ordered that patrols be sent out to 
reconnoiter to the front. 

Lt X, commanding one of the assault platoons of Co A, sends for Corporal A, 
leader of the 5th squad, and issues to him the following orders (at 1: 30 PM) : 

“ Intelligence reports indicate that the enemy has retired to a position on the high 
ground about 2 miles north of here. We remain here to-night and continue our 
advance in the morning. The companies on our right and left will reconnoiter their 
own fronts. 

“ Take the scouts of the 5th and 6th squads, move north to the village of Ellis, 
about a mile from here, and find out if it is occupied by the enemy. Reconnoiter 
the ground between here and the village, over which our company must pass in its 
advance, especially Shell Creek, the woods beyond, and the village itself. Send 
messages to me here. Be back by dark. It is now 1: 38 PM, set your watch. Any 
questions? ” (Shell Creek is the large stream in center of map.) 

While giving this order Lt X points out to Corp A the localities referred to, 
using his map. (Plate 77.) He shows the corporal the limits of the company’s 
zone of action. Corp A makes a rough tracing from the map of the ground he has 
been ordered to reconnoiter. (See Plates 42 and 43.) 

Demonstration 1. Corporal A’s estimate of the situation at this time, and his 
plan of action. 

Mission. Corporal A’s mission is to reconnoiter the company zone of action as 
far to the front as the village of Ellis, inclusive. 

Enemy . The hostile detachments thus far encountered were probably a hostile 
outpost, which has retired before the Blue advance, evidently to the position referred 
to by Lt X, or some locality in front of it. Corporal A may expect to encounter 
hostile patrols or observing groups even before he reaches the village. 

His ozvn troops. The Blues hold their present front in considerable force, and 
will make a determined advance to-morrow. The companies on both flanks will 
also send out patrols to reconnoiter their fronts. Corporal A may encounter these 
patrols. Corp A’s own patrol is five men. He will be able to send back probably 
not more than two messages. This should be sufficient. 

Terrain. Corporal A studies the terrain over which he must pass from the 
lieutenant’s map. He notes that Shell Creek crosses the company zone of action 
at the near edge of the woods, and that it might be a serious obstacle if the enemy 
held the near edge of the woods. Even if he does not the creek may be unfordable. 
He also notes the branch creek beyond. This will also be an obstacle to the advance, 
but probably less serious than the main creek. Certainly it will be necessary to 
reconnoiter both of these streams and the woods. Corporal A sees that there is a 
road leading to Ellis from the creek junction, but considers it too exposed a route 
for his advance. The creek bottoms will be better, especially as he must in any case 
reconnoiter them. On reaching the far edge of the woods, near the place where the 
branch creek enters, Corp A believes he will be able to see the houses of Ellis. But 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


154 



Plate 77. 






































































PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


155 


a closer view will be necessary before actually entering the town. Corp A notes 
that the high point in the small wood southwest of the village will apparently afford 
the best view. But on the other hand he will have to cross open terrain to reach it, 
and would likely be seen from the village. He can gain the woods to the southeast 
without exposing himself to view, but they will not afford as good a view, nor as 
close an approach. 

From the village, or near it, Corporal A will be able to judge how well fire from 
the village would sweep the open ground to the south in the company’s zone of 
action. 

Plan of action. Corporal A’s plan of action is limited for the present to selecting 
a route, at least as far as the north edge of the woods. He decides to move down 
the draw to his right front, thence along the bed of Shell Creek to the junction, 
thence along the branch creek to the locality where it enters the woods. Arriving 
here he will select his next point of observation. He plans to return by a different 
route from the one over which he advances. 

Lt X checks Corp A’s plan and approves it. 

Comments. Lt X’s orders to Corp A indicate the strength, composition and 
leader appropriate to a patrol on such a mission and to such a distance. His orders 
give Corp A all the information and instructions that are necessary for his guid¬ 
ance on this simple mission. 

The demonstration indicates how a patrol leader estimates a situation, anticipates 
his problems, and formulates tentative plans for their solution. It illustrates also 
the proper use of a map as an aid to a patrol leader in: 

1. Deciding what features of the terrain should be investigated. 

2. Selecting favorable localities for observation. 

3. Selecting the best routes for his advance. 

Demonstration 2 . Actions and orders of Corporal A prior to starting out. 

Corporal A assembles his patrol and inspects the men and their equipment. He 
sees that the men are fit, that all identifications, such as collar ornaments, letters, 
etc., are left behind; that all superfluous equipment, or any that rattles or glistens in 
the sunlight is left behind or replaced; that each man has a rifle, a belt full of 
ammunition, a bayonet, and a filled canteen. (As the patrol will be out a very short 
time no rations are necessary.) 

Corp A checks his own equipment, which includes, besides his arms and accoutre¬ 
ments, a sketch (made from the map), message book, watch, pencils, compass and 
field glasses. 

He orders as follows: 

“ The enemy is believed to have retired to a position two miles north of here. 
Our battalion remains here to-night and advances to-morrow. We are a patrol to 
reconnoiter the company zone of action as far as the town of Ellis about a mile 
north of here, and to find out if the enemy is in the town. We will reconnoiter the 
ground between here and the village, especially Shell Creek and its branch, 
the woods and the open ground beyond. We will enter and examine the village. 

“ We will move down this draw, thence down the main creek to the road, thence 
up the branch to the edge of the woods. There we will decide the best way to 
approach the village. 

“ We must be in by dark. Messages will be sent to Lt X here. 

“ Black, second in command and get-away man; Jones point; Gregg observe to 
right; Gray to left, I will follow Jones at 25 yards. All keep within sight and 
speaking distance. We will use the regular signals (forward, halt, lie down, 
assemble, change direction, enemy in sight). 

“ In case we are scattered we will reassemble at the stream junction. Any ques¬ 
tions? Move out.” 

While giving this order Corp A points out on his sketch, and on the ground, the 
localities to which he refers. 

Comments. This demonstration sets forth the necessary preliminaries to the 
departure of a patrol. The inspection is thorough and practical. 


156 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Corp A explains the situation and mission of the patrol in detail. This is in 
order that any member of the patrol may be able alone to carry out the mission of 
the patrol in case the others are captured or dispersed. The orders indicate the 
general plan, but do not provide for emergencies. These must be met as they are 
encountered. 

Demonstration j. Moving down a ravine or drazv. 

Jones (point) moves down the left side of the ravine, observing in the direction 
in which he is moving. Gray (left flanker) moves down on the same side, high 
enough to see over the crest to the left. Gregg (right flanker) moves on the other 
side of the ravine, observing to his right. Corporal A moves down the right side of 
the ravine keeping the three men in front in sight. Black moves in the bottom, 
keeping Corp A in view. The men are separated by distances of 15 to 20 yards. 
(See Fig. 1, Plate 77.) They do not move simultaneously, but one or two at a 
time; that is, while Jones moves Gray and Corp A are in concealed positions (prone 
if necessary), watching him, and observing the terrain. 

Comments. This demonstration indicates a suitable formation for a small recon- 
noitering patrol in open country. It provides for observation and security to front 
and flanks. The leader is where he can see his reconnoitering elements. The get¬ 
away man follows under cover, keeping the leader in view. Distances are great 
enough to afford security and favor observation, and small enough to permit easy 
communication between individuals. 

Demonstration 4. Crossing a stream. 

As Jones approaches the creek bottom he signals; “ Halt.” The patrol halts, 
and Corp A goes forward until he can see what Jones can see. Both study the 
terrain up and down stream on the far side. 

While Corp A observes across the stream, Gray downstream and Gregg up¬ 
stream, Jones crosses and moves to a position from which he can observe the terrain 
beyond. 

Corp A crosses next, followed in order by Gray and Gregg. Black remains on 
the near side until the patrol has reached the woods. (See Fig. 2, Plate 77.) 

Comments. This demonstration indicates the usual precautions in crossing a 
stream: 

1. Halt and observe. 

2. One man crosses and reconnoiters while others watch. 

3. Remainder of patrol crosses one at a time. 

4. Get-away man remains on safe side until other side is thoroughly recon- 
noitered 

Demonstration 5. Moving through woods. 

Corp A’s mission is not only to reconnoiter the town of Ellis, but also the inter¬ 
vening terrain. Accordingly, on entering the woods he takes up a formation suit¬ 
able for both reconnaissance and security. The limit of visibility in the woods is 
about 40 yards. 

Jones (point) moves parallel to the stream, and about 50 yards from it (in the 
woods). Gray (left flanker) moves parallel to the stream, about 20 yards from it 
(in the woods), and about the same distance in rear of Jones. He observes the 
stream bed and far bank. Gregg (right flanker) moves about 30 yards to the right 
rear of the point, observing into the woods to his right. Corp A follows Jones, 
keeping the three leading scouts in sight. Black follows, in sight of Corp A* 
(Fig. 3.) 

All guide on Jones (point). Corp A watches the scouts and controls their 
movements. The men move from cover to cover, selecting a new halting place 
before leaving a former one. Ihey move stealthily and noiselessly. 

Comments. This demonstration indicates the proper formation of a patrol in 
passing through a wood which is to be reconnoitered. If the patrol had not been 
required to reconnoiter the woods,. but only to pass through safely, it might have 
assumed a column formation in single file, thereby facilitating the use of cover 
since cover for one would be cover for all. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


157 


By the time he reaches the stream junction Corp A will have thoroughly recon- 
noitered the entire dangerous edge of the woods which his company must pass on 
the following day. 

Demonstration 6. Inspecting a bridge. 

As the point reaches the stream junction Corp A halts his patrol. He moves 
forward to where he can see the bridge over Shell Creek, and carefully observes 
the locality. 

Corp A’s orders did not specifically indicate that he should inspect this bridge. 
It is a feature of no great importance to his company. But Corp A realizes that 
the road through Ellis will be an important route of transport in the coming advance 
of the Blue forces. Battalion and higher commanders will be interested in the 
condition of the bridge, and being so close Corp A decides to take a look at it. He 
would not have done this had it involved any great amount of time or a considerable 
departure from the route he had planned. 

He posts Jones in the edge of the woods to observe to the northwest and cover 
him while he moves along the stream bed to the bridge. (Fig. 3.) Corp A notes 
that the roadway of the bridge is 16 feet wide and about 10 feet above the bed of 
the creek. He sees that the bridge is a good steel truss, apparently quite strong and 
heavy, and that all parts appear to be in excellent condition. He makes note of this 
information for his final report. The matter is not sufficiently urgent to warrant 
sending back a messenger. 

Demonstration J. Meeting a hostile patrol. 

Having completed his inspection of the bridge without exposing himself to view 
above the creek bottom, Corp A signals to Jones: “Move to the right.” Jones 
returns to his position at the head of his patrol. Corp A signals and orders: “ FOR¬ 
WARD,” pointing up the branch into the woods. The patrol continues in the same 
formation. 

As Gray reaches the bend in the branch about 100 yards above the junction he 
signals : “ Halt,” and “ Enemy in sight ” (raising his rifle above his head). Corp 
A observes that Jones and Gregg have seen the signal, halted and taken cover. He 
signals Black (get-away man) to halt, and moves cautiously to his left front to 
join Gray. Through an opening in the trees he sees a Red cavalry trooper mounted 
and holding three other horses, in the edge of the woods, just off the road, about 
150 yards northeast of the bridge. (Fig. 1.) 

Corp A orders Gray: “We will move off to the right and then up this branch. 
Same formation. Our assembly point, if dispersed, will be on the creek where this 
branch enters. Tell Jones, and wait for my signal to proceed.” 

Corp A moves cautiously over to Gregg, informs him of the situation, and gives 
him the same order. He and Gregg then move to the right rear, Corp A signaling 
to Black, “Assemble.” When Black joins the corporal he is also informed of the 
situation and given the order. 

Corp A signals Jones and Gray: “ Forward,” as he moves off to his right front. 
Having moved about 100 yards farther into the woods, the patrol halts, re-forms, 
and continues up the branch in the same formation as before. (Fig. 1.) 

Comments. When Corp A saw the Red trooper he made a rapid estimate of the 
situation. His mission is to reconnoiter the woods—not to take prisoners. As the 
Red is a horseholder he is probably a member of a cavalry patrol of four men and 
he is in rear of them. He probably has no information concerning the Blue forces. 
As this patrol has moved on to the Blue lines Corp A is not apt to encounter it in 
the woods, especially as he is off the road on which this patrol must move. The 
Blues are already aware that there is Red cavalry in the vicinity. The Red patrol 
will not in any way interfere with the operations of Corp A’s company or endanger 
it. It is not likely to interfere with Corp A’s own actions. U Corp A attempts 
to kill or capture the horseholder he will use up a good deal of time, he will probably 
obtain none of the information he is seeking, and could not rely on anything the 
Red might tell him. Moreover he would be very likely to create an alarm and betray 
his own"presence, which would not help him to achieve his mission. Corp A decides 


158 SCOUTING AND PATROLING 

that nothing is to be gained by an attempt to capture the Red trooper. He will 
therefore keep out of his sight and continue on his mission. 

The demonstration illustrates how a definite understanding of his mission will 
guide a patrol leader to correct decisions in emergencies. Combat with the enemy is 
ordinarily not the function of a reconnoitering patrol, and is to be avoided. 

The demonstration also indicates the manner in which the leader directs his 
patrol, using simple signals when applicable, and word of mouth for instructions 
which cannot be conveyed by signal. 

Demonstration 8. Selection of an observation post and route thereto. 

As Jones reaches the north edge of the woods he signals; “ Halt.” Corporal A 
joins Jones, and together they observe the open country and the village. (Fig. 4.) 
From their position they can see the tops of the houses only. Corp A notes that 
to gain the woods southwest of the village he must cross some 300 yards of open 
terrain and pass a house. He will also run some risk of encountering the Red 
cavalry patrol whose horseholder he has seen, and he may be observed from the 
village. On the other hand he can move in the woods to a concealed position south¬ 
east of the village and within 150 yards of it, where good observation will be 
possible. Here he will have a good line of retreat, through the woods. 

He decides to move in the woods to the point southeast of the village. This will 
take him out of the company zone of action. He is not required to reconnoiter this 
portion of the woods, and hence decides to move in a column formation, favoring 
concealment and rapid progress. He signals to his patrol; “ Assemble,” and issues 
the following orders: 

“ We will move along the edge of the woods to the point nearest the village on the 
southeast, and observe from there. Jones, keep about 25 yards inside the woods. 
Gray and Gregg, follow me at about 15 yards and observe to the flanks as before. 
Black, follow Gregg at 20 yards. Move out, Jones.” (Fig. 4.) 

In this formation the patrol moves to the observation point selected. 

Comments. This demonstration illustrates how a patrol halts to observe from a 
covered position and selects its next stopping point and the route thereto. It also 
illustrates a formation appropriate for passage through a wood when reconnaissance, 
other than for security, is not required. 

Demonstration p. Approach to and observation from a house. 

As Jones reaches the designated point, in the edge of the woods 150 yards south¬ 
east of the village, he signals; “ Halt.” Corp A joins him, and together they observe 
the village, and especially the nearest house, for about five minutes. Corp A then 
signals to the patrol; “ Assemble,” and orders: 

“ We will move to that house (pointing) thence through the village to the woods 
southwest. Gray, watch the road and the edge of the woods to the south. Gregg, 
watch the ground to the north. I will watch the house. Jones, go on to the house.” 

(Fig. 4.) 

Jones moves carefully towards the house, advancing from one bush to another, 
and creeping behind.slight folds of the ground. When he reaches the house Jones 
looks through the windows, while Corp A watches. Jones finally enters the house. 
Five minutes later he reappears at the door on the side towards Corp A and signals ; 
“ Forward.” 

Corp A at once joins Jones, moving in the same cautious manner, and is followed 
at intervals by Gray and Gregg. Black remains in the edge of the woods, observing 
the house, and occasionally looking to his flanks and rear. 

Corp A searches the house. It has evidently been hurriedly vacated. He finds 
a collar insignia of Co D 12th Red Inf. In the sitting-room he finds an officers 
spur. In the fireplace he finds a partially burned scrap of paper bearing the words * 

* * * order of Maj Gen SCHMIDT 
H. S. Myer, 

Chief of * * * 

The house is the largest in the village. From the upper windows Corp A inspects 
the village. He can see all the houses. There are no signs, either of the enemy or 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


159 


the inhabitants. Suddenly Gray who is observing to the south, calls out; “ Enemy 
in sight.” Corp A goes to Gray’s window and perceives four Red cavalrymen 
moving north along the road towards the village. They pass through the town 
without stopping. 

Corp A assembles his patrol (except Black, who is still in the woods), shows 
them the insignia and scrap of paper, and orders: 

You saw that patrol pass through. It looks as if there were no enemy in the 
village. I can see no signs. Gray, take this insignia and paper with a message to 
Lt X. Join Black, give him the insignia and paper and a copy of the message, 
and both of you return to our lines as rapidly as possible. Take a new route. Any 
questions ? ” 

Corp A then writes the following message: 

Southeast corner of ELLIS, 

4: 00 PM, June 12, 22. 

To Lt. X. (By messenger.) 

SHELL CREEK fordable all points. Woods unoccupied. Some underbush, 
limit of visibility about 40 yards. Saw Red horseholder, four horses, near bridge 
south of here 2 :20. Four Red cavalry passed through village to north at 3 155. 
Insignia, Co D 12th Red Inf, and scrap of order, found in house. No other signs 
of enemy. Will search village. 

A, Corporal. 

Corp A hands two copies of this message to Gray and dispatches him. Gray 
and Black return to Lt X through the woods. They do not move together, but 
as a two-man patrol, Gray giving one copy of the message, the insignia and scrap 
of paper to Black. 

Comments. Corp A has satisfied himself that the enemy is not holding the 
village, though he cannot be sure there are no individuals present until he has 
thoroughly searched it. This will take time. His mission has been accomplished, 
and the information desired by Lt X should be sent back without delay. Corp A 
considers it wise to search the village, as additional information of value may 
thereby be gained, and such an opportunity should not be neglected. 

Demonstration 10. Reconnaissance of a village. 

Corp A orders Jones and Gregg, “We will search the village. Move down that 
street (pointing) Jones on the left, Gregg on the right. When you reach a house 
one man search it rapidly while other covers it from outside. I will follow Jones. 
Move out.” 

In this manner the patrol moves through the village, searching all the houses. 
Signs of enemy occupation and hasty departure are noted in several houses. Some 
pieces of equipment marked “ Co D 12th Inf ” are found. Corp A notes that all 
pumps have been demolished, and open wells filled with rubbish. 

At 5 130 PM the patrol reassembles at the first house entered. Corp A orders, 
“ We will return, moving straight south through the woods. Jones in the lead, 
observe to front, Gregg 20 yards behind, observe to right and rear. I will observe 
to left and front. Move out.” 

Comments. The corporal’s orders indicate the proper method of reconnoitering 
a village. 

In returning the patrol should exercise the same care as in moving to the front. 
The return route should be different if practicable. 

Demonstration 11. Capture of hostile messenger. 

Just after the patrol has entered the woods Jones signals; “ Halt. Enemy in 
sight,” and takes cover. Corp A sees a Red infantryman moving carefully through 
the woods, 60 yards to his right front. He watches him for a moment, and decides 
that he is alone. He signals Gregg to move to the right, and aims at the Red. The 
Red halts, and looks intently in Gregg’s direction. The patrol is now on three sides 
of him at some 40 yards distance. Corporal A calls out, “ Surrender. Get him, 
Jones.” 


160 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 




The Red starts to run to his left and Corp A instantly shoots him. He covers him 
where he falls until Jones reaches him. Corp A searches the prisoner and finds 
a written message: 

“ Enemy outposts located as per sketch. Z, Sgt.” 

On back was a sketch of a part of the Blue position. 

Corp A administers first aid to his prisoner. He then questions him, but the 
prisoner refuses to answer. He orders; “ We will proceed. Jones in lead, Gregg 
follow at 20 yards, watch flanks and rear. I will take charge of the prisoner. 
Move out.” Corp A fixes his bayonet, and compels his prisoner to walk about 
five paces in front of him. 

In this manner the patrol proceeds to the edge of the woods. Here it halts and 
observes the open ground, and then proceeds up Shell Creek and the 'Small draw in 
which it started out, to the Blue lines. 

Comments. As the Red was alone and returning to his own lines he is evidently 
a messenger. Corp A’s mission has been accomplished, he knows that there are no 
large Red forces near, and he is close to his own lines. No great risk is involved 
in the attempt to capture this man. To do so probably deprives the Reds of valuable 
information concerning the Blue position. Also prisoners are one of the chief 
sources of information. Corp A was correct in his decision to capture the Red 
and take him back. He takes no chances of his escaping and shoots him when he 
fails to surrender on order. 

Demonstration 12. Report of patrol. 

On his arrival Corp A reports at once to Lt X and gives him a complete verbal 
account of all that he has learned. He finds that his messengers have returned. 
Lt X writes the following report, which he dispatches by Corp A to his company 
commander. The latter will probably wish to question the corporal, as well as the 
prisoner, who is sent with the corporal. 


Report of Patrol No. 1. 

1st Plat Co A 
7 : 30 PM, June 12, 22. 

To CO, Co A. 

Strength. Five men. 

Leader. Corp A (bearer of report). 

Mission. Reconnoiter co zone of action to village of ELLIS inc. 

Time of dep. 1 : 52 PM, June 12. 

Route. Down SHELL CREEK to junction, up branch creek to edge of woods, 
to ELLIS and return. 

Time of ret. 6: 20 PM. 

Information reported. SLIELL CREEK fordable. Woods unoccupied. Limit 
of visibility, 40 yards. ELLIS unoccupied but signs of recent departure of enemy 
Houses intact, water supply destroyed. Bridge over SHELL CREEK on road to 
ELLIS, strong steel tr roadway 16 feet, 10 feet above creek. In good condition. 

Enemy seen. Trooper and four horses near bridge, 2 : 20 PM. Mtd patrol four 
men passed through ELLIS 3 : 55 PM. One scout in woods south of town \: ac 
PM. Captured, with message. ’ J 0 

Remarks. One written message, forwarded from ELLIS 4:00 PM, received 
4: 45 PM. Sent to C O Co A with hostile insignia and scrap of order. 

Prisoner and message found on his person forwarded herewith. No casualties. 

X, Lt. 

The company commander reads the report and questions the prisoner He then 

sends the report by indorsement to the battalion intelligence officer, with Coro A 
and the prisoner. ’ F 

Comments. This demonstration illustrates the form of report of a reconnoiterine 
patrol, the information to be included, and the disposition made of the information 
and of any prisoners captured. 






PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


161 


Note. The students may be given a number of short practical problems based 
upon the subject matter of Chaps. X to XV, inc., and the situations illustrated in 
the preceding demonstration. These problems may be given on the same table 
used for the demonstration. For example: Write a general situation in which 
Blue forces coming from the north occupy the town of Ellis, and a special situation 
calling for patrols to be sent to the south. The problems may be drawn to illustrate 
the following duties: 

1. Orders to the patrol leader. 

2. Patrol leader's estimate of the situation. 

3. His actions and orders before departure. 

4. Formations of the patrol in various terrain. 

5. Selection of places for observation and routes thereto from the map, and on 
the terrain. 

6. Manner of making observations. 

7. Conduct of the patrol in various situations. 

8. Written messages. 

9. Final report of patrol. 

Exercises on map or sand table should be supplemented by exercises on actual 
terrain whenever practicable. Demonstrations and problems may be readily 
adapted to the terrain available. 

Exercise 27. Demonstration and Practice. Sound Signals. 

Purpose: To demonstrate the sound signals employed by night patrols and prac¬ 
tice their use. 

Equipment: Empty cartridge shell, match box, etc. 

Place: Any terrain or assembly room. 

Procedure: The instructor will demonstrate a number of sound signals, the 
following being suggested: 

Cluck. Hiss. Whisper. Drawing finger nail or pencil across the teeth. Tapping 
on match box or gunstock with finger nail or pencil. Whistle. Blowing across the 
top of an empty cartridge case. Rubbing palm of hand across sleeve or trouser 
leg, etc. 

The instructor then causes the students to turn their backs and recognize the 
signals. By varying his distance he demonstrates the range at which various 
signals may be heard. 

The class is then divided into a number of small groups and required to practice 
the signals until all are able to make and interpret them. 

Finally small patrols may be organized take the usual formation, move forward, 
halt, change direction, check-up, etc., at the signal of the leader, the members 
of the patrols taking turns acting as leader. 

Exercise 28. Demonstration. Inspection of Wire Entanglements by Night. 

Purpose: To illustrate the manner in which a patrol locates and records damaged 
places in a wire entanglement on the front of a stabilized position in close proximity 
to the enemy. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment (no rifles) ; patrol leader to be equipped with 
luminous compass, notebook and pencil (if demonstrated on the terrain). 

Place: Map, sandtable, or prepared trench area. 

Procedure. The procedure in the conduct of a sand table demonstration has 
been previously explained. If the demonstration be given on the terrain it should 
first be staged by daylight, the men of the patrol wearing black glasses or being 
blindfolded. Later the exercises may be practiced by night. 

General situation. Reds and Blues are at war. The Blues have checked a deter¬ 
mined Red offensive, and the situation has become stabilized in Blue territory. 


162 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Special situation. The ist Battalion 1st Blue Inf relieved the 3rd Battalion 
8th Inf in the sector shown on Plate V on the night of June 11-12, 1922. Cos A 
and B are in the front line. 

Lt A, commanding the support platoon of Co A, received the following order 
from his battalion commander at 1: 00 PM, June 12 : “ You will make an inspection 
of the wire on the battalion front to-night. Front line will be warned to expect 
your patrol between 10:00 PM and 2: 00 AM.” 

Demonstration 1. Lt A’s reconnaissance, estimate, plans and orders. Reconnais¬ 
sance — map. Lt A studies the battle map of the sector. (Plate 78.) He notes: 

1. At no point is the outer edge of the wire closer than 200 yards to the hostile 
trenches, nor farther than 150 yards from the battalion trenches. 

2. The battalion front is about 1000 yards wide. 

3. The ground on which the obstacles are located is low T er than the trenches on 
either side. 

4. A gap in the Blue wire is indicated near the right edge of the battalion sector. 

5. A tall pine tree within the Red lines and an old house within the Blue lines 
are indicated as favorable reference (resection) points from No Man’s Land 
(space between the opposing trenches). 

6. From the wire in front of Lt A’s own command post the pine tree bears 
N 40° W. 

Lt A notes all located hostile machine guns, observation and snipers’ posts, 
and gaps in the Red wire indicated on the map. 

Reconnaissance — ground. Lt A visits several of the front line observation 
posts. He verifies the location of the gap in the Blue wire on the right of the 
sector. He notes that the near edge of the wire is generally from 50 to 75 yards 
from the front trench. He verifies the location of the lone pine tree and the old 
house. He locates a gap in the Blue wire in front of his own command post (on the 
left of battalion sector). He cautions the men in each observation post: “ I am 
taking a patrol along the front of our wire between 10:00 PM and 2:00 AM 
to-night. Pass the word to your relief.” 

Estimate of the situation. Lt A’s mission is to inspect the front of the Blue 
wire, to note its condition, and particularly to locate all gaps. 

The enemy is active. He uses flares liberally and keeps up an active harassing 
fire by day and night. 

There will be no other Blue patrols out to-night (June 12-13). The Blue front 
line will be advised concerning Lt A’s patrol. 

The ground over which Lt A must pass is lower than the trenches. He will 
therefore not be visible against the sky. There are few shell holes, and no other 
serious obstacles to movement, no trees and no branches lying on the ground 
which might crackle under foot. 

The wire is not more than 75 yards deep at any point. A man on the inner edge 
will be able to maintain contact with one on the outer edge and with another in 
the trench without betraying the presence of the patrol to the enemy. 

The sky is overcast and Lt A judges that the night will be dark. The enemy 
will not detect his patrol so long as its movements are noiseless, except by the aid 
of flares. 

Lt A will need a small patrol to move to No Man’s Land and picket (guard) the 
heads of gaps, while he investigates them. He will need a man in the trench to 
further warn sentries of the presence of the patrol, and to mark the location of any 
gaps discovered, by means of stakes in the parapet, so that repair parties will be 
able to find them easily. He will need at least one connecting file between his patrol 
and the man in the trench, and it will be better to have two. He will therefore need 
six men altogether. 

Orders. Lt A issues the following orders at his own command post: “ Scouts 
of first section report. * * * Enemy patrols have been active at night recently. 
We are going out to-night to inspect the wire along the battalion front. We wili 
move into No Man’s Land through this gap at the right end of our sector (pointing 







PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


163 



it out on the map), move along 
the entire battalion front from 
right to left, and return through 
this gap, opposite the left front of 
our company. Jones, second in 
command, Black and Gregg, will 
accompany me outside the wire. 
Gregg, point, will move about 20 
yards from and parallel to the 
wire. I will follow Gregg at about 
15 yds. Black will move 20 yards 
on my right and observe to his 
right. Jones will follow me at 
about 15 yards and observe to his 
right and rear. Gray and Brown 
will move inside the wire as con¬ 
necting files between me and Ja¬ 
cobs. Jacobs will move along our 
advanced trench, warn sentries of 
our presence, and place stakes 
in the parapet when I order 
4 Mark.’ Bring a dozen stakes 
with you, Jacobs. Our control 
signals will be short low whistles, 
thus (he whistles) ; all repeat it. 
So. One whistle means ‘ Halt,’ 
two mean ‘ Forward/ three mean 
‘Assemble’ (near me). Our 
check-up signal will be one long, 
low whistle, thus (he whistles). 
Order of check, Gregg, Black, 
Jones, Gray, Brown, Jacobs. 
Count 10 between checks. Any 
number ending in three will be a 
recognition signal. Each man 
will wear a campaign hat or cap, 
and will carry a pistol, knife, and 
wire cutters. Any questions? 
All assemble here at 9:00 PM.” 

Comments. This demonstra¬ 
tion illustrates the necessary pre¬ 
liminaries before starting out on 
such a mission, and the nature of 
the orders appropriate thereto. 
Because of the difficulty of recog¬ 
nizing or even seeing a man in 
the dark, and the proximity of 
the hostile lines, a code of signals 
by sound is necessary. This code 
must be very simple, limited to 
absolute necessities. 







































164 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Demonstration 2. The start. Conduct of the patrol. 

At 9: 00 PM Lt A’s scouts are assembled. He inspects them and sees that they 
have observed his instructions with reference to equipment. They have nothing on 
which glistens or rattles, or would impede their movements. Lt A himself is 
equipped with a pistol, a luminous compass, a notebook with stiff back, pencils, 
watch (with luminous dial). 

He leads his patrol in single file to the trench opposite the gap on the right of the 
sector. Here he leaves Jacobs, giving him final orders, as follows: “ We move 
out through a gap there (pointing) and along the front in that direction (pointing). 
Keep abreast of us, and when I pass the word ‘ Mark,’ send back ‘ OK ’ and 
place a stake in the parapet, inside, below the crest.” 

Lt A notes that it is now 10:00 PM. An hour has been spent in assembling 
and inspecting his patrol, moving over 1000 yards in the trenches to his starting 
point, and giving his final instructions. He leads his patrol in single file into the 
gap. Here he signals; “ Halt ” (one low whistle). He sees Gray and Brown leave 
the tail of the column and move along the inside of the wire towards the place where 
Jacobs was left. He signals; “ Forward ” (two low whistles), and moves to the 
outer end of the gap. Here he signals ; “ Halt,” and kneels in the gap while Gregg, 
followed by Black and finally by Jones, moves past him. The three men take their 
proper positions. Lt A signals; “ Forward,” moves about 50 yards along the 
front of the obstacle, and signals; “ Halt.” 

Lt A now gives his check-up signal (a long whistle), counts 10 and hears it 
repeated in his front, counts 10 and hears it repeated to his right, and in like manner 
in rear, and three times on his left. Lt A thus knows that all of his men are 
present and in their proper positions. He signals, “ Forward.” 

Lt A moves slowly along the front of the wire and carefully inspects it. When- 
even necessary he lies on the ground, especially when he reaches a low point, 
so that he can see the wire outlined against the sky. He signals: “ Halt ” and 
“ Forward ” to his patrol, according to his own movements. 

Demonstration 3. Locating and inspecting damaged wire. 

Lt A presently reaches a locality in which the Blue entanglements have been 
badly damaged by hostile shell fire. He signals: “ Halt,” and works his way through 
the damaged wire. He finds that the gap extends entirely through all the belts to the 
inside. On arriving here Lt A cannot see the connecting files. He signals: “ As¬ 
semble ” (three short and very low whistles). Gray repeats the signal and moves 
back towards Lt A. Brown and Jacobs move to points opposite Lt A. Lt A orders: 
“ Mark.” Gray and Brown pass this on to Jacobs, who places a stake in the parapet 
and reports, “ OK.” This report is passed on by Brown and Gray to Lt A. 

Lt A takes bearings on the pine tree and the old house, and enters the following 
in his note book: 

10: 30 PM Gap 1 S 70° W tree. S io° E house. Inside stake 4 yds. 

He returns to the outer end of the gap, and takes its bearings. This is necessary 
to give the direction of the gap, which will be of importance, for example, in 
locating an automatic rifle to enfilade the gap. 

It is difficult to make notes at night, but with practice it can be done. A rubber 
band should be placed around the book to mark the page in use, and a separate page 
of the book should be used for all notes made at any one point. 

When wire is damaged but not breached clear through it is located by compass 
bearings as usual. If the damage is extensive, and it is necessary to place a stake, 
Lt A passes the order: “Mark,” through the connecting files to Jacobs. If he 
be too far from the nearest connecting file to safely give a verbal order he may 
crawl into the obstacle a short distance. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


165 


Demonstration 4. Return of patrol. 

When Lt A believes that he is about opposite the left of the battalion sector he 
checks his position by a compass bearing on the tree. He remembers that this 
should be N 40° W. If the reading is about this he continues to the next gap 
which extends entirely through. Upon returning to its outer end he signals: 
“Assemble,” to Gregg, Black and Jones, who join him. He leads them in a single 
file through the gap and into the trench, Gray and Brown following. The patrol 
then returns direct to Lt A’s command post. 

Demonstration 5. Report of patrol. 

In the presence of his men Lt A prepares his report. He questions the men, 
verifying his own information, and including any of importance they may have. 
The report is in the following form: 

Report of Wire Patrol No 1 

Date. June 12-13, 1922. 

Leader. Lt A, Co A 1st Inf 

Strength. Six men. 

Mission. Inspect wire on front of 1st Bn 1st Inf 

Time of dep. Left trench 10: 05 PM, June 12. 

Time of ret. Returned to trench 1 :17 AM, June 13. 

Through gaps located 



Time 

Azimuth X 

Azimuth Y Stake 

in parapet 

Remarks 

I. 

10: 30 


250° 


170° 

Yes 


Inside 




250° 


175 ° 



Outside 









About 4 yds wide 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

x * 

7 - 

12:48 


3 00 ° 


55 ° 

Yes 


Inside 




295 ° 


55 ° 



Outside 









4 yds wide 









narrower inside 

Damaged zvire 

located 







x 

* 

X 

* 

* 

* 

* 

X 

x * 

4 - 

11:40 


255 ° 


120° 

No 


Gap 10 yds wide 









in 2 outer belts 

* 

X 

X 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

x * 


(Azimuth X to pine tree, Y to old house, shown on battle map of Bn 2) 

Remarks. 

a. General condition of wire good. Some wooden pickets rotting. 

b. Inner belt intact except at through gaps reported. 

c. No enemy encountered. 

d No casualties 

e. While halted near gap 4 at 11 140 Pvt Black thinks he saw patrol of three 
men moving parallel to wire about 100 yards distant. Pvt Jones heard men moving 
at same time. I neither saw nor heard anything. 

A, Lt 

This report is sent by Lt A to his company commander, who reads and for¬ 
wards to Bn 2 (battalion intelligence officer). Bn 2 plots on his battle map any 
new information contained in the report. 

Demonstration 6. Plotting the information. 

On receiving this report Bn 2 refers to his battle map on which are shown the 
pine tree and the old house used by Lt A (points A and B, Plate 78). With his 


166 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


protractor centered at A Bn 2 quickly locates the gaps and damaged places reported. 
He then centers the protractor at B, and checks these locations. If the checks are 
close they verify both the location of the wire and of the gaps and damaged pjaces. 

Thus, for Gap No 7, Bn 2 plots the line AP', with an azimuth of 235 0 , the 
back azimuth of 55°, as given in the report. In like manner he plots AP" 
(on same line). He also plots from B, BP' and BP". P f and P" are the inner and 
outer ends of Gap No 7. 


Exercise 29. Demonstration. Inspection of Enemy Entanglements by Night. 

The procedure of the patrol, the method of locating gaps, and the form of report 
will be the same in this case as in the last, except that no stakes are placed in the 
parapet; and no man in the trench nor connecting files are needed. 

Gregg, Black and Jones operate outside the Red wire in exactly the same manner 
as they did outside the Blue wire. Lt A, accompanied by Gray, investigates each 
gap. Gray remains in the gap while Lt A moves through. He takes bearings and 
makes notes as heretofore described. 

Greater caution must be exercised in investigating hostile wire as it is practically 
certain to be under observation. 

The information reported by the patrol will be plotted by Bn 2 in the same manner. 
He has already the location of the Red wire. 


Exercise 30. Demonstration. Night Listening Patrol. 


Purpose: To illustrate the conduct of a night listening patrol in stabilized 
warfare. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment; patrol leader to be equipped with luminous 
watch and compass, notebook and pencil (if demonstrated on the terrain). 

Place: Map, sand table or prepared trench area. 

Procedure: See Exercise 27. If demonstrated on the terrain a number of men 
should be posted at various distances and in various directions, to simulate various 
characteristic noises of an area occupied by troops. The locations of these men 
should be marked by stakes, whereby a check may be had on the accuracy of the 
patrol’s observations. 

General situation. Same as Exercise 28. 

Special situation. The 1st Bn 1st Blue Inf has been in the sector (Plate 78) 
two days. At 1:00 PM, June 14, 1922, Sgt X, 1st Plat Co A 1st Inf is called to 
the platoon command post, and Bn 2, in the presence of Lt A (the platoon 
leader), gives him the following order: “The enemy’s night patrols were quite 
active last night. He uses flares continually. Our wire patrols and repair parties 
had a good deal of trouble from harassing fire. There will be two other patrols out 
to-night, both on your left. The recognition signal is any number ending in four. 
You will take out a patrol of three scouts at 10:00 PM to-night. Pass through the 
gap in our wire here (indicating on the map). There is a stake in the parapet 
opposite the gap. Move due north from that stake, and halt 50 yards from the 
enemy wire. You will be about here (indicating on the map). There are enemy 
observation posts here and here (indicating). Remain in position, listen and 
observe until about 2: 00 AM. Use this old house in our lines, and this pine tree 
in the enemy lines (indicating) as reference points. Make a written report in the 
usual form to Lt A. Set your watch, it is now 1: 06. Any questions ? 

Lt A directs Sgt X to take Jones, Black and Gregg (scouts) as his patrol. 

Demonstration 1. Sgt X’s reconnaissance, estimate, plans and orders. Recon¬ 
naissance — map. Sgt X, with Lt A, studies the battle map of the sector (Plate 
78). He locates his approximate position of observation, and with a protractor 
takes the bearings of the house and the tree. He studies the dispositions of the 
enemy as shown on the map, and makes a sketch of the locality (tracing from the 
map). He studies the distances and directions until he can make the sketch without 
reference to the map, thus fixing the locations in his mind. 




















PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


167 


Reconnaissance-ground. Sgt X visits the front line and locates the stake and 
gap from which he is to start. He studies No Man’s Land, and the enemy trenches 
beyond from the trench and a nearby observation post. He locates the pine tree 
and the old house. 

Estimate of the situation. Sgt X’s mission is to move to a point 50 yards from 
the enemy wire, to lie there, listen, observe, and report all that he learns of the 
enemy’s activities. 

The enemy is active. He will probably have night patrols out, and uses flares 
and harassing fire. 

There will be two other patrols on Sgt X’s left, with similar missions. 

The ground where Sgt X will lie is low, which is favorable for observation and 
concealment. He is familiar with the lay of it from his reconnaissance. 

Sgt X decides that he will lead his patrol straight to the position, place one man 
on his right and one on his left, each at about 15 yards to observe to the flanks, and 
one man about the same distance in rear to observe in that direction. Sgt X himself 
will observe to the front, watching the hostile position. 

Orders. Sgt X assembles his patrol as soon as he has completed these prelimi¬ 
naries. He takes them to the stake in the trench and points out the gap and the 
ground in which they will operate. He then orders: 

“ The enemy’s night patrols were active last night. He uses flares and harassing 
fire. We are going out at 10:00 PM to-night as a listening patrol, and will be out 
until 2: 00 AM. There will be two other patrols on our left. We move due north 
from here through the gap to a point 50 yards from the enemy wire, and there lie in 
observation. Black will follow me at 5 to 10 yards and observe to the right. Gregg 
will follow Black at the same distance and observe to the left. Jones will follow 
Gregg at same distance and observe to the rear. When we reach our positions Black 
and Gregg will move out abreast of me at 15 yards interval, Jones will close up to 
15 yards behind me, all continue to observe in same directions. I will watch the 
enemy. Our control signals will be short low hisses, thus (he hisses). All repeat 
it. One hiss, ‘ Halt ’; two, ‘ Forward ’; three, ‘ Assemble around me.’ Our check¬ 
up signal will be a low cluck. All repeat it. So. The order of check will be my¬ 
self, Black, Gregg, Jones. Count 10 between clucks. The recognition signal for 
the night is any number ending in four. Each man will wear a campaign hat, and 
carry pistol, knife and wire cutters. Black your faces and hands. Any questions? 
Assemble at the platoon command post at 9: 00 PM.” 

Demonstration 2. The start. Conduct of the patrol. 

At 9:00 PM Sgt X inspects his patrol and sees that they have observed his 
instructions with reference to equipment. He sees they wear nothing which would 
be either visible or audible to the enemy. He notes that their insignia are lacking. 
He asks if they have any letters on their persons which would identify the company 
to which they belong. Sgt X carries (in addition to his weapons) a wire cutter, a 
watch and compass, both luminous, a note-book with stiff back, pencils. 

He leads his patrol through the trenches to the starting point. While moving the 
patrol practices its signals. On arriving at the front line trench Sgt X moves a 
little distance in each direction. He finds several sentinels and tells them: “I am 
going out on patrol in your front. Will be back about 2: 00 AM. Pass the word 
to your relief.” 

Sgt X leads his patrol through the gap. At the outer end he halts, takes a bear¬ 
ing to his front, due north. He selects a spot on the ground as far ahead as he can 
see, and in the right direction, and moves to it. Here he halts again, takes a back 
bearing on the gap and finds it to be due south, thus checking his direction, takes 
another bearing forward and again advances. In this manner he continues until he 
can see the enemy wire ahead of him. He signals: “ Halt.”. He estimates his dis¬ 
tance to the wire and moves backward, or forward, until he judges.that he is about 
50 yards from it, measured along his line of direction (the wire might be closer in 
another direction). The members of his patrol move to their observing positions, 
SPM-8 


168 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


as planned. Sgt X sounds the check-up signal, which is repeated by his men. He 
thus knows that all of his men are present and in their correct positions. 

Sgt X takes bearings on the pine tree and house, and finds that these are as they 
should be, thus again checking his position. He then lies perfectly still, observing 
the enemy’s position, and listening for any indications of his activities. 

Demonstration J. Action on observing enemy activity. 

Machine gun fire suddenly opens to the right front, inside the hostile lines. Sgt X 
estimates the distance to the gun as about four times the distance to the wire, or 
200 yards. He points his compass (which he had placed on the ground in front of 
him) in the direction of the gun. He notes the time, and then reads his compass. 
He records all these items in his note book. He continues to watch the locality 
from which the fire comes. Each time it is repeated he checks his compass bearing 
and takes the time. The last burst is 15 minutes after the first. Sgt X’s notes 
are as follows: 

1:05 340 0 3 00 yds MG 15 min bursts. 

Sgt X continues to observe to his front, ready to repeat this procedure if any 

other hostile activity develops. 

Note. —The instructor may place a compass in the position occupied by the patrol (on the 
sand table) and show how the bearing is taken. 

Demonstration 4. Return of patrol. 

About 1: 45 AM Sgt X signals to his patrol: “ Assemble.” Guiding his move¬ 
ment by his compass as before, he leads his patrol in reverse formation to that in 
which it came out, back through the gap to the trench. Passing a sentinel he tells 
him that he is a patrol coming back. The patrol proceeds straight to the platoon 
command post. Here Sgt X questions his men as to what they have seen and heard, 
verifying his own observations. 

Demonstration 5. Report of patrol. 

Sgt X submits the following report to Lt A : 

Report of Listening Patrol No 1 

Date. 13 June, ’22. 

Leader. Sgt X, Co A 1st Inf 

Mission. Move north from trench; halt 50 yards from enemy wire; remain in 
position, listen and observe. 

Time of departure. Left trench 10: 00 PM, June 12. 

Time of return. Reached trench 2: 10 AM, June 13. 


Observations 


Time 

Distance 

Direction 

Description 

Remarks 

li:00 

50 yds 

0° 

Enemy wire 


11:05 


60 0 

House on hill 

Point A 

ii: 10 


265° 

Tower on nose 

Point B 

* 

* * 

* * 

* * * * 

* 

1:05 

300 yds 

340 ° 

MG firing in bursts 
for 15 minutes 

Point C 

* 

* * 

* * 

* * * * 

* 


Remarks. Patrols, probably hostile, heard at intervals during entire period of 
observation, in No Man’s Land. None were seen. 

X, Sgt. 

This report is forwarded (by indorsement) to the company commander by Lt A, 
and by the company commander in turn to Bn 2. 




PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


169 


Demonstration 6. Plotting the information. 

Jhe. battalion intelligence officer receives, in addition to Sgt X’s report, the 
following similar report of another patrol: 


Report of Listening Patrol No 2 

Date. 13 June, ’22. 

Leader. Sgt Y, Co A 1st Inf 

. Mission. Move N yo° W from CP; halt 5° yards from enemy wire; remain 
in position, listen and observe. 

Time of departure. Left CP 10: 07 PM, June 12. 

Time of return. Reached CP 2: 17 AM, June 13. 

Observations 


Time 

Distance 

Direction 

Description 

Remarks 

ii: 00 

50 yds 

290 0 

Enemy wire 


11:15 


70° 

House on hill 

Point A 

11:15 


320° 

Tower on nose 

Point B 

* 

* * 

* * 

* * * * 

* 

IN. 

O 

1—1 

500 yds 

20° 

MG firing in bursts 
Fired 15 minutes 

Point C 

* 

* * 

* * 

* * * * 

* 


Remarks. * * * 

Y, Sgt 

These reports are plotted on the battle map as follows (Plate 78) : 

Known points. 

CP Starting point for patrols. 

Point A House within own lines. 

Point B Tree within enemy’s lines. 

W—W—W. Enemy wire, located from observation and previous reports. 

Known directions. 

CP—X o° As per orders issued patrols 

CP—Y 250 0 As per orders issued patrols 

Known distances. (As estimated by patrols.) 

X—W 50 yards As per orders issued patrols 

Y—W 50 yards As per orders issued patrols 

He measures the distance X—W, and Y—W, on the plotted direction lines, 
CP—X and CP—Y, determines the location of Points X and Y, the locations 
of the patrols. 

He notes the reported azimuths X—A (6o°) and X—B (265°). He plots from 
the Point A the back azimuth A—X' (240°). He plots from the Point B the back 
azimuth B—X" (85°). He notes that although the direction lines A—X' and 
B—X"-do not intersect the direction line CP—X at the same point (X) they are 
very close to this point (X) as determined by the measured distance X—W. He 
considers that the location of the Point X is fairly accurate from these checks. 

He checks the location of the Point Y in the same manner from the report of 
Patrol No. 2. 

He plots the direction X—C from the reported azimuth 340°. He scales off 
the reported distance (300 yards) and determines the location of the Point C'. 

He plots the direction Y—C from the reported azimuth 20°. He scales off 
the reported distance (500 yards) and determines the location of the Point C". 




170 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


The intersection of the direction lines X—C and Y—C locate the Point C. The 
points C' and C" are close enough to the Point C to indicate beyond a reasonable 
doubt that there is a MG within a small area around the Point C. 

Note. —If the students have not been instructed in map reading the demonstrations of plot¬ 
ting information from reports of patrols may be omitted in the discretion of the instructor. 

Additional Demonstrations. 

Using the same or similar situations and the sand tables as prepared for the 
preceding, additional demonstrations may readily be prepared to illustrate: 

1. Ambush and capture of a hostile patrol. 

2. A silent raid. 

Exercise 31. Demonstration. Conduct of a Night Patrol when Attacked. 

Purpose: To illustrate the prearranged plans carried out in case of attack by 
night. 

Equipment: Usual night equipment. 

Place: Any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: 

Form a patrol of several scouts and after sufficient practice have them demon¬ 
strate to the class what they would do if the point, a flanker or the get-away man 
were attacked by an enemy patrol at night. 

a. If the point is jumped he calls out the danger signal such as “ Front.” 

b. The flankers rush straight ahead and close in on the enemy from the flank. 

c. The patrol leader and the men with him jump up and rush at the enemy in 
extended order closing in as they reach him. 

d. In the scuffle, members of the friendly patrol repeat the recognition signal to 
prevent fighting with each other. 

e. The get-away man does not enter into the fight. 

/.If the right flank man is jumped, the left flank man becomes the get-away 
man, etc. 

Practice. 

When this has been sufficiently demonstrated, the class is divided into patrols, 
signals are arranged and a formation taken up. The instructor will indicate the man 
who is assumed to be attacked and the patrol will practice its action. 

Then practice similar to the above will be held at night and finally the patrols 
will be required to work against each other. This last must be done without the 
patrol knowing what is to be practiced. It will be given a mission and while it is 
out will be met by another patrol which has been placed in its path. 

PRACTICAL PROBLEMS. 

Short, definite practical problems, based on the text and the preceding exercises 
should be given the students for solution. These problems should include: 

1. Selection of route for night movement. 

2. Signals. 

3. Patrol orders. 

4. Patrol formations. 

5. Methods of observation by night. 

6. Patrol reports. 


Security Patrols. 

The foregoing practical exercises deal especially with the tactics of information 
or reconnoitering patrols. The tactics of security patrols differ in no essential par¬ 
ticular from those of information patrols. The members of a security patrol observe 
the same rules as to the use of cover and individual movement. The formation of 
a security patrol is the same as that of an information patrol in the same situation. 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


171 


The problems which confront the patrol leader are likewise essentially similar. 

For example, consider the case of the flank patrol sent from the advance party 
on the march. It proceeds across country to a favorable observation point, searches 
the terrain for signs of the enemy, and reports by messenger or signal any infor¬ 
mation gained. The problems of the leader including: The formation of the 
patrol; selection of an observation point; choosing a route; advancing by bounds; 
approaching a danger area; etc., are the same as those of a reconnoitering patrol. 

In two particulars the conduct of a security patrol differs slightly from that of 
an information patrol: It is usually less concerned with concealing its presence from 
the enemy, and it usually fires on the enemy whenever he is seen. 

In general security patrols are more restricted as to the areas in which they may 
move and the routes they must follow, than are information patrols. The point 
of an advance guard is a special case of a patrol which is restricted to a single 
route (the route of march) and which halts only when compelled to do so. 

Small demonstrations and problems in the conduct of security patrols based on 
single tactical situations are easily prepared. They should be drawn to illustrate 
the principles set forth in the text. The following outlines are suggested: 

Point of an advance guard. 

Orders to the point. 

Formation in open terrain. 

Formation in dense wood. 

Conduct on approach of hostile aeroplane. 

Approaching a crest. 

Approaching the edge of a wood. 

Conduct on losing sight of the body in rear. 

Conduct on seeing individuals of the enemy to the front or to the flank. 
Conduct on meeting a hostile patrol on the route of march. 

Conduct on being fired upon by the enemy from the front or from the 
flank. 

Conduct on encountering the enemy in force. 

Dispositions during a short halt. 

Conduct on approaching a bridge or defile. 

Communication with body in rear. 

Messages, etc., etc. 

Flank patrol of an advance guard. 

Orders to the patrol. 

Mission. Destination. 

Formation of the patrol. 

Approaching a danger area. 

Selecting an observation point and route thereto. 

Dispositions during a halt in observation. 

‘ Conduct on seeing the enemy. 

Conduct on being fired upon from various directions. 

Communication with the column. 

Rejoining the column. 

Messages and reports, etc., etc. 

Point of a rear guard. 

Situations similar to those of an advance guard. 

Visiting patrol of an outpost. 

Strength. 

Orders to the patrol. 

Mission. 

Route. 

Going over route in daytime. 

Maintaining direction by night. 

Conduct on seeing or hearing anything suspicious to the front. 


172 


SCOUTING AND PATROLING 


Approaching an outguard. 

Inspecting an outguard. 

Conduct in case an outguard is found missing. 

Leaving the prescribed route. 

Messages and reports, etc., etc. 

Patrols when engaged in combat follow the usual procedure of a squad or section 
in attack or defense. This is covered in the course in Musketry. 



MUSKETRY. 

TABLE OF CONTENTS. 

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 

CHAPTER I. page 

THE THEORY OF FIRE. . . 2 

The Rifle. 2 

Trajectory . 2 

The sheaf . 2 

The beaten zone . 4 

Characteristics of the rifle . 5 

The Automatic Rifle. 7 

Characteristics . 7 

Hand Grenades .. 10 

Characteristics . 10 

The Rifle Grenade. 11 

Characteristics . 11 

The Bayonet. 12 

Characteristics . 12 

Summary . 12 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 12 

CHAPTER II. 

TECHNIQUE OF FIRE. 13 

RANGE ESTIMATION . 13 

Method of Range Estimation. 14 

TARGET DESIGNATION . 16 

Importance of Proper Designation. 16 

Essentials of Proper Training. 16 

Elements of Information in Target Designation. 18 

General Methods of Target Designation. 19 

Mechanical means (tracer bullets ). 19 

By voice . 20 

By physical indication . 24 

FIRE DISTRIBUTION .. 25 

Necessity for proper distribution . 25 

Distribution by traversing . 25 

Distributing the fire of the squad . 25 

Summary . 26 

Distributing the Fire of the Section. 26 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 27 

I. Range Estimation. 27 

II. Target Designation . 27 

III. Fire Distribution . 28 

CHAPTER III. 

FIRE DISCIPLINE .. 28 

What fire discipline includes . 28 

Means of Communication. Signals. 28 

Runners . 31 

Concealment. The Use of Cover. Individual Movement. 31 

Sight Setting and Delivery of Fire. 32 

Economy of Ammunition. Proper Rates of Fire. 34 

Replacement of Casualties. 34 

Individual Conduct and Initiative. 34 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 34 

I 

















































II 


MUSKETRY 


CHAPTER IV. 

CONTROL OF FIRE. 

FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SQUAD. 

Responsibilities of Squad Leader. 

Position of the leader . 

Observation of Fire by Squad Leader. 

Adjustment of Fire by Squad Leader. 

Correction or change of direction . 

Correction or change of range . 

Correction or change of distribution . 

FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SECTION. 

Position of the leader . 

Transmission of orders . 

Observation and Adjustment of Fire by Section Leader. 

Use of held glasses . 

Correction of Sight Setting. 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER V. 

CONTROL OF MOVEMENT. 

Movement out of sight of the Enemy and protected from Fire. . 
Movement out of sight of the Enemy but not protected from 

Fire . 

Movement in Sight of the Enemy. 

Fire Superiority . 

The Mechanism of Movement under Fire. 

Advance by rushes . 

Range at which hre is opened. Advance by inhltration . 

The Assault . 

Use of Signals. 

Summary . 

Illustrative Example of Fire and Movement in the Attack. 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER VI. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE.. 

Conduct of the Platoon in Attack. 

Duties of the platoon leader and platoon sergeant in attack. 

Summary . 

THE SECTION . 

Organization and leaders . 

Provisional units or temporary groups . 

Duties of the Section Leader. 

Fire orders and signals . 

Estimate of the situation . 

Personal reconnaissance the basis for estimates . 

Form and contents of orders . 

Information to be given subordinates . 

Fire estimates and arders continuous . 

Fire plans difhcult to formulate . 

Summary . 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 

CHAPTER VII. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE (CONTINUED). 

Duties of the Section Leader. 

Fire discipline . 

Position of the section leader in combat. Transmission of orders. 
Rate of hre . 


PAGE 

35 

35 

35 

36 

37 
37 

37 

38 
38 

38 

39 
39 

39 

40 
42 

42 

43 
43 

46 

47 

48 

49 

49 

50 

52 

53 
53 
53 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 
59 
59 
59 

59 

60 
60 
62 
62 
62 

62 

63 

63 

64 

65 
65 
65 
65 
65 


















































TABLE OF CONTENTS 


III 


PAGE 

Ammunition supply . 66 

Checking breaches of fire discipline . 66 

Replacement of casualties . 66 

Evacuation of the wounded . 66 

Leading the section . 67 

Qualifications of a section leader . 67 

Duties of the Section Guide. 67 

THE SQUAD . 67 

Organization and Equipment. 67 

Position of the squad leader in combat . 68 

Maintaining the integrity of the squad. Replacement of casu¬ 
alties . 68 

Duties of the Squad Leader. 69 

Fire control . 69 

Fire discipline . 69 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 71 

CHAPTER VIII. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE IN THE DEFENSE. 72 

Tactics of the Defense. 72 

Defensive areas . 72 

Combat groups . 73 

The active defense . 73 

Strong points . 73 

Summary . 73 

Observation, Circulation and Intercommunication. 74 

Dispositions of Front Line Platoons in Defense. . 74 

Location of the defenses . 74 

Organization of the position . 74 

Field of fire . 74 

Ranges at which fire is opened . ja 

DEFENSE PLANS . 74 

Example of Dispositions and Defense Plan of a Platoon. 76 

Normal and contingent sectors . 76 

Observation and Sniping. 78 

Duties of Leaders in Defense. 79 

Counter attack . 79 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 80 

CHAPTER IX. 

COMBAT PRACTICE. 81 

Purpose and importance of combat practice . 81 

Program of training . 81 

Landscape Targets . 81 

Description and preparation . 82 

Harmonizing the rifles . 83 

Harmonizing with sub-caliber rifles or reduced charges . 83 

Shot groups . 83 

Recording and scoring . 84 

Advantages of the landscape target . 85 

Tactical problems involving fire action . 85 

Grading . 86 

Fire efficiency . 86 

Maneuver efficiency . 86 

Summary . 87 

Preparation of problems . 87 

QUESTIONNAIRE . 89 
























































IV MUSKETRY 

PRACTICAL EXERCISES. page 

Ex. i. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 9 ° 

Ex. 2. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 91 

Ex. 3. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 9 1 

Ex. 4. Demonstration. Effect of Errors in Range Estimation. 92 

Ex. 5. Range Estimation . 93 

Ex. 6. Range Estimation . 93 

Ex. 7. Test. Range Estimation. 94 

Ex. 8. Calibration of Sights and Fingers. . 94 

Ex. 9. Target Designation. 95 

Ex. 10. Demonstration. Mechanical Target Designation. 96 

Questionnaire . 97 

Ex. 11. Target Designation. 97 

Ex. 12. Test. Target Designation. 98 

Ex. 13. Demonstration. Fire Distribution . 99 

Ex. 14. Demonstration. Fire Distribution. . 99 

Ex. 15. Fire Discipline. Arm Signals. . 99 

Ex. 16. Demonstration. Fire Discipline . 100 

Ex. 17. Fire Discipline . 100 

Ex. 18. Test. Conduct of Fire. 100 

Ex. 19. Landscape Target Firing. 101 

Ex. 20. Landscape Target Firing. 101 

Ex. 21. Landscape Target Firing. 102 

Ex. 22. Demonstration. Conduct of Fire. 102 

Ex. 23. Demonstration. An Infantry Squad in Attack. 102 

Ex. 24. Conduct of Fire. 103 

Ex. 25. Landscape Target Firing. 103 

Ex. 26. Test Problem. An Infantry Squad in Attack. 104 

Ex. 27. Test Problem. Conduct of Fire. 104 

Ex. 28. Conduct of Fire. 105 

Ex. 29. Test Problem. Conduct of Fire. 106 

Ex. 30. Sand Table Test Problem. An Infantry Section in 

Attack . 106 

Ex. 31. Conduct of Fire. The Fire Superiority Problem. 108 

Ex. 32. Competitive Problem. Conduct of Fire. no 


































LIST OF PLATES. 


PLATE 

Fire and Movement in the Attack. Section reducing Hostile page 

Resistance.Frontispiece 

1. Trajectories of the U. S. Rifle, Caliber 30, Model 1903. 2 

2. Sheaf of Rifle Fire. 2 

3. Relative Dispersions of Rifle and Machine Gun Fire at Various Ranges.. 3 

4. Beaten Zone . 4 

5. Effect of Ground Slopes on Beaten Zone. 3 

6. Vulnerability of Column Formations on Forward and Reverse Slope. 6 

7. Danger Space and Beaten Zone of Rifle Fire. 8 

8. Effects of Errors in Estimating Range on Accuracy of Rifle Fire. 9 

9. Characteristics of Grenades. 11 

10. Range Estimation. 13 

11. Terrain Nomenclature. 17 

12. Military Terms. 18 

13. Target Designation with Tracer Bullets. 19 

14. Target Designation . 20 

15. Measuring Frontage by Sight Leaf Intercept. 21 

16. Measuring Frontage by Sight Leaf or Fingers. 22 

17. Measuring Frontage by Sight Leaf Intercept. 22 

18. Target Designation . 23 

19. Physical Designation of Target. 24 

20. Fire Distribution within the Squad. 25 

21. Fire Distribution within the Section. 26 

22. Fire Control Signals. 29 

23. Movement Control Signals. 30 

24. Effect of Background on Visibility. 32 

25. Firing Positions . 33 

26. Firing Positions . 33 

27. Squad engaged with the Enemy. 36 

28. Section engaged with the Enemy. 38 

29. Adjustment of Fire. 41 

30. Sight Correction. 42 

31. Section Column . 44 

32. Squad Column . 44 

33. Deployment to a Flank from Line of Squad Columns. 45 

34. Section moving forward, deployed as Skirmishers. 49 

35. Squad moving forward by “ Squad Rush ”. 50 

36. Movement under fire. 51 

37. Platoon Defense Chart. 75 

38. Disposition of Squad in Defense. 76 

39. Plan of Defense for a Combat Group. 77 

40. Sniper’s Range Card . 79 

41. Landscape Target . 82 

42. Fifty per cent and 75 per cent Rectangles. 84 

43. Fifty per cent and 75 per cent Zones. 84 

44. Silhouettes . 87 

45. Operation of Silhouette Targets . 88 

46. Practical Exercise 27 . 105 

47. Practical Exercise 29 . 106 

48. Practical Exercise 30 . 107 

49. Practical Exercise 32 . no 


V 




















































Musketry. 

Fire and movement in the attack. Section reducing hostile resistance. Note small group moving forward on left under covering 

fire of balance of section. 














MUSKETRY. 

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 

Success in combat depends upon superiority of fire. Musketry is teamwork in the 
application of infantry fire. Thus Musketry is a part of Tactics, and the course in 
Musketry should precede the course in Tactics, proper. 

The individual instruction in the use of the infantry platoon weapons given a 
recruit shortly after his entry into the service is but the first step in this instruction. 
After he becomes proficient in the individual use of these weapons, and in individual 
movement and use of cover, we must teach him how to act as a member of a team, 
and to place his fire power, with that of his comrades, at the disposal of his 
commander. 

We must also teach our officers and non-commissioned officers how to utilize the 
fire power placed at their disposal. We must teach them how to lead the team. 

Junior officers, the non-commissioned officers and men of our next great combat 
army, will, like those of our last, be hurriedly and partially trained. For their use 
we must have a system of musketry which is simple, definite, single, and well defined. 
It must tell them not only what to do, but one, simple, correct method of doing it. 
It must tell them definitely exactly how to perform each part of their task in order 
to develop the required progress and efficiency. 

There is also another consideration which forces us to develop one, definite, 
simple system of musketry. Assume a situation in which the three squads of a 
section are deployed with an interval of 50 yards between squads over a front of 
200 yards. The section leader indicates the target by means of tracer bullets. He 
is near the right flank of the section. The members of each squad must know 
definitely that the squad is a fire unit—that their mission is to smother the target 
with fire—that by doing so they are playing the game, and doing their part as an 
element in the platoon team—that they are carrying out the platoon leader’s general 
plan of action. Private Jones must know that he is to traverse his fire over the 
entire target, Private Black, 5 yards to the left of the corporal, must know that he 
is to traverse the fire of his automatic rifle over the entire target. The section leader 
must know that each squad is doing this. He must know that if he advances one 
squad, the other two squads are still covering the whole target. Corporal Brown of 
the left squad must know that if he ceases fire and moves his squad to a better 
firing position, his movement will be covered by the fire of the remaining two squads. 
Each man and each unit can know these things only if they are trained as a team 
to work in just one way. 

One man or one small fire unit can accomplish but one mission at a time. Each 
man and each unit must know what that mission is. Each must know definitely 
how to accomplish it. The simpler the mission the greater the chance for success. 
I f each knows his mission and has one definite method to guide him in carrying it out, 
his own initiative will direct his skill and efifort so that he will act as a well trained 
unit of the team. Teamwork in the application of fire is musketry. With our wide 
deployments, personal direction and supervision by leaders is difficult and at times 
impossible. Intelligent teamwork is thus indispensable. We secure that team¬ 
work: First, by care Ally training the individuals and units in ONE, DEFINITE, 
SIMPLE system of action. Second, by giving each a definite mission, which their 
knowledge, training, and the spirit of playing the game will enable them to fulfill. 

The chapters in this course will cover the elements of this system of training in the 
following logical sequence: 

1st. Explanation and demonstration. 

2nd. Practice. 

3rd. Examination or test. 


1 


2 


MUSKETRY 




The training must be progressive. Each step depends upon the preceding step. 
Each element having been covered must be constantly reviewed. 

After the elements of musketry training are mastered, the units must use this 
training, and must apply the principles they have been taught to concrete cases in 
the field. 

This is done by combat practice. The more combat practice the unit has, the 
more efficient it will become in that teamwork in the application of fire, which is 
Musketry. 

CHAPTER I. 

THE THEORY OF FIRE. 

The infantry platoon is armed with several weapons, i. e., rifle, automatic rifle, 
hand grenades, rifle grenades and bayonet. In order that these weapons be used 
to their full advantage, it is necessary that the leaders know their characteristics, 
powers and limitations. In this chapter we will take up each of these weapons in 
turn, give a brief discussion of its characteristics, powers and limitations, con¬ 
cluding with the deductions we may draw from these discussions. 


The Rifle. 


Trajectory. The path of the bullet in its flight is called the trajectory. 

When the rifle is fired at a given range, the bullet follows, in general, a path 
through the air which has an unvarying shape. At short range this path is nearly a 
straight line from the muzzle to the target. This is called a flat trajectory. As the 
range increases the path becomes a curve, rising from the muzzle on a nearly uniform 
slope above the line from the muzzle to the target. It then curves down until it 
meets this line again at the target. (Plate i.) 


M=27‘ 


M is mQximurn ordinate 



Range-100 200 
Angles of foil 


400 


600 650 725 800 < l5anger 

l c Space 


1200yds 

2.5® 


Danger space.sCFor ranges up fa and including 700^ds_danger space is continuous) 

"boo"" iboo c \~\oo 


O o 


o 

o 

o 


o 

o 

00 


CC~ =3 

1200 


Plate i.— Trajectories of the U. S. Rifle, Caliber 30, Model 1903. (Springfield.) 

(From actual firing.) 


The angle which a line, tangent to the trajectory at the target, makes with the line 
from the muzzle of the rifle to the target is called the angle of fall. An idea of the 
flatness of the rifle trajectory at ordinary ranges may be obtained if it is remembered 
that this angle is only i° 30' at 1000 yards, and decreases rapidly with the range. 

The Sheaf. When a rifle is fired a number of times at a target, the bullet does 
not follow exactly the same path each time. The difference in aiming, holding and 
firing, variations in the ammunition, and changes in the conditions of light and 
weather, all cause variations in the path followed by the bullet. 

These different trajectories form a cone or sheaf with the apex at the muzzle. 
The sheaf of course spreads out as the range increases. (Plate 2.) 



Muzzle 


Plate 2. — Sheaf of Rifle Fire. 














































DISPERSION OF RIFLE FIRE 


3 


RELATIVE DISPERSIONS OF RIELE AND 
MACHINE GUN EIRE AT VARIOUS RANGES 

Fig. 1 D1JPER-5ION OF AVERAGE RJFLE GHOT3 





500 yds. 600yds. 700yds. 500yds. 


900yds. 



Fig. 2 duperaion of 75 % of ohotg of a machine gun 





500y±s. 600ydi X»vdj. 800y<U. 



900Y<Ji 


KXXTyCb. 


F1G. 3 COMPARATIVE GHOT GROUPS AT 600YD5, AUTOMATIC RIFLE, 



Plate 3 . 














4 


MUSKETRY 


The lateral dispersion or width of the collective sheaf of a group of average 
riflemen (from right to left) is about .8 of a foot at ioo yards. At 1000 yards it 
is about 8 feet. It increases approximately .8 of a foot for each ioo yards of range. 

The vertical dispersion at ioo yards is about one foot (up and down). At iooo 
yards it is about io feet. It increases approximately one foot for each hundred 
yards of range. 

Plate 3 shows the dispersion of individual average shots with the rifle at ranges 
of 500 to 1000 yards, compared to the size of a man. 

The Beaten Zone. The intersection of the cone of dispersion or the sheaf with 
the ground surface on which the target stands is called the beaten zone. (Plates 
4 and 7.) . 

The width of the beaten zone on the ground is the same as the lateral dispersion, 
i. e., .8 of a foot at 100 yards, increasing at the rate of .8 of a foot for each 100 yards 
increase in range. 

If the lowest bullet in the sheaf, when firing at 600 yards, strikes the ground at 
a point 550 yards from the muzzle, the highest bullet of the sheaf would be at this 
time 5 feet above the point struck by the lowest bullet. This high bullet would strike 
the ground about 185 yards farther away, or at 735 yards from the muzzle. The 
distance between the two is the longitudinal dispersion. It will be seen that the 
beaten zone is a narrow ellipse or oval, the size of which varies with the range. 
(Plate 4.) 

At 100 yards from the muzzle the bullet has a high velocity and the trajectory is 
very flat. The beaten zone on level ground at this range is 300 yards long and 



about one foot wide. At 1000 yards the velocity is not so great, as the bullet has 
been slowed down by the resistance and friction of the air, and the trajectory is 
curving down more rapidly. The length of the beaten zone at 1000 yards is only 
about 100 yards long, but 8 feet wide. At 300 yards it is 250 yards long. At inter¬ 
mediate ranges, the decrease in the length of the beaten zone or the longitudinal 
dispersion, is about 25 yards for each 100 yards increase in range. Thus at 400 yards 
it is about 225 yards and at 900 yards it is about 125 yards in length. 

When a number of rifles are fired at the same target there is still more chance 
for variation. The size of the sheaf and of the beaten zone is increased, and of 
course the number of shots striking within this zone is increased. 

We have seen from the above discussion how the width of the beaten zone increases 
and its length decreases as the range increases. There is still another element which 
enters into the length of the beaten zone. This is the slope of the ground. In 
Plate 5, is shown the effect that sloping ground has on the length of the beaten zone. 
It can be clearly seen from this diagram that rising ground decreases and falling 
ground increases the length of the beaten zone. 

We will now see what use can be made of the information we have gained con¬ 
cerning the effect of ground slopes on the length of the beaten zone. When the 
ground slopes upward to the rear from the firing line, the second wave or supports 
may be placed closer to the firing line without increasing their danger from fire 
directed at it. When the ground slopes downward to the rear from the firing line, 
the supports must be placed at a greater distance than when it slopes up, unless this 
reverse slope is so steep as to afford complete defilade from rifle fire (dead space, 
or ground which the bullets cannot reach).** Also we can see from Plate 6, that 
making the allowable assumption that fire is equally distributed laterally along the 















CHARACTERISTICS OF THE RIFLE 


5 


crest, the column target behind the crest and invisible to the enemy, will receive 
unaimed hits only in proportion to its width. Accordingly under these conditions 
it would be better to form the second wave in line of squad columns. If, however, 
the second wave is on ground rising to the rear from the firing line and visible to the 
enemy, the wave should not be in column formation, as they would thus present a 
more vulnerable target to the enemy’s aimed fire. A line of skirmishers would be 
less vulnerable in such a case. 

When the fire of a number of men is distributed over a target, the depth of 
the collective beaten zone is not changed, but the width is increased by the method 
of fire distribution used to cover the front of a linear target (one extending from 
right to left). 





on l<zv<z| ground 







on rising ground 
zone is shortened 


falling ground 
is 

engthened 



reverse slope 
zone is 

engthened 


Plate 5.—Effect of Ground Slopes on Beaten Zone. 


Characteristics of the Ride. 

1. The ride acts by dre alone. It has but little value as a weapon, other than 
for the delivery of fire. 

2. Mobility of the ride. The average soldier can easily carry his rifle, and suffi¬ 
cient ammunition for a protracted fire fight. Accordingly the mobility of the 
rifle is the same as that of the individual infantry soldier. 

3. The ride can be used effectively only for direct dre. While indirect fire is 
possible, yet practically the rifle is an individual weapon, and in actual battle satis¬ 
factory fire efifect can seldom be obtained by using any aiming point other than the 
target itself, or a relatively small area in which the target is located. 

4. The ride can effectively attack only targets which are above ground and in the 

open. The trajectory of the rifle at ordinary ranges is very flat, and its penetrative 
p")wer is not great. Accordingly it cannot be used with satisfactory efifect against 
targets behind cover or below the surface of the ground. r 

5. Rate of dre. .'There is a certain rate of fire for each range at which the average 
marksman will obtain the best results. If this rate be not attained the full fire power 
















6 


MUSKETRY 


a 


of the weapon is not being utilized. If it be exceeded the fire will be less effective 
even though more ammunition is expended. The proper rate of fire (number of 
shots per minute) for any range (up to 1000 yds.) is equal to 13 less the range in 
hundreds of yards. Thus at 800 yds. range the proper rate is 13 — 8 = 5 shots per 
minute. 

6. The rifle acts only by frontal fire. To apply the fire of its rifles a unit must be 
deployed in line. It is not possible to utilize rifle fire to good effect in any other 
formation. When a unit is once deployed it can change front or direction only 
with the greatest difficulty, and it cannot protect its own flanks. Except by very 
small units fire cannot be switched to the right or left without a change of forma¬ 
tion, involving an assembly and re-deployment in the new direction. Accordingly 
the rifle can be most effectively employed for frontal fire. 

7. The fire of the rifle must be laterally distributed. When firing at a linear 
target, that is one extending some distance from right to left, satisfactory effect 



Plate 6. —Vulnerability of Column Formations on Forward and Reverse Slope. 


demands that fire be laterally distributed over the entire front of the target. If 
there be one or two prominent points and all the riflemen aim at these points they 
will receive most of the fire and the rest of the target will be almost immune from 
fire. It is very easy to properly distribute the fire of a deployed line over a linear 
target, but it must be done by one single, definite system, so simple as to be 
practically second nature to the trained man when acting almost independently in 
the confusion of battle. 

8. The rifle is especially adapted to fire against individuals and dispersed targets. 
A machine gun can be aimed at only one particular point at one time. A group 
of rifles may be aimed at various points or individuals. Moreover the fire of the 
rifle is more readily switched to another target than that of any other weapon. 
With proper training of the men bullets from their rifles will be better distributed 
than an equal number of projectiles from any other weapon. It is largely for this 
reason (effectiveness against dispersed targets) that the rifle is the most important 
weapon in mobile warfare. 

9. Danger space. At a range of 100 yards the bullet rises to a maximum height 
of only 0.7 of an inch above the line from the muzzle of the piece to the target. It 
















































THE AUTOMATIC RIFLE 


7 


rises about 5 feet above this line at a range of 700 yards and about 14 feet above it 
at a range of 1000 yards. This means that on even ground (whether or not it is 
perfectly level), a bullet from a rifle aimed at a point 700 yards away, will never 
rise more than about 5 feet 7 inches above the ground (the muzzle of the rifle will 
always be a few inches above the ground). That is to say, the bullet will never be 
farther above the ground than the average height of a man. Accordingly a man 
standing anywhere on the line of fire, between the rifle and the point at which it is 
aimed, will be hit somewhere between the top of his head and the soles of his feet. 
Accordingly there is a continuous danger space along the entire line of fire for a 
man of average height. If the range be more than 700 yards there will be an interval 
near the middle of the trajectory where the bullet will be higher than a man’s head. 
Hence for ranges over 700 yards the danger space is not continuous. As the range 
increases, the length of the danger space at each end of the trajectory rapidly 
decreases. (Plate 7.) If the rifle be fired from a height or a depression, that is, 
if the ground over which it is fired is not even, the danger space will evidently be 
reduced. Fire from a height is called plunging fire. 

Accordingly we see that, to obtain the maximum effect, the rifle should be fired 
over ground as nearly even as possible, and at ranges preferably not greatly exceed¬ 
ing 700 yards, also that the greater the height of the -target the greater its vulner¬ 
ability or danger space at any range. A man standing is a far more favorable target 
than one prone on the ground, even though the entire body be exposed in both cases. 

10. The effect of errors in range estimation increases rapidly with the range. 
The beaten zone at short ranges is long. At 200 yards range it is 275 yards, at 
300 yards range it is 250 yards. Hence at a range of 200 yards an error in the 
estimation of the range of even 60 per cent of the range will still leave the target 
within the beaten zone. At a range of 1000 yards an error of even 10 per cent in 
estimating the range will leave the target entirely outside the beaten zone. 

Thus we see that correct estimation of the range is important, and that its 
importance increases rapidly with the range. Plate 8 shows the effects of correct 
and incorrect estimation of the range upon vertical and horizontal targets. 

11. Classification of ranges. Ranges for rifle fire are classified as follows: 

o- 600 yards, close or short range. 

600-1200 yards, mid or effective range. 

1200-2000 yards, long range. 

2000 yards and up, distant range. 


The Automatic Rifle. 

Characteristics. 

The automatic rifle employs the same ammunition, has the same trajectory, and 
when fired semi-automatically (single shot), the same dispersion or accuracy as the 
rifle. When fired automatically its dispersion is from 4 to 6 times that of the rifle, 
depending on the lengths of the bursts and the skill of the rifleman. Plate 3 shows 
the relative dispersions of the automatic rifle at 600 yards range, using automatic 
and semi-automatic fire. It will be noted that semi-automatic fire is fai more 
accurate and this should be the usual method of fire, automatic fire being employed 
only when a large volume is called for against a transitory target or in emergency. 
Semi-automatic fire will consume ammunition as rapidly as it can be supplied, and 

will in general be much more effective. . . . 

Practically the only difference between the rifle and the automatic rifle is in the 
rate and volume of their fire, and the amounts of ammunition they expend. Accord¬ 
ingly the characteristics of the rifle noted as Nos. 1-3-4-7-8-9-10 in the preceding 
discussion are virtually the same for the automatic rifle. This weapon has the fol¬ 
lowing distinctive or additional characteristics: 

1 The automatic rifle can produce a large volume of concentrated nre. 1 he best 
results can therefore be obtained on targets having considerable depth even though 



MUSKETRY 


FIgI Continuous danger, space 

At abort ran$e the height of the trajectory never exceeds tbot 
of a man. 



Fig .2 Short danger space and long safety space in long range fire 

Between A and B the, bullet is always higher than a mans 
bcod. 



Fig.3 Danger spaces of trajectory and ricochet 

At A occurs theTirst catch" by lowest part of cone of fire . At B occurs the "first c,ra 2 c\ 
At short and medium rarK,es .where trajectory is flat, there is an indefinite dancer space 
beyond C, due to ricochet .depend! n<^ on the direction and remaini n<, velocity of the ricochet bul Ids. 









5 heafs of fire.beaten zones and danger SPACES AT short and at long ranges 
Fig.4 Short range 

-- Continuous danger space - 






-z_"' : 


LRtaUn zone,--! 







Fig. 5 Long range 

Danger spacer_ 


!_ — - 


-~^*-*sirr»TmPX/PZ&7&/Z%2 _ _ 


* J>» 



Plate 7 .—Danger Space and Beaten Zone of Rifle Fire. 









































% 


EFFECTS OF ERRORS IN ESTIMATING RANGE 


9 



EFFECTS OF FJRROR5 IN ESTIMATING RANGE 
ON ACCURACY OF RIFLE FIRE 

FlG.l VERTICAL TARGET. Hostile machine, <jun in window of steeple 

Rjan^c 600 yds. r 


SHOT PATTERNS RESULTING FROM VARIOUS SIGHT SETTINGS 



Fig. 2 Horizontal target, Hostile machine cun at Gooyds. on tne 

same level, beaten zones resulting from various sf^bl settings,averageshots 



1000 yds. 


Plate 8 . 




















































































10 


MUSKETRY 


their fronts be narrow. Hence the automatic rifle should seek opportunities for 
enfilade or flanking fire, for which it is especially suited. 

2. Rates of fire. In attack, with well-trained men, the automatic rifle can deliver 
effective fire at a rate of from io to 60 shots per minute, at ranges up to 500 yds. 
Marching fire may attain a rate of 80 shots per minute. At ranges over 500 yds. 
the proper rate is 10 to 12 shots per minute. In defense, with the men stationary 
and intrenched, higher rates are permissible if ammunition can be supplied. 

3. Small area occupied in proportion to fire power. The automatic rifle occupies 
the same frontage and depth as one ordinary rifle, as it is operated by one man. It 
is thus capable of producing a large volume of fire from a small area. This char¬ 
acteristic enables it to meet an attack from a flank with but little if any movement. 
It is therefore a most useful weapon for defense against attack from the flank. 

4. Mobility and vulnerability. The automatic rifle, like the rifle, is carried and 
operated by one man, but it consumes about 4 times as much ammunition as a rifle. 
The individual soldier can carry the weapon and a limited amount of ammunition. 
The remainder of the squad all carry extra ammunition for the weapon, sufficient 
for a protracted engagement. Accordingly the mobility of the automatic rifle is 
practically that of the infantry squad, or somewhat less than that of the individual. 

As it is carried by one man and is no larger than a rifle, the automatic rifle has the 
same vulnerability as the rifle, except that when fired automatically it is more apt 
to draw hostile fire upon itself. 

5. The automatic rifle is a squad weapon. The automatic rifle is a squad weapon, 
and should function as an integral element of the infantry squad, both in offense 
and defense. 

Hand Grenades. 

The hand grenade is primarily a weapon for the defense, for minor attacks and 
for raids in trenches. It is used principally against personnel below ground or 
behind cover. It will either destroy such personnel or will force them into the 
open where they become targets for the rifle and automatic rifle. 

Characteristics. 

1. Curved trajectory. This characteristic indicates that the weapon is especially 
valuable against targets behind cover or below ground level. 

2. Rate of fire. An effective rate, under favorable conditions, of 10 grenades 

per minute can be attained. This enables a few men to put down an almost 
impassable barrage on ground defiladed from rifle fire. This feature makes it 
especially valuable in the defense. ✓ 

3. Radius of action. The hand grenade has an effective radius of action of from 
3 to 50 yards depending upon the type used. The short distance the grenade can 
be thrown prevents the use in the open of grenades having a large radius of action. 
Such grenades must be thrown from behind cover. 

4. Weight. The relatively great weight of the hand grenade (about i£ pounds), 
limits the number of grenades which can be carried. This characteristic reduces 
its value as an offensive weapon, except for operations involving only a slight 
advance. 

5. Short range. The hand grenade can be thrown from 30 to 40 yards by an 
average man. _ It is therefore of limited value in attacks against machine guns and 
similar objectives, especially in open warfare. (Some light grenades have a greater 
range.) 

6. The hand grenade can be thrown from below the ground surface, or from 
behind cover. This characteristic makes the hand grenade essentially a weapon of 
“ trench warfare,” for harassing, and cleaning up captured trenches, shelters, etc. 

7. Types of hand grenade. The hand grenade may be produced in various types, 
adapted to different purposes. It can be used as an agent for the employment of 
lachrymatory or irritating gases. Because of its very short range and relatively 
great radius of action, it is not a very suitable agent for the use of lethal (poisonous) 


11 


CHARACTERISTICS OF GRENADES 


gas, except for attack against deep shelters. Gas grenades are especially valuable 
against an enemy hidden in such shelters. The grenade is also constructed in certain 
types for incendiary effects, and is capable of setting fire to all combustible objects 
within its radius of action. Other types produce a large volume of smoke, useful 

or the creation of local smoke screens to conceal the movement or location of 
troops, or to blind the enemy. 



Range 30 to 50 yds. 

-. '^4 


Effective radius of burst 
/ on open ground 3yds. 


LN 


Can be thrown from 
behind cover 



\ r» 

Reaches target in trench X' 



or behind cover 


Fig.l HAND GRENADE 



Effective range 200 yds,— ^_ 


Variation of this angle ^ 
increases or decreases/ 
range (maximum * 
range 45 °) y 

/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


Effective radius of 30 yds ' | 


/ Line of fire of machine gun 




Reaches target 
behind cover 


Fired from below ground 
or behind cover 


Fig.2 RIFLE GRENADE 

Plate 9. — Characteristics of Grenades. 


The Rifle Grenade. 

The rifle grenade has a much longer range than the hand grenade. This makes 
possible its use in open warfare, especially against machine guns or infantry behind 
cover. 

Characteristics. 

1. Curved trajectory. The rifle grenade has a curved trajectory, and can there¬ 
fore reach a target below the surface of the ground, or behind cover, which would 
be immune from rifle fire from the same locality. It cannot, of course, penetrate 
even a light shelter. 

2. Limited use. The rifle grenade should never be used against targets which 
can be effectively attacked by the rifle or automatic rifle, as it is far less effective 
and economical. 



















12 


MUSKETRY 


3. Weight. It weighs about ij pounds. It is difficult to transport and must be 
used with care—generally to drive personnel into the open where they may be 
reached by the rifle and automatic rifle. The weight of the ammunition limits the 
volume of fire which can be relied upon. 

4. Radius of action. It has an effective radius of action from 30 to 40 yards 
from the point of impact. 

5. Degree of accuracy. With proper training of grenadiers a rifle grenade may 
be fired with a fair degree of accuracy. The best result, however, is obtained when 
the rifle is held in a fixed support. Its fire is then very accurate. 

6. Long range. The rifle grenade has an effective range of from 30 to 200 yards, 
much greater than that of the hand grenade. 

7. Rate of fire. Rifle grenades may be discharged at the rate of ten grenades 
per minute. However the most effective rate is from 5 to 8 per minute. 

8. Can be thrown from below ground surface or behind cover. See 1. 

9. A squad weapon. The rifle grenade is a squad weapon and should function as 
an element of the infantry squad. 

The Bayonet. 

The bayonet is a weapon for hand-to-hand-combat. It can act in no other w r ay. 
Its value is largely moral. 

Characteristics. 

1. It can act only by personal contact. 

2. Short range. The extreme range of the bayonet is about 5 feet. 

Summary. 

The foregoing chapter covers the characteristics, powers and limitations of the 
infantry platoon weapons. 

The leaders and men must be skilled in the use of these weapons and must be 
perfectly familiar with their powers and limitations, in order to use them effectively 
in the application of infantry fire. 

Practical Work. 

Practical work for use in connection with this chapter is given in Exercises 
Nos. 1 to 3 inclusive, at the end of this subject. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Theory of Fire. 

1. What is musketry? 

2. What is the trajectory? 

3. What is the effect of long range on the shape of the trajectory? What is a 
flat trajectory? 

4. Discuss the sheaf or cone of fire. Dispersion. 

5. What is the approximate lateral dispersion of the rifle at each 100 yards range 
up to 1000 yards? 

6. What is the approximate vertical dispersion of the rifle at each 100 yards 
range up to 1000 yards? 

7. What is the beaten zone? 

8. What is the approximate depth of the beaten zone of the rifle at each 100 
yards range up to 1000 yards? 

9. What is the collective beaten zone ? 

10. Discuss the effect of slopes on the beaten zone. 

11. What is the proper formation for supports? 

a. On a reverse slope, not subject to aimed fire? 

b. On a forward slope, subject to aimed fire? 

12. Why is the rifle unsuitable for indirect fire? 

13. Why can the rifle attack only targets in the open? 


RANGE ESTIMATION 


13 


14. What is the rule for the correct rate of fire for the rifle at all ranges up to 
1000 yards? 

15. Why is the rifle suitable only for frontal fire? 

16. What is the proper formation for troops using the rifle? 

17* Why must rifle fire be laterally distributed? 

18. Describe what is meant by danger space. 

19. What is the effect on danger space of : 

a. Ground slopes? 

b. Range? 

c. Diversification of terrain? 

d. Height of target? 

20. What kind of ground makes the best field of fire for the rifle? 

21. What is the effect of an error in the estimation of the range and how does 
it vary with the range? 

22. How does the accuracy of the automatic rifle compare with that of the rifle ? 

23. Against what kinds of targets can the automatic rifle be most effectively 
employed, and from what positions ? When should automatic fire be used ? 

24. What is the rate of fire of the automatic rifle? 

25. Compare the mobility and vulnerability of the rifle and automatic rifle. 

26. Against what kinds of targets should the hand grenade be used ? 

27. What are the range and radius of action of the hand grenade ? 

28. Describe the different types of hand grenade ? 

29. What considerations affect the volume of fire of rifle grenades? 

30. What are the ranges and radius of action of the rifle grenade? 

31. Against what classes of targets should it be used? 

CHAPTER II. 

TECHNIQUE OF FIRE. 

In order to apply the fire of any weapon in the most effective manner three things 
are essential: 

1. The range must be known. 

2. The target must be designated and recognized. 

3. The fire must be properly distributed over the target. 

In applying the collective fire of the rifles and automatic rifles of the infantry 
units these three elements are of fundamental importance. They constitute the 
technique of infantry fire. 

RANGE ESTIMATION. 

Accurate estimation of the range is essential to effective rifle fire. No matter 
how well the rifle is aimed, there can be no effective fire without correct sight 
setting. In fact the better the individual men are able to hold and aim their rifles, 
the less will be the effects of their fire if the range has not been correctly determined. 
The fire of good shots is concentrated at the range given, and does not cover the 
entire landscape as does that of untrained shots. Consequently they may not hit the 
target at all if they are given the wrong sight setting. The teaching of correct 
range estimation is not difficult and does not consume a great deal of time. It 
does, however, require practice, and a lot of it. 

The usual method of determining ranges, both in attack and defense, is estima¬ 
tion by eye, averaging the estimates of several men when practicable. Other 
methods, less frequently employed, are: By firing tracer bullets or ranging volleys 
with a given sight setting and noting the strike of the bullets; by range finder 
instruments. In defense, ranges may sometimes be actually measured and marked, 

and this should always be done when possible. 

The proper selection of fire positions, the decisions as to formations, the selection 
of cover for supports, and many other questions of fire tactics, call for the determina¬ 
tion of the range before the proper results can be obtained. 


14 


MUSKETRY 


Unless the range is accurately determined rifle and automatic rifle fire, and in 
fact even that of the rifle grenade, will be unsatisfactory. The efifect of errors in 
range determination on rifie fire is shown by the following table: 

TABLE 


Relative number of hits at various ranges when incorrectly estimated. 






Error in 

Estimate, 

yds. 




Range 










used, yds. 

0 

50 

TOO 

150 

200 

250 

300 

350 

400 


Relative number of hits. 

400 

IOO 

96 

83 

67 

49 

32 

21 

12 

8 

450 

IOO 

96 

8l 

62 

43 

27 

16 

9 

6 

500 

IOO 

93 

78 

57 

36 

21 

10 

6 

3 

550 

IOO 

92 

74 

50 

30 

15 

7 

4 

1 

600 

IOO 

91 

69 

43 

23 

9 

4 

2 

0 

650 

IOO 

90 

64 

38 

18 

7 

3 

0 


O 

0 

w 

IOO 

88 

59 

32 

13 

5 

1 



750 

IOO 

86 

55 

27 

10 

3 

0 



800 

IOO 

84 

50 

22 

6 

1 




850 

ICO 

82 

46 

18 

5 

1 




900 

IOO 

80 

4i 

13 

3 

0 




950 

IOO 

00 

IN* 

37 

11 

2 





IOOO 

IOO 

75 

32 

8 

1 





1050 

IOO 

73 

30 

7 

1 





1100 

IOO 

70 

27 

5 

0 





1150 

IOO 

69 

24 

5 






1200 

IOO 

67 

20 

4 






1250 

IOO 

65 

18 

3 






1300 

IOO 

63 

15 

2 






1350 

IOO 

59 

13 

1 






1400 

IOO 

55 

10 

1 






1450 

IOO 

54 

9 

1 







Note. —The above table is based on the results of experimental firing by a class of riflemen 
who were regarded as slightly above the average company in individual proficiency, all of 
the men being expert riflemen or sharpshooters. 

If “good marksmen” shooting at - yards with sights set correctly make ioo hits by 

firing a certain number of rounds, then the same men firing at the same target and range the 

same number of rounds, but with a sight setting - yards in error will make - hits. 

To illustrate: “Good marksmen” at 800 yards with correct sight setting will make 100 hits 
(the number of rounds necessary to make the 100 hits is immaterial), but if the sights are 
set at 900 yards or 100 yards in error, they will make but 41 hits, as will be seen from the 
table by looking along the 900-yard line until the 100-yard error column is reached, where 
the figure 41 will be found. By a study of this table it will be evident that where an error is 
made in determining the range, the number of hits made on the target will drop off very 
rapidly as the error in range determination increases. 

Every effort must be made to make every man in the platoon a trained range 
estimator. Estimating ranges is not guessing ranges. There is a definite way to 
estimate a range—a definite system to follow—and it must be thoroughly mastered 
and applied. 

Method of Range Estimation. 

The estimator must be thoroughly familiar with the appearance of a unit of 
100 yards on the ground. For distances up to 500 yards apply this unit and 
determine the number of times it is contained in the distance to be estimated. 

If the distance is short and the observation good the estimator may be able to say 
definitely that the unit is contained two and one-half times, or four times, etc. But 













































RANGE ESTIMATION 15 

when practicable it is well to apply this method several times and frequently dif¬ 
ferent results will be obtained. The mean of these estimates will give the most 
probable range. 

Example. By the first estimate the unit is contained 3 times, or the range to a 
house is 300 yards. The second estimate is 400 yards. The mean is 3 so yards the 
most probable range to the house. 



Plate 10.—Range Estimation. 


If the range is more than 500 yards or is over such ground that the application of 
this unit is difficult, then determine the middle point, estimate the range to this 
point by applying the unit, and double this estimate. Estimates should be to the 
nearest 50 yards. 

The effect of perspective will be to make the farther half seem shorter than 
the nearer one. The target will appear to be nearer than it really is: 

1. When the target is plain and distinct. 

2. When the atmosphere is clear. 

3. When the light is good. 











































16 


MUSKETRY 


4. When the color of the target is such as to contrast with the background. 

5. When the ground between the observer and the target is a uniform flat sur¬ 
face, e. g., water, snow, a grassy meadow, etc. 

6. When looking downhill. 

The logical assumption is, therefore, that the estimated range is less than the true 
range. For example: If the estimation is 520 it is probable that if all or some of 
the above conditions obtain 550 is closer to the true range than 500. 

The converse is necessarily true, the target will appear more distant: 

1. When looking over a depression in the ground, or on diversified ground. 

2. When in a poor light, fog or smoke. 

3. When looking uphill. 

4. When the target is nearly hidden. 

It is probable that the range will be overestimated. In the above example, it 
would be more likely, if these conditions obtained, that 500 is the true range. 

The estimates of several men should be averaged. This will give closer results 
than any single estimator. The average of several trained estimators will usually 
be in error less than 10 per cent. 

Summary, a. Have the appearance of a unit length of 100 yards on the ground 
firmly fixed in the mind. 

b. Apply this unit to the range as a unit of measure. 

c. If unable to determine exactly the number and fraction of times it is contained 
in the distance, add several estimates, and determine the average. 

d. If the range is over 500 yards or the country is difficult so that the unit cannot 
be applied with accuracy, select the middle point, carefully estimate the range to 
this point and double the estimate. 

e. After determining the range as above, observe the conditions. If the estimate 
appears to be too high due to poor light, indistinct target, etc., decrease; if too 
low due to very distinct target, good light, etc., increase. 

Practical Work. 

Practical work in connection with the subject of range estimation is given in 
Exercises Nos. 4 to 7 inclusive. 

TARGET DESIGNATION. 

Importance of Proper Designation. 

The adoption of smokeless powder, neutral-tinted uniforms, and the prominence 
given to camouflage in the concealment of works, use of cover, and suitable back¬ 
grounds, all tend to diminish the visibility of the enemy and thus increase the neces¬ 
sity for thorough training in the designation and recognition of targets. Poor 
description of targets or delay in opening fire results in a loss of fire effect that may 
prove disastrous at the critical stages of an action. 

A faulty description is confusing, all of the men will not recognize the target, 
and there is consequently a delay in opening fire. This is especially true with fleet¬ 
ing or transitory targets. Bad description may result in a part or the whole of the 
unit mistaking the target, the outcome being a total loss of fire effect on account of 
firing at the wrong target. Part of the line may become confused and not fire at all. 

Essentials of Proper Training. 

An analysis of the elements of target designation indicates the necessity for the 
following training: 

a. Familiarity with terrain. 

b. Familiarity with military and topographical terms. 

c. Visual training; ability to observe and study terrain. 

d. Methods of target designation. 

For officers and non-commissioned officers to develop the necessary familiarity 
with terrain, it must be made the subject of study, the important features picked out, 


TARGET DESIGNATION 


17 


and the whole visualized in such a manner that one is able to describe these impor¬ 
tant features in a few words, which will call the attention of the men of the unit to 
the points described. Landscape sketching (covered in the course in Topography) 
is one of the best methods of teaching this. In drawing a landscape sketch, hun¬ 
dreds of features of the terrain which at first sight are not noticed, will appear. 


0 50mi Is | 

i i 


Ridge 50mils-lsighMfinger 
Ridge road 
Ridge crest 

Horizon or skyline 
Clearing 

Road center 



50 mils 


50 mils. I eights: I-finger C^AVInC *GULLY, WASHOUT OtZ BKtAK, KNOB 


THICKET OK UNDE(2E>I2U3>M. 

WOODS 

ckeek.dkanch ou Ron 



Plate ii. —Terrain Nomenclature. 


All soldiers should be familiar with the common characteristic features (both 
natural and artificial) of the terrain, such as shown in Plate ii, and with their 
nomenclature. They should be thoroughly drilled until they can promptly identify 
all these features and call them by their correct names. Otherwise they can neither 
accurately designate nor identify targets. 









































































































































18 


MUSKETRY 


Military terms such as “ right of enemy’s line ” or “ enemy’s right ” means his 
ozvn right, or as we face him, to our left. Our “ right ” means our own right when 
facing the enemy. (See Plate 12.) 

One of the essentials in teaching target designation and the recognition of service 
targets is the cultivation of the soldier’s faculty of observation. He must be taught 
what to look for, how to look for it and how to retain visual impressions. (See 
Scouting and Patroling.) Exercises will be given throughout the course during 
the practical work, to stimulate the power of vision in order that the student may 
appreciate, by daily association, the necessity for cultivating a faculty of such 
importance in modern warfare. 

Good target designation means that one man is able to point out so plainly to 
another man or group of men, the location of a target which he has recognized, that 
all will be able to locate the target in the minimum of time. Any way of designating 
which will work under varying conditions and accomplish the above results is per¬ 
missible and is a good system. However, if one remembers the extended formations 
of the infantry platoon either in attack or defense, it is very evident that the methods 
of designating targets which will work, are very few. 



Our left 



Elements of Information in Target Designation. 

Good target designation must give three elements of information about a target: 

a. The Distance (range) to the target. This is given first because it is important 
that the unit which is to apply fire to a target, know the range in order to set their 
sights. 

b. The Direction of the target. Knowing how far to look, as soon as the direc¬ 
tion in which to look is known, the eye will be directed to a particular point or 
small area in the landscape. 

c. The Description of the target. The eye having been directed to a certain 
small area of the landscape, it must be told what to look for in that area. 

Whenever a target is designated the designation should conform to this sequence. 
It is needless to say that one element or two elements of this essential information 
may be sufficient target designation. In designating targets, the distance or range 
should never be omitted. However, if the target stands out alone in front of us, 
the direction and even the description may be unnecessary. It is merely a question 
of which of two targets to attack, the range and direction alone would be necessary. 
We shall see in the course of this lesson that a description of a linear target is 
absolutely necessary for the purpose of controling distribution of fire. 











TRACER BULLETS 


19 


General Methods of Target Designation. 

There are three general methods of target designation. The equipment available, 
the time and means of communication and the tactical situation will determine 
which method or combination of methods to use. Considering those methods as 
principles—they are correct principles of target designation—the measure of suc¬ 
cessful leadership will be a man’s ability to apply these correct principles to concrete 
cases on the battlefield. Practice and common sense are the essentials of the train¬ 
ing which will fit him to do this. 

The three methods of target designation are: 

a. Mechanical means. ,The tracer bullet is the best means of target designation 
under ordinary conditions. 

i. It not only gives to a trained man, a good idea of the range, but checks the 
range for the man firing. His eye can, with practice, follow his own tracer bullet. 
If the section leader fires at a target estimated as 700 yards away and the bullet 
falls 100 yards short, he can immediately signal to his squads “ Range, 800.” The 



section leader must know the effect of ground slopes and be thoroughly familiar 
with the trajectory and sight scale. For example, if the ground in rear of the target 
rises on a 15 degree slope, a bullet fired at the target with a range of 900 yards 
might strike only 25 to 50 yards beyond the target, yet the range would have to be 
reduced between 200 and 300 yards to give the correct sight setting for that target. 
In case some other member of the section does the firing the section leader may 
correct for range by using the inverted sight leaf in his field glasses, as will be 
explained under Control of Fire. 

2. All the unit, even though scattered over 200 yards of front, and in most cases 
with the supports 100 to 200 yards in rear, can follow the trajectory of the tracer 
bullet through the air, and get the direction to the target. 

3. If the target is a point, such as one machine gun or automatic rifle, the tracer 
will indicate its exact location better than the best description. It will locate a 
small area, which contains the target. Fire must be applied to this small area of 
terrain, if the enemy is skilled in the use of cover, because the target may not 

be seen. 
































20 


MUSKETRY 


4. If the target is a line, tracer bullets must be fired at each end of the target. 
This locates the line of terrain or frontage between the two points, to be covered 
by the fire of the unit. The movement and action of the enemy will further define 
the target to the eyes of the men, thus accurately directed to a small definite area of 
the terrain by the tracer bullets. (See Plate 13.) 

5. The men using tracer bullets to designate targets must be expert riflemen, 
skilled in range estimation. They must be able to adjust their fire accurately, by 
estimation, or by the use of the inverted sight leaf in their field glasses. The range 
used or the corrected range, should always be announced or signaled to the unit by 
the men using the tracer bullets. The scouts 250 yards in front, the platoon leader 
50 yards in rear, or a flank patrol 200 yards to the flank, can all use this means of 
target designation equally well. Target designation with tracer bullets is a special 
function of the platoon scouts. 

b. By voice. The use of this method of target designation is limited by the 
difficulty of verbal communication in battle. It will often be used with small units 
where designation is given to assembled leaders, or in rendering verbal reports 
or giving of verbal orders by one man to another. 

The following simple examples will indicate the method of target designation by 
voice. (See Plate 14.) 



Plate 14. —Target Designation. 

1. Range, 400. Dead tree to left front. Machine gun in bush. 

2. Range 500. Where road disappears over crest. Lone scout. 

3. Range, 800. Right doorway of ruined house. Automatic rifle. 

The distance or range must be given first, thus: 

1. Range, 400. 

2. Range, 500. 

3. Range, 800. 

This tells the soldier how far to look for the target. It fixes a zone of the 
terrain within which the target will be found. 

The direction is given next. To do this pick out a single prominent object in or 
very near the target, which can be quickly identified from a simple description. This 
is called the reference point. There should be no similar object in the vicinity which 
might be mistaken for it. The reference point is described thus: 

1. Dead tree to left front. 

2. Where road disappears over crest. 

3. Right doorway of ruined house. 

The description of the target is given last, thus: 

1. Machine gun in bush. 

2. Lone scout. 

3. Automatic rifle. 

The complete target designation includes these three items, thus: 

1. Range, 400. Dead tree to left front. Machine gun in bush. 

2. Range, 500. Where road disappears over crest. Lone scout. 

3. Range, 800. Right doorway of ruined house. Automatic rifle. 





































MEASURING FRONTAGE 


21 


In the foregoing examples the target consists of a single point, so close to the 
prominent object given as a reference point that no measurements of distance are 
needed. Thus in the first example, there is but one bush near the dead tree, the 
machine gun is in this bush, and the designation given at once directs the attention 
of the men to the bush in question. Had there been a bush on either side the desig¬ 
nation would have been, “ Machine gun in bush on left.” 

When the target has a linear dimension, that is a certain frontage over which 
fire must be distributed, its limits or the location of its flanks must be given, pref¬ 
erably by reference to prominent features of the terrain, on or very near to these 
flanks. For example, referring again to Plate 14: 

1. ^ Range, 400. Dead tree to left front. Skirmish line extending right to road.” 

2. Range, 500. Where road disappears over crest. Skirmish line extending 
from fence to right edge of small grove.” 

It will often be the case that there is no single, unmistakable prominent object in 
or very near to the target. In this case select the one most prominent, unmistakable 
object on the landscape, in the general locality of the target. If it is not at the same 
distance or nearly the same distance as the target, it should be as far off as possible, 
in order to avoid parallax. Parallax is the apparent change of position of one object 
with respect to another, or the change in direction to any object when viewed by men 
in different positions, or when the observer changes his position. The closer the 
object the greater the parallax. Having directed the attention of the men to such 
a prominent object, give the direction (right or left) and the distance (in sights or 
fingers) from this prominent object to the target or the nearer flank of the target. 



Plate 15.—Measuring Frontage by Sight Leaf Intercept 
50 mils = 1 sight = 1 finger. 


In order to properly designate a target under such conditions all men must be 
trained to measure lateral distances or frontages, by means of sight leaf or finger 
as a unit. The units of angular measure to be used are: 50 mils, the apparent width 
of one finger or of one sight leaf (these are equivalent units). The mil is an angle 
the tangent of which is 1/1000 (0.001). In other words, a width of one yard at a 
distance of 1000 yards would subtend an angle of one mil. Fifty yards, or 1/20 of 
the range, would subtend an angle of 50 mils. Therefore an angle of 50 mils will 
be subtended by one foot at 20 feet; 5 feet at 100 feet; etc. In order to use the 
width of the finger or the sight leaf to subtend an angle of 50 mils, the finger or 
sight leaf must be held at a certain fixed distance from the eye. (Plate 15.) We 
will show in the practical work, how to determine the proper distance these objects 
should be held from the eye. It is necessary to hold them at the same distance from 
the eye in each case. (See Exercise 8.) 

If every man in the unit holds his sight leaf or finger the correct distance from 
the eye, and applies this unit of measure as directed, all will obtain nearly the same 
results. A good rule to remember in connection with the use of the finger width 
and sight leaf is : If we multiply the number of finger widths in a target by 1/20 of 
the range to the target, we obtain the width or frontage of the target in yards. This 
is important as we shall see later in Distribution of Fire, in computing the strength 
of firing lines. 

With our men thoroughly trained in this system of measuring frontages we may 
designate both the position and extent of a linear target by measures expressed in 
terms of sight leaves or finger widths as units. This system is not as satisfactory 

SPM-9 










22 


MUSKETRY 


as that illustrated in the preceding examples, where the flanks of the target may be 
accurately located by direct reference to prominent features of the terrain. For no 
matter how well trained the men may be, time is consumed, and the opening of fire 
is delayed when it is necessary to make these measurements. 

The following examples will illustrate the application of this system of measure¬ 
ments. (See Plate 16 and Exercise 8.) 



Plate 16.—Measuring Frontage by Sight Leaf or Fingers. 


1. “ Range, 500. Reference, windmill on far crest. Three sights right. Target, 
machine gun in bushes.” 

2. “ Range, 600. Reference, ruined house. Four fingers right. Target, enemy 
patrol on crest.” 

In these examples the reference point is not very near to the target, hence the 
reference point and the target are each designated by name (“ Reference,” and 
“ Target ”), the distance between them being given. 



In the two foregoing examples the target was a point. If it is a linear target, over 
which fire must be distributed, the flank nearer to the reference point is designated 
as before. The extent of its front is then designated in one of the usual units. This 
locates the other flank of the target, it being understood, of course, that the target 
extends away from the reference point. For example, referring to Plate 17: 
“ Range, 800. Reference, right gable of farmhouse. Two sights right. Target, 
enemy line just below crest, extending two sights right.” 

This designation is complete, and unmistakable to men who have been properly 
trained in this system. The range means always the range to the target, not to the 
reference point, which may or may not be at the same range. The reference point 
is quickly identified, and cannot be confused, as there is no other farmhouse in sight. 
“ Two sights right ” means that the near flank of the linear target is two sights to 

























































































































TARGET DESIGNATION 


23 




Direction 




Plate 18.—Target Designation. 















































24 


MUSKETRY 


the right of the reference point. “ Enemy line just below crest, extending two sights 
right,” means that the target extends two sights from the flank nearer the refer¬ 
ence point, away from the latter. The extent of front and the location of both 
flanks of the target are thus indicated as accurately as the prominent features of 
the terrain permit. Knowing the range to be 800 yards, one sight leaf covers a 
front of 1/20 of that range or 40 yards. Hence the front of the target (2 sights) 
is 80 yards. If it consists of skirmishers at 5 yards it contains 16 men. Thus the 
front of the target gives an indication of the strength of the enemy. 

There is another case of target designation, where a prominent reference point 
lies inside of a linear target, but there are no other prominent objects by reference 
to which the flanks of the target may be located. In this case the extent of the 
target on either side of the reference point is given. For example, referring again 
to Plate 17: “Range, 500. Reference, dead tree to left front. Target, enemy 
skirmish line extending two sights right and one sight left.” 

c. By physical indication. Soldiers in action will designate a target with the arm. 
We must teach them to do this accurately, and in a manner which will supply as 
much of the necessary information as possible, as follows: 

1. Signal the range. (Use arm signal.) 

2. Point with the finger directed accurately at the target, the arm straight from 
the shoulder to the point of the finger. 



Plate 19.—Physical Designation of Target 


The above method will give the distance and approximate direction. It will locate 
a more or less definite area of terrain. The enemy movement or verbal description 
will aid in picking up the exact location. One or two of the nearest elements will 
locate the target and their fire will aid the other elements in locating the target. 
The rifle may be aimed at the target (especially from the standing or kneeling posi¬ 
tion) to indicate the position of the enemy. The range must be given. 

If time and circumstances permit, adjust a rifle on the bayonet thrust into the 
ground, or any other form of rest, and aim it at the target. Have each man look 
through the sight. This will locate the target for them, providing the aim of the 
rifle is not changed during the process. If this means of indication is used it is well 
to check the aim of the rifle frequently. (Plate 19.) 

Every man must be trained in target designation. The officer and non-commis¬ 
sioned officers are not the only members of the unit who may be called upon to 
designate a target. Private Zybysko, who can hardly speak a word of English, may 
pick up the target. He must be able to point it out to Corporal Jones— i. e., lay his 
rifle on it, aim at it, or indicate it in some definite manner. 

Every man must understand target designation and must be able to recognize the 
target from the designation given. 




FIRE DISTRIBUTION 25 

Officers and men must speak in the same language, that is use the same military 
terms and call the features of the terrain by the same names. “ To our right from 
tnat stone pile, must mean the same direction to every one. 

Careful training, constant practice, a high degree of discipline and teamwork, 
and a large amount of common sense, are essential to the successful application of 
these principles in modern combat. 


Practical Work. 

. Practical work in connection with the subject of Target Designation is given 
in Exercises Nos. 8 to 12 inclusive. 


FIRE DISTRIBUTION. 

Necessity for proper distribution. To gain and hold fire superiority, it is neces¬ 
sary that fire be distributed over the whole target. Otherwise the parts not under 
fire will develop their own fire in great volume and accuracy. 



Distribution by traversing. If one man is firing at a target, he must traverse his 
fire over the whole target in order to properly cover it. If two, three or eight men 
are firing at a target, it has been proven by careful tests, that they will obtain 
much better results if they will traverse their fire over the whole target than if each 
fires at a different part of the target. 

Distributing the fire of the squad. The advantages to be obtained from this 
system of fire distribution as compared with any system in which the target is 
divided into parts are: 
































26 


MUSKETRY 


a. The men of the squad do not have to divide an indistinct distance on the 
terrain into parts, but have only to recognize the limits or approximate limits of 

their target. e , 

b. A casualty in the squad will not leave a portion of the squad target uncovered. 
As long as there are one or two men left in the squad it can properly distribute its 
fire, by this system. 

c. Even if the exact limits of the target are not well defined, the chances a.e 
still great that one or more men of the squad will cover the entire target with fire. 

d. The accurate fire of the good shots, and the great volume of fire of the auto¬ 
matic rifle, are both distributed over the target. 

e. There is a far greater probability that the indistinct portions of the target 
will be covered since all men of the squad traverse their fire over them. 

/. It is a system which will insure distribution of fire over the entire front of the 
target, even when the individuals of a squad or the squads of a section are widely 
separated, and not under close control of their leaders, as it is unnecessary to assign 
particular portions of the target to particular individuals or squads. 



Plate 21. —Fire Distribution within the Section. 


g. Movement of individuals or squads to more favorable fire positions does not in 
the least interfere with proper distribution, since each individual, whenever, or 
wherever firing, covers the entire target. 

Summary. This system will work in all situations. Its application becomes a 
matter of training and routine. "It eliminates the necessity for special orders in each 
case—no orders are required. Within the squad each man traverses his fire over 
the entire target. He begins at a point on the target corresponding approximately 
to his position in the squad, and traverses to his right, thence beginning at his left, 
across the entire target from left to right, and repeat. 


Distributing the Fire of the Section. 

The section is the fire unit. That is to say, a section is best used to attack one 
definite target. A section includes two or more squads, normally three (according 
to present organization). Each element of the section, that is to say each squad, 
will cover the entire front of the target assigned to the section. (Plate 21.) 










FIRE DISTRIBUTION 


27 


The advantages of this system of distributing the fire of the section are: 

a. One designation of the target will indicate it to all the elements. Each element 
will not have to divide an indistinct distance on the terrain into parts and remember 
the extent of those parts. 

b. One or more elements may cease firing and move to a better firing position as 
in advance by rushes, and yet leave no part of the target uncovered. 

c. If the exact extent of the target is not clear, the chances are good that one ele¬ 
ment will cover the part which may be missed by another element. 

d. 1 he firing positions of some elements may make it impossible, because of some 
intervening object, for them to cover part of the target. The remaining elements 
will usually be in a position to cover these parts. 

e. The fire of one or two squads may be shifted to a new target and still leave the 
original target covered. 

f. The section may advance by rushes of squads, or fractions of squads, under 
cover of the fire of the remainder of the section who will keep the whole target 
covered. 

Summary. As for the squad, so for the section, this system will work in all 
situations. It is simple, definite, requires no orders, and its application is merely 
a matter of training. 

The section is a fire unit. It will generally be used to attack one target. Each 
element of the section will cover the whole target, distributing its fire as laid down 
in the preceding paragraphs. 

The platoon is a maneuver unit. It generally consists of two sections. If both 
of its sections are used to apply fire to a target, they act as separate units, each 
covering the entire target. Each section may be used to attack half of the platoon 
target if so directed by the platoon leader, but without orders to the contrary each 
section will cover the whole target. Each section acts in either case as a separate 
unit under the direction of the platoon leader, but each is ordinarily under the 
immediate control of its section leader. 

Practical Work. 

Practical work for use in connection with this subject is given in Exercises Nos. 13 

and 14. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

I. Range Estimation. 

1. Why is accurate estimation of the range essential? 

2. Why is it more necessary in the case of good marksmen? 

3. How are ranges estimated in battle ? 

4. Describe the method of range estimation by eye. 

5. What conditions cause objects to appear closer than they really are? Farther? 

II. Target Designation. 

6. What conditions in modern warfare tend to diminish the visibility of targets ? 

7. Why is a knowledge of the features of the terrain and their usual names neces¬ 
sary in target designation? 

8. What are the elements of information given in target designation What is 
the sequence in which they are given, and why? 

9. How many general methods of target designation are employed? Name and 
define these methods. 

10. How and by whom are tracer bullets used in target designation? 

11. What is a reference point? What points should be selected as references, 
and how should they be located with reference to the target? 

12. Explain the methods of verbal designation of a target consisting of a single 
point. 


28 MUSKETRY 

13. What are the units of angular measure customarily used in measuring 
frontages? 

14. How many yards of front, at a range of 1000 yards are covered by a finger 
width ? 

15. Describe the method of verbal designation of a linear target: 

a. When there are prominent points on the terrain at or near its flanks. 

b. When neither flank is very near to a prominent point. 

c. When the reference point is within the limits of the target and the 
flanks are not clearly defined. 

III. Fire Distribution. 

16. Why is fire distribution essential to fire superiority? 

17. Explain what is meant by traversing fire. 

18. What are its advantages as compared with any system of dividing the target 
into parts ? 

19. Are any orders required for the distribution of fire by traversing? 

20. Explain how fire is distributed by traversing: 

a. In the squad. 

b. In the section. 

CHAPTER III. 

FIRE DISCIPLINE. 

What fire discipline includes. Fire discipline implies the proper training of the 
troops and the extent to which the individual rifleman is amenable to the control 
of his leader. It means the exact execution of all orders for fire or movement 
and careful attention to all details of his conduct in action, by the individual soldier. 
Specifically it embraces: 

a. Constant attention to the rapid and accurate transmission, and the intelligent 
and prompt execution of all orders and signals. 

b. The proper use of cover while in position and the correct execution of all 
movements directed or necessary. 

c. The careful setting of sights and accurate delivery of fire. 

d. Economy of ammunition. 

e. Replacement of casualties. 

f. Ability and willingness of the individual to act intelligently on his own initia¬ 
tive to further the accomplishment of the squad, section or platoon mission. 

Means of Communication. Signals. 

The voice is frequently inadequate for giving commands during fire and must be 
replaced by signals of such character that proper fire control is insured. 

The signals used to transmit orders and firing data in the infantry platoon are 
those prescribed and illustrated in the Infantry Drill Regulations. They are of 
two kinds: 

a. Whistle signals. 

b. Arm signals. 

There are two whistle signals ; i. e., the short blast and the long blast. The former 
means “ Attention to orders,” the latter, “ Suspend firing.” All other whistle sig¬ 
nals during combat are prohibited. 

Whistle signals are for the purpose of attracting the attention of the squad 
leaders. Squad leaders must listen for whistle signals and heed them. The men 
■must not. The men must be so trained that they will not look around each time a 
whistle is blown. It is their duty to keep their eyes on the target and to devote their 
attention to the delivery of an efficient fire. They cannot do this if their attention is 
distracted by the sound of a whistle. 

Whistle signals must be sparingly used. They are used only when the noise of 
firing makes it impossible to attract the attention in any other manner. When in 
close proximity of the enemy such signals will inform him that some movement or 
action is about to take place, and he will watch for it. Our regulations prohibit 
the habitual use cf the whistle as a preliminary to a command or "signal. 


SIGNALS 


29 



Range 



Fig.2 

.Are you ready 9 
I am ready 





New target 



Fig.8 

Cease firing 


Plate 22. —Fire Control Signals. 



Fig.9 

Suspend firing 












































MUSKETRY 


30 



Fig.4 Quick time. Fig.5 Fix bayonets Fig.6 As skirmishers 


Plate 23.— Movement Control Signals. 

















































SIGNALS 


31 


The arm signals prescribed in the Infantry Drill Regulations are for the control 
of both fire and movement in the platoon. Great care must be taken to insure that 
every member of the platoon is thoroughly familiar with these signals and is able 
both tq understand and transmit them. 

Visual signals are very useful in the control of the section or platoon in action, 
if they are properly used. They are dangerous if improperly used. Careful traim 
ing in the use of signals and the rigid observance of the two following rules are 
essential: 

a - If a signal is to be used it must be given properly, so that it can be read easily 
and correctly, even at the cost of danger to the sender. If he cannot expose himself 
sufficiently to give the signal clearly and correctly on account of danger from the 
enemy’s fire, he must use some other means of communication. 

b. A signal received must never be obeyed until it has been repeated back to the 
sender. If the sender does not signal back a correction, it is understood to be 
correct, and will be obeyed. The duty of watching for, receiving, repeating back and 
seeing to the execution of the signal by the squad, falls upon the squad leader. Every 
man must be able to act as squad leader if necessary. 

The squad leader must ordinarily transmit or give his orders to the members of 
his squad by word of mouth. When the squad is deployed at extended intervals it 
may be necessary for the men to transmit these orders along the skirmish line. 
In doing this they must always state the source of the order, thus: “ Corporal Jones 
said ‘ Fire faster” “ Corporal Jones said ‘ Suspend firing.’ ” 

It should be remembered that signals are substitutes, to be used when the voice is 
inadequate for giving commands. Section leaders will use the voice if possible, or 
unless the noise of firing, the great separation of the unit, or the proximity of the 
enemy prohibit. 

Runners. Under some conditions in action, such as at night, in smoke, fog, etc., 
it is impossible to use arm signals. Under such conditions another means of com¬ 
munication must be employed. This method is the use of messengers or runners. 

Buglers, runners, and members of the platoon must be thoroughly instructed in 
the transmission of verbal messages. 

All messages transmitted by messenger or runner must be brief and to the point. 
A verbal message which is subject to a fatal change in sense by the omission of a 
single word must be avoided. For example: 

“ The first section will not advance north of Rock Creek.” 

This message is subject to a reversal of meaning by the omission of the word 
“ not ” and should be given: “ The first section will halt south of Rock Creek.” 

A verbal message should include the name and address of the person to whom 
sent, and the name of the sender, for example: 

“To Sergeant Smith, First Section, from Lieutenant Jones. 

“ The first section will halt south of Rock Creek.” 

To properly fulfill their duties as messengers and runners, men must observe the 
following rules regarding the transmission of verbal messages: 

a. Repeat the message to the sender as soon as it is received. 

b. Verify the name of the person to whom sent and any special information as 
to his location. 

c. Make certain that the message is delivered to the right person, announce the 
sender, and repeat the exact message. (See message above.) 

d. Return to the sender with the reply or report the delivery of the message, unless 
ordered otherwise by the sender. 

Concealment. The Use of Cover. Individual Movement. 

See Scouting and Patroling. 

The great importance of proper concealment and use of cover must be recognized. 
The success of infantry is gained by pushing man power, assisted by covering fire, 
toward the enemy, until it is possible to finally close with him, and destroy or capture 
him, or force him to retreat. 


32 


MUSKETRY 


Each man must be thoroughly imbued with the idea that the advance of his unit 
and the effectiveness of its fire are of greater importance than the question of 
individual cover, but he must be so trained that when in position and in moving 
forward he will take every advantage of natural cover. 

There are certain laws which govern the use of cover and they must be thoroughly 
impressed upon the men. These laws and the simple rules as to individual move¬ 
ment and the use of cover are fully discussed in Scouting and Patroling. 

As a member of a fire unit the individual soldier must move and use cover to the 
fullest extent, but he must keep constantly in mind the necessity of being able 
to deliver effective fire on the enemy, and of moving as part of the squad, section 
and platoon team. 



Plate 24.—Effect of Background on Visibility. 

No. I. As seen on crest against the sky—no background. 

No. 2. As seen against hillside—average background. 

No. 3. As seen on crest but against bushes—good background. 

No. 4. As seen on crest against lake—poor background. 

No. 5. As seen on crest but not against sky—distant background. 


Sight Setting and Delivery of Fire. 

Careful sight setting is a matter of training. Any well-trained and disciplined 
unit should be able to set its sights correctly within ten seconds after the order is 
understood. To set the sights press the thumb of the left hand against the slide, 
leaf down. Loosen the slide with the right hand and move it up or down by pres¬ 
sure with the left thumb. Guide and stop the movement and tighten the slide in 
position, with the right hand. Units should be practiced repeatedly in setting sights, 
both by signal and command, and in every possible position. 

The accurate and correct delivery of fire requires: 

a. That each man know the range. 

b. That he set his sight properly. 

c. That he know the location and extent of the target. 

d. That he be in the correct position to fire easily and comfortably. 

e. That he accurately align his sights, hold his breath, and squeeze the trigger 
so as not to disturb his aim. 

/. That he reload promptly. 

g. That he traverse his fire carefully over the whole target, as described under 
Distribution of Fire for the squad. 





















FIRING POSITIONS 


33 



Plate 25. —Firing Positions. 




Wrong 


\\Jh\i\ IJJhiH 

— ‘ 



Correct 


Plate 26.—Firing Positions. 









































34 


MUSKETRY 


Economy of Ammunition. Proper Rates of Fire. 

(See Theory of Fire.) 

Economy of ammunition requires that only that amount of ammunition be used 
that is necessary to apply the most effective fire to the target. There is a correct 
rate of fire in rounds per minute for each range. An approximate rule to apply in 
determining this rate is to subtract the number of hundreds of yards in the range 
from 13. Thus the rate of fire for 800 yards would be 13 minus 8 or 5 rounds per 
minute. This rule holds up to 1000 yards. Beyond that range effective fire can only 
be delivered at the rate of 2 or 3 shots per minute. 

With the automatic rifle the rate of fire is considerably faster. Up to 600 yards 
the proper rate is from 10 to 50 shots per minute, semi-automatic fire, i. e., single 
aimed shots. Automatic fire in bursts of from 3 to 5 shots may be used against very 
large distinct targets, not more than 100 yards away. At ranges from 600 to 1200 
yards the rate of fire for the automatic rifle should be the same as that of the rifle 
except when the target is large and distinct in which case a higher rate of fire 
may be used. The fire of the automatic rifle is not very effective at long ranges. 

Repeated experiments have proven that to increase the rates of fire above those 
given will, with average marksman, not only use more ammunition but secure fewer 
hits. This additional ammunition is therefore worse than a total loss. Every man 
must know this, and as a matter of training must fire at the correct rate for each 
range, unless ordered to use a slower rate. 

Replacement of Casualties. 

The replacement of casualties by substitutes should be a matter of training and 
routine. It is an element of fire discipline. 

In particular each section and squad must have a leader, and the automatic rifle 
must be kept in action. The first replacement for the automatic rifleman is his 
substitute, and thereafter any member of the squad who is qualified to operate the 
weapon. The second in command of the squad is No. 4, rear rank. The squad 
leader is responsible for keeping the automatic rifle in action. The section leader 
and section guide are responsible for seeing that a substitute leader is designated 
for each squad when necessary. 

Individual Conduct and Initiative. 

Each man must be willing to act intelligently and to the best of his ability, and 
to place his individual skill in battle firing at the disposal of his leaders. Even in 
the excitement and stress of battle, in the absence of orders or directions, he must be 
ready to act on his own initiative, and to use his skill to accomplish the squad, sec¬ 
tion or platoon mission. 

Practical Work. 

Practical work for use in connection with this chapter is given in Practical Exer¬ 
cises Nos. 15 to 17 inclusive. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Fire Discipline. 

Having thoroughly mastered this chapter the student should be able to answer 
correctly the following questions : 

1. What does fire discipline mean, and what items does it include? 

2. What means are employed for the transmission of orders? 

3. To what uses are whistle signals limited? When should they be employed? 

4. What is the rule about repeating back visual signals ? 

5. Under what conditions are runners employed? 

6. What should a verbal message include and what should be its form ? 

7. What precaution is necessary with respect to negative expressions in verbal 
messages ? 


35 


FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SQUAD 

8 . Describe the method of setting the sight of a rifle. 

9. What does correct delivery of fire require on the part of the individual? 

10. What is the rule for the most effective rate of fire at any range? 

11. What are the limiting rates of fire of the automatic rifle when fired semi- 
automatically ? 

12. What rates of fire should be used by the automatic rifle at ranges beyond 
600 yards ? 

13. What replacements of casualties in the squad are of special importance? 

14. Who is responsible : 

a. That the automatic rifles are kept in action? 

b. That each squad has a leader? 

CHAPTER IV. 

CONTROL OF FIRE. 

Fire control is a function of subordinate leaders. It embraces the issue of orders 
to initiate a fire action, and securing the proper application of fire. Specifically 
it includes application, observation and adjustment of fire. 

The infantry squad and section are organized and deployed for combat with a 
view to facilitating the control of fire. 

FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SQUAD. 

Experience in combat proves that one man can personally control the fire of eight 
men. The infantry squad leader can therefore be expected to control the fire of his 
squad. 

To properly apply the fire of his squad the leader must convey to each of his 
men by appropriate orders, the following information: 

a. The range, in order that sights may be properly set. 

b. The target to which fire is to be applied, and exactly where it is located. 

c. The extent of the front of the target and the location of its flanks, in order 
that fire may be properly distributed over the target. 

d. The time to open fire. 

It will be noted that a proper target designation conveys the first three items of 
this essential information. 

Responsibilities of Squad Leader. 

If the squad is acting alone, or if it be separated by a considerable distance from 
the rest of the section, the squad leader may have to formulate the plan on which 
his fire orders are based. In such a case his problem is the same as that of a section 
leader. 

When the squad is acting as part of a section the squad leader, ordinarily, will 
have only to transmit the fire orders of the section leader and enforce their 
execution. 

The fact that the target has been designated by the tracer bullets of the scouts 
does not relieve the squad leader of the responsibility for properly applying and con- 
troling the fire of his command. One or more of his men may not have observed 
the tracer bullets. Another may have the wrong range. A proper order will give 
to all the men of the squad the information they require in order to properly apply 
their fire. 

The time of opening fire will often be determined by circumstances, for example 
the action of the enemy, or when the men locate the target. There will, on the 
other hand, be occasions when it is desirable that the squad open fire together, on 
the order of the squad leader. This order would usually be, “ FIRE AT WILL/* 

In the confusion of battle, with the squad deployed on a front of 40 yards or 
more, it will at times be impossible to give even a simple order such as this simul¬ 
taneously to all men of the squad. In this case the squad leader enters the firing 
line, gives orders direct to the men nearest him, and causes them to pass the orders 
on to the others. 


36 


MUSKETRY 


When the squad is acting as a part of the section, the squad leader must be con¬ 
stantly on the alert for signals from his section leader. 

When he is so ordered, or when he perceives an opportunity to advance, the 
squad leader must be able to promptly stop the fire of his squad. This is accom¬ 
plished by the order, “ CEASE FIRING,” followed by sharp repetitions to men 
who fail to obey promptly, thus: “ Jones ! Cease firing.” 

Especially upon the completion of a movement, and at other times as necessary, 
the squad leader must see that his men are in proper positions to permit of effective 
fire, not too close to each other, etc. A verbal caution such as, “ Jones, move over 
to your right,” or “ Jones, get behind that tree,” will place a man in a better firing 
position. 

Sights often slip during firing, and they should be checked occasionally. 

Position of the leader. The leader must take a position from which he can best 
observe the fire of his squad, and properly direct its actions. Such a position will 
usually be in rear of his squad, near the center, and at a sufficient distance to 
allow him to hear and see, and be heard and seen by the men on the flanks. In this 
position, and when employed in directing the fire of his men the squad leader does 
not himself participate in the fire. Fire control and the maintenance of fire 
discipline are his primary duties. To fire himself is a matter of less importance 
which must not interfere with this primary duty. 

It is of special importance that the squad leader should properly direct and con¬ 
trol the fire of his automatic rifleman and, if grenades are being used, that of his 
rifle grenadier. The deployment of the squad is such as to facilitate this, since 
these two men are near the center. 


(J> 

n 

9 

3 

a 

S' 

n 

o 

3 

9- 


3 

S 

3 


40 


t 


3 

□ 

* 

tfl U) 

73 

or 3! 

73 


3 



f* 

$ 

> 

XJ 


poors' 

□ 

W 
7} 

> 

\ 

71 

ft 


JV 

& 


9 

•s 

0 

0 


3 pc*C<z^> “ 

o □ 


0 TM 
70 

3 

o’ 

3 

9 
3 


•n 

A 

D 

D 

SL 

n 


n 

c 3 

to 


5 ! 

73 

71 

=K 

o’ 

3 

9 

3 


Such di^+ance as^hc can: 
I.See and control his squaot. 
S.Sce'the tarqeh 

3. Sec Sec"Hon Ueadar 

4. Be covered 'from enemy’s 
vievVar»c\ "fire. 



Plate 27. —The Squad Engaged with the Enemy. 











37 


OBSERVATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE 

In Plate 27 the squad leader is shown in the position from which he can ordi¬ 
narily best control the fire of his squad. The position in any case should be that 
which best fulfills the following conditions: 

1. The squad leader should see and be seen by each man of his squad. 

2. He should see the target and the terrain in its vicinity. 

3. He should see and be seen by his section leader. 

4- He should be covered from the enemy’s view and fire. 

In the positions indicated the two men nearest to the squad leader are the auto¬ 
matic rifleman and rifle grenadier. If conditions of battle make the control of the 
entire squad difficult or impossible, the leader will at least be able to control these 
two important weapons. The substitute automatic rifleman is on the left of his 
principal, where he can most easily and quickly replace him if necessary. On the 
left of the substitute automatic rifleman is the second in command of the squad, 
who from this position can best assist in controling the men. In the advance he is 
ordinarily the last man to move forward, supervising the advance of the men 
remaining when the squad leader himself has advanced. He then advances and 
takes his position at the proper interval on the left of the squad. 

The scouts, if present, are on the extreme right of the squad. At least one scout 
will usually be absent, or will join the squad after its deployment. It is therefore 
better that the scouts should be on the flank, where their leaving or joining the 
squad will not change the intervals at which it is deployed. 

Observation of Fire by Squad Leader. 

Having given his fire orders and engaged his squad, the corporal must observe the 
fire and adjust any errors that are noted. Such is his duty in the control of fire. 
He should note all errors of adjustment in the fire of the squad as a unit, or in that 
of any individual. For example: Careful observation on the part of the squad 
leader will detect the continual short shots of a man who has the wrong range. By 
watching his automatic rifleman he can tell whether he is firing continually at one 
spot, or distributing his fire properly over the entire target. A recruit may be so 
concerned with keeping himself covered that he merely pokes his rifle over the 
lip of a shell hole and fires into the air. 

Old targets may extend or contract their fronts, or new targets may appear. The 
men engaged in firing are apt to overlook such changes, but the squad leader should 
not fail to observe them. 

Adjustment of Fire by Squad Leader. 

Any adjustments that may be necessary, either as a result of errors or careless¬ 
ness on the part of the men, or by reason of changes in the target or new targets, 
must be promptly made by the squad leader. 

The squad leader may be able to effect these adjustments by verbal orders. Or he 
may enter the line and adjust the fire of an individual by personal contact, pointing 
his rifle, causing him to reset his sight, pointing out a new target, etc. For example: 
The squad leader perceives a burst of fire coming from a stone pile to the right of 
the target at which his squad is firing. He moves up alongside his automatic rifle¬ 
man, and orders as follows : “ Same range. Fire on automatic in that stone pile ” 
(pointing it out). 

Adjustment of fire by the squad leader involves three elements: 

1. Correction or change of direction. This will be required if any man is firing 
on the wrong target, or if a new target appears, as when individuals of the enemy 
filter forward, or otherwise change position and establish a new target. This adjust¬ 
ment requires a new designation of the target. 

If a member of the squad has failed to pick up the right target from the leader’s 
verbal designation, it may be necessary to adjust his fire by physical contact, that is 
moving up to the man and showing him the target, or pointing his rifle at it. 


38 


MUSKETRY 


If the entire squad has a wrong direction of fire, or it is necessary to shift to a 
new target, it may be difficult in the confusion of combat to simultaneously adjust 
the fire of the whole squad. In this case the leader, by physical contact, should first 
direct the fire of the automatic rifleman, and subsequently that of the other men as 
quickly as possible. 

2. Correction or change of range. This adjustment, like the preceding should be 
made by giving a new range. For example: “Jones, cease firing. Range, 800. ’’ 
The leader then sees that Jones resets his sight to the range indicated. 

3. Correction or change of distribution. A redistribution of fire may be neces¬ 
sary either as a result of error, or by reason of changes in the target. 

The man may have failed to understand the designation of the target. In this 
case it should be redesignated for his benefit. If he has failed to understand a 
verbal designation it may be redesignated physically. For example: The leader may 
point the man’s rifle at one flank of the target, and direct him to measure two sights 
“ in that direction ” (indicating). If by reason of excitement or nervousness a man 
iS failing to properly distribute his fire, the leader should steady him by a caution. 
For example: “ Jones, traverse over the entire target.” The leader then watches 
to see that Jones does as ordered. 


f 


12,0 paces 


5 pa cee 


000 0000000 0000000 0000 


o 

3-Squad 

Sec+ion Leader 
Select n't 



_o o 

1“ Squad "2 -Squad 

10 to 15 pacts 

Section Guide 
Corporal 

Second in Comd. 


Plate 28. —Section engaged with the Enemy. 


FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SECTION. 

The section leader is charged with the direct control of his section during all 
phases of the combat. 

As the section normally includes 24 men and deploys for fire over a front of at 
least 120 yards, the section leader cannot personally direct all of his men. He 
exercises control through his three squad leaders. 

The leading section will usually apply its fire to the target as soon as the enemy 
is developed. The^ initial action of the support section will usually be to seek a 
covered position. Thence it works forward to a position favorable either for fire 
or assault, preferably on a flank of the target. Or it may be employed to reinforce 
the leading section in a frontal attack by fire and movement, if so ordered by the 
platoon leader. 

In any event a section leader will eventually be confronted with the duty of 
applying the fire of his section to a target, and subsequently observing and adjusting 
this fire. 

To properly apply the fire of his squads to the target the section leader must 
convey to his squad leaders by appropriate orders, the following information: 
















FIRE CONTROL WITHIN THE SECTION 39 


a. The range. 

b. The target to which fire is to be applied, and its exact location, especially the 
location of the flanks of a linear target. 

He must make certain that each squad leader knows the range and identifies the 
target, thus only can he be sure that the fire of the section will be effectively applied. 

If the section enters the action deliberately the leader may also be able to controi 
the time of opening fire. 

The section guide assists the section leader in the initial application of fire and 
its subsequent observation and adjustment. 

Position of the leader. To properly control the fire of his section the leader 
should take the position which at any time best fulfills the following conditions: 

1. The section leader should see and be seen by his squad leaders. The squad 
leaders may be from 30 to 75 yards apart. 

2. He should see the target, and the terrain in its vicinity. 

3. He should see the section. 

4. He should see the platoon command post. 

5. He should be covered from the enemy’s view and fire. 

6. He should be able to see to his flanks, and see the adjacent units. 

The position which best fulfills these requirements will ordinarily be some 
distance in rear of and near the center of the section. (Plate 28.) Exceptionally 
it may be on a flank. As no one position will ih every case best meet all these 
requirements the section leader must exercise his judgment in selecting the one 
which is most favorable. He may utilize his section guide to assist in observation, 
for example, to take a position from which he can see the platoon command post. 

The section leader guards the flanks of his command by personal observation. In 
some cases he may utilize scouts for this duty. As the section is a fire unit, and not 
a maneuver unit, it can protect its own flanks only by observation, and by the fire 
of the flank squad. 

Transmission of orders. The problem of transmitting his fire control orders is 
a more serious one for the section leader than for the squad leader, on account of 
the greater front over which the unit is deployed. 

If under cover the squad leaders may be assembled. Prior to deployment the 
section leader can make himself heard to all members of the section. When the 
section is deployed and committed to the fire action verbal orders to the entire 
section will usually be impracticable. In this case the section leader exercises fire 
control by: (a) Going in person to his squad leaders; (b) Visual signals; and 
(c) Tracer bullets. 

The section leader and guide are both equipped with tracer ammunition. From 
a suitable command post the leader (or his guide) will be able to use tracer bullets 
for target designation, firing over the heads of the section, or through a gap. Or 
one of them may move into the line for this purpose. 

A signal, “ Range, 700,” followed by pointing to a locality at which the guide 
is firing tracer bullets, will convey a definite fire order to a squad leader a hundred 
yards away. 

Observation and Adjustment of Fire by Section Leader. 

Having committed his unit to the fire action the section leader must continually 
observe the conduct of the section, the target, and the fire effects on both sides. He 
must be constantly on the alert for any evidences of improper adjustment, and take 
prompt measures to correct them. He must note any changes in the target, or new 
targets appearing in his zone of action, and see that the fire of the section is prop¬ 
erly applied and adjusted thereto. 

Errors in adjustment include: 

1. Incorrect range. 

2. Wrong direction. 

3. Faulty distribution. 


40 


MUSKETRY 


On ordinary terrain the impact of rifle bullets (in considerable numbers) may 
be observed. In any case the tracer bullets of the scouts are an accurate indication 
of the locality in which the bullets of the squad are falling, and give notice of any 
errors in range, direction or distribution. Knowing what to look for and where to 
look, and not being under the necessity of personally supervising the conduct of 
individual riflemen, the section leader will often be able to note errors in range or 
direction which his subordinates closer to the line fail to detect. 

Range should be corrected by a new range designation. Often the section leader 
will desire to know the range that a certain squad is using. A simple signal to the 
squad leader will elicit this information, thus: Place the heel of one hand on the 
fist of the other, palm towards the person signaled. This means, “ What range are 
you using?” This information will often be necessary to check errors and give 
correct ranges. 

Incorrect distribution is frequently the result of incorrect target designation, or a 
designation not properly understood. A tracer bullet fired at each flank of the 
target by the section guide will re-outline it. The squad leaders should be always 
on the alert for such signals. If necessary the section leader calls their attention, 
using his whistle. If one flank of the target is not being covered, a tracer bullet 
fired at that flank, and a signal to the squad leader, “ Shift your fire to the right,” 
will correct this error in adjustment. The signal is given by extending the arm, and 
swinging the palm of the hand in the direction in which the shift is to be made. 
Verbal orders are given by the section leader moving over to the squad leader’s posi¬ 
tion, or transmitting a message by the section guide. Or the limits of the target 
may be physically designated to the squad leader by the section leader or guide. 

If the leader observes that fire is being applied to a wrong target he should at 
once check this waste of fire power by ascertaining which squad is in error, and 
correcting same. This may be done by observation, or by visiting the squad and 
personally checking its fire. Physical or mechanical (tracer bullet) designation will 
usually be the best method of indicating the proper target. At times a signal to the 
squad leader, “ Shift your fire to the right,” will call his attention to his error, and 
the fire of the remainder of the section will indicate the proper target. 

From his observation of the enemy and his grasp of the situation as a whole, the 
section leader should be able to perceive when fire should be shifted to a new 
target, to meet new developments. Usually a shift of fire should be made a squad 
at a time, the new designations being conveyed successively to the squad leaders 
by order or signal. 

Use of Held glasses. In the observation of fire effect and the adjustment of fire 
the section leader may use his field glasses to great advantage. He should be 
accustomed to the use of glasses, and able to estimate the influence of ground slopes 
on the size of the beaten zone, and the sight setting. Ordinarily, unless the ground 
is wet, the bullets may be seen striking the ground, if the field glasses are used. If 
the strike of the bullets cannot be seen the leader must depend upon several tracer 
bullets to give him the center of impact or line of centers of impact of the bullets. 
As soon as this is obtained the problem is easy. 


ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE 


41 


A. Fire order 
Range 500 

Reference-Tall pine tree. 








■<m>u 

*‘^•1 

Fig.l ERROR IN RANGE 


B. Result 

) f J) C. Corrected order 

^ 'i Range 700 


A. Fire order 
Range 700 

Reference-Tall pine tree 
M. G. in bush to left 


-Error to be adjusted 




C. Corrected order 
Range 700 

Reference - Tall pine tree 
M.G. in second bush to left 


Fig.2 ERROR IN DIRECTION 

Plate 29.—Adjustment of Fire. 














42 


MUSKETRY 



Correction of Sight Setting. 

When the target is on sloping ground the correction applied to the rear sight 
will be too small unless in addition to the correction for the actual distance short 
or over, allowance is also made for the angular distance of the point of impact of 
the bullets above or below the target. 

In practice, the actual distance in yards from the center of impact (center of the 
beaten zone) to the target must be estimated. The vertical correction, however, 
may be measured with a fair degree of accuracy by using the inverted sight leaf in 
the field glasses. 

To measure the amount of this vertical correction place the graduation of the 
range scale corresponding to the actual elevation being used on the target. Then the 
graduation opposite the point of impact will be the elevation necessary to take to 
correct the vertical error. The vertical correction having been made, then the cor¬ 
rection is completed by adding (if the impact is short) or subtracting (if the impact 
is over) a number of yards equal to the estimate of the horizontal distance from the 
impact to the target, and setting the sight accordingly. 



In Plate 30 assume the range to have been estimated at 800 yards. Then with 
the 800-yard graduation held opposite the target the splash of the center of impact 
is observed to be opposite the 1100-yard graduation and is estimated to be 150 yards 
short of the target. The full correction therefore would be 1100 yards (vertical 
correction), plus 150 yards (horizontal correction), or a final elevation of 1250 
yards, necessary to carry the center of impact onto the target. 

Practical Work. 

For practical work in connection with this chapter see chapter on Conduct of 
Fire. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Control of Fire. 

1. What does fire control include? 

2. What considerations govern the size of the squad? 

























CONTROL OF MOVEMENT 43 

3. What information must the squad leader convey to his men in order to prop¬ 
erly apply their fire ? 

4- What conditions govern the time of opening fire ? 

5. How are the orders of the squad leader transmitted? 

6. What is the position of the squad leader in action, and why? 

7. Having given his fire orders, what duties must the squad leader then perform? 

8. What is adjustment of fire and what does it include? 

9. How is a change in direction effected ? 

10. How is a change in range effected? 

11. How is a correction in distribution effected? 

12. By what means does the section leader control his men? 

13. When the enemy is encountered what are the first actions of the leading and 
support sections ? 

14. How is the support section later employed? 

15. What information must the section leader give, and to whom, in order to 
properly apply the fire of the section ? 

16. What is the position of the section leader in action, and why? 

17. What are the duties of the section guide? 

18. What precautions does the section leader exercise for the security of his 
flanks ? 

19. How are the orders of the section leader transmitted? 

20. What are the duties of the section leader after committing his section to 
action ? 

21. How does he detect an error in range? 

22. What is the usual cause of incorrect distribution and how is it corrected? 

23. What is the signal for “ Shift your fire to the right ” ? 

24. How are errors in direction detected and corrected ? 

25. What is the effect of ground slopes on corrections in sight setting? Show by 

diagram. 

CHAPTER V. 

CONTROL OF MOVEMENT. 

Musketry includes not only the proper application of fire to the target, but also 
the movement of the fire units necessary in this application of fire, and in advancing 
the attack to a position favorable for an assault upon the enemy. The subject thus 
includes the two component elements which make up the combat tactics of the 
fire unit, both in attack and defense, to wit: Fire and movement. 

The movement considered is that which takes place within the zone of effective 
small arms fire (rifle, automatic rifle and machine gun). It is accordingly move¬ 
ment in the immediate presence of the enemy. At different stages of the advance 
this movement may be: 

a. Out of sight of the enemy, and defiladed or protected against his fire (by natural 
cover). 

b. Out of sight of the enemy, but exposed to his indirect or unaimed fire. 

c. In sight of the enemy, and as a result directly exposed to his aimed fire. 

The. control of movement, or fire maneuver, will be considered under these three 

headings. 

Movement Out of Sight of the Enemy and Protected from Fire. 

a. Movement out of sight of the enemy and also protected from his tire will be 
that which takes place in low ground, on defiladed reverse slopes, in or behind dense 
woods, villages or buildings affording concealment and cover. 

Columns are more easily controlled than line, and can better utilize cover. Hence 
the movements of the fire units in such situations will usually be in small columns. 


44 


MUSKETRY 




0- 


The section column (see I. D. R.) is a suitable formation for movement in open, 
defiladed terrain. The squads of the section follow each other in their usual order, 
each in column of twos. (Plate 31.) 

To properly control the movement the section leader moves at the head of the 
column, where he can be seen and heard by his three squad leaders, each of whom 
marches at the head of his squad. 

The section guide follows in rear of the section. In this position he can keep the 
column closed up and prevent straggling, maintain proper formations and discipline, 
and watch for and transmit orders or signals from the rear. He checks such 
breaches of fire discipline as dropping equipment, carrying equipment improperly, 
straggling, talking when silence is demanded, etc. 

The section column is very vulnerable to a sudden burst of aimed fire, especially 
of machine guns. The long narrow beaten zone of the machine gun, combined with 
its great volume of fire, might enable it to almost annihilate a section column, taken 
by surprise, before it could change its formation. The column is much less vulner¬ 
able to machine gun fire from the flank. Nevertheless it is a bad formation in 
which to be caught under aimed fire from any direction. 

Section column is accordingly employed for better con- | 
trol and greater facility of movement in ground where it is 
not likely to be subjected to rifle or machine gun fire. To 
guard against surprise the section leader must provide for 
reconnaissance to the front and flanks. If there be other 
units on the flanks, abreast of the column, they may provide 
security in those directions, but reconnaissance to the front 
should never in any case be omitted. The scouts of the 
section are utilized for this purpose, forming a small ad¬ 
vance guard at a suitable distance. The leader should have 
visual, and if practicable, verbal communication with his 
scouts. 

Section column is not a suitable formation when exposed 
to artillery fire, as the burst of a single shell might involve 
the entire column. 

When moving through dense woods, underbrush, or very 
broken terrain, the section column is not always suitable, as ^ >LATE 31— Section Column, 
there is a tendency for the two files to separate from each other in picking their 
easiest route of advance, thus forming two columns of files, each containing portions 
of squads, which cannot deploy in the prescribed manner, and have no definite 
leaders. 

Squad columns, in which the members of the squad follow each other in single 

file, with the squad leader at the head, and the second in 
command at the rear, are less vulnerable to artillery fire and 
frontal fire of small arms. They are usually more suitable 
also for movement in dense woods or over very broken 
terrain, and have the further advantage that each column 
is a complete unit under its proper leader. (Plate 32.) 

To place his section in squad columns the section leader 
orders: “ Squad columns, MARCH,” or “ Squad columns 
right (or left), MARCH.” The squads normally form 
abreast of each other at deploying intervals (40 to 50 
yards). This formation is known as “ line of squad col¬ 
umns.” The formation may be echeloned or “ staggered,” 
that is the heads of the columns may not be on the same 
line, and the intervals may be either extended or closed 
from the normal deploying interval. For example, in 
passing through a dense wood the intervals should not 
exceed the limit of visibility in the wood, so that each 
Plate 32*.— Squad Column, squad may see the one next to it. The original leading 


Section Leader 
"Sergeant" 

1st Squad 


2nd Squad 


3rd Squad 

Section <3uida 
'Corporal 
Sec .in GomcL 


f 

A- Corporal 
♦—• I to Q paces. 

cb 2 Rifleman 

Grenade Discharger 
I I 2-R Rifl cm an 

I- 1 3 Rifleman 

Substitute Auto. Rif l* 

I 1 3'R Auto Rifle 
| 1 1 Rif lemao - Scout 


□ 


|-R Rifleman 
Alternate Scout 


A -R Rifleman 
Second \n comd. 








45 


CONTROL OF MOVEMENT 

squad, which is usually the center of the line of squad columns, is the base squad 

or guide for the movement, unless another squad be specially designated as 
(Such) squad, base squad.” 

To control the movement of the line of squad columns the section leader places 
himself where he can see to the front, see his three squads, and be seen and heard 
by the squad leaders. Usually this will be in front of the center squad. 

The flank squads are responsible for observation and security on their respective 
flanks. _ The front is covered by the scouts. Usually each pair of scouts moves 
approximately in front of its own squad, at a suitable distance, depending on the 
terrain, of from 25 to 500 yards. 

If the scouts are already in advance they adapt themselves to the formation 
Otherwise the order of the section leader, “ SCOUTS OUT,” will cause the scouts 
of each squad to precede it by about 150 yards. If a different distance be desired 
the section leader orders, “ Move 50 (250, etc.) yards in front. SCOUTS OUT.” 

The section guide follows in rear of the line of squad columns, where he can best 
perform the duties heretofore mentioned. 



Each squad leader is at the head of his squad where he can see to the front, 
see and hear the section leader, and see and be seen and heard by the members of his 
squad. The second in command (No. 4, rear rank), follows in rear where he per¬ 
forms duties relative to the squad similar to those of the section guide. 

Columns are not suitable for the delivery of fire, and for this purpose must be 
deployed in line of skirmishers. This is usually executed to the front, in the 
manner prescribed in the drill regulations. 

In case of emergency a section column can deploy directly to a flank. An order, 
“Right (left), FACE,” or “By the right (left) flank, MARCH,” followed by a 
target designation, will place the section in a suitable formation and initiate fire to 
the flank. The men in the rear rank (when faced to the flank), step into the 
intervals in the front' rank. This results in a skirmish line at close intervals, but 
the line is able to open fire, and the intervals are increased to the proper amount as 
opportunity allows. 

A line of squad columns can similarly deploy to the flank. The flank squad can 
open fire at once. The. other squads advance to the line by rushes or infiltration, as 
rapidly as possible. 

To illustrate such a maneuver, let us assume the situation shown in Plate 33. The 
section has been moving through a dense wood, out of sight of the enemy, and not 
subject to fire, in the formation shown (line of squad columns). Machine gun fire 




46 


MUSKETRY 


suddenly opens from the vicinity of the house at A. The section leader decides to 
attack. He may order his 2nd (right) squad, which is nearest to the edge of the 
wood, as follows: “ Range, 600. Reference, house to right front. One sight right. 
Target, machine gun in edge of woods. FIRE AT WILL.” The other two squads 
are ordered as follows: “ On left of second squad, RE-FORM. Range, 600. 
Machine gun indicated by tracers.” (These tracers are being fired by the scouts 
of the 2nd squad.) The target may be otherwise designated. 

Each squad leader might order, “ FOLLOW ME,” leading his squad to its 
proper place in line, and on approaching the edge of the wood, “ As skirmishers, 
MARCH. Range, 600. Machine gun indicated by tracers (or by any other 
method). FIRE AT WILL.” 

The section leader should take post where he can observe the target and the fire 
of his section, and be seen by his squad leaders. To observe the target he must 
move to the edge of the woods, on line with his section. In this position it is likely 
that the leaders of the flank squads may be unable to see him, as they must also 
be in or close to the firing line. The section leader’s most important duty in this 
case is to see the target and observe the fire of his section. He must take a position 
from which this is possible, even if it be one where he cannot be readily seen by his 
squad leaders. The section guide supervises the movement ordered, and upon its 
completion takes position where he can best assist the section leader in controlling 
the conduct of the section. In the case cited, for example, the section leader might 
take a position on the left of the right squad, where he could see the target and 
supervise the fire. The section guide would take a position from which he could 
see the section leader, and if possible the leaders of the two left squads. In this 
position he would form a medium of communication between the section leader and 
the squad leaders not directly visible to him. The leaders of the two left squads 
should take positions in which they can see the target and direct the conduct of their 
squads, and if possible positions from which they can also see the section guide (or 
section leader). 

Movement out of Sight of the Enemy but not protected from Fire. 

b. Movement out of sight of the enemy, but not protected or covered from 
unaimed or area fire, would include that which takes place through thin woods, 
brush, tall weeds, standing crops, etc., or on reverse slopes not steep enough to 
afford defilade. Here the troops would be invisible to the enemy, but the terrain 
over which they were passing might be swept by fire, especially area fire by machine 
guns. Areas may be deliberately swept by fire, usually machine gun fire, on the 
chance that they contain hostile troops, or in the knowledge that such troops are 
obliged to pass through them. Or they may be swept by the “ overs ” or high 
shots directed at another locality. For example, if troops be in line near the edge 
of a wood, or on or just below a crest whose reverse slope is not steep enough to 
afford defilade, troops such as supports moving up to this line would be exposed 
to the shots directed at the firing line, but which passed above it. This is called 
unaimed fire, and it would usually be fairly uniformly distributed along the front. 

If the unaimed fire were distributed uniformly over the ground, like a rain¬ 
storm, it will be evident that the chances that any individual would be hit while 
passing through the fire-swept area would depend only upon the intensity of the 
fire and the length of time he spends in passage. The formation of the troops, 
whether line or column, would make no difference. This can be understood by 
considering an area impregnated with gas. An individual would be exposed dur¬ 
ing the time he spent in the area, and whether he went through alone or as one of 
a large column would make no difference. Actually, however, neither rifle, 
machine gun nor artillery fire are ever so uniformly distributed. The fire will take 
the form of momentary bursts falling here and there, sometimes covering a very 
small, sometimes a considerable area, but never in any case falling uniformly and 
continuously upon the entire terrain. Artillery fire is quite widely distributed, but 
nevertheless the thing to be feared is the burst of a particular shell, and we can 


CONTROL OF MOVEMENT 


47 


never tell exactly where or when it will fall. If the shell strikes within a few 
yards of a man he is certain to be killed or seriously wounded. If it strikes 30, 
40 or 50 yards away, he has a very good chance of escaping serious injury, 
unless the shell is a large one,, and large shells are seldom used against infantry. 
Of course, there will be occasional heavy concentrations of machine gun or artil¬ 
lery fire on certain areas, almost like a rainstorm in their intensity. Any troops 
who attempt to pass through such areas during such concentrations are almost 
certain to be killed, whatever formation they adopt. Such areas, which will com¬ 
monly include main routes of approach, important road junctions, stream cross¬ 
ings, or other places the troops would naturally pass through during the approach, 
should be located in advance and, if under fire, avoided by a detour around them. 
If it be absolutely necessary to pass through such “ sensitive points,” the best 
chance of safety is to pass through in the shortest possible time. 

Generally, then, troops do not have to pass through a continuous hail of bullets, 
shrapnel or shell fragments. But on “ fire-swept ground ” they are apt at any 
time to run into a burst of machine gun fire or an exploding shell. Under these 
conditions it is evident that the greater the dispersion of the troops over the ter¬ 
rain, the smaller the number that will be involved in any encounter with an artil¬ 
lery shell or a burst of machine gun fire. The greatest possible dispersion, of 
course, is a line, or successive lines, of skirmishers at wide intervals. But such a 
formation is unsuitable for the approach march because of the difficulty of control. 
Accordingly we have recourse to small columns (section and squad columns, as 
heretofore described) as a compromise between the invulnerable skirmish line and 
the easily controlled large columns. 

Movement in Sight of the Enemy. 

c. Movement in sight of the enemy will be subject to aimed fire of all weapons. 
It is impossible for troops to advance steadily in the open subject to the unrestricted 
fire of rifles, automatic rifles and machine guns. However, an advance in view of 
the enemy is the rule in open warfare. 

Often, especially in stabilized warfare, involving an attack on highly organized 
defenses, the small arms fire of the enemy is restricted by means of a rolling barrage 
of artillery fire. In this case the attacking infantry advances in waves, the leading 
wave following as closely as possible behind the barrage. 

When the barrage is lacking, as will frequently be the case in mobile warfare, 
there are two expedients by means of which the attack may be advanced without 
ruinous losses: 

1. The attacker’s troops in moving forward should offer as small a target for 
as short a time as possible to the enemy’s aimed fire. 

2. The fire of the enemy should be restricted and rendered ineffective to the 
greatest possible extent by a heavy, well directed and accurate fire of all the weapons 
at the disposal of the attacker. This is known as establishing fire superiority. 

Each of these expedients will be discussed in some detail. 

In order to offer as poor a target as possible to the enemy’s aimed fire the attacker’s 
formations must be dispersed. All dense formations, such as bunched groups, large 
columns, lines at close intervals, must be avoided. A unit moving forward should 
expose itself as little as possible to view, and an individual should expose as little 
as possible of his body. This is accomplished by the intelligent use of cover, which 
has been heretofore discussed. When necessarily exposed in the open in moving 
from cover to cover, a unit or an individual should move as rapidly as possible, 
thereby offering a poorer target and reducing the time of exposure. The char¬ 
acteristic movement under fire in the open is accordingly made at a rapid pace. 

Aimed fire, especially aimed rifle fire, is of course the most dangerous to which 
the infantry can be subjected, and its effects are evaded by wide dispersion, the use 
of cover, rapidity of movement while exposed, and the establishment of fire 

superiority. 


48 


MUSKETRY 


The vulnerability of any formation to aimed fire depends chiefly upon the proba¬ 
bility that it zmll draw such fire in so far as it presents a conspicuous and an attrac¬ 
tive target, and upon the nature of the formation as determining the efifect of the fire. 
The probability of drawing aimed fire is about in proportion to the visible area of 
the target exposed to the enemy, but it is a factor that cannot be accurately 
measured by any mathematical rule because of varying conditions of terrain, visi¬ 
bility, and the human element. The only thing we can certainly say is that con¬ 
spicuous targets will always draw aimed fire. Thus several men abreast at close 
intervals are more conspicuous and usually more apt to draw machine gun fire than 
if in single file, one behind the other. But the effect of frontal machine gun fire 
would be greater in the latter case. Squad columns are less vulnerable to artillery 
fire than section columns, provided an interval of 40 to 50 yards is maintained 
between adjacent columns, though a line of them is perhaps almost equally apt to 
draw artillery fire. The vulnerability of columns is increased by ground sloping 
downwards towards the enemy because of the larger vertical target exposed and 
the greater probability of drawing fire (see Plate 6) ; whereas in the same situa¬ 
tion the vulnerability of a line is decreased by reason of the shortened beaten zone 
and danger space (see Plate 5) and the greater difficulty of ranging on it on such 
ground. 

The exact vulnerability of various infantry formations under aimed fire of 
various weapons and on various terrain, is an intricate mathematical problem 
whose ramifications are almost endless. For the troop leader the practical solu¬ 
tion is as follows. Three formations are generally employed, these are: a line of 
skirmishers at wide intervals, line of section columns, and line of squad columns, 
either of which latter may be “ staggered ” (heads of columns not on line with each 
other). The skirmish line at wide intervals, moving by infiltration, is the least 
attractive target and the least vulnerable formation under all kinds of aimed fire. 
Moreover it is necessary for the delivery of fire, and will be the habitual forma¬ 
tion of the first wave, or firing line, during the attack. Small columns are more 
easily controlled and maneuvered than a line of skirmishers, and can usually readily 
avail themselves of any existing cover, although when exposed they are more apt 
to draw all kinds of fire, and are more vulnerable than a line of skirmishers. They 
are commonly employed for the support sections (until they are ready to open 
fire) and by supports coming forward (in order to retain control of the men as 
long as possible), unless they draw so much fire as to force a deployment into line 
of skirmishers. They should, of course, always deploy before entering the firing 
line. 

Fire Superiority. 

It is frequently and truly asserted that the best cover for the attacker’s advance 
is his own fire. This fire includes not only that of the assault platoons themselves, 
but also of the accompanying weapons (machine guns, one pounders and light mor¬ 
tars), and artillery. The effect of a properly directed fire is to cause the enemy to 
stay down under cover and to render his fire far less effective. When the effect of the 
enemy’s fire has been reduced to such an extent that the attacker is able to move 
forward without suffering ruinous losses, the attack is said to possess fire superiority 
over the defense. The extent of this superiority of fire will determine the speed 
with which the attacker is able to move. If the fire of the defense is very wild and 
ineffective, the attack will be able to move complete units forward simultaneously 
over relatively long distances, and he will soon close with the defender in the shock 
of personal contact. If the fire of the defense be somewhat more effective the 
attack will be able to move only small units or fractions of a unit over relatively 
small distances, or his troops may have to work their way forward as individuals. 
When the fire of the defense is so effective that no forward movement is possible 
without heavier losses than the attacking troops can endure, fire superiority lies 
with the defense, and if this condition continues the attack is a failure. 

Fire superiority is thus a moral phenomenon. The physical conditions upon 
which it depends are great volume, high accuracy and proper distribution of fire. 


49 


MECHANISM OF MOVEMENT UNDER FIRE 


The term is relative, inasmuch as a very weak and poorly directed fire may be 
sufficient to establish fire superiority over very inferior troops. Fire superiority 
is the keynote of success in battle, and having once been established it must also 
be maintained , otherwise the attack comes to a standstill. 

The terrain naturally exercises a great influence upon the effect of fire. The 
defender will always endeavor to have the combat take place in a locality affording 
him a good field of fire as far to his front as possible, preferably up to 1000 yards! 
A good field of fire is one which is open to view, favorable for the application of fire, 
and which affords little or no natural shelter or concealment which the attacker 
can utilize in his advance. 


The Mechanism of Movement under Fire. 

The section in attack advances under fire by rushes, either of the whole section, or 
of squads or parts of squads, or by individual movement which is known’ as 
infiltration. 


5 pace.'St 


t 

.El 


T 

-\Z0 paces 


Section Leader 
Sergean+ 


IO tol 5 paces 

e .0000 0 O 0 /9^00-0 ? O o Q / £Q OOOOQQ 


3 - Squad 
101*015 paces' 


■v 


l**Squac| 2-Squad 

Section Guide,Corporal 
Second in Command 
Responsible ’for conduct 
ot m o v<2 vr\ <2 n't* 


Plate 34.—Section moving forward, deployed as Skirmishers. 


Advance by rushes. When the fire of other units or of accompanying weapons or 
artillery is effectively applied to the enemy opposing the advance of the section, or 
when for any reason the fire of t-he enemy is weak and ineffective, the entire section 
may be able to advance by a rush, usually of from 25 to 75 yards. (Plate 34.) 

The section leader will initiate, control and lead such a movement. Having judged 
that a section rush is possible, he selects the next position to be occupied, and orders ; 
“ Cease firing. Prepare to rush.” He then moves to the front, through his section, 
ordering, “ UP,” and, followed by his section, moves rapidly to the new position. 
The section guide follows, supervising the movement and enforcing fire discipline. 

If the fire of the enemy or the lack of cover is such that a rush of the entire section 
is not considered advisable, the rush may be made by smaller fractions, squads, half 
squads or two men at a time, usually progressively from one flank of the section to 
the other. 

The section leader will direct but ordinarily will not lead such a movement. He 
may move to the vicinity of the flank from which the movement is to start. He 
indicates the flank from which the movement is to commence, the size of the frac¬ 
tions to execute the rush, if practicable the next position in advance to be occupied, 
and whether the successive units are to advance without orders, or upon signal 
from the section leader. 

The orders of the section leader might be as follows: “ By squads, from the right 
(left), RUSH”; or, “To that hedgerow, by fours (twos) from the right (left), 
RUSH.” The orders may be conveyed by the signals given in the drill regulations 
and under fire discipline. 
















50 


MUSKETRY 


Each squad leader, upon receiving the order or signal will: 

1. Select the position to which to move (unless this has been designated by the 
section leader). 

2. Prepare his squad to move. 

3. Lead the rush to the new position. 

4. See that the squad halts on the proper line and promptly resumes fire. 

His orders might be: Cease firing. Prepare to rush.” He then passes through 
his squad, ordering, “ UP,” and leads the rush to the next position. Each man upon 
arriving in the position on line with the squad leader, throws himself upon the 
ground and promptly resumes fire. (Plate 35.) 

If the rush be executed by half squads (fours) the squad leader may order: 
“ Men on my right. CEASE FIRING. Prepare to rush. UP.” He leads this 
fraction forward, and the second in command similarly conducts the remainder of 
the squad at the proper time. 

t 


CO 

a 

0 

3 

Q. 


8 

3 

Q. 


* 

I 

3 

ft 

3 

D 

3 


(J) o) 


c 

O' 

Ifi 


I 


7 J 

5 » 

o' 

3 

0 

3 


> 


79 



W 

1 

79 


> 

S 


0 

70 


f > 


i 


3 


^■o 




psacs 

□ 

7 J 




-1 

a 


ft 


(Ji 

n 


9 

CD 

ft 


0 

3 


V 

73 

a 

ft 

3 

0 

3 


□ □ d 


CP 

n 

i - 

~r f) 

3 

0 

3 


> z 


70 ^ 70 


ft 

D 

9 


ft 

(J> 

9 

9. 


a 

ft 

3 

D 

3 




Plate 35.—Squad Moving Forward by “ Squad Rush.” 


If the rush be executed by twos the squad leader designates the successive frac¬ 
tions by name. The squad leader himself will usually advance when the bulk of 
his squad has moved to the new position. He may accompany one of the fractions. 
The second in command supervises the advance of the remainder. 

The section leader in like manner usually advances to the new position when 
the bulk of his section has moved, leaving the section guide to supervise the 
remainder of the movement. 

Range at which fire is opened. Advance by infiltration. Rifle and automatic rifle 
fire in the attack is not very effective at ranges exceeding 800 yards and it delays 
the advance. The attacker will accordingly usually endeavor to advance to within 
800 yards of the defender’s position, before opening the struggle for fire superiority, 
with rifle and automatic rifle. The machine gun fire of the defense, and even rifle 
fire in favorable terrain, will be effective at ranges of 1000 yards or even more. 
Accordingly the attack may come under such fire at ranges where it cannot effec¬ 
tively reply with its own rifle fire. This will be by reason of the range and also 
because of the difficulty of locating the hostile machine guns at such great distances. 
The attacker may be unable to beat down the defender’s fire to such an extent as to 
make an advance by section rushes practicable. Also at closer ranges (within 









MOVEMENT UNDER FIRE 


51 



Plate 36. 















52 


MUSKETRY 


800 yards) the nature of the terrain and the effectiveness of the defender’s fire may 
be such that the advance by rushes cannot be carried out without heavy losses. 

In such cases resort is had to the method of advance by the independent move¬ 
ment of squads or individuals. This is known as infiltration. 

The section leader initiates the movement, and makes provisions for regaining 
control of his section upon its completion. 

The next position forward will often be occupied by the scouts, it being their duty 
to outline a position favorable for the development of fire, if practicable. The 
section leader may order: “ On the line of scouts RE-FORM,” or “ On the far 
side of that ditch RE-FORM.” The order may be given to one squad, and by 
them passed down the line to the others. If it be impracticable to give such an 
order, the section leader may simply signal: “ Forward.” 

Upon receiving the order or signal of the section leader, each squad leader will: 

1. Identify the forward position indicated by the section leader, or if no such 
position has been indicated, select a suitable position which can probably be reached. 

2. Decide upon the best way to move; whether by a squad or half squad rush in 
the open, in column along a covered route, such as a ravine or ditch, if such be avail¬ 
able, or by individual movement. 

3. Issue the necessary orders for the movement. 

The orders of the squad leader might be: “ On the line of scouts RE-FORM,” 
allowing each man to select his own route. Or he may designate by name the men 
to move, as, “ Jones, move to line of scouts.” If the scouts are with the squad they 
will ordinarily be the first to advance. The next to move should usually be the 
automatic rifleman, in order to establish as promptly as possible fire power to cover 
the remainder of the movement. The substitute automatic rifle should usually 
follow his principal, to insure that the fire of the automatic rifle shall be maintained. 
The squad leader may move forward in his judgment when part of his squad has 
reached the new position, in order to control its fire. He should cause the automatic 
rifleman to precede him, as otherwise he cannot personally insure this important 
element of his fire power reaching the new position. The second in command will 
ordinarily be the last to move forward. He assumes the direction of the movement 
as soon as the squad leader has advanced. 

If the available cover dictates an advance in squad column along a sheltered route 
(ravine, woods, etc.), the squad leader may order; “ Squad column. Follow me at 
5 yards,” moving out on the route selected. If the advance be made by rushes of 
two men, the orders might be: “ Jones and Black. CEASE FIRING. To line 
of scouts (to far side of that ditch). Prepare to rush. UP.” Similar orders are 
given to the remaining men, “ Brown and Gray. CEASE FIRING. On line with 
Jones. Prepare to rush. UP.” 

If the distance be short the squad leader may wait until one man or one pair reach 
the advanced position before ordering up the next. Or he may start them sooner. 
This is a matter for the exercise of judgment in each case. The skilful leader will 
work his men forward in the minimum of time and with the minimum of exposure. 

The Assault. 

The purpose of fire and movement in the attack is to reach a position from which 
an assault may be delivered upon the enemy’s position. The assault is the culmina¬ 
tion of each stage of the attack. 

The assault will usually be more effective when it can be delivered by a section 
rush. However, there will be cases where the assault is delivered by squad or even 
by a few individuals. The assault should be delivered at the earliest moment at 
which it gives reasonable promise of success. Each assault should have a leader, 
and the small units in the assault will be led in person by their proper leaders. 
Bayonets are fixed when it becomes apparent that the moment for the assault is 
approaching, unless they have previously been fixed. 

Just before the assault the leader orders or signals: “ Fire faster,” which conveys 
to a trained unit the information that the moment for the assault is at hand. The 



FIRE SUPERIORITY 


53 


leader, calling the attention of his men by whistle if necessary, then moves forward 
through the line, signaling or ordering, “ Follow me,” and personally leads the 
charge into the hostile position. 

Use of Signals. 

The movement of the fire units in combat should be initiated, directed and halted 
by the signals and orders prescribed in the drill regulations. They have been 
proven by experience to be the simplest and best. They are sufficient to meet the 
need. They will be understood by trained troops. They inspire confidence of the 
men in their leader. The leader who does not use them fails to take advantage of 
one of the chief means to success at his command. 

Summary. We have seen that the fire attack of the infantry is a combination and 
co-ordination of the two essential elements, fire and movement. These are mutually 
related and dependent. Fire superiority, which reduces the effectiveness of the 
enemy’s fire, is necessary to continued movement. Movement is necessary to 
gain a position from which effective fire may be delivered. And finally both are 
necessary to the steady advance of the infantry which culminates in an assault upon 
the enemy. Fire superiority is established by all the weapons at the disposal of the 
attacker, including those of the infantry platoon, the accompanying weapons, the 
artillery, and tanks when available. Movement is made under cover of this fire, 
and the leader of the small fire unit, on his own initiative, should take advantage of 
every favorable fire situation to move forward. If the enemy’s fire slackens this is 
the signal for the attacker to push on. For example, if the leader of a small unit 
sees two light mortar bombs fall, one short of and one beyond that element of the 
enemy which is opposing his advance, he should know that subsequent bombs will 
probably fall upon the target. He must prepare to take advantage of this assistance 
to make a determined rush forward at exactly the right instant. 

Illustrative Example of Fire and Movement in the Attack. 

To make more clear the meanings of the terms “ fire superiority,” and “ fire and 
movement ” in the fire attack, let us take a simple example. Suppose that a certain 
individual A is attacking another individual X. A is in the open and can be plainly 
seen except when he is able to find some natural cover. X, the defender, is in a 
trench behind the parapet. In firing his rifle he exposes only his head, and even 
this will be difficult to see if the trench is properly constructed and has a parados 
behind it, so that X’s head, as seen by A, does not appear distinctly on the skyline. It 
is evident that X, if he is as good a soldier as A, will be able to fire much more 
effectively. A is in the open, he is moving, he is probably more or less excited. 
X is well protected, he knows that he is well protected, and he fires calmly, taking 
careful aim. The chances are that X will hit A before A hits him. This means that 
where numbers and quality of troops are equal, the defender, properly intrenched, 
will deliver a more effective fire than the attacker, and that to drive home an attack, 
superior numbers or better troops, or both are required. 

Now let us suppose that A is reinforced by another man B. A and B firing 
together produce a greater volume of fire than X, especially if they are separated by 
an interval so that they fire at X from his left and right front, and so that he 
cannot attend to both of them at the same time. Probably they will not actually 
hit X. But their bullets will strike unpleasantly close all around him. This will “ get 
on his nerves,” he will feel that he is in danger, he will be inclined to stay down in 
his trench. When he does fire he will not take aim as accurately as when opposed 
to A alone. When X has been reduced to this condition A and B have fire superiority 
over him. But this alone is of no use. They must go up to X’s trench, driving him 
out of it, or, if possible, killing or capturing him. 

A and B having fire superiority, having rendered X’s fire wild and ineffective, 
are now able to advance, as they must do if they are to win victory over X. But if 
they both advance at the same time over any considerable distance they must of 
course slacken their fire, because they cannot fire as many shots or as accurately while 
moving as while lying still. X will presently observe that bullets are not striking as 

SPM -10 


54 


MUSKETRY 




close to him as they were. He will recover from his attack of “ nerves ; he will 
decide that A and B are not such good shots after all. He will again take more 
careful aim, his shots will strike closer to A and B. He may even hit one of them, 
or at any rate he will convince them they will be hit if they continue to advance 
without firing. The fire superiority has now passed from A and B to X. A and B 
have lost it by failing to keep up their fire. 

Now let us suppose that A and B reestablish fire superiority, by lying down behind 
some natural cover, where X cannot see them very well, and again firing a great 
number of well-aimed shots at X. They now adopt different tactics for their 
advance. Instead of moving forward a great distance at a time, they move only a 
short distance and again lie down and fire at X. The intervals during which they are 
not firing are so short that X will not have time to recover from one volley before 
he receives the next. Also A and B discover that having by a great volume of fire 
forced X to get down in his trench, a much less volume of fire, an occasional bullet 
striking near X, is sufficient to keep him down. And so A fires alone, while B takes 
advantage of the effectiveness of X’s fire to run forward to some sheltered place 
nearer to X. Here B lies down and again fires at X, A also continuing to fire if 
necessary. Presently A ceases firing and advances to a position abreast of B or 
beyond him. Thus A and B continue the advance by alternately firing and moving 
forward, always utilizing natural cover as far as possible. A and B also discover 
that they make better progress if they do not stay too close together. So while A 
engages X’s attention from the front, B works his way around one side of X and 
fires at him from an oblique direction. X finds it much more difficult to evade 
shots coming from different directions, especially when some of them come from a 
position on his flank. If he devotes his attention to either of the attackers the 
other will fire more shots, better aimed, and will also move closer. 

Finally A and B approach so close that they can reach X’s position in a single short 
rush. The fact that they have been able to thus approach him unharmed by his 
fire, will often convince X that his situation is desperate. Perhaps he will decide 
to surrender or to leave his trench and make a run to the rear, in other words to 
retreat. Perhaps some comrades in rear will aid him in this by firing at A and B 
while X retreats. Or X may decide, or may have his orders, to resist to the end. 
In this case A and B, having worked up close to X, will make a sudden rush at him 
with their bayonets, usually from different directions. Perhaps X will kill one of 
them, but he will hardly have time to kill both, and they will either kill or capture 
him in his trench thus deciding the fight in favor of A and B. 

If in addition to the rifle fire of A and B there is also a field gun or small howitzer 
throwing shells at X’s trench, or a machine gun in a sheltered position shooting at 
him, this will greatly aid A and B in gaining and maintaining fire superiority over X. 
They will be less apt to be hit by X, they will not have to fire as often themselves, 
and will hence be able to advance more rapidly. 

Finally, just as A and B enter X’s trench, and are proceeding to disarm him, 
having perhaps temporarily laid down their rifles, two comrades of X make a sudden 
rush at them from a nearby trench which they had not noticed. At the same time 
another man opens fire on them from a trench on their other side. A and B, if 
taken by surprise, may be forced to run, or else they may be killed or captured, and 
their carefully executed attack will have come to naught. So while A disarms X, B 
conceals himself and keep a sharp lookout in the direction from which a counter at¬ 
tack may be expected, and as X’s comrades approach he opens fire on them from the 
trench, having dug for himself a little place in the parados back of X’s trench so that 
he can use his rifle effectively. Even if A and B are not at once attacked, while they 
are still excited and perhaps breathless from their own attack, they know that they are 
very apt to be attacked later, and so they prepare X’s trench to resist such an attack. 
Also some of their comrades will join them to assist in holding the position. 

Such is the conduct and the psychology of the infantry attack and defense in 
mobile warfare. If we now consider X to be a combat group composed of two 
squads to a platoon, and A and B to be two attacking platoons, we have a good 
picture of the little combats which make up a great battle. 








EXAMPLE OF FIRE AND MOVEMENT 


55 


In this example the following points are to be noted: 

a. A successful fire attack usually implies a superiority of numbers or quality of 
troops, or both. This superiority need be local only, or at the actual point of * 
attack. 

b. Fire superiority must be established before an advance is possible over open 
ground against an intrenched enemy. And once established it must be maintained. 

c. Fire superiority is largely moral. It is not necessary to actually kill or wound 
an enemy in order to establish fire superiority, although of course it aids greatly 
if this can be done. In the example given, however, the entire action might be 
fought out while A, B and X remained unwounded. 

d. A successful attack involves fire and movement. Fire alone will not achieve 
victory. Usually the defender cannot be shot out of his position. The attacking 
infantry must advance against the enemy. Fire superiority over the defender 
enables the attacker to advance and close with the defender without suffering ruinous 
losses. 

e. The auxiliary arms, artillery, light howitzers, machine guns, etc., are an aid 
to the infantry of both attack and defense in gaining and maintaining fire superiority. 

f. Decisive results are achieved only by an attack which advances into the de¬ 
fender’s position. Decisive results for the defender are achieved by counter¬ 
attack. 

g. The attack will be more effective if the attackers are somewhat separated, 
especially if some of them are able to work around to the flank of the defender. 
They thus subject him to oblique, converging and cross-fire, which is much more 
effective than an equal volume of frontal fire alone. If the attackers advance in 
dense masses moving straight to the front they will form excellent targets for the 
defender’s fire, and will suffer accordingly. 

h. The attackers should, in the first instance, approach as close as possible to 
the defender before opening fire, and while still concealed from his view by natural 
cover. Their fire will be more effective if opened at short range, and the time during 
which they will be exposed to the defender’s fire will be reduced. 

i. During his advance the attacker should utilize to the fullest extent all natural 
cover or concealment which the terrain affords, both while he is in motion and 
during his halts. 

j. Victory may be lost to the attacker if he does not promptly prepare to meet 
the defender’s counter-attack, once he has penetrated the latter’s position. As a 
rule, the best protection against counter-attack is a continuation of the advance. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Control of Movement. 

1. What does Musketry include, in addition to the application of fire? 

2. Under what three conditions does movement in the zone of small arms fire 
take place? 

3. What features of the terrain afford both concealment and cover from fire? 

4. What formations should be used in moving through such terrain ? Why ? 

5. What are the positions of the section leader, section guide and squad leaders 
in section column? 

6. Why is the section column especially vulnerable to aimed machine gun fire? 

7; What precautions are taken for the security of small columns? 

8. Under what conditions should section columns be employed and when are they 
unsuitable ? 

9. What are the advantages of squad columns and when are they employed? 

10. What is a line of squad columns and how is it formed? What are echeloned 
squad columns? 

11. What is the usual interval between squad columns and under what conditions 
should this interval be reduced? 

12. What are the positions of the section leader, section guide and squad leaders 
in line of squad columns ? 


56 


MUSKETRY 


13. Where are the scouts when the section is in line of squad columns ? 

14. Who is responsible for the security of the flanks in line of squad columns. . 

15. How may section columns or line of squad columns deploy to the flank in 

case of emergency ? _ _ 

16. What features of the terrain afford concealment without cover from fire. 

17. What formations are most suitable for passing through unaimed rifle fire. ^ 

18. What formation is best adapted to passage through machine gun fire? Why r 

19. Explain the effects of time of passage and formations in movements through 
areas subject to unaimed fire of artillery and machine guns. 

20. In what formation does attacking infantry move when following a rolling 

barrage? . 

21. What expedients are employed to reduce losses when the barrage is lacking. 

22. What are the factors which determine the effects of the aimed rifle fire of 
the enemy ? Which is the most important of these ? What is the least vulnerable 

formation under aimed rifle fire? 

23. What is the best cover for an advance over open terrain? 

24. What is fire superiority ? What influence has fire superiority on the forward 
movement ? 

25. Does a wide field of fire favor the attack or defense? Explain why. 

26. Explain the two general methods employed by the section in advance under 
fire and the conditions under which each is used. 

27. What are the duties of the section leaders: 

a. In a section rush ? 

b. In an advance by squad rushes? 

28. What orders does he give in each case? 

29. What does the squad leader do upon receiving orders for a squad rush? What 
orders does he give ? 

30. Explain the manner in which the squad leader conducts a rush by twos or 
fours. 

31. What are the duties of the second in command of the squad in this case? 

32. At what ranges, in attack and in defense, are the rifle and automatic rifle 
effective ? 

33. Under what conditions is the advance by infiltration employed ? 

34. What men are first to advance ? 

35. Who establishes the advanced position to be occupied? 

36. What does the squad leader do upon receiving the order for an advance by 
infiltration? 

37. In what order should the members of the squad be sent to the new position? 
Why ? 

38. What determines the exact time at which individuals are ordered forward ? 

39. What orders does the squad leader give in the advance by infiltration? 

40. What is the ultimate purpose of fire and movement in the attack? 

41. What is the assault? 

42. By what units is the assault made ? Why ? 

43. When is the assault made? 

44. What are the duties of the section leader in the assault? 

45. How are the fire and movement of small units in the attack initiated and 
directed ? 

CHAPTER VI. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE. 

Conduct of fire embraces the duties of leaders of fire units in: 

a. Maintaining the fire control. 

b. Enforcing fire discipline. 

These duties must be performed both in attack and defense, varying somewhat 
in their nature and purpose in the two cases. 







THE PLATOON IN ATTACK 57 

As a preliminary to our discussion, therefore, we will consider the principles 

vernmg ie conduct of the platoon and its component units in attack and defense. 

Note —In this chapter much of the discussion in preceding chapters is necessarily repeated, 
tne problems of the leaders of small units being viewed from a different angle. 

Conduct of the Platoon in Attack. General Considerations. 

The possible plans of action for an infantry platoon with a definite attack mission, 
are few in number. They depend on a few basic principles. 

1. To attack means to move forward. 

2. The immediate object of movement is to gain a position which permits the 
development of more effective fire. 

The ultimate object of movement is to gain a position from which an assault may 
be launched against the enemy. 

3. Unless his movements are masked by cover, darkness, fog, etc., the attacker 
must gain fire superiority before he is able to advance without ruinous losses. Fire 
superiority having been established, must be maintained throughout the forward 
movement. 

A consideration of these principles will show that the plan of the platoon attack 
must provide for: 

1. The use of available cover, combined with rapid and skilful movement, in gain¬ 
ing an initial position in which fire superiority may be established. 

2. Progressive movement forward from one fire position to another which either 
permits more effective fire or is an intermediate step in the advance to the assault. 
For example: It is not always possible to move directly from one good fire posi¬ 
tion to a better. The attacker may be compelled to leave an excellent fire position 
which is well covered, to advance to a more exposed and less favorable position to 
the front. Because the sole purpose of fire superiority is to make forward movement 
possible. The attacker, having established fire superiority in any position, must take 
advantage of the opportunity thus afforded to continue his advance, even though this 
may temporarily place him in a less favorable position. Victory cannot be won by 
fire alone. Also the attacker seeks ultimately to gain a position from which he may 
launch his assault. Any intermediate position, however favorable for the delivery 
of fire, is merely a step in the progress toward the assault position. 

3. Covering each forward movement by sufficient fire to maintain fire superiority. 
Except at very close range the weapons of the platoon cannot be effectively employed 
when in motion. Therefore it is necessary that portions of the platoon remain in 
the fire position to cover the forward movement of other portions. The extent of 
the fire superiority over the enemy will determine how large a proportion of the 
platoon may cease firing and advance. It may be a section, a squad, or even indi¬ 
viduals, one by one. The movement may be a single rush from one position to the 
next, or a more deliberate individual movement, taking advantage of existing cover 
(infiltration). 

4. As the most advantageous positions from which to deliver fire or launch an 
assault will usually be on a flank of the enemy’s position, the plan should provide 
for placing elements of the platoon in such positions when practicable. Movements 
to such positions must take advantage of any cover afforded by the terrain, and 
of fire superiority established by other elements. 

This typical procedure may of course be varied to some extent to meet emergencies 

which may arise. 

The practicable plans for a platoon attack may usually be classed as three: 

1. A continuous frontal advance, without halting for the purpose of delivering 
fire. Such a movement is possible when covered by a rolling barrage of artillery 
fire, or when the natural cover is exceptionally good or the enemy’s fire particularly 
weak and ineffective. 

2. To immobilize the enemy, or pin him to his position, by a frontal attack, while 
employing the rear wave in maneuvers on one or (exceptionally) both flanks, with 


58 


MUSKETRY 



a view to gaining positions favorable for oblique or flanking fire or for assault. 
This will be the characteristic procedure in mobile warfare. 

3. (When plan 2 is impracticable by reason of the terrain or the nature of the 
enemy’s dispositions.) A frontal advance by alternate fire and movement, rushes 
of fractions of the line or infiltration of individuals, building up successive firing 
lines closer and closer to the enemy. 

All of these three typical plans will ordinarily conclude with an assault or charge 
upon the enemy. 

The infantry platoon is the smallest unit which is habitually deployed in depth and 
endowed with independent power of maneuver. 

It is the largest unit admitting of direct personal leadership and fire control in 
combat. 

It comprises two sections, each under a leader who exercises control over his 
unit in all phases of battle. 

The platoon has no reserve, but when deployed in depth has the second section 
as a support. 

The infantry platoon is commanded by a lieutenant, with a sergeant as second in 
command. 

For a fire unit (squad or section) to deploy in depth is very exceptional. The fire 
of an infantry unit is best delivered from a line. Our regulations prescribe that the 
normal formation shall be a single line deployed at not less than five pace intervals. 

The habitual deployment of the infantry platoon therefore is not only for the 
purpose of fire but also for maneuver. 


Duties of the Platoon Leader and Platoon Sergeant in Attack. 

The primary duties of the platoon leader are those which concern maneuver. 

As in larger units, it is not contemplated in our organization that the second in 
command should be assigned to command of one of the component units of the 
platoon. He is the assistant to the platoon leader and the replacement for the platoon 
leader. An inspection of the high casualty list of platoon leaders will be convincing 
proof of the necessity of always having this replacement ready and near. 

The platoon sergeant’s duties are therefore concerned primarily with maneuver. 

Before entering action leaders of small units should be as far to the front as 
practicable in order that they may personally see the situation, control and direct 
their units, order the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with 
their own wishes. 

The distance between the assault and support waves of the platoon in movement 
is ordinarily such as to prevent one man personally leading both. 

The assault wave, if preceded by scouts, is ordinarily such a distance from the 
scouts that a leader who is as far forward as practicable, i. e., in rear of the line 
of scouts, would not be able to personally lead the assault wave. 

If then we extend the meaning of the term “ Conduct of Fire” to include not 
only those duties which are incident to the actual fire fight, but also those which 
are necessary to insure the orderly and systematic entrance into the fire fight, we can 
see that in either case the position of the leader of the infantry platoon prevents that 
direct control of the platoon necessary to personally control fire or enforce fire 
discipline. 

During the action the distance between the assault wave and support wave is 
ordinarily the distance between the firing position and the next available cover in 
rear. The platoon leader in order to be near enough to the support wave to insure 
direct and easy communication will be far enough from the first wave to prevent 
direct personal control. 

He must in each case leave to the local leaders the detailed conduct of the assault¬ 
ing troops. These local leaders are the section and squad leaders. 





DUTIES OF SECTION LEADER 


59 


This detailed conduct of assaulting troops is concerned mainly with the fire of 
these troops and that movement which should have for its object the gaining of such 
a position that fire can be developed, which, by virtue of its direction, volume, and 
accuracy is superior to that of the enemy. In other words the duties of the local 
leaders are mainly control of lire and enforcement of fire discipline. 

Summary. It will thus be apparent that the primary duties of the platoon leader 
are not. those which are incident to the personal conduct of fire. He directs and 
supervises the fire and movement of his platoon, but he does so through his sub¬ 
ordinate local leaders (section and squad). 

I he duties of the platoon leader in attack are covered in detail under offensive 
combat, in the course in Minor Tactics. 

In this course we are especially concerned with the duties of these local leaders of 
the fire units. 


THE SECTION. 

Organisation and leaders. The infantry rifle section is the fire unit. Its fire can, 
as a rule, best be applied to a single target. 

Under present organization the section normally consists of three squads. Its 
habitual deployment for fire action in the attack is in a single line of skirmishers at 
5 yards intervals, that is one man to each 5 yards of front. This interval may be 
increased, but should not be diminished. The usual frontage of the section in this 
formation is accordingly about 125 yards. 

The section is commanded by a section leader, a sergeant, having as his assistant 
and second in command, a corporal—the section guide. These non-commissioned 
officers are armed with the rifle and equipped with tracer ammunition for target 
designation. The section leader exercises direct control over his section during 
all stages of the action, remaining always within sight of it. 

Provisional units or temporary groups. The combat cannot, however, always be 
carried to a conclusion by the original units, remaining intact. In the confusion of 
combat and under the enemy’s fire, units will often be broken up and dispersed to a 
greater or less extent. Casualties will reduce their strength, their leaders may be 
permanently or temporarily lost. Men separated from their proper commands 
should join the nearest unit and place themselves under the commander thereof. 
Temporary groups will thus frequently result from the incidents of the combat, the 
nature of the terrain, or other circumstances. Each such group, though composed of 
only a handful of men, should have a leader, and be properly organized. 

Such an infantry group, which applies its fire independently to a single target, 
may be regarded as a provisional or temporary section. It is a fire unit. Its maxi¬ 
mum size should not exceed 24 men, as this is the greatest number which, as 
experience indicates, can function efficiently as a section. 

Temporary groups deploy, advance, and fire in the same manner as normal units. 
All that is stated in this course with reference to the section and its leaders, applies 
with equal force to the temporary group and its leaders. 

Duties of the Section Leader. 

The duties of the section leader in the fire action are naturally included under 
two heads: 

a. Primary duties connected with fire control: 

1. Apply fire to the proper target. 

2. Observe the target for fire effect, and the section to note the fire effect of the 
enemy. 

3. Adjust errors in fire. 

4. Initiate and control movement. 

5. Combine and co-ordinate fire and movement. 

6. Initiate the assault. 

7. Deliver covering fire in support of the movement of the other section. 

8. Support adjacent units with cross and flanking fire. 


60 


MUSKETRY 


b. Secondary duties connected with fire discipline. 

9. Provide for the transmission of orders and signals, and enforce compliance 
therewith. 

10. Regulate the rate of fire. 

11. Insure the necessary supply of ammunition. 

12. Check breaches of fire discipline. 

13. Insure the prompt replacement of casualties, necessary to maintain the 
integrity of his fire unit, and the evacuation of wounded. 

14. Lead the section in rushes as a whole, and in the assault. 

15. Reorganize his unit after the assault. 

16. Set an example to his men by his conduct, bearing and aggressiveness. 

The important function of personally leading his section in the charge or assault 
on the enemy’s position, is included as a duty under fire discipline, inasmuch as it 
is a matter of routine and moral effect. 

All of these duties are essential to both attack and defense, though their relative 
frequency and the order in which they usually occur will vary in the two situations. 

Fire Orders and Signals. 

Considering now these primary duties of the section leader in the attack, it will 
be apparent that he can apply or adjust fire, and initiate or control movement, only 
by means of orders or signals. As the orders of a section leader in the fire fight 
are primarily concerned with the control of fire, or with movement for the purpose 
of better applying fire, they are properly termed fire orders. 

Estimate of the situation. Fire orders, like all other orders, must be preceded by 
an estimate of the situation. 

An estimate of the situation is a logical process of thought, in which the leader 
decides as to his mission, or what he is required to accomplish, the conditions which 
will help him in accomplishing his mission, and those which may hinder its accom¬ 
plishment. From these considerations he will usually perceive that there are one or 
more courses of action open to him to accomplish his mission, each course possessing 
certain advantages and often certain disadvantages. From these courses the leader 
selects the one which is most promising of success, according to his judgment, and 
decides the steps that he will take in pursuing this course. These steps constitute 
the leader’s plan of action. Having decided upon his plan of action the leader must 
issue to his subordinates the orders necessary to carry out this plan. 

An estimate of the situation should not and cannot be made according to any fixed 
schedule or form. Nevertheless it should be an orderly and logical process of 
thought, and experience proves that it should follow a certain sequence and include 
certain important items. These items are: 

1. The mission. A clear conception of the task to be done. 

2. The enemy. A consideration of everything known or reasonably inferred 
with reference to the enemy which would probably affect the leader’s action. 

3. His oivn troops. Similar considerations with reference to the friendly troops, 
including the leader’s own immediate command, and any supporting troops which 
might aid him in carrying out his task, or in any way influence his plan. 

4. The terrain. The terrain will always exercise a most important influence on 
any plan of action. The leader must avail himself of its advantages, and avoid its 
disadvantages as far as is possible. 

5. Other conditions. There will be in many cases certain special conditions which 
will influence the decision and the details of the plan of action, for example, weather 
and season. These should be given such consideration as their importance warrants. 

1. The mission. For a small command the mission will ordinarily be clear, 
definite and simple. As a rule it will be embodied in the orders received from higher 
command. For example: “ Cover the near edge of that small wood with fire.” 
“ Move down that draw to a fire position on the left flank of the enemy in the farm.” 

We might draw a comparison between the general or “ maneuver ” and im¬ 
mediate or “ fire ” mission of the section, and the mission of a football team in a 



61 


FIRE ORDERS AND SIGNALS 

game and in a particular play. The mission of the team in the game is to win. Its 
mission m a particular play is to advance the ball a certain distance, and as much 
arther as possible. The general mission of the section is to contribute to the victory 
of the force as a whole. Such a mission is defined in an order: “ Advance on a 
front of 150 yards, direction 83°.” It is the continued advance of the infantry 
which means victory. The special or fire mission would be defined in an order: 
“ Range, 800. Dead tree to left front. Enemy line extending three fingers right. 
FIRE AT WILL. ,, 555 

The maneuver mission is the guiding factor on which the maneuver order is 
based. The fire mission is the guiding factor, the central idea, on which the fire 
order is based. 

A clear comprehension of his mission will guide the leader in the confusing 
emergencies of combat. 

2. The enemy. The enemy with which the section is especially concerned is that 
within the platoon zone of action, and is to be regarded primarily as a target. The 
range, location and extent of the target are the important elements to be considered. 
The nature and volume of the fire that is being or may be delivered by the target 
and by other elements of the enemy are to be duly considered. The leader should be 
familiar with the organization and tactical methods of the enemy, from which his 
probable actions may be divined, more or less accurately. The general situation 
should be known, for example, whether or not the enemy is in a general retreat, 
and the physical condition and morale of his troops, as this will have a bearing on 
the nature of the resistance that may be expected, and the chances that may be 
taken in pushing ahead. It is important to know the extent to which the hostile 
position has been organized for defense. 

To illustrate the deductions that may be drawn from our information concerning 
the enemy, let us assume a simple case. The enemy is in retreat. His organization, 
armament and tactics are known to be similar to our own. The target is in position 
on a wooded crest, at a range of 600 yards. It measures four fingers in extent. The 
enemy is delivering rifle and automatic rifle fire. 

Four fingers at 600 yards subtend a front of 120 yards (4 times 1/20 of the 
range). An infantry section is armed with rifles and automatic rifles. Probably the 
enemy consists of a section, as this is about the usual front it occupies. The enemy 
is on a crest. He is not using machine guns. These facts tend to confirm the 
information that he is in retreat. If he is retreating his position will not be highly 
organized. Two sections constitute a platoon. In retreat one section may be placed 
in position to cover the retreat of the other. Probably the second section of the 
hostile platoon is in such a position, and will not be heard from until the first section 
withdraws. Had the enemy been attacking, the second section would probably be 
used to work forward in an attempt to gain a position on our flank. In such case the 
leader would expect to hear from it soon in such a position. 

Such considerations as these would have an important influence on the plans of 
the leader. 

3. His own troops. The leader’s information concerning his own troops, includ¬ 
ing his section and the elements which protect and support it, will usually be quite 
complete and definite. The conduct of other elements will greatly influence his own 

conduct. 

For example: If the scouts of the section on the left have cleared a wood on the 
flank, it will usually be quite safe to advance past such a wood. If the unit on the 
right' or the supporting weapons are applying effective fire to the target of the 
section, it may be possible to effect an advance, when without such fire support 
an advance would be impossible. If it be known that the other section of the platoon 
is working forward to gain the enemy’s flank, the section leader will determine to 
remain in his position, and assist this advance by maintaining fire superiority over 
the enemy, and fully occupying his attention. When the other section opens a 
vigorous fire on the flank of the enemy, he will take advantage of such a diversion 
to move forward. 


62 


MUSKETRY 


4. The terrain. The selection of a fire position, the route of advance, the forma¬ 
tion and manner of moving forward, are all very greatly dependent on the nature 
of the terrain, and the cover and concealment that it affords. Continued study of 
the ground will continually reveal new features which will affect the leader’s plans. 
“ The little drainage ditch which you did not note until the third time you looked, 
might save the lives of your men in advancing. It might determine for you that the 
proper way to advance was one man at a time crawling up this ditch, rather than by 
squad rushes in the open, exposed to fire.” 

Personal reconnaissance the basis for estimates. The basis for much of this 
estimate in the case of the leader of a small unit, must be personal reconnaissance. 
His decisions will be the better if made “ in sight of the facts.” He utilizes his 
map, field glass and compass to supplement personal observation. 

The mission will usually be so definite, and the limits of time and space so 
restricted, that but few courses of action will be open to the section leader. His 
decision as to the course to be adopted must be quick and definite. On this decision 
his plan of action is based. 

Form and contents of orders. Now, and not until now is the section leader ready 
to issue his orders. The fire orders of a section are short and simple. So far as 
possible they take the forms prescribed in the drill regulations. They may be 
verbally given, or conveyed by means of signals. They may consist of a single 
word, as “ Halt,” or a single gesture, “ Commence firing.” 

In our service the complete order follows a standard form. It consists of 5 parts, 
as follows: 

1. Information concerning the enemy and supporting troops. 

2. The general plan of action of the unit. 

3. A definite task for each element of the command. 

4. Any necessary administrative details. 

5. The location of the commander, or the place to which messages for him will 
be sent. 

Information to be given subordinates. Such an order is necessary to secure proper 
team work. The men of the section, especially the squad leaders, should know what 
there is to be known concerning the enemy they are to attack. They must have such 
information if they are to exercise initiative in carrying out their own tasks. They 
should know what other units adjacent to them are doing. If the second section is 
working forward up a draw to the enemy’s flank the first section should know 
about it. If the section on the right has captured the machine gun that was holding 
up their advance they should know this. Each element, and each man of the 
element should know the particular task he is required to perform. This may be 
simply to traverse his fire across the front of a designated target. Administrative 
details usually will not concern the platoon in attack, but sometimes information con¬ 
cerning ammunition, food and water may be necessary. Administrative details 
become more and more important and necessary as the size of the unit increases. 
In the orders of a division they assume great prominence. The elements of the 
command must know where their leader will be, or how they may communicate 
with him. In a small unit he can usually be seen by his subordinate leaders. But 
if not he must tell them where he will be, or where they are to send messages, or both. 

Fire estimates and orders continuous. The estimates, plans and orders of the 
small unit in combat will always be fragmentary. It is quite impossible to plan 
and issue orders for an entire protracted fire fight in advance. The leader estimates 
the opening situation, and issues the orders necessary to intelligently commit his 
command to action. He cannot foresee what the future developments will be. 
Emergencies will constantly arise. The general nature of the emergencies char¬ 
acteristic of combat the leader will know. He will think of them and plan for them, 
but he cannot issue orders to meet them until they are actually at hand. The 
“ estimate of the situation ” will be a continuous process during the combat. The 
leader closely watches every development, and modifies or extends his plans 
accordingly, issuing his orders from time to time, as may be necessary. The 





FIRE ORDERS AND SIGNALS 


63 


emergencies of combat arise so suddenly that the leader cannot meet them promptly 
unless he has thought about and provided for them to a great extent in advance of 
their occurrence. 

Fire plans, difficult to formulate. Fire estimates and fire orders are difficult to 
make and give, not because they are intricate (they must be quite simple), but 
because of the time element involved (they must be done quickly) and the difficult 
and trying conditions under which they are formulated and issued. 

It is more difficult to estimate a situation and issue a correct order to a section in 
battle, than to write the orders for the movement of a regiment in a quiet office. 
The army commander makes his estimate and formulates his plans in the seclusion 
of a comfortable headquarters. He will have ample time, hours at least, at his 
disposal. The leader of a small infantry unit must make his estimates and issue his 
orders in the turmoil of battle, with bullets whistling about his head and the cries 
of his wounded men in his ears. The army commander will have time to think care¬ 
fully before making his decision. The section leaders must complete the logical 
cycle of thought called an estimate of the situation, decide upon their plans, issue 
correct orders, and see that they are carried out, often within a few seconds of time. 
And on the correctness of their thinking, the clearness and decision of their orders, 
and the vigor with which they carry them out, the issue of battle absolutely depends. 

Yet even under these conditions hasty judgment cannot be permitted. A proper 
estimate of every situation that arises can never be omitted. It is the thinking man 
who wins. The leader who can keep his mind clear and his nerves steady, and 
think rapidly and correctly, will have an immeasurable advantage over an opponent 
who cannot do so. Such men can be created by right training. If by means of hard 
work in study, terrain exercises, map exercises, sand table demonstrations, drills, 
problems, etc., we can make our group leaders within the platoon think, logically, 
correctly and rapidly, the problem of successful leadership in battle is solved. To do 
this we must train them along definite lines, according to a definite and simple 
system. We must require them to make repeated estimates, we must put upon them 
the burden of solving problem after problem on their own responsibility. We must 
make them do their own thinking and hold them responsible for their own con¬ 
clusions. And as a result of such right training they will think that same way, as a 
matter of habit, even in the stress of battle. 

Summary. The mechanism of the application of fire, and the methods of observa¬ 
tion and adjustment have been covered in the chapter on the control of fire. 

The initiation and control of movement, and the principles which must guide the 
leader of a fire unit in the proper co-ordination of fire and movement in advancing 
the attack, have been covered in the chapter on the control of movement. 

The particular action to be taken in any situation, whether for the initiation or 
control of fire, the initiation or control of movement, teamwork in the support of 
other units, etc., will be decided by the leader in his estimate of each aspect of the 
ever-changing situation during the fire fight. The principles which should guide 
him and the manner in which he makes this estimate and formulates the orders 
necessary to carry out his plans, are discussed in this chapter. The actions and orders 
appropriate to each situation are explained and illustrated in the proper places in 
preceding and following chapters. 

The delivery by one section of the platoon of covering fire for the movement of 
the other involves no new principles. It involves only continual observation by the 
section leader of the situation of the other section, to the end that he may intel¬ 
ligently co-operate in the teamwork of the platoon. 

The support of adjacent units by cross and flanking fire is a special case of the 
application of fire.' It requires that the fire leader observe not only the conduct and 
situation of his own unit, but that of adjacent units on his flanks, with a view to 
applying his fire to the proper targets at the proper time to assist their advance. 

Practical work. Practical work for use in connection with this chapter is given 
in Exercises Nos. 18 to 30. 


64 


MUSKETRY 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. Define conduct of fire. What elements does it include? 

2. What is the immediate object of movement on the part of the attacking troops 
during battle ? 

3. What is the ultimate object of movement on the part of attacking troops 
during battle? 

4. Why must the attacker gain fire superiority ? 

5. For what operations should the attack plans of a platoon provide? 

6. What should be the action of an attacking unit when it has gained fire 
superiority ? 

7. What are the three practicable plans of action for an infantry platoon in an 
attack ? 

8. What are the characteristics of an infantry platoon? (Organization, leaders, 
deployment, etc.) 

9. What is the primary duty of the platoon leader in attack? 

10. What are the primary duties of the platoon sergeant? 

11. Does the platoon leader ordinarily personally exercise fire control or enforce 
fire discipline in action ? Explain why ? 

12. How does the platoon leader direct and control his platoon? 

13. What are the characteristics of an infantry rifle section? (Organization, 
leaders, deployment.) 

14. What are temporary groups? From what conditions do they result, and how 
are they organized and led ? 

15. What are the two classes of duties the leader of a rifle section performs in 
battle, and to what do they pertain ? 

16. How does the section leader apply the fire of the section to a target? 

17. How does the section leader adjust the fire of the section? 

18. How does he control its movement? 

19. What is an estimate of the situation? 

20. What are the principal items which should be considered in any estimate of 
the situation? 

21. What are the usual missions of fire units? 

22. With what matters concerning the enemy is the section leader specially con¬ 
cerned ? 

23. Why should section leaders be familiar with the general situation, the organi¬ 
zation and the tactical methods of the enemy ? 

24. Give an example of deductions that may be drawn from information con¬ 
cerning the enemy. 

25. What does the section leader consider with reference to his own troops, a^id 
how do such considerations affect his plans ? 

26. Hcrw will the terrain affect the decisions of the leader of a fire unit ? 

27. What should be the basis of the estimate of the leader of a fire unit? 

28. What are the characteristics of fire orders ? 

29. How are they transmitted ? 

30. What are the form and contents of an order? 

31. What information should the leader give to his subordinates? 

32. Why are fire orders fragmentary? 

33. Why are fire plans difficult to formulate? 

34. How can leaders of fire units be trained to think along the proper lines? 

35. Discuss the value of such training. 









FIRE DISCIPLINE 


65 


CHAPTER VII. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE (Continued). 

Duties of the Section Leader. 

In preceding chapters we have considered the primary duties of the section leader, 
which have to do with the lire control of his section. We will now take up the 

secondary duties of the section leader in attack, which have to do with fire discipline 
within the section. 


Fire Discipline. 

It is difficult to clearly distinguish the duties pertaining to fire discipline from those 
which pertain to fire control. 

Any action which is necessary to meet a particular situation, and which accord- 
ingly demands an estimate of that situation, and the formulation of plans and orders 
adapted to the particular conditions to be met, is classed as fire control. Any action 
which pertains to the routine conduct of fire in accordance with approved methods 
based on experience, and which accordingly should generally be carried out in any 
situation, is classed as fire discipline. The two functions tend to merge into each 
other, and it is impossible to draw any sharp line of demarkation between them. 

The section leader, as commander of the larger fire unit, is especially concerned 
with the control of fire, which constitutes his primary duty. He is, nevertheless, 
responsible for the maintenance of fire discipline within his section, which con¬ 
stitutes his secondary duty. In the performance of this secondary duty the section 
leader must: 

1. Provide for the prompt transmission of his orders and signals to his sub¬ 
ordinate (squad) leaders, and the enforcement of compliance therewith. 

2. Regulate the rate of fire. 

3. Insure the necessary supply of ammunition. 

4. Check breaches of fire discipline. 

5. Insure the prompt replacement of casualties, and the evacuation of wounded. 

6. Lead the section in rushes as a whole, and in the assault. 

7. Reorganize his unit after the assault. 

8. Set an example to his men by his conduct, bearing and aggressiveness. 

Position of the section leader in combat. Transmission of orders. It is of first 

importance that the squad leaders should be able to promptly receive the orders 
of the section leader, and that the latter should personally see that these orders are 
being carried out. The location of section headquarters has much to do with this, 
and the section leader should take a position where he can see and be seen by his 
squad leaders, and if possible also heard by them. Generally this position will be 
somewhat in rear of and opposite the center of the section, but it is determined not 
by any fixed rule, but by the necessity of properly performing his duties. These will 
include also the observation of the enemy and the effect of fire on both sides, and 
visual contact with platoon headquarters. It will not always be possible to meet 
all of these requirements from a single position. The section leader moves about as 
necessary in the performance of his duties. He also utilizes his section guide as an 
agent of communication both with the squad leaders and with platoon headquarters. 
The section guide is specially charged with watching for and transmitting any orders 
from the platoon leader. He calls the attention of the squad leaders to any breaches 
of fire discipline within their squads, or any failure to carry out the orders of the 
section leader, and if necessary goes in person to the squad leader for this purpose. 
(See also Chapter IV.) 

Rate of fire. The section leader must see that the proper rate of fire is main¬ 
tained. The correct rate to insure maximum results (rounds per minute) is 
thirteen minus the range in hundreds of yards. The squad leaders and men should 
know this rule, but if they fail to observe it the section leader takes the necessary 
steps to enforce discipline, usually by a signal or order, “ Fire faster (slower).” 
If necessary the section guide goes to the squad leader and corrects the rate. 


MUSKETRY 


66 

Ammunition supply. The section leader should at all times know the sta^e of 
ammunition supply in his section, and should send back requests (to platoon head¬ 
quarters) for additional ammunition before the need becomes critical. He checks 
every tendency to waste ammunition. The chief waste results from an excessive 
rate of fire and from failing to cease fire on order. 

Ammunition is usually brought forward by carrying parties from the rear. These 
carrying parties come usually from the reserve company of the battalion. They 
do not return, but are used as reinforcements for the firing line. The section leader 
directs the distribution of ammunition thus furnished, according to need, and 
assigns the replacements to squads in which casualties have occurred. Ammuni¬ 
tion should not be collected in one spot, but should be promptly distributed along 
the line. It will usually be impossible for men to move along the line for this 
purpose, during the fire fight. The ammunition is passed along from one man to 
the next. The section leader will see that his squad leaders require the removal 
of ammunition from the dead or wounded, and its distribution in the squad. 

Checking breaches of fire discipline. The section leader, assisted by the section 
guide, maintains a close watch for and takes prompt measures to check any breach of 
fire discipline within the squads. This will include, in addition to improper rate 
of fire, inattention, incorrect or dilatory execution of orders, unnecessary talking, 
improper use of cover either in fire positions or while moving, slow or careless move¬ 
ment, unnecessary exposure of person, improper firing positions, improper opera¬ 
tion of rifles, incorrect intervals or crowding, failure to set sights or improper sight 
setting, etc. The correction of these matters is the duty of squad leaders, but 
the section leader is responsible that they do so. The section guide on his own 
initiative takes prompt measures to check all such breaches of discipline. 

Replacement of casualties. The maintenance of the integrity of his command 
and the continuity of its fire by prompt replacement of casualties is a routine duty 
of the section leader. The minimum personnel with which any one of his three 
squads can function as a fire unit is a leader, automatic rifleman and scout. Each 
squad must have a leader, and its automatic rifle must be kept in action. A substi¬ 
tute is provided for each of these. The automatic rifle equipment must be at 
once transferred to the substitute before any movement of either the casualty or 
the substitute is made. If the substitutes become casualties other men qualified to 
fill their positions must be specially designated. 

Replacements coming forward with ammunition are distributed by the section 
leader in accordance with their qualifications, to fill casualties in the squads. Each 
takes with him for distribution, the extra ammunition he has brought forward. 

When a squad, as a result of casualties, is reduced below the minimum strength 
that allows it to function as a unit, it may be built up by replacements sent from 
the rear. If replacements are not available the squad should be broken up, and its 
remaining members assigned to fill vacancies, or as additional members to the 
other squads. This is usually accomplished during a lull in the action. 

Evacuation of the zvounded. The evacuation of the wounded is an element of fire 
discipline. In addition to the fact that the wounded are entitled to and should 
receive prompt aid, their presence with the command has a bad moral effect, 
especially if there is any indication that they are being neglected. The care and 
evacuation of the wounded is the special function of the medical personnel. But 
they will ordinarily not be able to attend to them on the firing line unless conditions 
as to cover are exceptionally favorable. The wounded are usually allowed to remain 
near where they fall until the advance of the attack enables the medical personnel 
to come up to them. Wounded who are able to walk should be inspected by the 
section leader, or more usually by the section guide, and directed to the battalion 
aid station, or a company collecting post, in rear. The location of the aid station is 
made known in orders to all units of the battalion. Wounded who are unable to 
walk are ordinarily allowed to remain near where they fall until picked up by 
the litter bearers attached to the battalion. If in a very exposed position they 
may be removed to a sheltered locality near by. If the section is not moving forward 


DUTIES OF SECTION GUIDE 67 

first aid will be rendered to the seriously wounded. No member of the section 
is allowed to go to the rear or remain behind when his squad moves forward, for 
the purpose of attending to wounded. The section leader informs his platoon 
eader of the occurrence of casualties, and of the localities where the wounded are 
v ln §b order that the medical personnel may be directed to them. 

Leading the section. When the section moves as a unit, either in a rush to a 
fire position, or in an assault upon the enemy, the section leader should lead it in 
person. He should be in a position where he can be seen by as many of his men 
as possible, especially his squad leaders, who will guide on him and watch for his 
signals. 

Qualifications of a section leader. The section leader must be at all times an 
example to his men. Because of his close contact with them the influence of his 
personality is very great. Aggressiveness, the determination to advance the attack 
in spite of all difficulties, should be his chief characteristic. Good common sense, a 
thorough knowledge of his duties which will be apparent to all his men, the habit 
of unremitting attention to duty, and dignity of demeanor, are qualities he must 
possess. These, with a good physique and perfect health, complete the essential 
requirements of the successful section leader. 

Duties of the Section Guide. 

The section guide fulfills the functions of assistant to the section leader, and is 
his replacement in case he becomes a casualty. These require that he be a man of the 
same caliber as the section leader, fully qualified by personality and training to fill the 
position of section leader. Since he is second in command of the section and replace¬ 
ment for the section leader, he should never be assigned to the command of a squad. 
If the section guide becomes a casualty, the section leader promptly replaces him 
by one of the squad leaders, who must also be a man qualified to lead the section 
in case of necessity. 

The section guide assists the section leader in the performance of all his duties 
incident to fire control and maintenance of fire discipline, and acts as his personal 
agent of communication. 

His chief duties include : 

1. Maintenance of fire discipline and checking all breaches of same. 

2. Watching for signals from the platoon leader. 

3. Maintaining communication between the section and squad leaders. When 
necessary he transmits the orders or signals of the section leader, and may go in 
person to the squad leaders for this purpose. 

4. Supervision of distribution of replacements and ammunition. 

5. Inspecting walking wounded cases and directing them to the rear. Seeing 
that litter cases are placed in sheltered positions and given first aid when practicable. 
Notifying platoon headquarters of casualties in the section. 

6. Preventing straggling or skulking. 

7. In movement, following the section and seeing that all elements go forward as 
ordered by the section leader. 

8. Watching the flanks of the section. 

The section guide takes a position in which he can best perform these duties. 
Usually this will be in rear of the section and near its center, and near the section 
leader. He should be able to see the section leader, the three squad leaders and 
platoon headquarters. He seeks a position from which this is possible. 

If the section leader becomes a casualty or is used as replacement to the platoon 
leader, the section guide promptly assumes command of the section, and replaces 
himself by one of the squad leaders. 

THE SQUAD. 

Organization and Equipment. 

The squad is the smallest unit of infantry organization. It consists of eight men, 
one of whom is squad leader (a corporal). It is a fire unit. The organization of 
the squad, and the equipment, positions and duties of its members are of funda- 


68 MUSKETRY 

mental importance, since they are the basis on which infantry tactics of fire and 
maneuver are built. 

The squad includes i corporal (rifleman and leader), i automatic rifleman, and 
6 riflemen. One rifleman is also replacement for the automatic rifleman, and 
another is equipped with grenade discharger and rifle grenades. The positions 
of these men in the squad, and their normal equipment, are as follows: 

Position. Function. Equipment. 

No. i, front rank ...Scout.Rifle, bayonet, tracer ammunition. 

No. i, rear rank ....Assistant scout .Rifle, bayonet, tracer ammunition. 

No. 2, front rank ...Rifleman and rifle grenadier... Rifle, bayonet, grenade discharger, rifle 

grenades. 

No. 2, rear rank ....Rifleman.Rifle, bayonet. 

No. 3, front rank ... Rifleman and substitute auto-Rifle, bayonet. 

matic rifleman. 

No. 3, rear rank_Automatic rifleman.Automatic rifle, magazine filler, spare 

parts case, io magazines. 

No. 4, front rank .. .Rifleman, squad leader, corporal.Rifle, bayonet, jointed cleaning rod, 

magazine filler, tracer ammunition. 

No. 4, rear rank ... .Rifleman, 2nd in command.Rifle, bayonet. 

All riflemen carry extra ammunition for the automatic rifle, and when necessary 
rifle and hand grenades. Each carries one web pocket containing 2 automatic rifle 
magazines, except No. 2, front rank, who carries rifle grenades. 

Position of the squad leader in combat. The usual position of the squad leader is 
in front of the center when the squad is moving as a unit, and in rear of the center 
when it is halted. The usual formations of the squad in combat are shown in Plates 
27 and 35. The interval between men when deployed in line is usually about 5 yards. 
This is to be regarded as a minimum. The intervals may be increased to as much 
as 10 yards to cover a greater front. An interval of more than 10 yards between 
men disperses the squad to such an extent that control by the leader becomes difficult. 
It is therefore seldom exceeded, it being ordinarily better to leave an interval between 
squads rather than to unduly increase the interval between men of the squad in 
cases where the section is covering a wide front. The expression “ an interval of 
5 yards ” means that there is one man to each 5 yards of front. An interval is 
always left for the squad leader, which he can enter in case he takes part in the firing, 
which ordinarily he does not. The usual front of a squad deployed, including small 
intervals on its flanks, is taken to be 40 yards. 

In this deployed formation the squad leader is in or immediately in front or rear 
of the center of his squad, where ordinarily he can best see and control all his 
men. No. 2 of the front rank, who is the rifle grenadier, is on the right of the 
squad leader, and No. 3 of the rear rank, who is the automatic rifleman, is on his left. 
The dispositions are accordingly such that the leader is next to and can most easily 
control the chief elements of the fire power of his squad. The scouts are on the 
right, when present. If they leave or rejoin the squad they do not change the 
intervals between the other men. No. 4 of the rear rank, who is second in com¬ 
mand, is on the extreme left. He assists the leader by controlling the men on 
that flank, especially when the leader goes forward with the right half of the squad. 
The substitute automatic rifleman is next to his principal where he can readily 
assist or replace him. 

Maintaining the integrity of the squad. Replacement of casualties. The squad 
is not simply a group of 8 men. It is an organized fire unit, a team. Each member 
is equipped and trained to play his part as a member of this fire team. To realize 
its maximum efficiency the squad must function as a team, both in attack and in 
defense. The squad has no subdivisions, and its members should never be 
separated when it is possible to keep them together. The scouts usually precede 
the advance of the rest of the squad, but are not separated from it. When the 
squad moves forward by twos or fours, or as individuals in the advance by infiltra- 







69 


DUTIES OF THE SQUAD LEADER 

tion, it should be reassembled in the advanced fire position as soon as possible. If 
the squad becomes scattered during combat, for example in the assault on the 
enemy s position, it should be reassembled and reorganized as soon as possible. To 
function as a fire team the minimum personnel necessary is a leader, an automatic 
rifleman and a scout. If as a result of casualties the squad is reduced below this 
minimum personnel the casualties should be replaced by qualified reinforcements. 
If this be impossible the squad should be broken up and its remaining members 
assigned to fill casualties in other squads. A disruption of the squad organization 
means a disruption of the entire fabric of infantry fire tactics. 

Duties of the Squad Leader. 

Fire Control. 

The duties of the squad leader, like those of the section leader, are concerned with 
fire control and the maintenance of fire discipline. When the squad is acting as a 
part of the section, which is the usual case, the duties of the squad leader in relation 
to fire control, are usually limited to: 

1. Watching for the fire control orders (or signals) of the section leader, giving 
the necessary orders to his squad, and insuring that the wishes of the section leader 
are carried out. 

2. Observing and adjusting the fire of his unit. 

3. Initiating and controlling the movement of his unit. 

4. Participating in the fire when this does not interfere with more important 
duties. 

The duty of formulating fire plans and orders does not ordinarily fall upon the 
squad leader. As a rule he has only to intelligently carry out the orders of his 
section leader. In the exceptional case where the squad is acting alone, or where 
the conditions of combat are such that the section leader is temporarily unable to 
properly perform his duties in controlling the fire of his unit, the squad leader will 
be confronted with the necessity for estimating the situation and formulating his 
own fire plans and orders. In this case his duties are similar to those of the section 
leader. 


Fire Discipline. 

As the squad leader is in personal contact with his men and can in most cases direct 
them by word of mouth, he is the leader immediately and chiefly responsible for the 
maintenance of fire discipline within the squad. His duties in this connection are 
many and varied, and have to do with both fire and movement. The squad leader 
must: 

1. See that his men recognize and fire at the designated target. 

2. See that sights are set at the proper range. 

3. See that the men fire at the proper rate. 

4. See that the fire of the squad is properly distributed over the target. 

5. See that each man takes a proper position for firing and properly operates his 
piece. 

6. See that his men use cover to the best advantage while in the fire position, that 
they maintain the proper intervals and avoid crowding. 

7. See that the men promptly obey all orders to open fire, cease fire or suspend fire. 

8. See that the automatic rifle is kept in action, promptly replacing the automatic 
rifleman by a substitute in case he becomes a casualty, and seeing that the equipment 
is transferred before either man moves. 

9. Constantly watch the state of the ammunition supply, and give notice to the 
section leader of need for ammunition before it becomes urgent. See that ammuni¬ 
tion is removed from the dead and wounded and properly distributed. See that 
ammunition brought up by men from the rear is distributed and that the men are 
assigned to places in the squad. See that lulls in the action are utilized to replenish 
ammunition and fill automatic rifle magazines. 



70 


MUSKETRY 


10. When movement is ordered identify the position to be reached or select a 
position if none is designated by the section leader. 

11. Cause the squad to cease firing and prepare to move forward. 

12. Lead the squad as a whole to the new position, either in column by a covered 
route or by rush in the open. 

13. When the movement is executed by fractions, indicate the position to be 
reached and designate the successive fractions to advance. 

14. Cause individuals to make proper use of cover and otherwise properly conduct 
themselves while moving. 

15. Lead the assault in person. 

16. Reassemble the squad after the assault. 

17. Inspect walking wounded cases and send them to section headquarters. See 
that seriously wounded are placed in a position covered from hostile fire, and first 
aid administered. (Men are never permitted to leave the squad or remain behind 
when it moves for the purpose of attending the wounded.) Report casualties to 
section headquarters, at first opportunity. 

18. Prevent straggling or skulking. 

19. Observe every detail of the personal conduct of his men and check all breaches 
of discipline and training. 

20. Preserve order in his squad, and by his conduct and bearing set an example to 
his men. 

The squad leader takes the position in which he can best carry out these duties. 
Specifically he should be able to see and verbally direct his men, see the target and 
adjacent terrain, and see the section leader (or guide). (See also Chapter IV.) 

Except in emergency the squad leader does not himself take part in the firing. 
The fire power of the squad is that of ten rifles (the automatic rifle being equivalent 
to 4 rifles). By himself firing the squad leader can add one-tenth to the volume of 
this fire. But to do this he must neglect other duties. He can usually add more 
to the fire power of his squad by refraining from firing and devoting himself to his 
other duties. 

In carrying out his duties the squad leader should use the orders and signals pre¬ 
scribed in the drill regulations. The manner of giving orders has been illustrated in 
a number of places in this course. 

The squad leader may be used as replacement for the section guide or even the 
section leader, and should be qualified by personality and training to fill these 
positions. 

No. 4 of the rear rank is second in command in the squad, assistant to and replace¬ 
ment for the squad leader. He performs the same duties relative to the squad that 
the section guide performs with relation to the section. He assists the squad leader 
in maintaining discipline, especially in the case of the men nearest him, on the left 
of the squad. When the squad leader advances to a new position the second in 
command assumes charge of all men remaining in rear. He automatically replaces 
the squad leader if the latter is called away or becomes a casualty, and designates 
a new second in command. 

Summary. We have seen that the conduct of fire includes the duties of the 
leaders of the fire units, the section and squad leaders and their seconds in com¬ 
mand, in the control of fire and the enforcement of fire discipline within their 
respective commands. 

Fire control, including the formulation of fire plans and orders, is the primary 
duty of the section leader. Fire control includes both fire and movement and 
their proper co-ordination in advancing the attack. The maintenance of fire 
discipline is a secondary duty of the section leader, closely connected with and 
merging into his primary duty of fire control. 

The squad leader is the commander of the smallest infantry unit or fire team. 
His duties in the conduct of fire also include fire control and the maintenance of 
fire discipline. His fire control duties usually consist in intelligently carrying out 
the fire orders of his section leader, although in emergencies he may be called & upon 


CONDUCT OF FIRE 


71 

to make his own fire plans. Being in immediate personal contact with all members 
ot his command he is the leader primarily responsible for the proper conduct of 
e infantry soldier in the fire fight, which is known as fire discipline. 

Practical Work. 

Practical work for use in connection with this chapter is given in Exercises 
Nos. 18 to 30, inclusive. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What are the primary and what are the secondary duties of the section leader? 

2. What is the difference between fire control and fire discipline and what does 
each include? 

3. How does the position of the section leader affect the transmission of orders? 

4. What requirements should the combat position of the leader fulfill? 

5- What are the general duties of the section guide with reference to communi¬ 
cation ? 

6. How does the section leader regulate the rate of fire? 

7. What are the duties of the section leader relative to the supply of ammuni¬ 
tion ? 

8. How is ammunition supplied to the firing line? How is it distributed along 
the line? 

9. What is the rule as to ammunition carriers returning to the units whence they 
came ? 

10. What do the section leader and guide do on observing breaches of fire disci¬ 
pline in the squads ? 

11. What is the duty of the section leader with reference to the replacement of 
casualties ? 

12. What is the minimum personnel with which a squad can function as a fire unit ? 

13. What is done when the squad falls below this minimum ? 

14. What precautions are to be observed when an automatic rifleman becomes a 
casualty ? 

15. Why is it essential that the wounded be evacuated to the rear? 

16. What is done with the slightly wounded, able to walk? 

17. What is done with the seriously wounded, unable to walk? 

18. What is the rule with reference to men of units in action remaining behind 
or going to the rear with wounded ? 

19. What reports does the section leader make to his platoon leader with reference 
to casualties? 

20. What does the section leader do when his section moves as a unit ? 

21. What are the requirements for a good section leader ? 

22. What are the specific duties of the section guide? 

23. What requirements should a combat post for the section guide fulfill ? 

24. Where will this post ordinarily be ? 

25. What does the section guide do if his leader becomes a casualty? 

26. What are the characteristics of the infantry squad? 

27. State the functions and equipment of each member of the squad. 

28. How is extra ammunition for the automatic rifle carried? 

29. What are the usual posts of the squad leader—*. 

a. When the squad is moving as a unit? 

b. When it is stationary? 

30. Give the reasons for these positions. 

31. Can a squad be subdivided ? 

32. Are the members of a squad ever separated during combat? If so to what 
extent ? 

33. What should the leader do if his squad becomes scattered? 


72 


MUSKETRY 






34. When should a squad be broken up ? 

35. Give four duties of the squad leader in the control of fire when acting as part 
of a section during the attack? 

36. Under what conditions will a squad leader be called upon to formulate fire 
plans ? 

37. Why should a squad leader be held responsible for fire discipline ? 

38. What duties does a squad leader perform in maintaining fire discipline? 

39. Should a squad leader ordinarily take part in the fire of his squad? Under 
what circumstances may he do so ? 

40. What orders and signals does the squad leader use? 

41. What higher positions should a squad leader be qualified to fill? Why? 

42. Who is second in command in the squad ? 

43. What are his duties ? 

CHAPTER VIII. 

CONDUCT OF FIRE IN THE DEFENSE. 

The subjects of defensive combat and of the organization of the ground for 
defense, are covered in detail in the courses in Tactics and Field Engineering. 
We are here concerned only with the conduct of fire of the infantry fire units 
(section and squad) in defense. 






Tactics of the Defense. 


Every combat, whatever the size of the forces engaged or the circumstances under 
which it occurs, takes the form of the attack of a position, in which one combatant 
(the attacker) advances against the position and endeavors to take possession of it, 
while the other (the defender) occupies the position and endeavors to repel the 
attack. 

The position may be very highly organized, including many lines of carefully 
constructed trenches, obstacles, shell proof machine gun emplacements, observation 
posts, etc. On the other hand it may, by reason of lack of time and opportunity on 
the part of the defender, include no artificial works other than pits hastily dug for 
the shelter of individual riflemen or machine guns. In any case the defender avails 
himself of the shelter and other advantages afforded by the terrain in its natural 
state, as far as possible. 

The defender may have no intention of contesting the possession of the ground 
when the attacker has reached the position. In this case he seeks a position allowing 
long range fire to the front, thus forcing the attacker to deploy and open the fire 
fight. Before the attacker has advanced to a locality from which an assault on the 
position is possible, or from which he can compromise the defender’s retreat, the 
latter withdraws. Such a defense is known as a delaying action, and is usually 
undertaken to cover the retreat of a larger force. 

In a decisive action, however, the defender contests the possession of his position 
by the attacker, both on the front of the position and within the area or zone which 
he occupies. 

When opportunity affords the defender selects a position favorable for defense 
and artificially strengthens it to the extent that the time and facilities at his disposal 
permit. 

The troops of the defender are disposed in this position in accordance with a 
definite scheme of defense. In brief this is as follows: 

Defensive areas. Having selected the general line on which he will offer resis¬ 
tance the defender picks the small areas along this line which lend themselves to 
defense. These will be localities which afford a good field of fire to the front and 
flanks, usually slightly elevated above the adjacent terrain, and affording natural 
concealment, shelter, and approach from the rear. Each of these areas should be 
able to protect its own front, flanks, and even its rear with fire, and adjacent areas 
should be mutually supporting, that is, each should be able to cover with oblique or 
flanking fire the fronts and flanks of the next adjacent areas on either side. This 









TACTICS OF THE DEFENSE 


73 


means generally that they should not be over 300 to 400 yards apart, and even less in 

very close terrain. Their actual location, however, will be fixed by the nature of the 
terrain. 

. rear of this advanced line of defensible areas there may be one or more similar 
lines. 1 liese rear areas are so located as to cover with their fire the flanks and 
rears of the areas in front of them They are also mutually supporting, and can 
continue the defense in depth, in case the areas in front of them are captured by the 
attacker. 

Combat groups. Each of these defensible areas is held by a small garrison. They 
may include machine guns, if the particular locality affords a favorable field of fire 
for same. They always include infantry. Usually they will be garrisoned by a 
rifle platoon or section, exceptionally by a single squad, always by complete fire 
units (squads or sections). The size of the areas may vary from about 50 x 50 yards 
to 150x200 yards or exceptionally more. These small garrisons are known as 
combat groups. Their functions are: 

1. To oppose the advance of the attacker by frontal fire, endeavoring to inflict 
upon/him such heavy losses that he will be unable to reach the position. 

2. To cover and protect the fronts and flanks of adjacent areas on either side, 
and to sweep with fire the unoccupied ground between groups. 

3. Finally, to hold the ground occupied, even when the attacker has reached, and 
perhaps penetrated the position, by fire to their fronts, flanks, and even to the rear, 
and by close combat within the area. 

^ The active defense. The foregoing constitutes what is called the passive defense. 
The defender also employs more active measures, in the form of counter attack 
against any elements of the attack who may have entered the position. 

Strong points. To maintain the continuity of the defense, and to provide for the 
active measures of same, a number of combat groups, either on one line or more, 
are grouped to form a strong point , under a single commander. An appropriate 
garrison for a strong point is a company. It may include from two to four combat 
groups. In addition to the small garrisons of the defensible areas a strong point 
includes a support, for example one platoon of the company. This support is 
used by the commander to reinforce threatened points within the area assigned to 
him, and for counter attack to expel any of the enemy who may have gained a lodg¬ 
ment in his area. These counter attacks should be delivered promptly as a surprise, 
if possible against the flanks of the enemy, and should be supported by the fire of 
the combat groups which are in a position to do so. 

The larger units of the defense, battalions, regiments, etc., hold reserves which 
are used to reinforce the companies in the forward part of the position, and to 
deliver counter attacks on a larger scale. 

The defensive position may be greatly elaborated, improved and strengthened 
by trenches to permit better fire and covered communication, obstacles to delay the 
attacker under the fire of the defense, shelters for the protection of the troops, etc. 
These works, however, do not alter the fundamental scheme of defense. 

Summary. To summarize then, an active defense includes: 

1. A number of small defensible areas each occupied by a fire unit, capable of 
defense to the front, flanks and rear, adjacent areas supporting each other by fire, 
the whole being so arranged as to cover by fire all the ground over which the enemy 
must advance. 

2. Grouping of a number of small areas into larger areas, including supports and 
reserves for reinforcement and counter attack. 

In the conduct of his defense the defender first opposes the advance of the 
attacker by frontal fire, endeavoring to prevent him from reaching the front of 
the position. As the attacker reaches the front of the position he receives, in addi¬ 
tion to frontal fire, cross and flanking fire from the small defended areas. If he 
attempts to enter one of the areas he is opposed by fire from front and flank, and 
by the close-in defense of the garrison of the area. Finally, if he succeeds in gain- 


74 


MUSKETRY 


ing a footing, he is expelled by counter attack of mobile supports or reserves, aided 
by the fire of the area garrisons and by accompanying weapons and artillery, when 
practicable. 

The secret of a successful defense is in each area garrison maintaining itself in 
the area assigned to it. The determined resistance of a few combat groups has 
often brought about the collapse of an attack which had penetrated even to their rear. 

Observation, Circulation and Intercommunication. 

The defensive position, to whatever extent it may be artificially strengthened, 
should always provide for observation to the front and within the position, facilities 
for the movement of troops from one part of the position to another, covered as far 
as possible from the enemy’s view and fire, and arrangements for intercommunica¬ 
tion between the various elements of the defense. It is usually easier to provide 
these facilities in defense than in attack. The commander of each defensive area 
(combat group or strong point) should have one or more sheltered observation 
posts from which he can observe the ground in all directions, the conduct of his 
own command, and the situation to his front, flanks and rear. 

Dispositions of Front Line Platoons in Defense. 

In this scheme of defense the front line platoon may be assigned to garrison one 
or more combat groups. The dispositions of the platoon within the area assigned 
to it would vary with the terrain and other conditions. If assigned to a single area 
it might place one section in position as garrison, holding the other in support to be 
used for the replacement of casualties, to reinforce threatened portions of the 
defense or meet emergencies or, exceptionally, for local counter attack, within 
the area assigned to the platoon. In case the platoon were holding a wide front, 
and the terrain were favorable for frontal fire, the entire platoon might be deployed 
for this purpose. If assigned to defend two areas the platoon might place a section 
in each. Each section might deploy its three squads for fire, or deploy two squads, 
holding one in support for replacement or reinforcement, etc. 

The men would seldom be deployed at uniform intervals in line, but would be 
grouped by section or squad in localities within the assigned area which were 
favorable for the development of fire, whether frontal or oblique. Squads should 
not be subdivided except for very cogent reasons, and the two parts of a squad 
thus divided should be next to each other in the position. Sections should be main¬ 
tained intact as single units when practicable, but it is not essential that they be 
deployed in a single line. 

Location of the defenses. The general location of the position to be defended 
and the sectors or frontages assigned to units, together with the dispositions of the 
troops for defense, will ordinarily be set forth in the orders of higher commanders. 
When time permits, the location of combat groups and the troops to be assigned to 
each will be determined by the company and battalion commanders. In emergency, 
however, as in a meeting engagement or unexpected encounter with the enemy, the 
platoon may receive no orders other than as to the front it is to occupy. Even these 
orders may be lacking, and platoon, section, or even squad leaders may be required 
to decide upon the combat positions to be occupied by their units. 

Organization of the position. Following the assignment of troops to their posi¬ 
tions for the defense the available time prior to the opening of the attack will usually 
be devoted to intensive work in preparing the position for defense. Trenches will 
be dug, obstacles placed, shelter prepared, etc. As a rule, positions should ie 
prepared by the troops who are to occupy them, as this insures more interest in thfc 
work on the part of the men. 

Field of tire. The field of fire to the front should be as wide as practicable, at 
least 400 to 500 yards, with a minimum of cover for the attacker. The firing line 
should not (except in delaying actions) be greatly elevated above the field of fire, 
thereby producing a plunging effect and sacrificing the advantages of grazing fire 
and long danger space (see Theory of Fire). 

Ranges at which fire is opened. In defense rifle fire may often be opened at 
long range (1000 to 1800 yds.) in order to compel an early deployment of the 


DEFENSE PLANS 


75 

attacker inflict losses and delay his advance, especially when the defender is fight¬ 
ing a delaying action. By reason of its intrenched position, facility of ammuni¬ 
tion supply, and knowledge of exact ranges to points in the foreground, the defense 
can usually deliver effective fire at a greater range than the attack. 

DEFENSE PLANS. 

. To insure continuity and co-ordination of the defense, plans must be prepared 
m which a definite mission is assigned to each element of the defense. The elements 
of the passive or fire defense are the combat groups. When an entire platoon is 
assigned to a single combat group the platoon leader exercises command thereof. 
If the platoon be assigned to more than one group the leader supervises and 
co-ordinates the actions of the groups. 



The defense mission of a combat group, for example a platoon, will require that 
it defend and prevent the enemy from occupying a certain definite area. This 
will require that troops be disposed for fire to the front and flanks of the area, and 
that arrangements be made for defense to the rear in case of necessity. This mis¬ 
sion will also, as a rule, require that the combat group cover with its fire certain belts 
of the terrain extending in front of adjacent combat groups in the same line and 
across the unoccupied terrain between groups. Certain special missions may also 
be assigned, for example to cover certain areas which cannot be reached by the 
fire of other units. 

The platoon leader, or combat group commander, decides what troops he will 
place in position for the development of fire in the required directions, and what, 
if any, he will hold in support, and where they shall be placed. He selects a com¬ 
mand post and an observation post. These should be at the same place if possible. 
He indicates to his subordinates the nature and extent of the preparation of the 
position for defense, assigns tasks, and sees that the work is carried out in 
accordance with his plans of defense and the orders of his superiors. He notes 
the preparations for defense in adjacent combat groups, co-ordinates his work there¬ 
with, ascertains what fire support he may expect from neighboring groups and 
tells their commanders of his own plans. He assigns to each section, squad or part 
of a squad, the position it is to occupy and the field of fire it is to cover. He prepares 



76 


MUSKETRY 


range cards, or causes them to be prepared, for the combat group as a whole, and 
for each section and squad, showing the sectors to be covered by their fire. He 
causes ammunition, including grenades and rifle grenades, to be distributed to the 
localities where it will be needed. 



Example of Dispositions and Defense Plans of a Platoon. 


To illustrate these defense plans of a combat group, let us take a simple example. 
Plate 37 represents the defense chart of a combat group consisting of a platoon. 
The platoon leader, who is the combat group commander, decides to place one sec¬ 
tion in position for the fire defense and to hold one section in support at the locality 
shown. Here it is available to reinforce the passive defense, or for counter attack 
against an enemy penetrating the interval to the right of the combat group, where 
by reason of the nature of the terrain the greatest danger is to be apprehended. 

As fire must be developed to the front of the combat group, and obliquely to the 
right and left across the fronts of the adjacent groups on each flank, the platoon 
leader disposes his section accordingly. One squad is disposed primarily for frontal 
fire and the other two primarily for oblique or cross fire to either flank. 

Normal and contingent sectors. The 1st squad fires to the front. It must know 
the limits of its sector, and the ranges to conspicuous points therein. These are 
shown on the platoon range card. They are also shown on the range card of the 
section and of the squad leaders. These range cards are similar to that shown in 
Plate 40, except that the sector is usually not subdivided. 



I scout being absent in sniping post 

Plate 38.—Disposition of Squad in Defense. 




Assuming that trenches had been constructed the squad might be deployed for 
fire as shown in Plate 38. The automatic rifleman is placed on the flank, where he 
can switch his fire from front to flank, or vice versa. 

The fire orders of this squad might be; “ This squad will fire at any target 
appearing to the right of that large tree (B) and to the left of that house (D). 
hire will be opened on order of the squad leader, but not before the enemy crosses 
the road 800 yards to our front. Rifle grenades will be used if the enemy reaches 
the ditch 200 yards to the front. Hand grenades will be used if the enemy suc¬ 
ceeds in penetrating our wire. Twelve hand grenades for each man will be placed 
in recesses in the trench. The position will be held to the last and assault resisted 
with the bayonet.” 

The primary duty of the second squad is to deliver fire across the front of the 
combat group on the right. It is assigned a sector extending from the church ( E ) 
to the house (D) (Plate 37). This is called its A sector (normal sector). The 
squad will fire on any target appearing in this sector. In addition to this fire in 
support of the adjacent group the squad will also assist in covering the front of its 
own group, being assigned a sector extending from the house (D) to the left as far 
as the cross roads. This is called its B sector (contingent sector). The squad will 
fire on any target appearing in the B sector (within 800 yards) when not engaged in 
fire in the A sector. It will shift its fire to the A sector whenever a target^appears 
therein, unless otherwise ordered, or unless it be necessary to defend its own front. 
The orders to this squad would be in the same form as those of the 1st squad. The 
3rd squad performs duties similar to those of the 2nd, on the other flank. 

The following is an example of a defense plan, including only those items per¬ 
taining to the conduct of fire. (See Plate 39.) 










PLAN OF DEFENSE FOR A COMBAT GROUP 


77 



Plate 39. —Plan of Defense for a Combat Group. 
































78 


MUSKETRY 


Plan of Defense. Combat Group No. 2, Strong Point No. 1, 1st Battalion, 

1st Blue Infantry. 

Garrison: 2nd platoon, Co. A, 1st Inf. 

Note.— The plan would relate the dispositions of troops on both flanks, supports, machine 
guns, etc. In this case another battalion holds the west edge of the woods to the right, and 
Co. B the east edge of the woods to the left. Other details of the plan, not herein included, 
would relate to observers, sentinels and snipers and their reliefs, location of C. P v administra¬ 
tive details, such as supply, messing, evacuation of wounded, etc. 

The 1st section will garrison the right half of the platoon trench. 

The 2nd section will garrison the left half of the trench. 

Order of squads f right to left, 2-1-3-5-4-6. 

Fire sectors . 1. The 1st section will defend the sector from the front of the 1st 
platoon to the north edge of the woods on the left, overlapping with 2nd section 


Squad. 

Sector. 

Limits. 

I 

A 

Front of 1st platoon to small shed. 


B 

Small shed to big oak tree. 

2 

A 

Same as 1st squad. 


B 

Same as 1st squad. 

3 

A 

Small shed to E. edge of woods on lef t 


B 

None. 


2 . The 2nd section will defend the sector from the small shed to a point of the 
woods directly west of the 6th squad, overlapping with 1st section. Fire will 
be directed into the woods only in case of withdrawal of B Co., or attack from 
that direction. 


5 

A 

Same as 3rd squad. 


B 

None. 

4 

A 

Entire edge of w’oods on left. 


B 

Big oak tree to E. edge of woods on left 

6 

A 

Same as 4th squad. 


B 

Same as 4th squad. 


Each squad will fire on any target appearing in its A sector. When no target 
appears in the A sector it will fire on any target appearing in its B sector. In case 
a target appears in the A sector it will switch to such target unless otherwise 
ordered. 

************ 

Each squad should act as a unit, directing its fire into either its A or B sector, 
but not into both at the same time. In certain cases the fire of the automatic rifle 
may be directed into one sector (usually to the flank) while the remainder of the 
squad fires in the other. 

A combat group frequently includes one or more machine guns within its area. 
These guns have definite missions assigned. These missions should be known to the 
commander of the group, but the guns are not under his control. 

Observation and Sniping. 

(See Scouting and Patroling.) 

One or more observation posts are selected within the area occupied by the combat 
group. These posts are manned by scouts, in pairs. They should cover the 
entire field over which the fire of the combat group is distributed. Prior to the 
launching of the attack the scouts or snipers prevent reconnaissance by the enemy 
by killing or driving back his scouts and patrols. During the attack they fire upon 
the leaders of the attacking troops whenever they can be identified. For this 
purpose the scouts are equipped with glasses. 

Each sniper’s post is assigned a certain sector to cover, and range cards are pre¬ 
pared. The sector is divided into three parts; right, center and left. The limits 
of these sub-sectors are defined by features of the terrain, thus: 

Right sub-sector. Red barn to road junction. 

Center sub-sector. Road junction to tall pine. 

Left sub-sector. Tall pine to large oak. 








79 


DUTIES OF LEADERS IN DEFENSE 

Ranges to all prominent points are determined, thus: 

Rend in road, 200. Fence corner, 400. Shed, 600. Tall pine, 800. 

division points of the sub-sectors, and the prominent points to which ranges 
are determined are indicated on the range card. (Plate 40.) One scout with glasses 

studies the terrain and locates the 
targets. These he designates to the 
other, who directs fire upon them. 
For example (Plate 40) : “ Range, 
600.” Sniper looks to shed. 
“ Right.” He looks to right sub¬ 
sector. “ Right.” He looks to right 
of right sub-sector. “ Scout behind 
bush.” He picks up the target. 
Complete designation: “ Range, 

600. Right. Right. Scout behind 
bush.” 

The observer and sniper (rifle¬ 
man) change places about once 
every 20 minutes, and the pair 
should be relieved once every two 
hours, as the duty is arduous and 
exacting. Reports of observations 
are made in the following form: 

Time. Distance. Direction. Description. 

10:05 700 N. 7 0 E. Machine Gun 

(See Scouting and Patroling.) 

Sniping is a specialized form of musketry. In stabilized positions, where the 
posts are occupied for a considerable time, it may be developed to a high degree of 
efficiency and become an important element of the defense. To enable the snipers 
to fire on small and indistinct targets they may be equipped with telescopic sights. 

Listening posts in front of the firing line are established at dusk and relieved at 
daybreak. 

While awaiting the attack, the trenches are manned by sentries, the remainder of 
the men being allowed to rest, usually in shelters near enough to the firing line so 
that they can promptly reach their combat positions when called. 

Duties of Leaders in Defense. 

The duties of the leaders of the fire units and their assistants in defense are in 
general similar to those in attack. They have to do with the control of fire and the 
maintenance of fire discipline. 

By reason of the facts that the unit is stationary, that it has opportunity to 
familiarize itself with the terrain, and that it enjoys a degree of concealment and 
cover in its fire position, and in movement within the defensive area, most of the 
problems involved in the conduct of fire are greatly simplified. For example, ranges 
to all prominent points are known, targets are easily designated by means of 
reference points with which all are familiar, trenches allow of lateral movement 
of the leaders under cover, an ample quantity of ammunition may be provided in 
advance and additional ammunition is easily brought up and distributed, etc. 

In a proper plan of defense many emergencies are provided for in advance, and 
in the conduct of the defense the leaders have only to carry out plans already made. 
Accordingly the conduct of the defense does not require as high a state of discipline 
and training as that of the attack. Nevertheless the attacker can and will do un¬ 
expected things. Situations that have not been foreseen nor provided for will arise. 
In these situations the leaders will be called upon to exercise their judgment in 
estimating the situation and formulating plans to meet it. 

Counter attack. So far as conduct of fire is concerned the problems of the leaders 
of the fire units in the counter attack are the same as in the attack. 



Snipz^ arxd 
Observer 


Plate 40.—Sniper’s Range Card. 





80 


MUSKETRY 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is delaying action? 

2. What is the principal requirement of a position for delaying action? 

3. How is a delaying action conducted? 

4. What is the usual purpose of a delaying action ? 

5. What is a decisive action? 

6. Describe the scheme of defense by tactical areas? 

7. What is a combat group ? 

8. What are the functions of a combat group? 

9. What is the strength of a combat group? 

10. What is the size of the area which it occupies? 

11. What is meant by the passive defense and what does it include? 

12. What is the active defense? 

13. What is a counter attack? 

14. What is a strong point? 

15. How is a strong point organized? 

16. For what purposes are the supports of a strong point used? 

17. When and how should counter attacks be delivered? 

18. How are the reserves of the larger units in defense employed? 

19. To what extent does the organization of the ground affect the scheme of 
defense? 

20. What are the elements of a complete active defense? 

21. How and when are frontal and flanking fire employed in the defense? 

22. What is done if the attacker succeeds in gaining a foothold in a defensive 
area? 

23. What can you say with reference to observation, circulation and intercom¬ 
munication in a defensive position? 

24. Why is it easier to provide these facilities in defense than in attack? 

25. What is the minimum width of the field of fire desirable for a defensive 
position ? 

26. What is the objection to a firing line at a considerable height above its field 
of fire, in active defense? 

27. Why is this less objectionable in a delaying action? 

28. How may an infantry platoon be disposed in defense? 

29. Under what conditions might the entire platoon be deployed? 

30. May squads and sections be subdivided in defense? 

31. By whom is the general location of a defensive position determined? 

32. What may be the responsibilities of a platoon leader in the location of 
defenses ? 

33. Why is it desirable that a position be organized by the troops who are to 
defend it? 

34. Why is a plan of defense necessary? 

35. What is the defensive mission of a combat group? 

36. Who is responsible for the defense of unoccupied areas between combat 
groups ? 

37. How is the front of a combat group defended? 

38. How are its flanks and rear defended? 

39. What are the duties of the combat group commander in the organization of 
defense? 

40. To what extent does he co-operate with neighboring groups in the preparation 
of the defense? 

41. What information should be given to section and squad leaders? 

42. What is a range card ? 

43. What is meant by A sectors and B sectors. What is the purpose of these 
assignments ? 


COMBAT PRACTICE 


81 


44. How are the limits of fire sectors defined? 

45 - If a squad be firing- on a target in its B sector what action does it take when 
one appears in its A sector ? 

46. Give an example of typical orders to a squad in defense. 

47. Where is the automatic rifle of a squad in defense usually placed? Why? 

48. Does a combat group commander control a machine gun within his area? 

49. What is a sniper? What are the duties of snipers in defense? 

50. How is a sniper’s post organized and conducted ? 

51. Describe in detail the manner in which the observer in a sniper’s post 
designates a target to the rifleman. 

52. How often should snipers be relieved? 

53* Give an example of an observer’s report. 

54. What is a listening post ? Where is it located and under what conditions is it 
employed ? 

55. What are the general duties of leaders of fire units in the defense ? 

56. What advantages does the defense enjoy as compared to the attack? 

57. What are the problems of the fire unit leader in the counter attack? 

CHAPTER IX. 

COMBAT PRACTICE. 

Purpose and importance of combat practice. No system of musketry training 
is complete without combat practice. Such practice affords a test of the efficiency 
of a fire unit, with every condition of battle closely simulated, except the fire of the 
enemy. 

Combat practice is accordingly the last phase of musketry training. It consists in 
the solution of fire problems by squad and higher units, using ball ammunition when 
practicable. If the conditions are such that ball ammunition cannot be used, or in 
preliminary instruction, blank ammunition or simulated fire may be employed. The 
course should be ultimately completed by firing the problems with ball ammunition. 

By this training individuals are taught to co-operate in securing the maximum fire 
effect, and fire discipline is instilled to a degree not possible in any other method of 
instruction. Leaders are taught the practical application of fire direction and fire 
control. All are trained to adhere to the principles of the conduct of fire as given 
in this course, under conditions simulating those of actual combat as closely as is 
possible in time of peace. 

Program of training. In the preliminary problems the first lesson to be taught 
is that of the correct application of fire. This should be followed by exercises in¬ 
volving the combination of fire and movement, until the squads and the individual 
members thereof are thoroughly familiar with the methods constituting the fire 
tactics of infantry in battle. 

The mechanism of “ fire and movement ” having been acquired, advantage should 
be taken of every opportunity for application of or practice in the lessons that have 
been learned. For example, in the solution of tactical problems it will be determined 
what the fire units should do. The tactical solution may then well be followed by a 
further solution as to how the fire units are to carry out the approved plan of action. 
How will they move to their fire positions, how will the target be designated, how 
will fire be applied, how will fire and movement be combined to advance the 
attack, etc. ? 

In tactical exercises or maneuvers, the details of the conduct of the fire action are, 
from the point of view of the commanders or prospective commanders of tire units, 
‘of at least equal importance to the tactical solution of the problem. 

Landscape Targets. 

Practical instruction in the application of fire can best be given by the use of 
landscape targets. 


82 


MUSKETRY 



The targets may be mounted 
factory arrangement, especially 


Description and preparation. The land¬ 
scape target consists of a set of views of an 
imaginary landscape, printed in colors. These 
sets include from 3 to 10 sheets, each about 
24 x 30 inches, the sheets of each set forming 
a continuous panorama when matched. These 
colored sheets are known as the target sheets, 
and with each set is furnished several sets of 
the corresponding recording and harmonizing 
sheets. These latter are the same size as the 
target sheets, or of the same width and double 
the height. On the recording sheets is printed 
in black the outline of the landscape on the 
corresponding colored sheet. These target sets 
are furnished by the War Dept, on requisition 
to organizations or institutions. If they can¬ 
not be obtained, “ home-made ” targets may 
be prepared by anyone having a little artistic 
ability and ingenuity. 

The sheets are mounted on frames made of 
i"x2" dressed lumber, with knee braces at 
^ the corners. The frames are usually made 
E 60" wide, 25" high for the target sheets and 
as high as necessary for the recording sheets. 
The frames are then covered with “ target 
a cloth ” (which is furnished with the sets) 
£ tacked to their edges. It is better to paint the 
c frames, though not absolutely necessary. 

►3 The colored (target) sheets are then 
[ mounted as follows: Dampen the cloth with a 
^ thin coat of flour paste and let it dry for about 
h an hour. Apply a coat of paste similarly to 
£ the back of the paper sheet and let it dry about 
half an hour. Place the frame on some sur¬ 
face to prevent the cloth sagging. Apply a 
second coat of paste to the back of the paper, 
and mount it on the cloth, using a wet brush or 
sponge to smooth out wrinkles from the center 
to the edges. The recording sheets are not 
pasted, but merely tacked to their frames, as 
they are occasionally replaced by new sheets. 

The frames are then mounted on a vertical 
frame consisting of 4" x 4" posts of sufficient 
height, placed upright in the ground, 5 ft. 
center to center, with horizontal pieces of 
2" x 4" to support the small frames, and the 
necessary braces to insure stability. The small 
frames are supported by cleats and dowels (to 
allow easy removal). The recording panels 
are placed above the target panels, care being 
taken that the tops of all frames are on the 
same horizontal line. (See Plate 41.) 

The targets must never be exposed to the 
weather. When not in use they should be 
stored under cover, safe from rats and vermin, 
on sheets of heavy cardboard, a much less satis- 
for the recording panels, but which will answer. 













































































LANDSCAPE TARGETS 


83 


A safe back-stop for bullets must be provided. The firing-point is placed 1000 
inches from the target, and on a level with or slightly above the bottom of the target 
panels. It should be wide enough to accommodate at least a squad firing, with 
sufficient intervals—I to 2 yds. 

Harmonising the rifles. In firing on the landscape target the riflemen aim at the 
features of the terrain designated on the target panels, but the rifle sights are so 
adjusted that the shot groups appear not on the target panels, but at the correspond¬ 
ing positions on the recording sheets. 

The advantages of this procedure are: 

1. The target panels, which are more expensive and difficult to replace than the 
blank recording sheets, are not injured by the firing, as no shots strike them. 

2. Sheets of paper, large enough to take the anticipated shot groups, are attached 
to the recording sheet panels (with pasters at the corners) at the positions corre¬ 
sponding to the designated targets on the target panels. After firing, these sheets 
may be removed for examination and grading. They also form a permanent record 
of the firing which may be preserved if desired. 

In prder that the shot groups of shots aimed at the target panels may thus appear 
in the corresponding positions on the recording sheets, it is necessary to adjust the 
sights of the rifles. This process is known as harmonizing the rifles. It is accom¬ 
plished as follows. (Plate 41.) 

A row of black pasters, one for each man firing (usually 8), is placed, with 
equal intervals along a horizontal line on the upper edge of the target panel (F, 
Plate 41). If the sights of the service rifle be set at 1300 yards a shot fired at a 
range of 1000 inches (the range of the landscape target) will strike about 23 inches 
above a point correctly aimed at. In order to counteract the correction for drift 
at this range, it is necessary also to set off one point right windage for the 1000-inch 
range. 

A horizontal line is drawn on the recording sheet, 23 inches above the line of the 
bottoms of the black pasters, with a short vertical line ruled across it directly above 
each paster. This horizontal line is known as the “ harmonizing line,” and the 
vertical lines as “ windage lines.” 

The squad firing now set their sights as indicated, take careful aim, each at the 
bottom of the black paster corresponding to his position in the squad, and fire. The 
shots should strike at the intersections of the harmonizing line and the windage 
lines. The first shot of one man may strike, for example at G, Plate 41. A change 
of 100 yards in the sight setting corresponds to roughly 2 inches vertical change on 
the target, and one point of windage similarly corresponds to roughly 1 inch hori¬ 
zontally. The sight setting is corrected accordingly until the shots fall within half 
an inch of the intersections of the harmonizing line and the windage lines. When 
the rifles thus register they are said to be harmonized. 

Note.—I f the features of the landscape are outlined on the recording sheet, the height from 
the bottom of the pasters to the harmonizing line should be the same as the vertical distance 
from any feature on the target panel to the same feature on the recording sheet. This will 
be about 23 inches. If the recording sheets are blank the distance is made 23 inches. 

With rifles harmonized any shot fired at the target will strike the recording sheet 
at the harmonizing distance (about 23 inches) directly above the point on the target 
panel at which the shot was actually aimed. 

Harmonising with sub-caliber rifles or reduced charges. By proper sight adjust¬ 
ment any caliber .22 rifle or the service rifle with reduced charge may be harmonized 
in the same manner. It may be necessary with some types of sights to fire at a 
greater distance than 1000 inches, or to reduce the harmonizing distance. 

Shot groups. The collective cone of dispersion of average shots is practically a 
constant (see Theory of Fire). The areas cut from this cone or sheaf by vertical 
(or horizontal) planes vary with the range but are constant, for any one range. They 
are called the vertical (or horizontal) shot groups. Their size and shape and the 
distribution of the shots follow certain mathematical laws. 

Without going into the mathematics of the theory of fire it may be stated that 
at any range here is a certain vertical rectangle which will contain 50 per cent of 


84 


MUSKETRY 


/ 




/ 


T~- 


i>^ 


ll 



T 


* $ 

-f *• 

1— " 77 ? -' 

• • • 

- 



( M 


V) 


all shots of the vertical shot group. Outside of this is a larger rectangle which will 
contain 75 per cent of the shots. That is to say, if a squad of average shots v/ith 
sights properly set, fire at the same point on a vertical target, 50 per cent of their 
shots will fall within a rectangle of a certain size. When fire is distributed over a 
linear target 50 per cent of the shots will fall within a certain zone extending above 
and below the line of the target, and 75 per cent within a similar zone of greater 
width. 

These areas are called the 50 per cent and 
75 per cent shot groups, and their dimensions 
at a range of 1000 inches (the range of the ^, 
landscape target) are as shown in Plate 42. / ) 

They are used in scoring hits on the land- ( 
scape target. } ] 

Recording and scoring. The instructor' 1 
selects the target at which the squad is to fire. > 

This may be a single point (as a machine gun Y 
location), or a linear target on the target 
panel. The procedure is then as follows: 

1. If the target be a point. The instructor 

pastes on the recording panel a sheet of 
paper, and marks thereon a point at the 
harmonizing distance directly above the point 
of aim on the target panel. A curtain of 
target cloth is lowered over the recording 
panel, and the squad fires at the designated _ 

target. The instructor then removes the Plate 42. 

sheet pasted on the recording panel, on which F,ft 7 P er “ nt and 75 Per cent Rectangles, 
the shot group of the squad appears. He places the wire frame showing the areas 
of the 50 per cent and 75 per cent shot groups (at 1000 inch range) of average shots, 
upon the sheet, with its center at the point corresponding to the target, and traces 
the outlines of the areas. All shots falling within the 50 per cent area count 2, and 
all within the 75 per cent area (but without the 50 per cent) count 1. (Plate 42.) 

2. If the target be a line. The instructor traces on a sheet of paper the center line 
of the target as it appears on the target panel. This line may be straight or irregu¬ 
lar. On either side of this line he draws two lines parallel thereto at distances of 
14 and 2\ inches, each extending a like distance beyond the ends of the target. 
These lines fix the limits of the 50 per cent and 75 per cent zones of the target. 



Plate 43. 

Fifty per cent and 75 per cent Zones. 


These zones are divided into 10 (or any other desired number) of equal parts, by 
equidistant lines approximately perpendicular to the center line of the target. 























LANDSCAPE TARGETS 


85 


(Plate 43.) The sheet thus prepared is pasted on the recording sheet in its proper 
position, the curtain is lowered, the squad fires, and the record sheet is removed 
as before. 

This sheet is now scored for: 

a. Target designation. All shots within the 50 per cent (inner) zone count 2. 
All within the 75 P er cent zone but outside the 50 per cent zone count 1. 

b. Fire distribution. Divide the total number of shots fired by the number of 
parts into which the shot zones have been divided (usually 10). This gives the 
number of shots that should appear in each subdivision had the distribution been 
perfect. Any shots in excess of this number in any subdivision count zero, all 
remaining shots within the 75 per cent zone count 1. That is to say, in any sub¬ 
division all shots within the 75 per cent zone count one each, provided the total is 
not in excess of the total shots fired, divided by the number of subdivisions. 

Example of use of landscape target. (See Plate 41.) Fire orders: “ Range—.” 
(It is desirable to have range scales placed on targets as shown in Plate 41.) 
“ Doorway of house. Machine gun. Fire at will.” 

The squad fires at the target designated (Panel D), the shots recording on Panel 
E at D'. The plate shows the covering curtain cut away, exposing the recording 
sheet to view. In order to compare the shot group with standard shot group, the 
small wire frame (Plate 42) showing the average 50 per cent and 75 per cent shot 
groups is applied as shown. The instructor may explain the actual size of these shot 
groups had the target been at the range assumed. 

Advantages of the landscape target. As a means of instruction in combat firing 
the landscape target has a number of manifest advantages. 

It may be set up at any locality where there is a back-stop for the bullets, and 
1000 inches of fairly level ground. It very closely simulates the actual terrain in 
which combat firing takes place, and targets are designated in the same manner. 

The short range at which firing takes place makes it possible for instructor and 
students to examine the target immediately after the firing, to note and interpret 
the results thereof, and ascertain the reasons for errors. 

For example: A machine gun located at a certain road junction is designated and 
fired upon. The shot group is found at a similar locality to the flank. The 
importance of correct target designation, and the care that must be exercised is 
practically illustrated. Fire is directed upon a linear target—a line of skirmishers 
in a certain designated locality. Upon examination of the result, all shots are 
found grouped at one or two points, while the rest of the target is untouched. The 
necessity for care in the proper distribution of fire is at once apparent. 

Results on the landscape target are easily interpreted for other ranges, thus 
making the results of the firing an actual test of the efficiency of the firers at 
battle ranges. 


Tactical Problems involving Fire Action. 

Following the training problems: (a) On landscape targets; (b) with blank 
ammunition or simulated fire on the drill ground; and (c) with ball ammunition on 
the A (standard) target range; students or units undergoing training should be 
given simple tactical problems on diversified terrain, the solution of which involves 
the conduct of a fire action, either offensive or defensive, against an enemy simu¬ 
lated by targets. 

Upon the completion of the problem the instructor should conduct a critique upon 
the terrain, in which the following points should be covered: 

SPM -11 


86 


MUSKETRY 


1. Actions of the leaders. 

a. Was the mission accomplished? 

b. Did the leader formulate a simple, definite, workable plan? 

c. Was this the best possible plan? What were its good points? Its 
bad points ? 

d. Was the plan vigorously carried out ? 

e. Were the orders and actions of the leader such as to best carry out his 
own plan ? 

/. Outline a solution better calculated to accomplish the mission. 

2. Conduct of the troops. 

a. Discipline. Willingness and promptness with which they obeyed the 
orders of their leaders. 

b. Training. Skill shown by individuals and units in carrying out their 
assigned tasks, including scouts, squads, sections, platoons. 


Grading. 

Two elements enter into every problem of fire tactics, to-wit, fire and movement. 
The skill of the leaders and troops in combining these two elements within the 
limits of time and terrain imposed by the situation, is the index of their efficiency. 

Combat efficiency equals fire efficiency times maneuver efficiency. 

Fire efficiency. If a unit fires on a target for a certain time it will make a certain 
number of hits, in proportion to the excellence of its training, or according as each 
man knows the correct range and sets his sights properly, recognizes the target, is 
able to shoot accurately. The number of hits can be determined by inspection of the 
targets. 

If the troops do not use cover properly or if they are careless or inefficient in 
the execution of movements under fire, they will suffer casualties. This will result 
in a loss of fire power, depending upon the number of casualties, and the times at 
which they occur. This should be subtracted from the number of hits obtained. 

The umpire (instructor) will decide upon the number of casualties to be assessed 
because of improper use of cover, crowding, poorly executed movements, improper 
reconnaissance, etc., and the times at which they occur. 

Thus if a unit consists of 25 men, each man is assumed as responsible for 4 per 
cent of the total hits recorded. Assume that the unit suffers 7 casualties, and that 
these men were out of action an average of 30 per cent of the time between the 
first and last shots. Then the number of hits to be deducted will be roughly: 
7x4x0.30 = 8.5 per cent. Thus if the total number of hits were 213, 8.5 per cent 
of this or 18 hits, should be deducted because of casualties, leaving 195. 

If the hits are not properly distributed over the targets, the excess hits should 
be deducted, as explained previously. Thus assuming 213 minus 18, or 195 hits, 
and 16 targets, the number of hits on each should be 195 divided by 16, or 12. Thus 
the excess for each target is the number of hits on the target minus 12. The total 
excess is the sum of the excess for all 16 targets. Assume this to be 27 hits. Then 
the number of distributed hits is 195 — 27=168. 

If a unit can reduce a machine gun, or advance 300 yards against the enemy in 
10 minutes, it is at least twice as efficient as a unit which requires 20 minutes for 
the same task. (See Ex. 31, fire superiority problem.) Therefore to determine 
the fire power the number of distributed hits should be divided by the time required 
to make them. Assuming that the number of distributed hits is 168: 


Fire power = 


Distributed hits 
Fire time 



Maneuver efficiency. If two units are required to advance over 600 yards against 
enemy fire, each has the same maneuver task. If one unit accomplishes this task in 
15 minutes, and the other requires 30 minutes, the first unit may be regarded as 
having at least twice the maneuver efficiency of the second. 



COMBAT PRACTICE 


87 


In order to avoid fractions, let us assume the maneuver task 
by 1000. 


as represented 


Maneuver efficiency = Maneuver task _ loop = , 

Maneuver time 15 ’ 

Summary. To summarize; combat efficiency=fire efficiencyxmaneuver effi- 
ciency = hits — penalties - excess 1000 

fire time maneuver time 

In the example we have just discussed: 

Hits ..Total hits on targets... 213 

Penalties .Deductions on account of casualties. 18 

Excess .Hits improperly distributed. 27 

Fire time ...... Interval between first and last shots. 10 mins. 

Maneuver time. . Period from beginning to end of exercise. .. 15 mins 

Hence the above equation becomes for the unit considered: 

—- 10 7 x -75- =17x67=1139. 

If we assume that another unit had but 175 recorded hits, all other items being the 
same, its score would be: 


175-18-27 

10 


X 


IOOO 

15 


= 13x67=871. 


The score is less, as it should be, since the fire of the second unit was less efficient 
than that of the first, either by reason of inability of the leaders to correctly designate 
the target, inability of the men to recognize the target or set their sights properly, 
or less accurate fire, etc. 

Preparation of problems. In the preparation of problems as a basis for such 
exercises, the following hints may be of use. 

a. See the course in Tactics for correct tactical situations as a basis for problems. 

b. Make certain that the problem teaches certain definite duties in the conduct of 
fire, for example: 

Target designation. 

Use of cover. 

Advance by rushes or infiltration, etc. 

c. Write a situation in which the mission is clear. Construct the problem so that 
in accomplishing its mission the unit must perform certain definite duties in the 
conduct of fire. 

d. Place silhouette targets to represent the enemy in the places where they would 
actually be located, i. e., behind cover. To give depth to these targets in order that 
shots from the flank will appear as hits, they may be arranged as shown in Plate 44. 



e. To simulate enemy fire, men may be placed in pits on the flanks of the targets 
to fire blank cartridges at intervals. 

/. Targets may be made to appear and disappear as illustrated in Plate 45 * Com¬ 
munication may be had with the men in the pits by means of sound signals (bugle 
or whistle), pyrotechnics, buzzer or telephone. Two simple signals, “Commerce 
firing,’’ and “ Cease firing,” are all that are required. 





















88 


MUSKETRY 








Plate 45.—Operation of Silhouette Targets. 









































COMBAT PRACTICE 


89 


. The instructor will indicate the assumed effects of fire (fire superiority) as 
m Exercise 31, Appendix, or by instructions to the leader. 

Summary. Make the problem logical and realistic. See that it teaches a few 
definite lessons. Inspect the targets, and grade each unit firing the problem. 
Conclude with a critique on the field, of the leaders and units. 

Practical Work . 

Practical work for use in connection with this chapter is given in Exercises Nos. 
31 and 32. 


QUESTIONNAIRE. 

1. What is the value of combat practice? 

2. Of what does it consist? 

3. When should it be given ? 

4. In what order should the items of the program of training be arranged? 

5. Describe the landscape target and the method of preparing it for use. 

6. What are the recording sheets ? 

7. What is the range to be used with the landscape target ? 

8. What is meant by harmonizing rifles ? 

9. Why is it necessary ? 

10. Describe the procedure in harmonizing the rifles. 

11. What are the 50 per cent and 75 per cent rectangles and zones as used with 
the landscape targets? 

12. What are the dimensions of these areas at a range of 1000 inches? 

13. For what purpose are the shot groups used? 

14. How are shots recorded on the landscape target? 

15. How are the scores of the unit determined— 

a . When target is a single point ? 

b. When it has a linear dimension ? 

16. What are the advantages of the landscape target as a means of instruction? 

17. How are results on the landscape target converted into results at combat 
ranges ? 

18. In the critique following a tactical problem what points should be especially 
emphasized with reference to the conduct of the fire units and their leaders? 

19. How is the fire efficiency of a unit determined in a tactical problem? (Hits, 
penalties, excess hits.) 

20. How is the maneuver efficiency determined? (Maneuver task, maneuver 
time.) 

21. How is the general combat efficiency of the unit determined? Give the 
formula employed. 

22. What should a fire problem teach ? Give examples. 

23. How should the problems be drawn in order to accomplish this? 

24. How may the enemy be represented in fire problems? 

25. How may the fire of the enemy be simulated? 

26. How are the targets made to appear and disappear ? 

27. What are the means of communication with the target pits? 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 

Musketry is a practical subject, and practical demonstrations, exercises and tests 
are regarded as the most important part of the course.. The subject, fortunately in 
view of its great importance, lends itself to presentation in this manner. 

The exercises given will serve as a complete guide to the instructor in preparing 
the practical part of the course. Attention is invited to the test problems and the 



90 


MUSKETRY 


methods of grading by which they may be made competitive for individuals or units. 
A great variety of problems is possible and the instruction should not be allowed to 
become monotonous. 

During the course short definite periods should be devoted to a practical review 
(in the form of exercises), of work already covered. Upon the completion of the 
course practical work in Musketry should be continued as a matter of routine, quite 
as essential to the training of the soldier as infantry drill—if not more so. 

If the instructor is properly prepared in his subject five minutes at the opening 
of the drill period will be sufficient for a thorough review of the subject to be 
covered in the exercises for the day. Each exercise should conclude with com¬ 
ments by the instructor. 

Musketry field meets are a simple means of stimulating and maintaining interest 
in this most important subject, and they should be held at frequent intervals. They 
are as interesting, and will develop the spirit of competition as well as any other 
form of game. 

The events of the meet should take the form of simple test problems, similar to 
those given herein. The various events may be conducted simultaneously. For 
example if there be six squads competing the events might include: 

1. Sight setting contest. 4. Landscape target contest. 

2. Target designation contest. 5. Fire superiority contest. 

3. Range estimation contest. 6. Squad movement contest. 

The 1st squad would start with Event 1 and finish with Event 6. The 3rd squad 
would start with Event 3 and finish with Event 2, etc. Non-commissioned officers 
assist in conducting the events. Teams of non-commissioned officers may be formed. 

Attention is also invited to the value of the sand table in the instruction of 
students or enlisted men in the principles governing the conduct of fire. Such in¬ 
struction may, of course, be continued the year round. 

The development of competition is made possible by grading. It stimulates 
interest, increases the value of the instruction, and affords at the same time a test of 
the state of training of the unit. 


Exercise 1. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 

Purpose: 1. To show the trajectory of a bullet. 

2. To show the concentrated sheaf of a squad. 

3. To show the distributed sheaf of a squad. 

Equipment: One expert rifleman. 

One squad completely armed. 

120 rounds of tracer ammunition. 

15 silhouette targets. 

Place: Target range. 

Procedure: 1. Have an expert rifleman fire three rounds of tracer ammunition at 
silhouette targets at ranges of 100, 300, 500, 700 and 1000 yards. 

Comments: Call attention to the maximum ordinate, the curvature of the tra¬ 
jectory, danger space, before the shots are fired. 

Note. —Have the class formed slightly to one side and in rear of the rifleman. Pick an 
over-cast day or fire late in the afternoon to get the best results. Have the ground from the 
rifleman to the targets as level as possible. 

2. Have the squad fire five rounds of tracer ammunition each at a single silhouette 
target 500 or 600 yards away. (Auto-rifle to fire 20 rounds.) 

Comments: Call attention to the size of the sheaf and beaten zone. 

Note. —Have squad drilled to fire at the proper rate per minute (13 minus the range). Have 
their fire adjusted. Have the corporal control fire, not take part in it. 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


91 


3. Have the squad fire 5 rounds of tracer ammunition each at a line of 8 sil¬ 
houettes at 5 yard intervals. (Automatic rifle to fire 20 rounds.) Have the targets 
500 or 600 yards away. 

Comments: Call attention to the distributed sheaf and the covering of the target. 

Note.— Have the squad carefully drilled to distribute its fire over this target in the correct 
manner. The corporal will not fire. 

Exercise 2. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 

Purpose: 1. To show the effect of concentrated fire—(beaten zone)—of a squad. 

2. To show the effect of distributed fire—(beaten zone)—of a squad. 

Equipment: One landscape target complete. 

One infantry squad completely equipped. 

120 rounds of ammunition. 

Place: 1000" range. 

Procedure: 1. Have the squad fire at the door of a house or other small target 
on the landscape. (5 rounds per man, 20 for the auto-rifle.) 

Comments' Call attention to the number of hits within the 50 per cent and 75 
per cent rectangles. 

2. Have squad fire at fence row, edge of woods, or linear target on the landscape. 
(5 rounds per man, 20 rounds for auto-rifle.) 

Comments: Call attention to the number of hits within the 50 per cent and 75 
per cent zones. Call attention to distribution. 

Note. —Have rifles carefully harmonized and squad trained in fire distribution. 

Exercise 3. Demonstration. Theory of Fire. 

Purpose: 1. To show the effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire is 
3 shots per minute. 

2. To show the effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire is 7 shots per 
minute. 

3. To show the effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire is 10 shots per 
minute. 

Equipment: One section of infantry, equipped with rifles. 

Three screen targets, each 3 feet high and 40 yards long. 

Twenty-four silhouette targets spaced 5 yards apart on the screens. 480 rounds 
of ammunition. 

Place: The 800-yard firing point on target range. 

Procedure: The targets are placed on the 200-yard firing point. The section is 
deployed on the 800-yard firing point opposite the target on the right. Each man 
traverses the target on the right one minute, firing at the rate of three shots per 
minute. 

The section is deployed on the 800-yard firing point opposite the middle target. 
Each man traverses the middle target one minute, firing at the rate of 7 shots 
per minute. 

The section is deployed on the 800-yard firing point opposite the target on the 
left. Each man traverses the target on the left one minute, firing at the rate of 
10 shots per minute. 

The class inspects the results of the firing. 

Comments: From this demonstration the class will see: 

1. The effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire was 3 shots per minute. 
(Under the correct rate.) 

2. The effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire was 7 shots per minute. 
(Correct rate.) 

3. The effect of fire at 600 yards when the rate of fire was 10 shots per minute. 
(Over the correct rate.) 

The actual results of such an exercise, fired by a section of marksmen, follow: 


92 


MUSKETRY 


Purpose: To show the effect of fire at 300 yards, when the rate of fire is (a) 
5 shots per minute, (b) 10 shots per minute, and (c) 15 shots per minute. 

Procedure: A section of infantry equipped with rifles was deployed on the 500- 
yard firing point, firing at the rate of 5 shots per minute at a target 3 feet high and 
40 yards long, with 8 silhouette targets spaced 5 yards apart, representing a squad 
deployed and in the prone position. Each man traversed his fire over the target. 
The following was the result: 

Range, 300 yards. 

Time, 1 minute. 

Rate of fire, 5 shots per minute. 

Rounds fired, 119. 

Hits on silhouettes, 29. 

Hits on screen, 54. 

The same section then fired at the same target, at the rate of 10 shots per minute, 
each man traversing the target, with the following results: 

Range, 300 yards. 

Time, 1 minute. 

Rate of fire, 10 shots per minute. 

Rounds fired, 208. 

Hits on silhouettes, 45. 

Hits on screen, 74. 

The same section then fired at the same target, attempting to fire at the rate of 
15 shots per minute, many, however, not being able to keep up the rate after 
30 seconds. The following was the result: 

Range, 300 yards. 

Time, 1 minute. 

Rate of fire, 15 shots per minute. 

Rounds fired, 241. 

Hits on silhouettes, 34. 

Hits on screen, 68. 

After the section had a little more practice in firing at the rate of 15 shots per 
minute they again fired at the same target at the rate of 15 shots per minute with 
the following results: 

Range, 300 yards. 

Time, 1 minute. 

Rate of fire, 15 shots per minute. 

Rounds fired, 320. 

Hits on silhouettes, 21. 

Hits on screen, 91. 

The results obtained in the exercise show conclusively that up to a certain rate at 
a given range the hits can be increased by increasing the rate of fire, but that if 
that rate is exceeded, the number of hits is reduced, regardless of the amount of 
ammunition expended within the given time. 

Exercise 4. Demonstration. 

Effect of Errors in Range Estimation. 

Purpose: To show the effect of errors in estimating the range. 

Equipment: Expert rifleman, with rifle. 

60 rounds of tracer ammunition. 

3 silhouette targets. 

Place: Target range. 

Procedure: Place silhouette targets at ranges of 300, 500, and 700 yards. Have 
an expert rifleman fire five shots at target 1, (correct range 300 yards). Have 
same man fire 5 shots at the same target with a sight setting of 100 yards. Point 
out the effect of error in range and compare with the table (ante). Have the same 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


93 


man fire 5 shots at the same target with a sight setting of 500 yards. Point out the 
eliect of error in range estimation. 

Repeat this procedure for the other two targets. 

Exercise 5. Range Estimation. 

Purpose: To apply a correct method of range estimation. 

Equipment: Pencil and pad for each member of the class. 

Place: Any moderately diversified terrain. 

Procedure: a. Place two flags 100 yards apart. Look at this distance from 
different angles and then from different ranges. Note how it appears when looking 
up hill and looking down hill. 

b. Select an accessible area and pick six or seven places as observation points. 
Lay off from each point ranges to six objects (flags, targets, etc.). These should 
vary from 300 to 1200 yards. At the first point stake off the 100-yard divisions for 
each range. 

c. Move the class to observation station number 1, review carefully the method 
of estimating radges. Estimate range number 1, from this point. Have the 
estimates recorded, then send a man to each 100-yard division. Have the class 
check their estimates. (Note: This range should be under 500 yards.) Repeat for 
other 5 ranges. (Last 3 should be over 500 yards.) Have man mark half way 
point in these cases. 

d. Proceed to stations 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 and record ranges at each as at station 1. 

e. Announce correct range after each estimation. Do not check up on 100-yard 
division points, but discuss each range and be sure that the students are applying 
the prescribed system of range estimation. 

Exercise 6. Range Estimation. 

Purpose: 1. To apply a correct method of range estimation. 

2. To show the accuracy of averaged estimates. 

3. To determine the location of a target at a given range. 

Equipment: Pencil and pad for each member of the class. 

Place: Any moderately deversified terrain. 

Procedure: a. Divide the class into squads and sections, each with a leader. 

b. Select a prominent feature of the terrain, not over 400 yards distant, and cause 
each member of the class to estimate the range and record same on his pad. Thirty 
seconds will be allowed for this. 

c. Cause each squad leader to average the individual estimates of his squad and 
record on his pad. Then cause each section leader to average the estimates of his 
squads. Average the estimates of the sections. 

d. Announce the true range, and have the hundred-yard division points marked 
by flags. Let each man check his own estimate and note his error. 

e. Compare individual, squad, section and total estimates. Point out that in 
general the average estimate of a section will be closer to the truth than the average 
estimate of a squad, and that the average estimate of the entire class will be closer 
than that of any squad or section. 

f. Cause the class to look in the direction of a red flag about 750 yards distant. 
The instructor then announces, “ Range, 400 yards. What do you see at that 
range?” (Note, there should be some prominent feature of the terrain at the 
range stated.) The students record the answer on their pads. 

g. Now place flags at the locality indicated, and the hundred-yard division points 
between it and the point of observation, and cause the students to check their 
estimates 

Comments: The foregoing exercises may be repeated, with variations, as fre¬ 
quently as opportunity affords. The necessary preparation consists in measuring 
ranges from the observation points selected, placing concealed stakes at the 100- 
yard division points, providing marker flags, and instructing men how to place them. 

The instructor should call attention to the wide variation in early individual esti¬ 
mates (without mentioning names), and how this is rapidly reduced as a result of 

practice. 


94 


MUSKETRY 


Exercise 7. Test. Range Estimation. 

Purpose: To determine the proficiency of the class in range estimation. 

Equipment: Pencil and pad for each member of the class. 

Place: Any point on the terrain convenient for observation. 

Procedure: At a signal from the instructor a group of men suddenly appear at 
some point of the terrain. They remain visible for ten seconds. The members of 
the class are required to make and record their estimates within 30 seconds of the 
time the group first appears. 

In like manner cause the class to estimate and record ranges to 5 or more points 
indicated by trees, flags, individual men, target, etc. 

Each member records his estimates on his pad, signs his name and turns the 
sheet in to the instructor. 

The instructor determines each student’s score for each estimate from the table 
ante. The total score of each student is then found, and the class arranged in order 
of proficiency as determined by the test, thus : 


Correct range. 

Student’s estimate. 

Score. 

900 

950 

78 

850 

900 

80 

800 

850 

82 

700 

700 

IOO 

500 

600 

69 

Total score 


. 409 


Note.— All ranges are estimated in yards. In using the table to determine scores do not 
interpolate for estimates other than even fifty or one hundred yards, but take from the table 
the number of hits corresponding to the nearest tabular range. 

Exercise 8. Calibration of Sights and Fingers. 

Purpose: To secure accuracy and uniformity in lateral measurement with the use 
of the fingers or the sights of the rifle. 

Equipment: Line 20 feet long, 5 feet from and parallel to the ground, with 
12-inch intercepts, painted or otherwise marked, on the side of a building. 

“ Station line ” indicated at a distance of 20 feet from the building and parallel to 
the side. 

Rifle for each man participating. 

Place: Outside any suitable building. 

Procedure: The class is formed in single rank on “ Station line ” and the necessity 
for uniformity in the use of fingers or the sights of a rifle for measuring lateral 
distances is explained. 

The method of securing uniformity in the use of the fingers or rifle sight is then 
illustrated by the instructor with the aid of the horizontal line with 12-inch inter¬ 
cepts, as follows: The rifle is placed at the shoulder pointing toward the horizontal 
line, head is moved backward or forward on comb of piece until sight leaf exactly 
covers one intercept. Position of cheek on comb is firmly fixed in the mind. 

Right fore-finger is brought to a vertical position in front of the eye and moved 
backward and forward until it exactly covers one intercept. It is then dropped to 
the side without changing the position of the elbow or the wrists, and its point of 
contact with the body fixed in the mind. He then places the hand on this point of 
contact (on his thigh), and endeavors to bring the fore-finger before the eye so as 
to habitually cover one intercept, or the hand is held at full length and a particular 
width of hand, fingers or knuckles, etc., covering 1, 2 or 3 intercepts (50 or 100 or 
150 mils) used for measuring laterally. 

Each individual of the class calibrates his rifle sight with the 12-inch intercepts. 
The exercise is repeated until proficiency is reached. 

Rifles are laid aside and each individual calibrates his fingers with the intercepts 
in the approved manner. The exercise is repeated several times. 




PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


95 


Comments: By this exercise the students are shown: 

1. Method of securing accuracy and uniformity in the use of the finger or sight 
leaf in lateral measurement. 

2. As individuals, the exact position of the fingers or the cheek on the comb of 
the rifle necessary to “ block off ” a lateral distance of 50 mils. 


Exercise 9. Target Designation. 

Purpose: 1. To teach military and topographical terms. 

2. To teach accurate description and quick recognition of targets from proper 
designation. 

Equipment: Plate 11 of text, or landscape targets similarly arranged. 

Place: Class room. 

Procedure: Part 1. Using Plate 11 thoroughly review terrain nomenclature and 
military terms. 

Explain that for the purpose of these exercises the 50 mil= 1 sight, scale is placed 
in the upper corner and a range scale along the edge of the plate. 

Part 2. The instructor will give the following target designations and require the 
student in each case to locate the target by placing his pencil point or a pin upon it. 
Plate 11 I. Range, 250. 

(upper) : Target; sign post, machine gun. 

2. Range, 350. 

Target; at base of second telegraph pole from road junction, 
sniper. 

3. Range, 650. 

Target; road junction, patrol. 

4. Range, 550. 

Target; tree on crest at end of fence, machine gun. 

5. Range, 500. 

Target; on near bank of stream, machine gun. 

6. Range, 700. 

Reference; brow of cliff on right bank of river. One sight left. 
Target; machine gun. 

7. Range, 500. 

Reference; gable of house. 

Target; infantry squad on crest, extending 1 sight left. 

8. Range, 750. 

Reference; road center. Two sights left. 

Target; machine gun at edge of wood. 

9. Range, 400. 

Reference; when fence to right of river disappears over crest. 
One sight right. 

Target: Skirmish line extending 2 sights right. 

Part 3. Require students to write designations for the following: 

Plate 11 I. Designate a patrol just below the arrow marked topographical 
(upper) : crest. 

2. Designate machine gun in upper right window of house just visible 

beyond crest. 

3. Designate machine gun at a point where vertical line marked 

“ ridge crest ” cuts the nearest wood line at edge of nearest 
woods. 

4. Designate line of infantry along crest between arrows at bottom 

of vertical lines marked “ ridge ” and “ road junction.” 


96 


MUSKETRY 


5. Designate infantry in patch of woods to the right of arrowhead on 

line marked “ road fork.” « 1 » 

6. Designate enemy sniper in ditch, at arrow point under “ culvert. 

7. Designate skirmish line extending from junction of two fences at 

edge of road in foreground, one-half the distance to sign post. 
Plate 11 8. Designate cavalryman fording stream at arrow point under word 

(lower) “ ford.” 

9. Designate machine gun nest in woods at arrow point under word 

u _ 

cover. 

10. Designate machine gun at arrow point under words “ branch or 
run.” 

Landscape targets may be used to advantage in these exercises. Series A, B, and 
C are issued by the War Department. See Chapter VIII; combat practice. 

The foregoing exercises are examples. Any plate or photograph of terrain can 
be used. 


Exercise 10. Demonstration. Mechanical Target Designation. 

Purpose: To demonstrate the use of the tracer bullet as a means of target 
designation. 

Equipment: Four expert riflemen with their equipment; 80 rounds tracer am¬ 
munition. 

12 E targets. 

1 red flag. 

Place: Target range. 

Procedure: Have one rifleman representing section leader on military crest. 
Three riflemen representing scouts of section are deployed over a front of approxi¬ 
mately 120 yards in front of the section leader. 

The class will be formed in one or more lines on a narrow front 15 yards in rear 
of the section leader facing the range. The questionnaire on the demonstration will 

be issued to each member of the class. Two minutes will be allowed in which to 

! 

read the questionnaire. Each scout beginning at the right will then fire in succes¬ 
sion five shots at the first target. Section leader will then fire five shots at the first 
target. All scouts and the section leader will then fire five shots at the first target. 
The right scout will then immediately fire five shots at the second target firing at 
the flanks in succession, right then left. The remaining scouts and section leader 
will then fire five shots at second target distributing their fire. Scouts and section 
leader then fire on third target in the same manner and sequence as on targets one 
and two. As the firing progresses the instructor will call the attention of the class 
to the fact that when nearly in rear of the line of fire tracers are readily seen, but 
that when off to the flank of the man firing visibility decreases. 

Comments. Point out that concentrated and distributed targets have been desig¬ 
nated by means of the tracer bullet. One concentrated and one distributed target 
were directly to the front. One target was to the left front and the line of fire of 
the right scout made a considerable angle with the front. The answers to the 
questionnaire, considered in connection with the impression made by the demon¬ 
stration, will give the idea of the possibilities and limitations of target designation 
by means of the tracer bullet. The use of the tracer as a means of designation is 
further limited in that it cannot be employed until troops have been committed to 
combat and the commander is ready for the fire fight to commence. Conditions of 
light and background will also materially affect feasibility of designating targets by 
this method. 

Note.— Targets should be carefully hidden. 





PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


97 


Questionnaire. 

Tracer bullet demonstration. The purpose of this demonstration is to show the 
use of the tracer bullet as a means of target designation by (i) scouts, (2) section 
leader. Targets will be designated by the scouts who are in front and by the section 
leader at the red flag. You are the section. Each pair of scouts will fire five shots 
apiece at the target. All three will fire five shots apiece at the target. Section leader 
will fire five shots at the target. Each student will write answers to questions below: 

Target 1. a. Did you know where the target was ? 

b. Did you locate it before the tracer was fired ? 

c. Did the tracer of the right scout point it out? 

d. Did the tracer of the center scout point it out? 

e. Did the tracer of the left scout point it out ? 

/. Did the tracers from all scouts point it out ? 

g. Did the tracers from the section leader point it out? 

Target 2. a. Did you know where the target was ? 

b. Did you locate it before the tracer was fired ? 

c. Did the tracer from the right scout point it out? 

d. Did the tracer from the center scout point it out? 

e. Did the tracer from the left scout point it out ? 

f. Did the tracers from all scouts point it out ? 

g. Did the tracers from the section leader point it out? 

Target 3. a. Did you know where the target was ? 

b. Did you locate it before the tracer was fired ? 

c. Did the tracer of the right scout point it out? 

d. Did the tracer of the center scout point it out ? 

e. Did the tracer of the left scout point it out ? 

f. Did the tracers from all the scouts point it out? 

g. Did the tracers from the section leader point it out? 

Exercise 11. Target Designation. 

Purpose: 1. To show the method of teaching military and topographical terms. 

2. To show method of visual training. 

3. To show training methods in: Range estimation; concise and accurate de¬ 
scription of targets; quick, accurate interpretation of descriptions. 

Equipment: Each member of the class: I. Rifle and bayonet. 

2. Pad and pencil. 

On ground : 1.3 men. 

2. 4 flags. 

3. 16 E targets. 

Place: Selected observation point. 

Procedure: Class will be organized into squads and formed near a crest. In¬ 
structor will then call upon members of the class to point out the following features 
on the terrain; skyline, crest, military crest, ridge, gentle slope, draw, road-fork, 
edge of woods, sparse woods, thick woods, lone tree, cover, etc. See Plate it 

Instructor will direct that a limited area of the terrain be observed for military 
features, men, targets, etc., at the end of two minutes the front rank will be faced 
about and will describe to the rear rank the mental pictures they have formed of the 
terrain. In a like manner the rear rank will observe another sector of the terrain. 
(For method of searching ground see Scouting and Patroling.) 

Physical designation. Squad leaders will be directed to report to instructor. Class 
will be faced to rear. Instructor will signal men representing first target to appear, 
and wave a flag. 

Instructor will point out the target (but will not designate it) to squad leaders. 
They will be instructed to note the position of the target so that they can designate 
it when it disappears. As soon as target is understood by all squad leaders it is 


98 


MUSKETRY 


* 


signaled down, and the instructor directs: “ Return to your squads, face them about, 
have each man using his rifle and bayonet rest designate the target as they under¬ 
stand it from your description.” 

Simple designation. The class is called to attention and directed to take pad and 
pencil and to estimate the ranges and write designations for a number of targets. 
Different members of the class are called upon to read their designations after which 
the approved designation will be given by the instructor. Instructor has a flag raised 
at each target as he signals. 

The targets should be such that they can be designated by simple description. (No 
independent reference point.) 

See Part I, Exercise 9, for examples of such targets and for illustrations of the 
types of terrain to use. 

Vary this work by giving the designation and having the student recognize the 
target. Check on their recognition by having them aim their rifles at the target. 

Reference point designation. The targets for this exercise should be such that 
they can be best designated by using a reference point and finger or sight measure¬ 
ments. 

See Part 3, Exercise 9, for examples of such targets and their designation. 

Vary this work as before by having the student recognize targets from instructor’s 
designation. 


Note.— Always give an approved designation for each target. 


Comments: In this exercise the students have been shown the methods employed 
in teaching military and topographical terms, visual training, range estimation, target 
designation, and quick accurate interpretations of designations. In practice it will 
be found that once designation by reference point has been taken up men will have a 
tendency to always use reference point designations. This tendency should be curbed. 
Reference points should be used only when necessary. Simple designations should 
always be used when possible. The simpler the designation the better, so long as 
it accurately locates the target. 


Exercise 12. Test. Target Designation. 

Purpose: To determine the proficiency of the class in target designation. 

Equipment: Marker flags. 

Place: Any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The class is conducted to the site selected and organized into squads. 
The student to be tested acts as leader of a squad. The squad (except the leader) 
is deployed in line at intervals of about 5 yards, facing to the rear. The leader, in 
position behind the squad, faces the front. The instructor signals to his assistants, 
and a linear target is outlined by displaying a flag at each flank. The squad leader 
is allowed a reasonable time (not to exceed two minutes) to fix the position of the 
target in his mind. When he states that he has done so the flags are withdrawn. 

The squad is now faced to the front, and the leader designates the target to them, 
using any method of designation except tracer bullets. Each man of the squad 
takes the prone position, places his bayonet as a rest for his rifle, sets his sights 
at the designated range, and aims his rifle at the point at which he would fire his 
first shot. Three minutes are allowed for this, from the instant that the flags are 
withdrawn. The instructor then calls, “ Time.” The members of the squad rise 
and move to the rear, leaving their rifles in position. The instructor checks the 
points at which the rifles are aimed, and grades the squad leader according to the 
accuracy of his designation. He may also grade the members of the squad on target 
recognition. The grade (for the leader) is determined as follows: If there are 
7 rifles and 5 are properly aimed, the grade would be; 500/7 = 71.4. It is to be 
noted that the leader is. not graded on his theoretical designation of the target, but 
on the correctness of aim of his men. It is not sufficient for the leader to merely 
designate the target. He must see that every man of his squad recognizes the target 
designated, and aims correctly. 




PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


99 


Several students may be tested simultaneously, using the same, or varied targets, 
according to the number of assistant instructors available. 

Comments: By this exercise the ability of the student to properly designate a 
target and to see that each man recognizes it, is tested. The ability of the men of the 
squad to recognize a target from a leader’s description is also tested. 

Except for the first shot of each man this method is, of course, no test of proper 
distribution of fire. 

Exercise 13. Demonstration. Fire Distribution. 

Purpose: To show the manner in which a squad distributes its fire over a linear 
target by the method of traversing. 

Equipment: One infantry squad, completely equipped. 

120 rounds tracer ammunition. 

8 silhouette targets. 

Place: Target range. 

Procedure: Place the 8 silhouette targets in line at 5- to 10-yard intervals. Deploy 
the squad at a range of 500 or 600 yards from the targets. Have one rifleman 
distribute his fire over the targets, using tracer ammunition, and firing 10 to 12 shots. 
He will commence with the target corresponding to his position in the squad, traverse 
to the right, thence beginning at the left target, back to the right again. Have 
the automatic rifleman similarly traverse his fire over the targets. Then have the 
entire squad fire for one minute, distributing their fire over the targets. 

Comments: The instructor, during this demonstration, should call attention to the 
mechanism of distribution. He should point out the resulting even distribution of 
the large volume of fire of the automatic rifle, and of both the good and poor shots. 
The instructor may cause one man to set his sight 300 yards too high so that his 
shots pass over the targets, pointing out to the students that this simply reduces 
the volume of effective fire of the squad, but does not leave any part of the target 
uncovered. 

Exercise 14. Demonstration. Fire Distribution. 

Purpose: To show how the fire of a squad is distributed over a linear target. 

Equipment: One infantry squad, completely equipped. 

120 rounds ammunition. 

Landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

Procedure: The instructor selects and designates a linear target on one of the 
target panels of the landscape target. The squad then fires as in Exercise 13, first a 
rifleman, next the automatic rifle, and finally the entire squad as a unit. The re¬ 
mainder of the class observes the fire. 

Recording sheets are placed as explained in chapter on Combat Practice. After 
each phase of the problem the instructor and students examine the recording sheet, 
and the instructor comments thereon, as in Exercise 13. A separate record sheet 
may be used for each phase of the firing if desired. When the squad fires the 
instructor may cause one man to set his sights improperly, as in Exercise 13. 

Exercise 15. Fire Discipline. Arm Signals. 

Purpose: Instruction in arm signaling. 

Place: Parade ground, campus or any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The instructor forms the class in double rank. The front rank moves 
to front about 40 paces and faces about. Both ranks then take intervals of about 
5 yards, front and rear rank men opposite each other. 

The instructor explains that arm signals are used when the voice is inadequate for 
giving orders, and that signals are dangerous if improperly used. Two rules must 
be invariably followed : (a) The signal must be repeated back by receiver to sender; 
(b) both signals (forward and back) must be given carefully and properly, even at 


100 


MUSKETRY 


a personal risk to the signalers. The duty of receiving, interpreting and carrying 
out signals intended for the squad falls upon the squad leader, and every man must 
be able to act as squad leader in emergency. 

The instructor now explains and demonstrates each of the signals given in the 
drill regulations and in the courses in Scouting and Patroling and Musketry. After 
each demonstration the signal is given by each front rank man to his rear rank man, 
and repeated back by the latter. Signals are given both in the standing and in the 
prone positions. 

Exercise 16. Demonstration. Fire Discipline. 

Purpose: To show correct methods of taking positions and of movements by the 
individual in combat. 

Place: Parade ground or other suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The instructor will demonstrate in succession the following positions 
and movements: 

1. Prone position, (a) With rifle, firing, (b) With rifle, not firing, (c) Without 
rifle. 

2. Prepare to rush and rush. With rifle. 

3. The run. With rifle. 

4. To drop to the prone position from a run, with rifle. Without rifle. 

5. Creeping. 

6. Crawling. 

Following each demonstration the members of the class will practice the position 
or movement. One man moves or takes position while his front (or rear) rank 
file checks and coaches him. They then change places. The instructor points out 
any errors he observes. 

Comments: These positions and movements are described in Scouting and Patrol¬ 
ing (Chapter II and Exercise 4). The Practical Exercises in the use of cover in 
Scouting and Patroling should also be repeated at this time. 

Exercise 17. Fire Discipline. 

Purpose: To illustrate a quick and correct method of setting sights. 

Equipment: Rifle and belt for each man participating. 

Place: Parade ground, or any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The instructor explains to the class the necessity for correct and 
rapid sight setting, and that this must ordinarily be done in the prone position. 
He takes the prone position, demonstrates and explains the setting of the sight. 

The class is formed in two ranks, facing each other at about 3 paces distance, with 
about a half pace between men in the same rank. The instructor calls ranges and 
the students set their sights at the ranges indicated. The time allowed is gradually 
reduced until the the students are able to set their sights in 10 seconds. 

Test: Having completed this exercise the instructor tests the efficiency of the 
students as follows: 

The class is organized into squads. One squad at a time is deployed at one pace 
intervals, prone, 15 yards in front of the instructor, facing him. The instructor then 
announces or signals a range, and each man sets his sight. At the end of 10 seconds 
the instructor calls, “ Time.” The squad rises and comes to “ port arms.” The 
sights are checked by the instructor or his assistant. For each sight correctly set a 
score of ten is awarded. Failure to set the sight properly or to complete the setting 
within the time allowed means no score for that range. The procedure is repeated, 
ten ranges being given, five by command and five by signal. Total possible score 
for individual, 100. 

Exercise 18. Test. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To test the proficiency of the student in recognizing and designating 
targets and applying fire thereto. 

Equipment: For each member of class: Rifles and automatic rifles in proper 
proportions. 







PRACTICAL EXERCISES 101 

Ammunition: io rounds per rifle (5 for harmonizing) ; 25 rounds for auto, 
rifle (5 for harmonizing) ; total, 95 rounds per squad. 

One landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

Procedure: The class is organized into squads. Each squad will be given the 
test separately. 

The instructor outlines a situation about as follows: 

“ A hostile machine gun has been located during an advance, by the scouts.” 

The scouts of the squad are placed in position at the firing point. The assumed 
location of the hostile machine gun is pointed out to them. The remainder of the 
squad is deployed about 100 yards in rear of the line of scouts, and advances thereto 
by infiltration (one man at a time). Upon the arrival of each man of the squad 
upon the line of scouts he obtains the target designation from the man nearest him 
already on the line, and opens fire. 

At the conclusion of the firing the instructor will compute the score made by the 
squad, as shown by recording sheet. Each hit within the limits of the 50 per cent 
rectangle counts two; each within the 75 per cent rectangle counts one. 

The exercise is repeated for each squad. 

Comments: Similar problems, involving also a distribution of fire over a linear 
target, may be given. Select a position on the landscape target, having a front of at 
least 10 inches (at 1000 inches range, the range at which all firing on this target is 
executed). The selected part of the target is divided into any number of equal 
parts by vertical lines, ten parts is a convenient number. In scoring the fire of the 
squad on this target, distribution is taken into account as follows: Divide the total 
number of shots fired by the squad (including the automatic rifleman) by the num¬ 
ber of horizontal divisions of the target within the 75 per cent zone. Ths will give 
the average number of hits possible in each division, provided the distribution has 
been perfect. If there be more than this number in any division the excess shots are 
scored zero. For example: The target is divided into ten horizontal parts, and 
70 shots are fired at it. If every shot is a hit and the distribution is perfect, there 
should be 7 hits in each division. If any division contains more than this the dis¬ 
tribution is faulty, and the excess hits are not scored. 

Exercise 19. Landscape Target Firing. 

Purpose: To show the method of designating a concentrated target. 

To give practice in the issue of fire orders. 

Equipment: Rifle and 5 rounds of ammunition for each man firing. 

Automatic rifle and 20 rounds of ammunition per squad. 

Landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

Procedure: The instructor designates a concentrated target (point) on the target 
panel to the leader of each squad. The designation is not given by the instructor to 
other members of the squad. The squad leader designates the target and gives the 
fire orders to his squad. The squad fires and the resulting shot group is taken from 
the recording panel. Little comment is required to emphasize the need of proper 
target designation by the squad leader and the ability of the men to recognize the 
target. The instructor calls attention to the effect of concentrated fire on a con¬ 
centrated target. 

Note.—T he squads into which the class or unit is organized, fire in succession. Rifles must, 
of course, have been harmonized as a preliminary to this exercise. 

Exercise 20. Landscape Target Firing. 

Purpose: To show the method of designating a linear target. 

To give practice in the issue of fire orders. 

Equipment: Rifle and 10 rounds of ammunition for each man firing. 

Automatic rifle and 40 rounds of ammunition per squad. 

Landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

SPM-12 


102 


MUSKETRY 


Procedure: The instructor designates a linear target to the leader of each squad 
as its turn comes to fire. The leader gives the necessary fire orders to his squad, 
and the squad fires, distributing its fire over the target. Each man individually 
traverses over tfle entire target. On the completion of the firing the record sheet 
is taken down and the squad graded on the results of the firing. The instructor 
points out to the squad the efficiency with which they have distributed their fire, the 
need for proper distribution, and the method of grading. (The manner of preparing 
the record sheet and grading the squad is explained in the chapter on combat prac¬ 
tice.) Upon the conclusion of the firing the instructor announces the scores of all 
the squads. 

Exercise 21. Landscape Target Firing. 

Purpose: To illustrate fire control in an emergency of combat. 

Eq uipment: Rifle and 10 rounds of ammunition for each man firing. 

Automatic rifle and 40 rounds of ammunition per squad. 

Landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

Procedure: A squad having opened fire on a designated target, a threatening 
target in another panel is designated to the squad leader. The situation should be 
such as to require him to cover the new target as well as that on which he is 
already firing. The automatic rifle is the logical weapon to engage the new target. 

The squad is graded on the results of its firing as explained in the chapter on 
Combat Practice. 

The exercise is continued with successive squads. 

Exercise 22. Demonstration. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To show the position of each man in a squad deployed. 

To illustrate the mechanism of squad movement in the attack. 

Equipment: One demonstration squad of infantry, fully equipped, except rifle 
ammunition. The rifle grenadier carries ten rifle grenades. Each man’s number in 
the squad is displayed on his back. (See Chapter VIL) 

Place: Parade ground or other suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The class takes position in rear of the demonstration squad, which 
is deployed at the usual intervals, in the prone position. The instructor, walking 
along the squad, explains the combat functions of each man, describes his equipment, 
and the reasons for his position in the squad. (See Chapter VII.) 

The squad, under the direction of its leader, now advances by squad rushes, four 
and two men at a time, and by individual movement, simulating fire. The class 
follows up the movement, the instructor explained to them the mechanism thereof, 
and the conditions under which each movement is made. 

Note.— In this demonstration target designation and fire orders may or may not be included. 

Exercise 23. Demonstration. An Infantry Squad in Attack. 

Purpose: To illustrate all details of the mechanism of fire and movement in the 
attack. 

Equipment: One demonstration squad of infantry, fully equipped. 

Ammunition: 60 rounds of tracer ammunition per rifle, 240 rounds of tracer am¬ 
munition for automatic rifle. 

Note.— If a target range is available firing will be conducted with tracer ammunition. Other¬ 
wise fire will be simulated. 

16 silhouette targets set up irregularly (at varying intervals and distances). 

Place: “ A ” target range, or any available ground. 

Procedure: The class is formed on high ground, overlooking the terrain on 
which the demonstration takes place. 

The scouts precede the squad at about 250 yards. They reach a crest and receive 
fire from the targets (imaginary). Scout No. 2 first locates the target, sets his sight, 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


103 


and opens fire or simulated fire (see note). He signals to scout No. I, “ Range, 700.” 
Scout No. 1 picks up the target, aided by the tracer bullets of No. 2, which fall 
100 yards beyond. He corrects his sight setting to 600, and opens fire on the 
flanks of the position occupied by the targets. Rate of fire, 7 shots per minute. 

The squad leader, from a covered position in rear, orders, “Jones (automatic 
rifleman), move up to line of scouts. Smith (substitute), follow Jones.” The entire 
squad moves by infiltration to the line of scouts, making proper use of cover, etc. 
The leader follows Smith, the 2nd in command moving last. 

The automatic rifleman reaches the line of scouts and takes cover. He calls to 
scout No. 1, “what range”? The scout replies, “600.” The automatic rifleman 
sets his sights, and opens fire (with tracer bullets, or simulated) at a rate of 40 shots 
per minute, covering the entire target. The substitute arrives, and similarly 
opens fire. 

The squad leader arrives on line, ascertains the range, points out positions to the 
other men as they arrive, and calls and signals to each, “ Range, 600. FIRE AT 
WILL.” 

The next to the last man is a recruit. He fires wild. The 2nd in command, on 
coming up, crawls over to this man, steadies him and puts his fire on the target. 

All of the squad being on line, the scouts shift their fire to cover the entire line of 
targets. 

The squad leader is wounded. The 2nd in command assumes the leadership, and 
moves to his proper position. 

The new leader receives from his section leader and repeats back a signal (as¬ 
sumed), “ Squad rush.” He gives the necessary commands, (“ CEASE FIRING 
Prepare to rush. UP.”) and leads the squad forward about 40 yards, resuming 
fire at the end of the rush. 

The instructor, with the class, calls their attention to and comments upon each 
feature of the demonstration. 

Comments: A number of demonstrations similar to the foregoing may be given, 
covering all details of the mechanism of fire and movement. Such demonstrations 
should follow the chapters on the conduct of fire and should precede similar exercises 
in which the students (or the units in training) themselves participate. 

Exercise 24. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To illustrate the mechanism of fire and movement in the attack. 

Equipment: Full equipment for each man participating. No ammunition. 

Place: Drill ground or any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: A squad is deployed as skirmishers at about 600 yards from a desig¬ 
nated linear target on the landscape. The squad leader gives his fire orders, and the 
squad opens simulated fire. Under cover of this fire the advance proceeds by rushes 
of 25 to 50 yards, two to four men at a time. The rushes are covered by accelerated 
fire. The squad leader gives all necessary orders. The men should be accustomed tG* 
the teamwork of fire and movement. 

Comments: Similar exercises should be conducted for the section. 

Exercise 25. Landscape Target Firing. 

Purpose: To illustrate fire and movement in the attack. 

Equipment: Rifle and 10 rounds of ammunition for each man firing. 

Automatic rifle and 40 rounds of ammunition per squad. 

Landscape target complete. 

Place: 1000-inch range. 

Procedure: A squad is formed as a combat patrol at a distance of 100 yards from 
the target and advances towards it. As the point reaches the firing position he is 
told that fire is being directed at him from a certain point on one of the target panels. 
The point signals, “ Enemy in sight,” lies down and sets his sights. The remainder 
of the patrol advances by infiltration to the firing position, lies down alongside the 
man in position, who designates the target. The corporal gives his fire orders, and 
the squad opens fire. 


104 


MUSKETRY 


Comments: A variety of problems similar to the foregoing may be framed to 
illustrate the advance of a squad to a firing position and the opening of fire on a 
designated target. 

Exercise 26. Test Problem. An Infantry Squad in Attack. 

Purpose: To test the students’ knowledge of the mechanism of fire and move¬ 
ment in a squad attack. 

Equipment: Pad and pencil for each member of class. 

9 silhouette targets. 

Place: Any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: The class is marched to the ground, where the situations (mimeo¬ 
graphed) are handed out, one to each man. The instructor answers any proper 
questions. The students then solve the problem, writing out their solutions. 

Situation: You are the leader of an infantry squad. Your section is engaged 
in a fire fight with an enemy. Your squad is the left squad of the section, in the 
position indicated by the silhouettes. (One silhouette represents squad leader.) 
The section leader is represented by the silhouette in rear. He has just signaled, 
“ Squad rush,” pointing to you. 

Requirement 1. Your actions and orders. 

Solution 1. I repeat back the signal. I select a new fire position 40 to 50 yards 
ahead. I order, “ CEASE FIRING. Prepare to rush.” I look along the line and 
see that my men are ready (sights down, pieces locked). I pass through the line, 
ordering, “ UP,” and lead the rush to the position selected. I take a prone position 
on the new line. When my squad is down, I work to the rear, where I can properly 
direct them, and cause them to resume fire as quickly as possible. 

Requirement 2. You are Pvt. B, No. 2, front rank, of the squad. Describe in 
detail your actions, from the first command of the squad leader until the end of the 
movement. 

Solution 2. At the first command I cease firing, lay my sight leaf, lock my piece, 
lie flat behind cover, draw my hands back to my chin, keeping my elbows down, rifle 
in right hand at the balance, ready to spring. At the command, “ UP,” I rise by 
straightening my arms and throwing my right leg forward, and jump ofT to the 
front, following the squad leader. I swing my rifle across my body, left hand at the 
balance, right hand at the small of the stock. I run fast, keeping my left shoulder 
forward. When the squad leader halts I move abreast of him, drop to the prone 
position and take such cover as is available. In taking the prone position from the 
run my left knee hits the ground first. I throw my rifle forward to the full extent 
of my arms. The butt hits the ground about 3 feet in front of my left knee. I roll 
forward on my left knee, my left elbow striking the ground next. This pulls 
the butt of my rifle back against my right shoulder. I roll to the right, until my 
right elbow strikes the ground. I adjust my sling, set my sight, raise my sight 
leaf, unlock my piece, and promptly resume firing. 

Comments: This problem, like the majority of these problems and exercises, is 
to be regarded as illustrative of a great variety of similar problems, which may be 
framed with a little ingenuity, and adapted to any available terrain. In the absence 
of available terrain problems may be adapted to the sand table, relief map or topo¬ 
graphical map. 


Exercise 27. Test Problem. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To test the students’ knowledge of the conduct of fire in a squad attack. 
Equipment: Pad and pencil for each member of class. 

6 prone and 6 kneeling silhouette targets. 

3 red flags. 

Place: A terrain somewhat similar to that shown on accompanying sketch 
(Plate 46.) 


105 


PRACTICAL EXERCISES 

Procedure: The instructor conducts the class to the terrain on which the problem 
is laid, where the situation (on mimeographed sheets) is handed out, one copy to 
each man. The instructor explains the situation and answers questions. The 
students then solve the problem, each writing out his own solution. 

Situation: You are Corporal A, leader of the 4th squad 1st platoon Co A 1st 
Infantry. Your platoon is engaged in a fire fight with the enemy. The 1st section 
is firing and advancing in the open. Your section has been sent through the woods 
to gain a position on the left flank of the enemy, and has reached this point (position 
of Corporal A, as indicated on Plate 46). The six scouts leave the edge of the 
wood and start to advance up the slope when they receive fire from the locality 
indicated by those red flags (auto rifle, PI. 46)* The scouts take positions as 
indicated by the silhouettes (prone), and open fire on the enemy. The section leader, 
from the edge of the woods, issues the following order to the three squad leaders, 



Plate 46- 


“ Build up on the line of scouts and open fire." Your squad is represented by these 
kneeling silhouettes (in the woods). 

Required: Your orders as squad leader. 

Solution: “We are going to build up on the line of scouts by infiltration. Range 
from line of scouts, 300. Target indicated by tracers of our squad scouts. Jones 
(automatic rifleman) prepare to rush. UP. Smith (substitute automatic rifleman) 
prepare to rush. UP. Black (2nd in command), I am now going forward. Send 
up remainder of squad." 

Comments: Any number of similar problems, covering various situations in the 
fire attack, are easily framed. Almost any available terrain may be used, the problem 
being adapted in a realistic manner to the terrain available. 

Exercise 28. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To illustrate the advance of a section, and the method of replacing 
casualties amongst leaders. 

Place: Any suitable terrain. 

Procedure: A section will be assigned an objective, on which it advances by rushes 
and infiltration, simulating fire. At various times during the advance the instructor 
will designate certain men as casualties (by tapping them on the back). The section 
leader, three squad leaders, and one or two automatic riflemen will be thus eliminated 
during the progress of the attack. They remain on the ground, and are replaced 
by their proper substitutes. 

The instructor grades the section, on the promptness with which the casualties 
are replaced, and the smoothness with which the section continues to function. 

Comments: A great variety of similar problems, illustrative of the duties of 
section and squad leaders, may be framed, and adapted to almost any terrain. 























106 


MUSKETRY 


Exercise 29. Test Problem. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To test the students’ knowledge of the conduct of fire in an attack. 

Equipment: Pad and pencil for each member of class. 

24 prone silhouette targets. 

3 red flags. 

Place: A terrain somewhat similar to that shown on Plate 47. 

Procedure: The instructor conducts the class to the ground on which the problem 
is laid, issues the situation, one copy to each man, explains and answers any pertinent 
questions. The students then solve the problem, each writing his solution on his pad. 

Situation: You are Sergeant X, leader of the 1st section, 1st platoon, Co. A, 
1st Infantry. Your section, represented by the silhouette targets in the edge of the 
woods ( A, Plate 47), is engaged in a fire fight with an enemy located between the 
two red flags ( BC ). You have suffered a number of casualties. At this instant you 
(Sergeant a) are in a shell hole at this point. You detect an enemy automatic rifle 
firing rapidly from the position indicated by the 3rd red flag (to the right of the 
target). It is apparently undisturbed by your fire. No tracer bullets from the firing 
line have been directed against this position. You are equipped with a rifle and 
tracer bullets. Your section guide is too far away to hear your voice above the noise 
of the firing. 



Plate 47. 


Required: Your actions and orders. 

Solution: I fire tracer bullets at the new target, indicating its position to my 
section. I signal the squad nearest the target, “ Shift your fire to the right/’ pointing 
in the direction of the target. 

Comments: This problem is illustrative of a single situation confronting a section 
leader in the attack. Any number of additional situations may be drawn from the 
text, and illustrated in a similar manner. 

« 

Exercise 30. Sand Table Test Problem. An Infantry Section in Attack. 

Purpose: To test the students’ knowledge of the duties of the section leader, 
section guide and squad leader in the fire attack. 

Equipment: Pad and pencil for each member of class. 

Sand tables, complete, in the proportion of one to each 12 to 15 men. (If 
“ bleacher ” seats are used a sand table with seats on one side and both ends will 
accommodate 30 to 50 students.) 

Procedure: Reproduce on each sand table the terrain shown in Plate 48. The 
method of preparing the sand table is given in the course in Tactics. 

The situations, on mimeographed sheets, are handed to the class. Each student 
solves the problem, writing his solution on his pad. 

General situation. Reds and Blues are at war. The territory shown on the map 
is Red. The Blues have taken the offensive, and are invading Red territory. The 
general Blue advance which had halted to reorganize has just been resumed. 

Special situation 1. The 1st platoon, Co A 1st Inf, is advancing on a front of 





























PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


107 


200 yards, direction of advance, Azimuth 135 0 , with other platoons on either flank. 
The 1st section in line of skirmishers has just reached the Road AB, its right element 



Plate 48. 


at A. The six scouts of the section are 
300 yards ahead (position indicated 
by white pins). The 2nd section is 
200 yards in rear. The platoon leader 
and platoon headquarters are near C. 
You are Sgt. X, section leader of the 
1st section. At this moment, when 
you are at D, heavy rifle fire opens to 
your front. You note one casualty 
on your right. 

Your scouts have opened fire. 

Requirement 1. Your actions and 
orders at this time, and brief reasons 
therefore. 

Solution 1. I signal “ HALT,” and 
run rapidly forward to a position 
from which I can see to the front, and 
be near to platoon headquarters. 

Reasons. Personal reconnaissance 
is the basis for estimates and orders. 
I must be in contact with my platoon 
leader, from whom I expect orders. 

Special situation 2. The platoon 
leader, from near C, signals you to 
him. When you reach him he orders; 
“ The woods in our front and the 
high ground to the right ( E ) are 
strongly held. Build up the line of 
scouts with the first section. Range 
500. I will remain here. Move out.” 

Requirement 2. Your actions and 
orders at this time. 

Solution 2. I note that my section 
is lying down and under cover. I 
return to section and signal the squad 
leaders to me. I point out to them 
our line of scouts engaged. I order: 
“ Enemy hold edge of woods and crest 
in force. Build up line of scouts and 
attack entire front. Range 500 I 
will be near those bushes (pointing to 
H). Move fast.” I move directly to 
a position near the bushes ( H ). The 
section guide joins me when the sec¬ 
tion has filtered to line of scouts. 

Special situation 3. You are now 
Corporal A, leader of the left (3rd) 
squad of the 1st section. You have 
just received the order of your sec¬ 
tion leader, as follows: “ Enemy hold 
edge of woods and crest in force. 
Build up line of scouts and attack en¬ 
tire front. Range 500. I will be near 
those bushes. Move fast.” You saw 
your scouts move past the buildings at 
C, just as the enemy opened fire. 

























108 


MUSKETRY 


Requirement 3. Your actions and orders. 

Solution. I lead my squad (in squad column, 3 to 5 paces distance between men) 
under cover of buildingsto where I can see scouts, signal, “ HALT,” and order: 
“ This section will attack enemy in woods to the front. Range 500. B (automatic 
rifleman) move to line of scouts.” When B is well started I order, “ C (substitute) 
follow B.” When C is well forward I order, “ M (second in command) take charge, 
and send up rest of squad.” I move up to rear of line of scouts. M continues to 
feed men forward, coming last himself. 

Special situation 4. Sgt. X’s whole section is in a position and engaged with 
enemy in edge of woods and on crest to right. He observes the fire of what 
appears to be an automatic, from hillside (£). It seems to be undisturbed and the 
tracers of the scouts do not indicate this target. Corporal Q, section guide, has 
now joined him. 

Requirement 4. Your actions as Sergeant X, at this time. 

Solution. Sgt. X orders Corp. Q.: “ Range 500. Reference, stump on crest. 
One sight right. Target, automatic rifle. Fire tracers.” Sgt. X attracts the atten¬ 
tion of the leader of the center squad, and signals: “ Range 500 ” (points to where 
tracers are outlining target) : “ Shift your fire to right.” 

Special situation 5. Sgt. X hears heavy fire from the woods on his left (F). 
Lt A, and platoon headquarters have moved forward from the houses at C. Sgt X 
has seen or heard nothing of them for the last five minutes. He sees tracers from 
scout of section on his left (in edge of woods) outlining his target. Apparently, 
the section on his left is also attacking his target. The enemy’s fire seems to slacken. 

Requirement 5. Sgt. X’s estimate of the situation and orders at this time. 

Solution 5. Sgt. X’s estimate of the situation. 

Mission: To attack—to push forward. 

Enemy: Enemy fire is apparently slackening. His position is difficult if the. 
section on my left or right gains the woods. (Only fire I am exposed to is frontal.) 

Own troops: At present the platoon on my left is well forward and on the flank 
of the position. There is also a platoon on my right. Its scouts must be getting into 
the woods on my right by now ( 0 ). Therefore I need not fear flank fire from these 
woods. 

Terrain: The ground to my front affords concealment in grass, yet permits firing. 

I consider the advisability of remaining in position, and pinning the enemy down 
with fire or of advancing. If I remain in position and the units from the flank close 
with the enemy they must leave their zones of action, and change their direction of 
advance. Under cover of their fire and my own I believe I can advance and assault 
the hostile position. 

I decide to advance by squad rushes and close with the enemy. I attract the 
squad leaders’ attention, and signal: “ Squad rush,” pointing to left. 

Comments: The instructor carefully indicates on the sand tables the particular 
localities referred to in the situations, and will also indicate the stated positions of the 
troops by pins, matches, beads, etc., following the solution of the previous situation. 

This or similar problems may also be given on the topographical or relief maps, 
or on any moderately diversified terrain. 

Exercise 31. Conduct of Fire. The Fire Superiority Problem. 

Purpose: To illustrate the mechanism of fire and movement. 

Equipment: Full equipment for each man participating. 

Ammunition: 60 rounds (ball) for each rifleman. 

240 rounds for each automatic rifle. 

(Extra ammunition for the automatic rifle will be carried by other members of 
the squad in the prescribed manner.) 

16 D targets on 8 standard double frames. (The problem may be fired with 
any lesser number of targets.) 

Place: Target range. (“ A ” range.) The problem may be fired on any suitable 
terrain where there is a back-stop for the bullets. 








PRACTICAL EXERCISES 


109 


Preparation: Eight pairs of standard D targets are mounted on 8 double frames 
at about 5-yard intervals in the target pits. It the standard double frames are not 
available any other frames or improvised frames may be used. If the problem is not 
fired on the range a pit is dug for the men operating the targets. 

If the full number of targets be not available, any lesser number, even one, may be 
used. The number of hits required for fire superiority, as explained later, is based 
on one D target every 5 yards. If it be necessary to set up the targets with a 
different interval, as for example to conform to the actual spacing of frames already 
established in the pits, the number of hits required should be modified accordingly. 
Thus if there be one target every 10 yards only half as many hits should be required. 
If less than 8 targets are used they may be set up to cover the same front with wider 
intervals, or may cover a less front with the same intervals. In any case the 
number of hits on all targets required to establish fire superiority is inversely pro¬ 
portional to the interval between targets, and has nothing to do with their number. 
For example, if three targets be set up, one every 15 yards, a total of 7 hits per minute 
on all targets is required to establish fire superiority. 

A chicken wire fence, covered with burlap or weeds, of such a height as to conceal 
the targets, is set up in front of the pit. It covers the same front as the targets, and 
extends a half interval beyond the targets on each end. 

Procedure: The squad which is to take the exercise is deployed as skirmishers 
about 800 yards from the line of targets, and advances towards them. A signal 
from a horn or bugle, placed in a pit, announces that hostile fire is being received. 
The squad halts and opens fire, the squad leader exercising his usual functions. 

The fire effect of the squad is indicated by means of a large red flag at the pits. 
(See Plate 45, lower figure.) When the flag is down the squad has a marked fire 
superiority, and is permitted to advance by rushes of 2 to 4 men at a time. When 
the flag stands at an angle of 45 0 the squad has a slight superiority, and is permitted 
to filter forward, one man at a time. When the flag is vertically up the enemy has 
fire superiority, and the squad is not permitted to advance until fire superiority 
has been re-established. (See Plate 49.) 

Determination of fire superiority. Fire superiority is determined as follows: The 
targets remain up for one minute after the opening of fire. They are then lowered, 
the alternate targets being raised at the same time. The targets are then examined, 
and all hits anywhere on the target frame are counted. With targets at 5-yard 
intervals a total of 20 hits on all targets establishes a decided fire superiority, and the 
flag is lowered. If the number of hits be between 15 and 20 the squad has a slight 
fire superiority, and the flag is lowered to 45°. If the number of hits be less than 
15 fire superiority is not established and the flag remains vertical. The targets 
are scored and the state of fire superiority signaled every minute during the progress 
of the exercise. 

The squad continues to advance, under the direction of its leader, as rapidly as 
its fire effect permits, for a stated period (as 10 minutes) or until its ammunition is 
exhausted. The umpire (instructor) notes the total distance advanced. 

Grading. A figure of merit or score for the squad is obtained as follows: 

(No. of yards advanced) X (Total number of hits) X (Unused rounds) 

(Total time) X (1000) 

This score serves for comparison of squads. Or a figure of merit may be computed 
as explained in the chapter on Combat Practice, taking account of distribution of fire. 

For example: One squad advances 400 yards in 10 minutes, scores 160 hits and 
has 50 unused cartridges. Its score would be 

400x160x50 _. 2Q 

IOXIOOO J 

Another squad advances 600 yards in 10 minutes, scores 240 hits and has 8c 
unused cartridges. Its score would be 

600 X 240 X 80 


iox 1000 


1152 . 






110 


MUSKETRY 


The second squad have advanced farther in the same time, made more hits and 
used less ammunition, and have accordingly the higher score. 

Comments: This exercise should not be given until all the participants have been 
thoroughly instructed in the mechanism of fire and movement. It may then be 
conducted as a competition between squads, and should also be extended to sections, 
using a wider front and more targets if desired. In the latter case the number of 
hits required, as compared to those of a squad, should be three times as great. 

This exercise demonstrates in a strikingly convincing and practical way the mean¬ 
ing of fire superiority, and the mutual interdependence of fire and movement in the 
attack. While the exercise lacks certain elements of realism, a unit which cannot 
establish fire superiority under the conditions described might have extreme diffi¬ 
culty in doing so against a determined enemy. 

Exercise 32. Competitive Problem. Conduct of Fire. 

Purpose: To illustrate the application of fire and the control of movement. 

Equipment: Two squads fully equipped. 

16 silhouette targets. (A less number will serve if necessary.) 

Ammunition : 30 rounds per man firing. 

Place: Target range. 



Plate 49. 


Procedure: Two opposing squads, each of the same number of men, are placed 
as shown in Plate 49. Each has the same number of targets, in the same formation as 
the squad. A flag is placed in the middle of the group of targets. Each squad 
leader is told that he will fire on all targets appearing to the right (or left) of the 
flag. His squad is not given this information. He is not allowed to use the flag in 
his fire order. 

The squads advance towards the targets in skirmish lines. At a signal from the 
umpire (instructor) the targets appear. The squads take cover, and their leaders 
give their fire orders. The squads open fire. When a figure is hit it is removed, and 
the umpire rules out a man from the opposing team by tapping him on the shoulder. 
At the end of one minute the umpire blows his whistle. The squads cease firing and 
advance a designated distance in a manner indicated by the umpire (squad rush, half 
squad rush, infiltration). At the end of the movement they re-open fire. The exer¬ 
cise continues until one squad has shot down all the targets of the opposing squad. 

Comments: Members of the class not participating, observe the exercise, and 
listen to the comments of the instructor. 

Competition between squads should be developed in all exercises when practicable. 























NOTE 


111 


Note. 

Musketry has to do with rifle and automatic rifle fire, and a proper course of 
practical instruction must of necessity include demonstrations and actual practice 
in firing, both on the landscape target and on the range. Where these facilities are 
lacking a very important part of the course must be omitted, and in this case 
advantage should be taken of a summer encampment to make good the deficiency. 
Practical instruction in terrain nomenclature, searching ground and retaining 
visual impressions, range estimation and verbal and physical target designation, 
individual and squad and section movements, arm signals, etc., may be given on 
almost any terrain. Lacking a iooo-inch range the landscape targets may be set 
up in the class room and used for visual training, instruction in target designation, 
and other instruction not involving actual firing. Instruction in target designation, 
and small problems in the control of movement, may well be given on a sand table. 
Even without a target range it is possible to make the course in Musketry practical 
and interesting. The preceding problems are given as illustrations and guides. They 
should be varied, amplified and modified as necessary to meet local conditions. 


THE R. O. T. C. MANUAL. 

A set of standard text-books in four volumes as follows : 

Vol. 1. The B. 0 . T. C. Manual, Freshman Course (1st Year 
Basic). 

Yol. 2 . The B. 0 . T. C. Manual, Sophomore Course ( 2 nd Year 
Basic). 

Vol. 3 . The B. 0 . T. C. Manual, Junior Course ( 1 st Year 
Advanced). 

Yol. 4 . The B. 0 . T. C. Manual, Senior Course ( 2 nd Year 
Advanced). 

These texts have been prepared by B. 0 . T. C. specialists qualified 
by training and experience to produce them. 

They cover the War Department program in letter and in spirit. 

The subjects are prepared in a simple yet thorough manner. The 
authors speak to the freshman in his own language, to the senior in 
an entirely different manner. 

The texts are illustrated as no military text-books have hereto¬ 
fore been illustrated in this country. These volumes have been 
adopted and are indorsed by the great majority of military institu¬ 
tions throughout the country, following a thorough practical test of 
their usefulness. 

THE JUNIOR R. O. T. C. MANUAL. 

Prepared specially for Junior Institutions that are not essentially 
military. It covers in letter and spirit the recent ( 1922 ) W. D. 
Program of Training for these units. 

Large octavo; 400 illustrations; 500 pages. 


Authors of the R. O. T. C. Manuals. 

P. S. BOND, Lt. Col. Corps of Engineers, U. S. Army. 


E. B. GABEY, 

Major Infantry, U. S. Army. 

0 . 0 . ELLIS, 

Lt. Col. National Army, 

Major Infantry, U. S. Army, 
Resigned. 


T. L. McMUBBAY, 

Captain Infantry, U. S. Army. 

E. H. CBOUCH, 

Formerly 1 st Lt. } U, S, Army. 


For terms on all B. 0 . T. C. Manuals write The New Military 
Library, Baltimore, Md. 










« 


\ 




































































































































































































































